2302228-3-100 r1 O PDF

GE Healthcare
Senographe 2000 D Acquisition System

Service Manual
SM
0459
2302228-3-100
Revision 1
No Rights Licensed - Do not duplicate. Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited.

Copyright© 2006 by General Electric Company inc. All rights reserved.
GE Healthcare Senographe 2000 D Acquisition System
Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100
This page is blank.
Page no. 2
cover-S2KD+Alnitak.fm
X-RAY WARNING
X-RAY WARNING
ATTENTION
Les appareils à rayons X sont dangereux à la fois pour le patient et pour le manipulateur si les
mesures de protection ne sont pas strictement appliquees
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un danger lorsque le
manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.
Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cet appareil
créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles-mêmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de protec-
tion établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 60 : Recommandations de la Commission Internationale
sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X-ray equipment is dangerous to both patient and operator unless measures of protection are
strictly observed
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x-ray beam becomes a source of danger
in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x-radiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing
themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the International
Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 60 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
Los aparatos de rayos X son peligrosos para el paciente y el manipulador cuando las normas de
proteccion no estan observadas
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado por
personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas utilicen
este aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre las normas
de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 60: Recomendaciónes de la Comisión Internacio-
nal sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
Röntgenapparate sind eine gefahr fÜr patienten sowie bedienungspersonal, wenn die geltenden
sicherheitsvorkehrungen nicht genau beachtet werden
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbefugter
oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Organismus
schädlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche Geräte
bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den gefahr-
losen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 60 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut machen:
Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
Page no. 3
warning.fm
X-RAY WARNING
This page is blank.
Page no. 4
warning.fm
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN
CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD
This Service Manual is available in English only.
If a customer's service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer's responsibility
to provide translation services.
Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from electric
shock, mechanical or other hazards.
ATTENTION
NE PAS TENTER D'INTERVENIR SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N'A PAS ÉTÉ
CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS
Ce Manuel de service n'est disponible qu'en anglais.
Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue que l'anglais, c'est au client qu'il
incombe de le faire traduire.
Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l'opérateur ou le patient des
blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
ATENCION
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE
MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
Este Manual de Servicio sólo existe en inglés.
Si algún proveedor de servicios ajeno a GEMS solicita un idioma que no sea el inglés, es responsabil-
idad del cliente ofrecer un servicio de traducción.
La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el operador o el
paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
WARNUNG
ERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN, OHNE DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG GELESEN UND
VERSTANDEN ZU HABEN.
Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des Bedi-
eners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
Page no. 5
language warning.fm
ATENÇAO
NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE
ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA
Este Manual de Assistência Técnica só se encontra disponível em Inglês.
Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, quE não a GEMS, solicitar estes manuais noutro idi-
oma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução.
O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do técnico, operador ou paciente dev-
ido a` choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
AVVERTENZA
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL'APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL
PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO
Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.
Se un addetto alla manutenzione esterno alla GEMS richiede il manuale in una lingua diversa, il cliente
è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
Non tenere conto della presente avvertenza potrebbe far compiere operazioni da cui derivino lesioni
all'addetto alla manutenzione, all'utilizzatore ed al paziente per folgorazione elettrica, per urti meccanici
od altri rischi.
Page no. 6
language warning.fm
Transport Damage
Transport Damage
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “dam-
age in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed
for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed,
damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event within 14 days
after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation com-
pany will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 785-5052/8*323-5052 immediately after damage is
found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express
bill number, item damaged and extent of damage.
Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bul-
letins.
Page no. 7
damage.fm
Transport Damage
This page is blank.
Page no. 8
damage.fm
Electrical Contractors
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT
All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the
Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between
pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical per-
sonnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated,
and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE
will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply
with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, person-
nel of third–party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electri-
cal servicing on the equipment.
Page no. 9
contract.fm
This page is blank.
Page no. 10
contract.fm
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
X-RAY WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Transport Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electrical Contractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 1: Publication Presentation

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 2: System Description

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Chapter 3: Installation
Job Card IST 000 - AWS System Configuration Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Job Card IST 001 - Installation Steering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Job Card IST 002 - Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Job Card IST 003 - Unpacking the Cart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Job Card IST 004 - Senographe Physical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Job Card IST 005 - Cart Physical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Job Card IST 006 - Connections (Gantry, Generator, X-ray Console, Footswitch). . . . . . . 55
Job Card IST 007 - Cart Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Job Card IST 008 - AC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Job Card IST 009 - First System Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Job Card IST 010 - Line Resistance Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Job Card IST 011 - Set Elevator Upper Travel Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Job Card IST 012 - Regulatory and Safety Labelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Job Card IST 013 - Room Lamps and Door Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Job Card IST 014 - Automatic X-ray Tube Warm-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Job Card IST 015 - Installation of the CD-R writer (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Job Card IST 016 - Modem installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Job Card IST 017 - Image Receptor Assembly/Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Job Card IST 018 - Bar Code Scanner (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Job Card IST 019 - Conditioner Coolant Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Chapter 4: Configuration
Job Card CFG 001 - The X-ray Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Job Card CFG 002 - Gantry and Generator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Job Card CFG 003 - Senographe Jumpers and Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Job Card CFG 004 - Check Supply Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Job Card CFG 005 - AWS Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Job Card CFG 006 - Declare Network Hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Connection and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Page no. 11
S2KD+OnyxTOC.fm
Table of Contents
Job Card CFG 009 - Declare Printers (Filming Devices). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Job Card CFG 010 - Changing Senographe 2000 D Internal IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Chapter 5: Calibration
Job Card CAL 000 - Calibration Interactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Job Card CAL 001 - Heater Current Scale Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Job Card CAL 002 - X-Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Job Card CAL 005 - Calibration of kV Scale Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Job Card CAL 006 - Calibration of Compression Force Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Job Card CAL 007 - Calibration of Breast Thickness Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Job Card CAL 008 - Compression/Decompression Minimum Force. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Job Card CAL 009 - Compression Arm Angle Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Job Card CAL 010 - Tube Tilt Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Job Card CAL 011 - X-ray Beam Alignment Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Job Card CAL 012 - Collimator Format Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Job Card CAL 013 - Bad Pixel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Job Card CAL 015 - Conversion Factor Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Job Card CAL 016 - Half-Value Layer Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Job Card CAL 018 - ISC Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Job Card CAL 019 - Light Beam Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Job Card CAL 020 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration (Automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 6: Functional Checks

Job Card VF 001 - Boot/Init and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Job Card VF 002 - Cart Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Job Card VF 005 - Senographe Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Job Card VF 008 - IQ Tools Flat Field Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Job Card VF 009 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Job Card VF 010 - Acquisition in AOP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Job Card VF 011 - Light Beam Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Job Card VF 012 - Dicom Printer Adjustments and Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Job Card VF 014 - Check kVp settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Job Card VF 016 - Check mA and mAs settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Chapter 7: Equipment Protection

Job Card EP 001 - Detector protection during system shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance

Scenario PM 001 - Planned Maintenance Steering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Page no. 12
S2KD+OnyxTOC.fm
Table of Contents
Job Card PM 002 - Conditioner Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Job Card PM 004 - Conditioner Coolant Level Check and Top-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Job Card PM 005 - Site Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Job Card PM 006 - Check Gantry and Generator Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Job Card PM 007 - Removal/Replacement of Covers for Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . 321
Job Card PM 008 - Check HV Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Job Card PM 009 - Tube Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Job Card PM 010 - Column Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Job Card PM 011 - Compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Job Card PM 012 - Conditioner Coolant Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Chapter 9: Error Message Information

Job Card ERR 001 - IDC Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Job Card ERR 002 - AWS Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Job Card ERR 003 - Gantry and Generator Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Chapter 10: Diagnostic Information

Job Card DIAG 001 - AWS Sun-VTS Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Job Card DIAG 002 - AWS Ethernet Port Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Job Card DIAG 003 - AWS File System and SCSI Board Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Chapter 11: Renewal Parts

Renewal Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 12: Disassembly/Reassembly

Job Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Job Card D/R 001 - FRU replacement (no specific D/R instructions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Job Card D/R 002 - Paddle board 800PL8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Job Card D/R 003 - Magnification sensor board 800PL14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Job Card D/R 004 - Inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Job Card D/R 007 - Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Job Card D/R 008 - Compression Motor and Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Job Card D/R 009 - Gantry CPU Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Job Card D/R 010 - Optical Fiber (Gantry to Generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Job Card D/R 011 - X-ray Tube Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Job Card D/R 012 - Centering Device Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Job Card D/R 013 - Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Job Card D/R 015 - Filter wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Job card D/R 016 - Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure - Manual record sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Job Card D/R 021 - Generator CPU Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Job Card D/R 022 - Capacitor box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Job Card D/R 025 - HV and kV/mA tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Page no. 13
S2KD+OnyxTOC.fm
Table of Contents
Job Card D/R 026 - Magnification device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Job Card D/R 027 - Arm Angle Sensor (potentiometer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Job Card D/R 028 - Gantry CPU Board 800PL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Job Card D/R 029 - Generator CPU Board 400PL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Job Card D/R 030 - Generator Command Board 400-PL1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Job Card D/R 031 - Generator Interface Board 400-PL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Job Card D/R 032 - Generator Supply Command Board 200-PL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Job Card D/R 033 - Generator Relay Board 200-PL4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Job Card D/R 100 - IDC Replacement Steering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Job Card D/R 102 - Image Receptor Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Job Card D/R 103 - Image Receptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Job Card D/R 104A - Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Job Card D/R 104B - Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Job Card D/R 104C - Replacing IDC Dione 3 or 4 With Dione 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Job Card D/R 105 - Conditioner Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Job Card D/R 107 - AWS unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Job Card D/R 108 - Software reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Job Card D/R 109 - Digital Detector Firmware Flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Chapter 13: System Evolution

ADS/IDC/Conditioner Compatibility Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
End of the Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Page no. 14
S2KD+OnyxTOC.fm
CHAPTER 1 PUBLICATION PRESENTATION
1. APPLICABILITY
This publication provides all information required to understand, to install and to maintain the
Senographe 2000 D System. For information on associated equipment mentioned in this publication,
such as the Review Workstation refer to their specific publications.
This publication contains only class A information.
It is intended for use by Field Engineers installing and maintaining the system who are employed by:
• GEMS.
• A third party supplier with an agreed contract with GE.
• A third party supplier without an agreed contract with GE.
2. CONTENT OF THIS PUBLICATION

The contents fall into two main categories Descriptive and Procedural.
• Descriptive content.
- Chapter 2 System Description describes the main operational characteristics of the equipment.
- Chapter 11 Renewal Parts provides information for the identification of Renewal Parts.
- Chapter 13 System Evolution describes the ADS/IDC/conditioner compatibility matrix.
• Procedural content:
- Chapter 3 Installation contains information for the installation of the Senographe 2000 D system.
- Chapter 4 Configuration contains information for configuration of the Senographe 2000 D, includ-
ing a description of basic functions available from the X-ray Console.
- Chapter 5 Calibration contains information for calibration of Senographe 2000 D functions.
- Chapter 6 Functional Checks contains information for verification of Senographe 2000 D func-
tions.
- Chapter 7 Equipment Protection contains recommendations for protection of Senographe 2000 D
system equipment.
- Chapter 8 Planned Maintenance contains recommendations for planned maintenance of the
Senographe 2000 D Acquisition System.
- Chapter 9 Error Message Information includes job cards listing error messages generated by
Senographe 2000 D sub-systems.
- Chapter 10 Diagnostic Information includes job cards describing Senographe 2000 D diagnostic
operations.
- Chapter 12 Disassembly/Reassembly contains information for the removal and replacement of
Senographe 2000 D components.
A summary of changes to the publication is given in the Revision History section in this chapter.
Publication_Presentation.fm Page no. 15

Revision History
Revision History Chapter 1
Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

0 August 2, Onyx M3 release, based on FFDM 2269413-100 rev. 02. 438
2001 Changes include: IST005, modified to include installation of Siemens Hi-Bright
monitor; IST017, modified to reflect new installation procedure to avoid coolant
spillage; CFG 009, now specifies printer parameters for use with ScrapBook;
CAL000, new document listing CAL interactions, all CAL Job Cards modified to
refer to CAL 000 for pre- and post-requisites; CAL017, correction (replace
instruction to open worklist by instruction to close exam list if open); CAL020,
new job card added for automatic mAs non-linearity calibration; VF012 sec. 5-2,
corrected value for item 5 (was 3%); Renewal Parts extensively revised in
accordance with latest FRU specifications; D/R000, new document specifying
required calibrations and checks after FRU changes, all D/R Job Cards modified
to refer to D/R000 for post-requisites; D/R001 deleted (replaced by D/R000); D/
R019, minor corrections and added forms for manual backup;
D/R 103, added cautions about coolant spillage; D/R104, added illustration of
IDC Dione II; D/R106, modified to more fully describe the coolant kit and coolant
disposal, added cautions about coolant spillage; D/R108, minor corrections;
Appendix 1 deleted ( Physicist Checks now treated in separate documents).
1 September Onyx M4 release. 444
28, 2001 Changes include: New chapter Equipment Protection with EP001 describing
precautions during hospital shutdown. CAL018, added Notice to refer to Com-
mander for correct instructions. CFG009, corected diagrams, added Notice on
use of print model 3 for MQSA, added Notice on patch for Agfa printers.
Renewal Parts; new coolant p/n, corrected name of Locking Plate, corrected p/
ns for paddle plastic plates, added HNS kit and manual. D/R000, removed post-
requisite requirements for tube (not FRU), corrected requirements for D/R011. D/
R104, corrected procedures, added summary. Removed references to CAD.
Chapter 1 Page no. 16 Publication_Presentation.fm

Revision History

2 March 2002 Onyx post M4 release. 480
Changes include: D/R001, new generic job card for FRUs without specific D/R
instructions. In IST 012 and CFG001, added illustrations of Console 2001.
Added D/R028 and D/R029 to provide instructions for replacement of CPU
boards (required for IFL steering guides). Modified temperature stabilization
info. in CAL013. Added info. on washer in D/R007 and locknut and washer in D/
R013 (required for Mobile systems).
Changes relating to new Planned Maintenance policy:
Remove JC D/R106 Conditioner Fill and Maintenance. Dispatch its content
among the following "new" JCs: - PM002 Conditioner Air Filter Cleaning:
PM003 Conditioner Coolant Flush; PM004 Conditioner Checks; IST019 Condi-
tioner Coolant Installation
Modify existing JC PM001 to reflect new PM policy.
Modify existing JC D/R105 Conditioner Unit by adding a procedure to drain
coolant from old Conditioner unit before disassembly and adding coolant to
new Conditioner after reassembly (these procedures exist in old D/R106 now
removed).
Modify existing D/R103 Image Receptor section 5-2. Added top-up instructions
to replace ref. to D/R106 (now removed from this document, see above).
Added a step at end of disassembly to drain defective image receptor.
Modify existing JC IST009 section 4 changed reference to new installation JC
IST019 instead of D/R JC D/R106 (now removed from this document, see
above).
Modify Ch. 10 Renewal Parts List, Ill. 23 for coolant kit, added reference for
van-mounted.
Modify JC IST001 Installation Steering to reflect deletion of D/R106 and crea-
tion of IST019.
Create new job cards for P.M.: PM005 Preliminary Operations; PM006 Genara-
tor and Gantry Safety Checks; PM007 Remove Covers for PM; PM008 Check
HV Unit; PM009 Tube Check; PM010 Column Movement; PM011 Compres-
sion;
Modify D/R021 and D/R009 with photos to show location of CPU lithium batter-
ies.
Modify ERR001, ERR002, ERR03 minor adaptation for PM.
Modify CAL000 table head title to show prerequisites only if not already done,
but post-completion tasks are always mandatory.
3 October 1, Onyx post M4 (3) release (Comanche). 480
2002 Changes include: add references to CAD option (changes to Introduction,
IST001, CFG008, D/R103);; IST012 corrected to include regulatory labelling;
CAL000, remove CAL013 and CAL 014 from prerequisites for CAL020; CAL019,
correct procedure according to SPR 76390; VF010, correct exposure parameter
table according to SPR 74456; Renewal Parts, new p/ns for detector, IDC (Dione
III), AWS monitor; D/R104, add illustration of Dione III, change illustration of
Dione II (was picture of protoytype).
Publication_Presentation.fm Page no. 17 Chapter 1

Revision History

4 December 17, Onyx post M4 (5) release. BUCge87719. 22
2004
BUCge85449:
Replaced FRU 2298456 800PL3 Gantry CPU by 2298456-2
Replaced FRU 2225445 Bucky by 2225445-2
Replaced FRU 2295490 UPS with support by 5104584 (EURge04127)
Added FRU 2407693 Bar Code Reader (for Sun SB150 AWS hardware)
Updated Job Card DR107 AWS Unit to include Sun SB150 AWS hardware.
Updated job cards:

VF001 Boot/Init and Shutdown
DR019 Back-up/Restore procedure
CAL010 Tube Tilt Calibration (XRYge54467)
CAL011 X-ray Beam Alignment Calibration (XRYge54467)
CAL012 Collimator Format Calibration (XRYge54467)
CAL013 Bad Pixel Calibration
CAL014 Detector Gain Calibration
CAL015 Conversion Factor Measurement
CAL017 AOP Calibration
D/R 103 Image Receptor (added reference to new D/R 109 Digital Detector
Firmware Flash)
Introduction of FRU 2102082-9 800PL1 Gantry power board:

Modified FRU list: replaced 2102082-8 by 2102082-9
Updated Job Card CFG003 Senographe Jumpers and Switches: Section 5-3
step 2 including addition of Illustrations 3 and 4.

Revision History

Chapter 10 Renewal Parts:
In revision 3 of the publication, all headers of all pages in this chapter showed
revision 2.
Replaced FRU 2303925 CD Writer with protective label by the following (for Sun
U10 AWS hardware) (BUCge85477):
- 2369031 (to replace failed existing unit)
- 2372446 (option kit for add-on)
Halogen Lamp FRU 2188568 corrected 1000W by 100W (BUCge90695)
Added FRUs :
- 2222414 S2000D Bucky without grid
- 2235106 Bucky cover with handles
- 2111764 Radshield Glass
- 2149381 Radshield mounting kit
- 45554829 Bracket for console
- 2148017 Accessory trolley foam
- 2393779 Cable (Compression Board / Bucky) W38 (BUCge94564)
- 45563301 Protection cover (plastic) (located between 200PL1 and 200PL2
boards) (BUCge80929)
- 2369908 X-ray detector coolant (bottle of coolant alone)
- 2296388 Detector Supply Harness (BUCge80733)
- 5109928, 5113759, and 5113759-2 AWS Sun SB150 Workstations
- 2331316 Generator cooling fan
Replaced FRU numbers:
- 224787-2 Loopback kit by 2247879-2·
- 2231528 Wall connector (2 x Optical Fiber) by 2279696
- 2249359 Purge tool by 2270096
- 2305765-4 Monitor AWS by 2316918
Updated Illustration 4 BULKHEAD/IDC-AWS-UPS HARNESS (BLACK, FROM
CART TO GANTRY): Minor corrections of FRU names.
Updated Job Card IST018 Bar Code Scanner (Option) to include case of 2000D
equipped with Sun SB150 AWS hardware.
Updated Job Card VF010 Acquisition in AOP Mode:

Changed values in mAs column of table in section 6 (BUCge74456).
Updated Job Card IST015 Installation of the CD-R Writer (option):

Added case of Plextor brand CD-R unit.
Updated Job Card CAL005 Calibration of kV Scale Factor:

Minor changes.
Updated Job Card ERR002 AWS Error Messages:

Added Note concerning AWS Error Code 3.

Revision History

Coolant for detector:
Updated coolant type. One coolant type for all systems. Removed all mention of
coolant color depending on system type.
Reworked IDC D/R procedures:
Created Job Card D/R100 IDC Steering Guide
Removed Job Card D/R104 IDC Unit
Created Job Card D/R104A Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 2
Created Job Card D/R104B Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 3 or 4
Created Job Card D/R104C Replacing IDC Dione 3 or 4 With Dione 3 or 4
Created Job Card D/R109 Digital Detector Firmware Flash
Updated Job Card D/R 000 Calibration after FRU Replacement:
Modified required calibrations and checks for D/R 104A, B and C.
Created Chapter 12 System Evolution and Section 1 ADS/IDC/Conditioner
Compatibility Matrix.
1 July 03, 2006 New number 2302228-2-100 rev.1, based on 2302228-100 rev.4. 566
• Job Card PM 001 - added line, Check Half-Value Layer Measurement
(EURge39997).
• Job Card DR 104 - removed hidden cross-references not used for
Senographe 2000D.
• New JCs added: VF014 (Check kVp) and VF 016 (Check mA and mAs)
(EURge39997).
• PM 001; lines added to call VF014 and VF016.
• PM 001: Steering Guide modified to have separate columns, Task and Task
Definition.
• New Job Card added: CFG 010 - Changing Senographe 2000 D Internal IP
Addresses (EURge46356)
• Part Numbers of Conditioner corrected in Job Cards IST006 and IST 017,
and in Renewal Part List (BUCge84608).
• Breast Holder Cover P/N 2270410 replaced by P/N 2227909 in Renewal
Part List (BUCge84136).
• Mammo Console P/N 2282675-4 replaced by P/N 2282675-6 in Renewal
Part List (BUCge49902).
• Job Card CAL 017 - removed §5.3 Calibration with No Grid/Large Focal
Spot configuration not applicable to Senographe 2000D (EURge38117).
• Updated Job Card CFG 003 and Renewal Part List for Gantry board 800PL1
5190800 introducing (EURge52555).
• Updated Job Card CFG 008 for IP configuration (EURge38125).
• X-ray Tube P/N 2218380 replaced by P/N 2299551-2 in Renewal Part List
(EURge50385).
• Updated Job Card CFG 008 for SUNBLADE 150 station adaptation
(XRYge66171).
• Updated Job Card IST 015 and Renewal Part List for Plextor CD-R unit
5140781 introducing (EURge28099).
• Updated Job Card CFG 006 and Job Card D/R 019 for Network Security fea-
ture (IP filters).
• Job Card CAL 011 - added Step 4. in procedure.
• Job Card CFG 009 updated for Konica 793, AGFA 4500M,AGFA 5500/5503,
and Kodak 8900 printers. Provisional information for Fuji 7000 printer.

Revision History

1 November 23, Technical release Onyx post M4 (8). 608
2006 New number 2302228-3-100 rev.1, based on 2302228-2-100 rev.1.
• Added Chapter 1 - Publication Presentation including the Revision History.
• Improved Job Card CFG 009 - Declare Printers (Filming Devices) - new Agfa
printers configuration information: PERCEPTION_LUT=OEM921.
• New presentation of the Scenario PM 001 - Planned Maintenance Steering
Guide: added Supplies and Special Tools Lists, added PM Task Schedule
per visit.
• Added Job Card PM 012 - Conditioner Coolant Replacement.
• SPR XRYge68852:
36005885 Belt inverted with the 91726680 Belt 49-tooth in the Chapter 10 -
Renewal Parts.
• CCC Requirements SPR EURge39282:
Added ordering conditions of the line supply cable in the Chapter 10 -
Renewal Parts.
• Improved Job Card D/R 029 - Generator CPU Board 400PL3.
• Added Job Card D/R 030 - Generator Command Board 400-PL1.
• Added Job Card D/R 031 - Generator Interface Board 400-PL2.
• Added Job Card D/R 032 - Generator Supply Command Board 200-PL2.
• Added Job Card D/R 033 - Generator Relay Board 200-PL4.
• ADS Sofware Kit 5179391 replaced by Kit 5179391-2 in the Chapter 12 -
System Evolution.

Revision History
This page is blank.

CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This chapter contains introductory information on the Senographe 2000 D system.
Page no. 23 CHAPTER 2

Descript_Chap.fm
This page is blank.
CHAPTER 2 Page no. 24

Descript_Chap.fm
System Description
System Description Chapter 2
1. MAJOR COMPONENTS
The Senographe 2000 D system includes the major components shown in the illustration below:
Also included, but not shown in the illustration, are the Network Connectivity kit and a number of acces-
sories (additional screen, compression paddles, etc.)
ILLUSTRATION 1 - SENOGRAPHE 2000D BASIC CONFIGURATION
Protective screen Generator Cabinet Gantry
AWS Cart X-ray Console Digital Detector
2. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Note:
This document mentions options which may not be available in your country, or may not be in-
stalled on your site. Please check the current configuration of the equipment you are servicing.
Optional equipment available for use with the system includes:
1. Mass Archiving system
2. Laser Printer.
3. CD-R (CD Recordable) writing system.
4. CAD (Computer Aided Detection).
5. Additional accessories.
Page no. 25 Chapter 2

System_description.fm
System Description
3. PRESENTATION
Senographe 2000 D is the new Digital Mammography System from GE Medical Systems. It has been
designed to perform Screening examinations as well as Diagnostic Views (including Spot compression
Magnified and/or Coned views). It is a modular system that eliminates the need for film cassettes, and
takes advantage of digital technology, including on-screen image display, Networking, Filming, and
Archiving.
The Senographe 2000D is equipped with a dual track X-ray tube (molybdenum/rhodium) and a digital
detector. The digital detector is a flat panel of amorphous silicon on which cesium iodide is deposited to
maximize detection of X-rays. Positioning operations and X-ray exposure are controlled by the Control
Panel which also controls power to all parts of the Senographe 2000D system.
1. Senographe 2000 D's digital technology offers the capability to acquire Images in near-real time and
to process them, with the ability to vary brightness and contrast levels and manipulate images.
2. It also offers high examination productivity as compared with screen/film, and introduces new appli-
cations such as Networking and Archiving.
3. Senographe 2000 D is built on the Senogrpahe DMR Platform, recognized for Image Quality superi-
ority. The Rhodium spectrum of the Senographe 2000 D's tube is well adapted to Digital Imaging.
The Senographe 2000D includes an acquisition work station ("AWS") monitor, keyboard and mouse,
computer, electronics, accessory storage, and uninterruptible power supply. The AWS is used for
image acquisition, processing, and display. The AWS can also be used for database management,
and can send images to archive, review, or filming.
4. The Acquisition Workstation displays acquired images in the room, allowing immediate evaluation of
breast positioning and possible motion blur, or adjustment of brightness and contrast.
Archiving, Networking, and Filming are all possible from the Acquisition Workstation, which can pro-
duce any number of equally high quality film copies as needed.
A hard-copy laser-film printer is used for image interpretation. Printer window width and window level
are set automatically, based on the image content. Images are displayed per film 1 on 1.
Several options are available for use with the Senographe 2000D system. These options include a
Senographe 2000D review workstation, a mass archiving system, a laser camera, networking capa-
bilities, and CD-ROM interchange media.
5. The optional Review Workstation is a stand-alone workstation, with its own dedicated computer and
image database, connected to the Acquisition workstation by a high speed link. It supports image dis-
play and manipulation.
This powerful computer is equipped with two dedicated, very high resolution B & W monitors and a
dedicated keypad. Networking is possible from this workstation, as well as printing and receiving
images from an archive device.
Chapter 2 Page no. 26

System Description
4. SYSTEM COMPONENTS
4-1. Overview
1. The Senographe 2000 D Gantry is equipped with a digital detector. Positioning operations and X-ray
exposure are controlled by the Control Panel, usually mounted on a protective screen, which also
controls power to the gantry and generator of the Senographe 2000 D system.
2. The Senographe 2000 D includes an Acquisition Workstation (AWS) monitor, keyboard and mouse,
computer, electronics, accessory storage, and UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
3. Accessories (standard and optional).
The following sections describe each of these components.
4-2. Senographe 2000 D X-ray System

The Senographe 2000 D is equipped with a dual track X-ray tube (molybdenum/rhodium) and a digital
detector. Mammographic examinations can be made with patients standing or sitting; both contact and
magnification views are available.
Images are acquired by direct digitization; they are displayed immediately on the AWS monitor and are
stored for later diagnostic review. They can be processed and/or filmed.
AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) and manual setting modes are provided for control of X-ray
parameters; the system provides auto-collimation and other leading features.
4-3. Digital Detector and Image Receptor

The Digital Detector is built into the Image Receptor, shown below. It is a flat panel of amorphous silicon
on which cesium iodide is deposited to maximize detection of X-rays and transmission of light photons.
The high definition digital images produced are sent to the acquisition workstation for visualization and
processing.
The upper surface of the Image Receptor is a removable grid (Bucky). When the grid is not required, it is
easily removed and it can be replaced by an optional Breast Holder without grid.
Compression
Paddle
Bucky
Image Receptor

System Description
4-4. Acquisition Workstation (AWS) Cart

4-4-1. Overview
The Senographe 2000 D AWS (Acquisition WorkStation) is used for image acquisition and display, data-
base management, and to send images to archive, review or filming.
The workstation is installed in the AWS Cart shown above.
Inside the cart are housed the workstation electronics (computer, image detection system), an accessory
storage unit, the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), the optional CD-R unit for interchange purposes,
and the Image Detector Controller (IDC).
Monitor screen
Keyboard Mouse pad
Light box
Three-section table
Access to workstation
computer and optional
CD-R Interchange Me
dia unit
Accessory storage unit
Uninterruptible
Power Supply

System Description
4-4-2. Three-Section Table
AWS
Monitor
Light box
Mouse and
Light switch Release button Keyboard Release button writing table/mouse pad
The three-section table carries the workstation keyboard, light box and writing surface/mouse pad. It can
be raised for easy access to the Accessories which can be stored below the table.
The left and right sides of the table (light box and writing table/mousepad) can be lowered out of the way
if necessary.
• To lower a side table, pull it slightly upwards, push the release button beneath it to release the lock,
and lower it carefully (do NOT drop).
• To return a side table to its working position, lift it to the horizontal position, then pull it slightly
upwards until the lock springs back into place.
CAUTION
The three-section table is not designed to hold items in excess of 20 kg weight.

4-4-3. Light Box
You can use the light box for viewing comparison mammograms.
WARNING
The light box must not be used for final interpretation of examinations.
The ambient light conditions in the examination room, and the resulting light level of the
light box, are incompatible with its use for final interpretation.
WARNING
The workstation monitor must not be used for final interpretation of examinations.
It is set up for optimum visualization with an ambient light level of 50 lux. Leaving the light
box illuminated without a film in place may degrade the review quality of images displayed
on the monitor.

System Description
4-4-4. Writing Table / Mouse Pad

The space to the right of the keyboard, with the integrated mouse pad, can be used for manipulating the
mouse, and as a writing surface. There is a recess for holding pens and pencils.
Note:
For the comfort of left handed users, the mouse can also be operated on any other horizontal sur-
face of the three-section table. The mouse cable can be connected at either side of the keyboard
according to user requirements.
4-4-5. Accessory Storage Unit

The Accessory Storage Unit is located inside the drawer at the bottom of the Senographe 2000 D cart.
Open the drawer by depressing the small catch in the upper part of the opening. The unit is designed to
store items removed from the Senographe 2000 D, or other accessories. Access to the compartments of
the storage unit can be from the front of the cart, or the unit can be turned 90 degrees either way for
access from the side.
4-4-6. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Catch for opening the drawer

UPS front panel
To assure system safety in the case of disturbances in the mains supply, the Senographe 2000 D system
incorporates an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), housed in the lower part of the Senographe 2000 D
cart.
During power fluctuations or brief interruptions, the UPS assures an unchanging supply to the worksta-
tion and the acquisition system, thereby preventing mains disturbances being transmitted to the system.
When a power failure occurs, or when the user switches off the system from the AWS Browser, the UPS
continues to supply power to the workstation during the time needed for the workstation to shut down in
an orderly manner.

System Description
5. ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS

5-1. Senographe 2000 D Accessories
The Senographe 2000 D is delivered with a set of breast compression paddles, including an axillary pad-
dle, and a magnification stand. Accessories available as options include:
• Graduated biopsy compression paddle (for 2D localization) with optical localizer.
• Extra X-ray shield
• X-ray remote control hand switch
• Hydraulic chair
5-2. System Options

System options available include:
• Review workstation.
• Mass archiving system. When this option is installed and connected to the Senographe 2000 D,
acquired images can be sent to the mass archiving device for permanent storage, either automati-
cally or on request. A list of all patients ever imaged on the Senographe 2000 D system can be kept
on the mass archiving device, making future retrievals fast and easy.
• Laser Camera. To provide hard copies of images, the Senographe 2000 D system can be connected
to a laser camera for film output.
WARNING
Only images produced by GE-recommended laser cameras can be used for final interpre-
tation of examinations. For compatible printers, see the latest product data sheets for this
system, which you can obtain from your local sales representative.
• Networking. The Senographe 2000 D is DICOM compliant, allowing it to be connected in a network

with other compliant devices for the exchange of images. Networking allows you to transmit images
acquired with the Senographe 2000 D system to other DICOM-compatible review stations, using the
"Network Push" function of the AWS Browser. In some cases, additional studies will be needed for
the implementation of customized connections.
• CD-R Interchange Media. A CD-R (CD-Recordable) unit can be installed in the Senographe 2000 D
cart, allowing selected sets of images to be saved on CD-ROMs for communication purposes (e.g.,
recording images for referring physicians, training, personal image library, etc.). It is NOT recom-
mended for permanent archiving.

System Description
This page is blank.

CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION
This chapter contains information for the installation of the Senographe 2000 D system.

Install.fm
This page is blank.

Install.fm
Job Card IST 000 - AWS System Configuration Form
Job Card IST 000 - AWS System Configuration Form Chapter 3
1. INTRODUCTION
Complete a copy of this form at the end of installation.
Leave it attached to the site Service Manual; upgrade it for each configuration change (new option, new
software release, etc.).
MACHINE TYPE: U60

SERIAL NUMBER:
HOSTID:
INTERNET ADDRESS:
NETMASK:
SDC PASSWORD:
HOSPITAL NAME:
USER’S INTERFACE LANGUAGE:
APPLICATION SUPPORT TELEPHONE:
MISCELLANEOUS:
SOFTWARE INITIAL REVISION:

SOFTWARE UPGRADE REVISION:
SOFTWARE PROTECTION KEY:
CD-R PROTECTION KEY:

ist000.fm
NETWORK HOST #1:

Hostname: IP address:
Protocol: Port Number:
A.E. Title: Comments:
NETWORK HOST#2
NETWORK HOST #3
NETWORK HOST #4
NETWORK HOST #5
NETWORK HOST #6
NETWORK HOST #7
NETWORK HOST #8
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #1:

NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #2

ist000.fm
ROUTING TABLE:
route add net:
route add net:
route add net:
route add net:
route add net:

ist000.fm
This page is blank.

ist000.fm
Job Card IST 001 - Installation Steering Guide
Job Card IST 001 - Installation Steering Guide Chapter 3
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information for installation of the Senographe 2000 D equipment.
2. STEERING GUIDE
Refer to Illustrations 1 through 4 for a Steering Guide outlining the recommended sequence of installa-
tion, followed by checks and calibration.
3. ROOM LAYOUT AND WIRING

Illustration 5, System Block Diagram, gives an overview of system connections

ist001-OC.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE - PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION
Preparation Notes
Schedule appointments
(e.g., with printer supplier
representative)
If the Senographe network

is to be connected to the
hospital network, request IP
addresses from the hospital.
Check Room Preparation

(see p.i.m. inspection
report)
Physical Installation
Unpack the Senographe

Job Card IST 002
Gantry Physical Install.

Job Card IST 004
Install Protective
Screen
(see instructions supplied)
Unpack the Cart

Job Card IST 003
Cart Physical Install.

Job Card IST 005
Apply regulatory and safety labels

as required
Job Card IST 012

ist001-OC.fm
ILLUSTRATION 2 - INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE - CONNECTIONS AND POWER-UP
Connections and power-up Notes
Remove covers for access

(Gen. Cab., Gantry, Cart rear)
Job Card D/R 101
Connect Gantry to Generator,

X-ray Console, and Footswitches
Job Card IST 006
Connect Cart to Gantry

Job Card IST 007
Connect and Configure Room

Lamps and Door Switch
Job Card IST 013
Make a.c. power connections

Job Card IST 008
Unpack/install image
receptor
Job Card IST 017
Check supply voltages

Job Card CFG 004
Coolant Installation
Job Card IST 019
First System Power-on

Job Card IST 009
Carry out line resistance check

Job Card IST 010

ist001-OC.fm
ILLUSTRATION 3 - INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE - CONFIGURATION, ETC.
Notes
Configuration
Configure Gantry and Generator
Job Card CFG 002
Set Gantry upper travel limit

Job Card IST 011
Senographe Functional Checks

Job Card VF 005
Install Modem
Install Modem
Job Card IST 016
CD-R Writer option

Install CD-R Writer if present
Job Card IST 015
Configuration
AWS Configuration
Job Card CFG 005
Network Connection and Config.

Job Card CFG 008
Declare Network Hosts

Job Card CFG 006
Declare Printers
Job Card CFG 009
Optionally change
Internal IP Addresses
Job Card CFG 010

ist001-OC.fm
ILLUSTRATION 4 - INSTALLATION STEERING GUIDE - CALIBRATION AND CONFIGURATION
Networked Options Notes

Install required options
(refer to supplied manuals):
Advantage Workstation
Mass Archiver
LaserCam
Calibrate Monitor
Calibrate AWS Monitor
For ISC monitor, perform:
Job Card CAL 018
For Hi-Bright 21" monitor,
refer to monitor s.m., perform:
Brightness and Contrast Adjustment
Refit covers
Refit covers
Job Card D/R 101
Final checks
Verify X-ray beam Geometry
Job Card CAL 011
Flat Field check

Job Card VF 008
Image Acquisition & ACR Score

Job Card VF 009
Acquisition in AOP mode

Job Card VF 010
Completion
Complete AWS System
Configuration Form
Job Card IST 000
Clean up room
and complete paper-work

ist001-OC.fm
Generator Cabinet
Chapter 3
Mains in:
Revision 1
AC UPS IEC 320C1

GE Healthcare
XP2 4/10A plug

ECM
Filter Line 1 AC
Mains Conditioner IEC
Line 2/Neutral 320C1 Air/Water pipes *
S1 Circuit XP4
4/10A
Breaker AWS
Plug
Cart IEC 320C1
Bulkhead 4/10A Plug
Ground Conditioner
Optical
Water
Detector fiber
Generator Air
UPS
Main Distribution
Rack
400PL2 DB9F
Fiber
Keyboard
Console XJ8 AC Keybd
(for debug)
Detector PS IEC 320C1 Detector
ILLUSTRATION 5 - SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Mains XP5 Can2

J9 4/10A Plug PS
XJ11 IDC
distribution link Conditioner control
Com1
Monitor
Monitor
IDC-DMR link IDC-DMR link DB9F Com2 (for debug)
XJ10
AWS-DMR link
HE10-50F Ethernet
XJ4
RJ45M
Bulkhead
Page no. 44
Ethernet
XJ6 crossover
thru Fiber optic
XJ9
RJ45M DB9M
Gantry DC power (+ve) Port 0

200PL2 XJ7 Mouse
DB25F Aurora
AWS-DMR link AWS
Gantry DC power (-ve) Port 1
Bar code
XJ6 reader (opt.)
Emergency stop Keyboard

XJ10 Gantry
HV Monitor
HV Tank
Anode return (+HT) Serial
RJ45M DB25
300PL2 Ethernet line
300PL2 Anode Starter straight
XJ2 modem
through
Gantry ground XJ10A XJ10B
Ground bar Connector for
Phone phone (Insite)
RJ45M line
Foot switches
Connector for
network
Network
* Note: For dryerless type conditioner,
the air pipes are not connected.
Printer, AWS, CAD, etc.
Service Manual 2302228-3-100
ist001-OC.fm
Job Card IST 002 - Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet
Job Card IST 002 - Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
1. Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket.
2. 6 mm Allen wrench.
3. Claw hammer or other suitable tool for removing packing nails.
3. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
- Two persons are needed for unpacking and moving the Gantry and Generator.
- Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
- When using a fork-lift to move the loaded pallet, always insert it on the Generator
Cabinet side; the other is blocked.
- Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.
- Do not remove the securing straps from the Generator Cabinet until it to be
removed from the pallet
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT

The objective is to unpack the gantry, generator and accessories and move them to the mammography
room. Do not remove the packing on the Image Receptor.
WARNING
The Image Receptor is delicate, and can be easily damaged if subjected to any shock. DO
NOT remove the packing on the Image Receptor at this stage. It will be removed after all
movement and installation work has been completed.
1. Inspect for damage and perform initial unpacking.
THE SENOGRAPHE WAS COMPLETELY INSPECTED FOR PROPER OPERATION AND
APPEARANCE BEFORE SHIPMENT. HOWEVER, IT IS NECESSARY TO INSPECT THE PROD-
UCT AFTER THE SHIPMENT IS RECEIVED. VISUALLY INSPECT THE PACKAGES FOR ANY
APPARENT DAMAGE. IF THERE ARE SIGNS OF DAMAGE, REFER TO THE Damage in Transpor-
tation STATEMENT IN THE FRONT OF THIS MANUAL.
Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on the list
are present in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.
2. Perform initial unpacking.
3. Remove the outer cardboard covering from the crate.
4. Remove ramp from crate and put it in place.
5. Remove the protective screen and the other accessories from the crate and move them into the
mammography room.

ist002.fm
Job Card IST 002 - Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet
5-1. Unpack gantry

1. Use the 6 mm Allen wrench to remove the four gantry baseplate shipping hold-down screws.
2. Thread the four special jacking bolts (provided in the accessory pouch) into their respective holes in
the gantry baseplate. Place the four flat round jack feet (provided in the accessory pouch) on the floor
of the crate with their nipples facing upwards. Continue turning the jacking bolts downwards until their
hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the jack feet.
3. Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts.
4. When the gantry baseplate is high enough to be clear of the two wooden support blocks, remove
these blocks.
5. Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by the castors.
6. Leave the four jacking bolts threaded into the gantry baseplate and set the jack feet aside (they will
be used again when installing the gantry).
7. Carefully roll the gantry down the ramp and into the mammography room.
CAUTION
Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.
5-2. Unpack generator cabinet

1. Remove the securing straps from the generator cabinet. A B
2. For each of the two red clamping brackets securing the cabinet to
the pallet:
a. Remove the two bolts which hold the bracket to the pallet.
b. Remove the protective film from the strips of adhesive tape on
the bracket and on the bottom edge of the cover panel immedi-
ately above the panel.
c. Push the bracket firmly upwards as shown (C) so that it is held
up by the adhesive tape.
3. Remove the screws (B) which hold the two wooden blocks under- C
neath the cabinet; remove the blocks.
4. Carefully roll the cabinet down the ramp and into the mammography
room.
CAUTION
Take care that the generator cabinet does not catch and jump while moving down the
ramp; note that its center of gravity is higher than that of a Senographe DMR generator
cabinet.
5. Leave the two brackets in place (held to the covers by the adhesive tape) until you are ready to
remove the covers and connect the system. Then remove them and place them with the other pack-
ing materials for return.
5-3. Accessories
The box of accessories is packed on the pallet with the AWS Cart.

ist002.fm
Job Card IST 003 - Unpacking the Cart
Job Card IST 003 - Unpacking the Cart Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
Standard toolkit with metric wrenches.
Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Reception
The AWS Cart is delivered with all items secured to a single pallet. Systems for overseas shipment are
protected by a wood and cardboard cover with shock indicators. Systems for road shipment do not have
this cover.
1. Examine the system on reception. Check any shock indicators present. If possible (this requires
removal of the cover, if present), make a visual check of all items on the pallet (monitor in carton, box
of accessories, AWS Cart).
2. If any problems are found (items missing, signs of shipping damage, excessive shock, etc.), note
them on the delivery note before signing for reception.
3. Move the pallet into or close to the examination room, ready for unpacking.
Notice:
The Cart must be unpacked inside or close to the examination room; it is not a mobile, and cannot
be moved over bumps such as cables and elevator entrances.
If necessary, it may be moved over small steps with the aid of the ramps provided.

ist003-OC.fm
Job Card IST 003 - Unpacking the Cart
5-2. Removal from pallet

Unpack the equipment:
1. Remove the cover, if present.
2. A box containing accessories (A) is secured above the monitor box in front of the Cart. Remove it.
3. Remove the box containing the monitor (B) from the pallet in front of the Cart.
4. Release the webbing strap (C), which secures the Cart and a wooden unloading ramp.
5. Remove the unloading ramp (D) and the packing material which protects the top of the Cart.
Position the ramp at the front of the pallet.
6. Remove the Cart securing box (E) after unscrewing the two bolts
which hold it. Remove the box containing the cassette support from
the securing box.
7. The front of the Cart is supported on two foam blocks. Lift the front of
the Cart slightly; remove the blocks by pulling the two tapes (F).
8. Remove all foam packing pieces from around the Cart.The Cart can F
now be rolled down the ramp.
Notice:
Avoid shocks to the Cart! In addition to the unloading ramp, a small triangular wooden ramp (30
mm x 50 mm) is provided for use if the Cart must be moved over steps. This ramp is taped at the
rear of the pallet.
5-3. Unpacking
1. Unpack the boxes containing the monitor and accessories.
2. Remove items packed in the accessory storage area at the front of the Cart;
3. Examine all items for damage. If there are any signs of damage, refer to the Damage in Transporta-
tion statement at the front of this manual. If there are no signs of damage, set them aside until
required for connection.
4. Collect all packing material for disposal.

ist003-OC.fm
Job Card IST 004 - Senographe Physical Installation
Job Card IST 004 - Senographe Physical Installation Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
1. Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
2. 8 mm Allen wrench
3. Drill
4. Screwdrivers
CAUTION
Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.
4. PREREQUISITES
• The procedures described in Job Card IST 002 - Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet on
page 45 must have been completed.
5. PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
The objective is to place and anchor the gantry in its permanent position, and to assemble the protective
screen.
Note:
The generator is not permanently installed in this Job Card because it must remain mobile until the
wiring between it and the gantry is complete. The generator must therefore remain on its castors
for the moment.
The "CE" marking label, located on one of the large side panels of the generator, must remain visible
after installation of the generator.
6. INSTALL AND ANCHOR THE GANTRY IN ITS PERMANENT POSITION.

CAUTION
Do not remove the packing from the Image Receptor until the conditions specified in Sec-
tion 5-2 have been met.
• Before proceeding, it is recommended that you perform a final verification of the information given
in the Pre-Installation Manual, particularly concerning clearances around the gantry when
installed in its permanent position.
• Anchoring is recommended for Senographe 2000 D systems, but is not mandatory except in seis-
mic areas.
1. If anchoring is required, drill and prepare the securing holes:
a. Place the drilling template (provided in the installation kit) flat on the floor, align it with the desired

ist004.fm
Job Card IST 004 - Senographe Physical Installation
permanent position and mark the three gantry mounting hole centers on the floor.
b. Drill the three gantry mounting holes (depth and diameter depend on the type of insert to be used
- see below).
c. Place the appropriate type of insert (not provided) into each of the three mounting holes (depend-
ing on the type and thickness of floor). The inserts should be able to receive the 10 x 80 mm
screws (provided), or, for U.S. installations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).
2. Wheel the gantry to its correct position (if it is to be anchored, position it with the three baseplate
mounting holes aligned with the three holes drilled in the floor).
3. Place the four flat round jack feet on the floor with their nipples facing upwards.
4. Turn the four jacking bolts downwards until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the four
jack feet.
5. Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts until the castors are clear of the floor.
6. Use the 8 mm Allen wrench to remove the castors.
7. Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by its baseplate.
Remove the four jacking bolts completely.
Note:
The four jack feet remain below the gantry baseplate. If the floor is not perfectly even, level the
gantry base using the four screws p/n 45562657 (provided in installation kit). Insert them in place
of the jacking bolts to push on the jack feet.
8. To provide access to all three gantry baseplate mounting holes (one of the holes is located inside the
gantry column), remove the two column side panels (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on
page 539 if necessary).
9. If required, bolt the gantry to the prepared inserts in the floor.
10. Cover all unused gantry baseplate holes with the plastic plugs provided.
7. ASSEMBLE THE PROTECTIVE SCREEN.

See the mounting instructions delivered with the X-ray shield (one to three panels). Anchoring to the floor
is mandatory in seismic areas.

ist004.fm
Job Card IST 005 - Cart Physical Installation
Job Card IST 005 - Cart Physical Installation Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
Standard toolkit with metric wrenches
WARNING
The monitor is heavy; two people must be available to lift it.
4. PREREQUISITES
The checks specified in Job Card IST 002 - Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet on page 45
and Job Card IST 003 - Unpacking the Cart on page 47, describing unpacking of the Gantry, Generator,
and Cart must be complete.
The room must be clean, and as far as possible free of unwanted material.
5. PROCEDURE
• Two procedures are given here, one for the ISC (Image Systems Corporation) monitor, and one for
the Hi-Bright 21" AWS Monitor.

ist005-OC.fm
6. INSTALLATION - ISC MONITOR

Notice:
When installing the monitor, take care not to damage the support paint.
6-1. Monitor
1. Place the monitor in its position on the top of the Cart. Note that
the support is not square; it must be positioned with the small hole
(for cables) at the rear.
2. Remove the magnetic covers from the four monitor clamps (A).
3. Position the clamps and secure them to hold the monitor in posi-
tion (5 mm Allen key).
4. Replace the four magnetic covers on the clamps. A
6-2. Monitor Connections
1. Remove the monitor rear cover.
2. Pass the monitor cables (power cable and five-way BNC signal cable, leaving the cart through the
cable cover behind the monitor) through the slot at the rear of the monitor.
3. Route the power cable so that the ferrite ring is to the right of the cable space (to allow the maximum
space for routing the signal cables), and connect it to the power input socket.
4. Identify and connect three of the BNC connectors to the monitor signal inputs (B) as follows:
a. Video input: Green cable (marked G).
b. Synch input; Grey cable (marked H).
c. Vertical input: Black cable (marked V)
d. Use 75-ohm BNC terminators to terminate the remaining two BNC connectors (Blue and Red).
Leave them unconnected.
CAUTION
When routing the signal cables, position

them with the ferrite ring to the left of the
cable space, so that the cables are bent as
gently as possible (as shown here). Focus
problems can occur if the cables are bent too
tightly.
5. Use tie-wraps to secure the cables (including those
unconnected).
6. Set the monitor switch to ON and install the monitor
rear cover.
7. In the Cart, connect the monitor power cable to W18
(the upper connector of UPS outputs).

ist005-OC.fm
7. INSTALLATION - HI-BRIGHT MONITOR

Notice:
When installing the monitor, take care not to damage the support paint.
7-1. Monitor
A
• The Hi-Bright 21" AWS Monitor is delivered with its adaptor plate
already fitted, and the power and signal cables already connected.
1. Place the monitor on top of the AWS cart as shown (A and B).
2. Pass the a.c. mains connector through the hole in the top of the
cart (it must be turned to pass through sideways) and pass the
cable behind the AWS unit. B
3. Push the mains cable to the side of the hole and pass the video
connector through the hole.
C
4. Move the monitor and adapter plate assembly back to position it
as shown (C). The four fixing holes in the adapter plate should cor-
respond to the four holes in the top of the AWS Cart.
5. Secure the monitor to the cart using the four screws provided.
D
6. Connect the monitor video cable to the VGA connector at the bot-
tom right of the AWS unit.
7. Plug the monitor power cable into a free socket on the UPS power
output strip at the bottom left of the cart.
8. Position and secure the cables as required.
VGA video connector

ist005-OC.fm
This page is blank.

ist005-OC.fm
Job Card IST 006 - Connections (Gantry, Generator, X-ray Console, Footswitch)
Job Card IST 006 - Connections (Gantry, Generator, X-ray Console, Foot-
switch) Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
• HV grease 46-125224P3
2. TOOLS
• Standard set of socket wrenches and nut drivers
• Standard set of open end wrenches
None
4. PREREQUISITES
The system components must have been installed in their final positions in the room.
5. CONNECTIONS
Notice:
The connection from the hospital a.c. mains supply must be switched by a mains isolator switch
external to the Senographe 2000 D system, accessible in case of emergency.
This module describes the connection of cables between the Generator, Gantry, and X-ray Console, and
the connection of footswitches. Connection of the X-ray lamp, room lamp and room door is described in
Job Card IST 013 - Room Lamps and Door Configuration on page 89.
An overview of cable connections is given in the diagram below; cables and tubes to be connected are
listed in Tables 1 through 4.
A block diagram giving an overview of system connections is given in Illustration 5.
Connection of the incoming a.c. supply cable to the Generator is described in Job Card IST 008 - AC
Connection on page 73.
AC connection
Refer to
Cart Connections
Harness 2 (black)
Harness 1 (white) AWS Cart

Generator Gantry
Cabinet
X-ray Console
cable X-ray Footswitch
Console cables
Footswitches Phone Network
line connection
(Insite)

ist006.fm
TABLE 1 - GANTRY TO GENERATOR CABINET CABLES - HARNESS 2 (BLACK)
Cable Reference Connects: See Section:

Detector ac supply 2225467 Gantry to Distribution Rack XP5 6-3
UPS ac supply 2225470 Gantry to Distribution Rack XP4 6-3
Water tubes 2266811, 2266812 To connectors on side of Conditioner 7
Air tubes n/a To connectors on side of Conditioner 9
Conditioner Control 2226611 To upper connector on side of Conditioner 6-4
AWS - Generator Link 2226623 Gantry to Generator Cabinet 400PL2 XJ4 6-1
IDC - Generator Link 2226613 Gantry to Generator Cabinet 400PL2 6-1
XJ10
TABLE 2 - GANTRY TO GENERATOR CABINET CABLES - HARNESS 1 (WHITE)
Cable Color Connects to Generator Cabinet: See Section:

HV Grey HV Tank 8-1
Anode Return (+HT) Black HV Tank 8-2
Gantry DC Power Brown 200PL2: XJ6 (+ve); XJ7 (-ve) See Warning in
section 8-3
Gantry Ground Green/Yellow Ground Bar 8-3
Fiber-Optic cables Black 400PL2: XJ6 thru XJ9 See Caution in
section8-4
Anode Starter White 300PL2 XJ2 * 8-5
The Starter Motor cable screen terminates in a metal grounding clip, which must be securely fixed using
the screw pre-installed on the panel.
Emergency Stop Grey To connectors TB1 on Autotransformer 8-6
TABLE 3 - X-RAY CONSOLE TO GENERATOR CABINET CABLE

X-ray Console Cable 2150063 X-ray Console to Generator Cabinet 400PL1 XJ8 6-2
TABLE 4 - FOOTSWITCH TO GANTRY CABLES

Footswitch Cable 2234874 Footswitches to Gantry Power Board 800PL1 11-1
(2-pedal) (pedal assy.) X10A/B
Footswitch Cable 2234879 Footswitches to Gantry Power Board 800PL1 11-2
(4-pedal option) (pedal assy.) X10 A/B, and XJ13 A/B
Note:
Most of the illustrations in this Job Card show the Generator assembly only; they do not show the
MDR (Main Distribution Rack) which is mounted at the top of the Generator Cabinet.

ist006.fm
5-1. Route Cables from the Gantry to the Generator Cabinet

These cables are grouped in two harnesses. One is contained in a white flexible cover, the other is run
through a semi-flexible black tubular cable conduit. They are already connected in the Gantry Cabinet - it
is only necessary to route and connect them to the Generator Cabinet. Do not secure cables with cable
ties until all have been routed and connected.
1. Do not route and connect cables until the Gantry and Generator Cabinet are in their normal working
positions.
2. Remove the Generator Cabinet covers (refer to Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539
if necessary).
3. Remove the two red brackets which clamped the cabinet to the pallet for transport (now held to the
bottom of the front and rear cover panels by adhesive tape).
4. Run the cable harnesses from the Gantry to the Generator Cabinet through floor or wall ducts as
appropriate. Facing the front panel (with switches), cable entry is at the bottom of the left-hand side of
the cabinet.
5. When you are satisfied that all equipment is in its
correct position and unlikely to be moved, and that
the cables have been correctly routed, open up
any excess length of the black flexible conduit at
the Generator Cabinet end. Cut it to the correct
length for clamping at the cabinet entry point.
6. Clamp the white cable harness as shown. Secure
the black conduit in the U-shaped clip mounted
under the clamp.
7. Separate the cables and tubes contained in the black

harness. The electrical cables (A) will be routed first.
The air tubes (clear plastic; B) and water tubes (red
reinforced tubing, insulated at the conditioner end; C)
will be run separately. C
B

ist006.fm
5-2. Cabinet internal routing
WARNING
It is important that the instructions given for routing the two water tubes are carefully fol-
lowed. Only the insulated parts of the tubes should pass through the cabinet; any excess
must be coiled below the cabinet as specified. If these instructions are not followed, the
heat of the cabinet can affect the temperature of the detector cooling water and make cor-
rect detector temperature control impossible.
This section gives requirements for routing cables and tubes in the Generator Cabinet. Before perma-
nently securing any item, be sure that you have studied and understood all the requirements of the con-
nections described in this job card. It may be necessary to try different arrangements for excess cable
before finally deciding on the best cable routes.
• Any excess length of water tubes is coiled on the floor in the space beneath the bottom of the cabi-
net.
• Any excess length of electrical cables is coiled in the space above the cabinet cable entry, over the
guide provided at the top of the space and down to the clamping bracket at the bottom of the cabinet.
• Any excess length of air tubes is coiled with the electrical cables.
Take great care not to allow the air tubes to be pinched by the weight of cables.
• Make connections and route cables in the order given:
- Black harness and X-ray Console cables; see section Black Harness and X-ray Console Cable
Connection.
- Water tubes; see section Water Tube Connection.
- White Harness cables; see section White Harness Connections.
- Air Tubes; see section Air Tube Connection.
- Room door wiring; see section X-ray On and Room Door Wiring.
- Footswitch connections; see section Footswitch Connection.

ist006.fm
6. BLACK HARNESS AND X-RAY CONSOLE ELECTRICAL CONNEC-

TIONS
ILLUSTRATION 1 - AWS, IDC, AND X-RAY CONSOLE CABLES
400 PL3
400 PL1
400 PL2
XJ4
XJ8 XJ10
200 PL2
XJ 10
701 PL1
Power
Line
Filter
6-1. Connecting the AWS and IDC Link Cables

1. AWS - Generator Link. Route the cable up the side of the generator and connect it to Generator Inter-
face Board 400PL2 connector XJ4.
2. IDC - Generator Link. Route the cable up the side of the generator and connect it to Generator Inter-
face Board connector 400PL2 XJ10
6-2. Connecting the X-ray console cable

1. Route the X-ray console cable (provided in the accessory pouch) from X-ray console to generator.
2. Route the cable up the side of the generator, along the inside of the middle generator cross-member,
and connect it to generator command board 400PL1 connector XJ8.
3. Route and connect the other end of the X-ray console cable to the X-ray console.
CAUTION
Tighten the connector retaining screws finger tight only at each end of the X-ray console
cable.

ist006.fm
6-3. Connecting the Detector and UPS supply cables

From the cable entry point, run the cables up the rear of the
cabinet, along the side cross-member and the front cross mem-
ber to the right hand side of the cabinet. Plug them into the sup-
ply outlets XJ4 and XJ5 as shown (A).
A
ILLUSTRATION 2 - DETECTOR AND UPS AC SUPPLY CABLES
6-4. Connecting the Conditioner Control cable

From the cable entry point, run the cable up the rear of the cabinet, along
the side cross-member and up to the side of the Conditioner in the MDR.
Plug and secure it in the upper connector as shown (B).
6-5. Excess cable

Coil any excess cable in the space above the cabinet cable entry, over the
guide provided at the top of the space and down to the clamping bracket at
B
the bottom of the cabinet.
C
7. AIR AND WATER PIPE CONNECTIONS
Run the insulated sections (only) of the pipes up the rear of the cabinet
and plug them into the Conditioner connectors (C). Take care not to
obstruct the pipes by bending them too sharply, or by securing them too tightly. Note that the pipes are
not identified as inlet or outlet; they are interchangeable.
Coil any excess length of pipe on the floor in the space beneath the cabinet and secure it using cable ties
when installation is complete.
Note:
For dryerless conditioner, do not connect the air pipes.

ist006.fm
8. WHITE HARNESS CONNECTIONS

ILLUSTRATION 3 - HV TANK CONNECTIONS
1
TB1
2 200 PL4
8-1. Connecting the HV cable

1. Remove the protective covering from the HV cable connector and apply HV grease to the connector.
2. Plug the HV cable (2) into the HV unit and carefully tighten the connecting ring.
3. To ensure proper grounding of the HV cable, tighten the 1.5 mm screw on the top of the cable locking
ring.
Note:
If the HV cable is not properly grounded, intermittent X-ray console lock-up and random error mes-
sages may occur - if this occurs, check the grounding at both ends of the cable.
8-2. Connecting the anode return cable

4. Connect the X-ray tube anode return wire marked BLOC +HT (1) to the threaded stud marked with a
ground symbol on the top of the HV unit.
CAUTION
Do not tighten the nut excessively - doing so may damage the thread or break off the stud.
If this happens the sealed HV unit must be returned to the factory for repair.

ist006.fm
ILLUSTRATION 4 - GANTRY D.C. SUPPLY AND GROUND CONNECTIONS
400 PL3
400 PL1 Capacitor

box
400 PL2
200 PL2
XJ6
XJ7
701 PL1 1
Power Power
Line Line
Filter Filter
8-3. Connecting the gantry power and grounding cables

1. Route and connect the gantry 27 V power cables to 200PL2 as shown: the +ve connector to XJ6, the
0 V connector to XJ7 (cables are routed under the capacitor box, through the middle of the genera-
tor).
2. Route the green/yellow ground cable in the same way; connect it to the grounding bar (1).
WARNING
These cables must be routed through the opening close to the capacitor box.
WARNING
Be very careful to connect the 27 V power cables to XJ6 & 7 on 200 pl2; (NOT to XJ6 & 7 on
200 pl1) - the 200pl1 connectors carry line level ac voltages which will cause considerable
damage to components if connected to the gantry.

ist006.fm
ILLUSTRATION 5 - FIBER-OPTIC LINKS CONNECTION
400 PL3
XJ6
400 PL1 through
XJ9
400 PL2
Fibre-
optic
cables
200 PL2
701 PL1
Power Power
Line Line
Filter Filter
8-4. Connecting the fiber-optic cables
CAUTION
Fiber-optic cables are more fragile than ordinary copper-stranded cable and you must
therefore treat them with greater care - bend or twist them only as much as is strictly nec-
essary to install and connect them.
Note:A small protective cap protects the cable end; remove it before connecting.
1. Route the black plastic tube protecting the fiber-optic cables as shown in the illustration, taking care
to keep a smooth radius on all bends (fibers are routed under the capacitor box, through the middle
of the generator).
2. Identify the four connectors XJ6 through XJ9 on the generator interface board 400PL2 and connect
the four fiber-optic cables to their respective connectors.

ist006.fm
ILLUSTRATION 6 - ANODE STARTER MOTOR CABLE CONNECTION
Anode
starter 400 PL3
cable
400 PL1
400 PL2
Metal
grounding
clip here
200 PL2
701 PL1
Power
Line
Filter
8-5. Connecting the anode starter cable

1. Route the anode starter cable (marked 300 PL2 XJ2) as shown; connect it to XJ2 on the anode
starter board 300PL2(on rear of the unit; not illustrated here).
2. Remove the metal grounding clip; pass the anode starter cable inside it and bolt the clip back to the
panel.

ist006.fm
ILLUSTRATION 7 - EMERGENCY STOP CABLE CONNECTION
TB1
HV tank
701
200 PL4
8-6. Connecting the Emergency Stop cable

Route the emergency stop two-wire cable (marked AUTOTRANSFORMER TP1 OR 200PL2 XJ10) over
the HV tank; connect the two wires to the clip connectors TB1 on the top of the Autotransformer. The
leads may be connected either way round. TB1 is connected through the autotransformer thermal cutout
to the emergency stop connector on board 200PL1.
8-7. Excess cable

Coil any excess cable in the space above the cabinet cable entry, over the guide provided at the top of
the space and down to the clamping bracket at the bottom of the cabinet.

ist006.fm
9. AIR TUBE CONNECTION (ONLY FOR CONDITIONER WITH DRYER)

Run the air tubes up the rear of the cabinet and plug them into the Condi-
tioner connectors (D). Take care not to obstruct the tubes by bending them
too sharply, or by securing them too tightly. Note that the tubes are not
identified as inlet or outlet; they are interchangeable.
Coil any excess length of water tube with the electrical cables, in the
space above the cabinet cable entry. It should be coiled last, to avoid any
danger of being pinched by the weight of the cables.
Note:
This section applies only for the following conditioner types (with D
dryer):
- P/N 2210405-11 (FRU P/N 2386318)
- P/N 2210405-14 (FRU P/N 2390024)
Note:
For Dryerless Conditioner P/N 2210405-15 (FRU P/N 2387548) these air tubes are not connected.
See Renewal Parts page 418.
10. X-RAY ON AND ROOM DOOR WIRING

Refer to the Job Card IST 013 - Room Lamps and Door Configuration on page 89 for information on con-
necting the X-ray ON lamp and room-door wiring

ist006.fm
11. FOOTSWITCH CONNECTION

11-1. 2-Pedal Footswitch basic hardware (Compression only):
1. Remove gantry column left side cover to access 800 PL1 Gantry Power Board.
2. Route the two footswitch cables along gantry main harness (use cable ties).
3. Attach each footswitch cable to the Gantry chassis using a clamping plate (4),
4. Connect the two footswitch cables to the fixed connectors XJ10A and XJ10B on the Gantry 800PL1
Power Board (2). The “flying” connectors XJ13A and XJ13B (3), if present, are not used.
11-2. 4-Pedal Footswitch optional hardware (Compression + Elevator):

1. Remove gantry column left side cover to access 800 PL1 Gantry Power Board
2. Route the two footswitch cables along gantry main harness (use cable ties).
3. Attach each footswitch cable to the Gantry chassis using a clamping plate (4).
4. Connect the two compression footswitch cables to fixed connectors XJ10A and XJ10B on the Gantry
800PL1 Power Board (2).
5. Connect the two elevator control footswitch cables to the “flying” connectors XJ13A and XJ13B (3).
ILLUSTRATION 8 - FOOTSWITCH CABLE CONNECTION
BASIC (COMPRESSION ONLY):
800PL1 Gantry Power Board

(2) CONNECTORS FOR COMPRESSION CONTROL
XJ10A XJ10B
LEFT
Route Footswitch
cables along the
main harness (4) CLAMPING PLATES
RIGHT
OPTION (COMPRESSION + ELEVATOR):
800PL1 Gantry Power Board

(2) CONNECTORS FOR COMPRESSION CONTROL
XJ10A XJ10B
LEFT
XJ13A
(3) CONNECTORS FOR ELEVATOR CONTROL

XJ13B
RIGHT

ist006.fm
12. COMPLETION
12-1. Final cable dressing and tying
When all cables have been correctly routed and connected, use cable ties to secure them as required.
Specific recommendations are as follows:
1. Secure the HV cable to the lower and middle cross-members with two cable-ties (one on each cross-
member).
2. Arrange the remaining cables, then attach them to the lower and middle cabinet cross-members with
two cable-ties (one on each cross-member).
Note:
Secure the anode current return wire BLOC +HT to the lower cross-member only.
3. Secure the X-ray lamp and room lamp wires (if used) to the lower and middle cross-members with
two cable-ties (one on each cross-member).
4. Leaving sufficient slack to avoid stress on the optical fiber connectors, attach the black plastic tubing
to the middle cross-member with a cable-tie.
5. Attach the two gantry power leads and the protective grounding cable to the lower cabinet cross-
member with a cable-tie
6. Secure the excess cable loops as required
12-2. HV tank
• In order to release pressure during long exposures, loosen the vent screw of the HV tank by 3 mm.
VENT SCREW

ist006.fm
Job Card IST 007 - Cart Connection
Job Card IST 007 - Cart Connection Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• Standard set of socket wrenches and nut drivers
• Standard set of open end wrenches
None
4. PREREQUISITES
The Cart and Gantry must be in their final positions in the room.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Cable routing
Cart to Gantry cables are already connected in the cart; they leave the cart through a black tubular con-
duit.
1. Run the cable conduit from the cart to the gantry (through floor or
B
wall ducting as appropriate).
2. If the conduit is too long, remove the securing ring (A), cut off the
excess at the gantry end, and replace the securing ring.
3. Starting with the biggest connectors (to ease the task of routing
the last cables), pass the cables through the opening (B) at the
bottom of the gantry.
4. Identify and connect the cables as described in the following sec-
tions.
5. After all connections have been made, secure the conduit by fit-
ting the securing ring (A) into the fork at the bottom of the gantry
as shown. Coil any excess cable inside the gantry and secure
with cable ties. A
5-2. Gantry Connections

Identify and connect the cables in the gantry, using the following table and illustrations.
WARNING
Fiber-optic cables are more easily damaged than electrical cables; handle them with care.
Note:A small protective cap protects the cable end; remove it before connecting.
The connectors are keyed; if they are difficult to connect, check that the key is
correctly oriented.
When disconnecting, be sure to pull on the connector and not the cable.

ist007-OC.fm
Cable Reference Connects to: Illus. Ref.
Power connections:
AC UPS Power 2231555 UPS IECC14/10A to IEC 320/10A C

Gantry Bulkhead
Detector PS-IDC 2226621 IDC to Power Supply J2 D
Signal connections:
ADS-Gantry Link 2226625 - XJ7 ADS Port 0 to Gantry Bulkhead XJ7
UPS-Gantry Link 2226615 - XJ6 UPS to Gantry Bulkhead XJ6
IDC--Gantry Link 2240227 - XJ5 IDC COM2 & RT line to Gantry XJ5
Bulkhead
Conditioner Control 2226612 - XJ2 IDC COM1 to Gantry Bulkhead XJ2
Fiber-Optic Cable n/a IDC to Gantry Bulkhead E

(see Warning)
C
XJ2
XJ6
XJ7
XJ5

ist007-OC.fm
5-3. Modem and Network Connections

Connect the modem and network cables to the connectors at the rear of the AWS cart (see illustration):
• Connect the modem cable from the telephone wall socket to the modem connector.
• Route and connect the cable from the network hub (provided in the Senographe 2000 D networking
kit) to the Ethernet network connector.
• Note that the third socket is intended for connection of a local printer, but is not currently used.
Printer connection
(not used)
Modem connection Ethernet connection

ist007-OC.fm
This page is blank.

ist007-OC.fm
Job Card IST 008 - AC Connection
Job Card IST 008 - AC Connection Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• AC voltmeter
• Torque wrench (optional)
Note:
The recommended torque for all lug nuts is 4 Nm
Follow standard safety techniques and procedures for handling equipment and circuits carrying AC sup-
ply voltages.
4. PREREQUISITES
A suitable mains isolator switch must have been installed for connection of the Senographe 2000D sys-
tem to the hospital supply.
Remove covers from the Generator Cabinet.
Note:
Jumpers and switches not dependent on site voltages etc. are set in the factory, and normally need
not be checked. If you suspect that they have been disturbed, refer to Job Card CFG 003 - Senog-
raphe Jumpers and Switches on page 131.
5. PROCEDURES
The procedures described in this document and listed below must be followed carefully before applying
power to the system:
1. AC Supply Check.
2. Voltage Selection - Mains Distribution Rack.
3. Voltage Selection - Generator.
4. Configure Fuses F1, F2.
5. Connect the AC Supply Cable.
• When all of these procedures have been successfully completed, and before switching on the
Generator Cabinet and Mains Distribution Rack circuit breakers, follow the instructions for
First Power On in Job Card IST 009 - First System Power On on page 79.

ist008.fm
5-1. AC supply Check

Determine the nominal voltage and frequency of the available power supply.
5-1-1. Check nominal line voltage
Consult the user to determine the nominal line voltage and frequency, then measure the open-circuit line
voltage to verify that it corresponds to the nominal line voltage, ±10%. Allowable nominal line voltages
are 200, 208, 220, 240, 380, 415 V single-phase.
5-1-2. Line frequency
The Senographe operates with line frequencies of 50 or 60 Hz without adjustment.
5-2. Voltage Selection - Mains Distribution Rack
Check the position of the input connection wire

on the Mains Distribution Rack transformer ter-
minal block (reference A in the illustration).
If the tap connection does not correspond to the
nominal (not the measured) line voltage you
determined in section 5-1, then remove and
reconnect the wire to the correct terminal.
A

ist008.fm
5-3. Voltage Selection - Generator

5-3-1. Position the voltage selection board
Referring to the illustration and Table 1
(below), install the voltage selection board
IN2 on the AC Distribution board 200–PL1
according to the nominal AC supply voltage.
5-3-2. Voltage selection
Check the position of the SEL wire on the AC
Distribution board 200–PL1 (see illustration).
By default, the SEL wire is connected to the
240v transformer tap. If the tap connection
SEL wire
does not correspond to the nominal (not the
HV tank 701
measured) line voltage you determined in
section 5-1, then remove and reconnect the
200 PL1
SEL wire to the correct terminal.
Notice:
The SEL wire must NOT be connected
to the 0V terminal. This terminal is re-
served exclusively for use while per-
forming the measurement described in IN2 board
position
Job Card IST 010 - Line Resistance
Measurement on page 81. The Senog- BT for <240v
AC input
HT for >380v
AC input
raphe cannot function normally with
the SEL wire in this position.
TABLE 1 - POSITION OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARD IN2 AND SEL WIRE
Nominal single- Position of IN2 Position of SEL wire

phase line voltage
415 V HT 415 V
380 V HT 380 V
240 V BT 240 V
220 V BT 220 V
208 V BT 208 V
200 V BT 200 V
440 V Use transformer reference 45563370

and 380 V configuration.
480 V

ist008.fm
5-4. Configure fuses F1, F2.

To configure these fuses (see Illustration 1 for location), follow the indications on the label located on the
bottom of the generator cabinet, just below the AC supply switch S1.
WARNING
FOR SAFE OPERATION OF THE SENOGRAPHE, PAY PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE
INFORMATION ON THIS LABEL.
DETERMINE WHETHER THE AC SUPPLY CONSISTS OF TWO PHASES OF A THREE–

PHASE SYSTEM, OR A SINGLE PHASE AND NEUTRAL.
WHEN THE SUPPLY IS SINGLE–PHASE WITH NEUTRAL, A METAL CYLINDER (delivered

with the system) MUST BE INSTALLED INSTEAD OF F1.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - LOCATION OF FUSES

ist008.fm
5-5. Connecting the AC supply cable.

1. Verify that generator AC supply Switch 200-S1 is in the 0 position and that AC supply is OFF.
2. Connect the AC line and neutral wires to the L & N terminals and the ground wire to the yellow/green
terminal as shown in illustration 2.
3. Cable-tie the cable to the lower cross-member of the cabinet, using the holes provided in the cross–
member.
4. Route and connect the other end of the supply cable to the AC supply source.
ILLUSTRATION 2 - CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY CABLE
AC supply cable
200 PL1
HV tank
701
200 PL4
200 PL2

ist008.fm
This page is blank.

ist008.fm
Job Card IST 009 - First System Power On
Job Card IST 009 - First System Power On Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
None
None
4. PREREQUISITES
• The installed components (ADS, IDC, Conditioner, etc.) must be in a safe state, ready to receive
power, and all of their power switches must be set to ON.
• The instructions given in Job Card CFG 004 - Check Supply Voltages on page 137 must have been
carried out to ensure that the Generator and Mains Distribution Rack power supplies have been cor-
rectly configured.
• The detector cooling circuit must have been filled with coolant and checked for leaks (refer to Job
Card IST 019 - Conditioner Coolant Installation on page 117, and carry out the instructions given for
Coolant Fill).
5. FIRST POWER ON
After installation of the system, it must be powered up before installing options or configuring the system.
CAUTION
When you are ready to apply power to the Senographe 2000 D system for the first time,
carry out the following steps:
Note:
If any problem is encountered during the first power up, refer to the checklists for power up/down
given in the Job Card VF 001 - Boot/Init and Shutdown on page 257.
1. Set the Main Distribution Rack (MDR) and Generator breakers to ON.
2. Set the circuit breaker connecting the hospital supply to the Senographe 2000 D system to ON.
3. Set the two circuit breakers in the Generator Cabinet (one in the Generator Rack, the other in the
Main Distribution Rack) to ON
4. To power up the system, press the power switch [I] on the X-ray Console. Power is applied to the
whole system (Generator, Gantry, Cart, Digital Detector, etc.); green power indicators are lit on the X-
ray console, the Generator Cabinet, the Cart, and the monitor.
If the screen is still blank after about 30 seconds, check that the monitor is switched on (the green
LED should be lit).
5. A series of system initialization messages appears on the screen, then the Login: prompt is dis-
played. Type sdc (all lower case) followed by <Enter>. When the Password prompt appears, type
adw3.1<Enter>. The AWS Browser should be displayed after a short delay.
When the system has been successfully powered up, it must be powered down ready for the next steps
in the installation process.

ist009.fm
Job Card IST 009 - First System Power On
Follow the normal shutdown procedure described below.
6. POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM

• Normal Shutdown Procedure:
In order to power off the system, push the button on the ADS Browser; a pop-up is displayed.
Click OK in order to shut down the system. Wait for complete system and UPS shut down (about two
minutes); check that no LEDs remain lit on the UPS before continuing.
• To power down the Gantry and Generator system only, press the power switch [0] on the X-ray Con-
sole.
• NEVER switch off at the UPS directly except in emergency (risk of data loss).

ist009.fm
Job Card IST 010 - Line Resistance Measurement
Job Card IST 010 - Line Resistance Measurement Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Voltmeter (a.c.)
3. SAFETY PROCEDURES
During the procedures in this Job Card, you will be in close proximity to circuits operating at line voltage
- take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order given in Job Card IST 001 - Installation Steering Guide on page
39.
Note:
Make sure the X-ray console is connected to the generator.
5. PROCEDURE
If the resistance at the line input to the Senographe generator is too high, there will be a significant volt-
age drop when the generator draws maximum power. This procedure checks that the resistance is within
acceptable limits.
5-1. Preparation
1. Switch off the system; set the generator power switch 200-S1 to the 0 position.
2. Disconnect voltage selection wire SEL from its lug on the generator board 200-PL1; reconnect it to
the 0 V lug.
Notice:
The 0 V position of the SEL wire is reserved exclusively for this line resistance measurement. The
Senographe cannot function normally when the SEL wire is in this position. Do not attempt to
switch on the Senographe at this point - follow the instructions below.
3. Connect the ac voltmeter to the input end of the power switch 200-S1; Note and write down the
observed value of the open-circuit line voltage V1:
V1 =......................................
5-2. Procedure
1. Turn the AC supply on: set the generator switch 200-S1 to the 1 position.
Note:
Read the next step completely before performing it. You will have only 3 seconds to read the volt-
meter; if you miss the reading you will have to wait about 15 minutes to repeat it.
2. While looking at the voltmeter, press the power-on switch on the generator board 200-PL2. During a
period of three seconds, a resistive load (power resistors R1 and R4 on the generator board) is con-
nected across the line input, causing a drop in the voltage reading on the voltmeter. Note and write

ist010.fm
Job Card IST 010 - Line Resistance Measurement
down this closed circuit voltage:
V2 = ....................................
Note:
After this three-second period the red LED DE3 on the generator board light, indicating that heating
of the resistive load prevents an immediate repeat reading. After about 15 minutes, the LED goes
out, the reading can then be repeated if necessary.
3. Calculate line resistance RL according to the formula:
RL = [(V1 - V2) / V2] RINT
where RINT, the internal resistive load, depends on the nominal a.c. supply voltage V:
Voltage (V) RINT (Ω)
200 11
208 11
220 11
240 11
380 44
415 44
4. Turn off the Senographe: set the generator power switch to the 0 position and switch off AC power.
5. Disconnect the line voltage selection wire SEL from the 0 V lug on the generator board; reconnect it
to the lug corresponding to the nominal (not measured) AC line voltage. Tighten the lug nuts to a
torque setting of 4 Nm.
Check that the calculated line resistance RL does not exceed the maximum value given in Table 1 for
the nominal a.c. supply voltage.
If the calculated value exceeds the maximum value given in Table 1, consult with the hospital electri-
cal department and your OLC. The problem must be resolved before the Senographe 2000 D system
is put into service.
TABLE 1 - MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE LINE RESISTANCE
Nominal AC voltage Maximum Line Resistance
415 V 1.19
380 V 1.00
240 V 0.40
220 V 0.34
208V 0.30
200V 0.28

ist010.fm
Job Card IST 011 - Set Elevator Upper Travel Limit
Job Card IST 011 - Set Elevator Upper Travel Limit Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None.
2. TOOLS
• Screwdriver 4mm.
• Allen wrench 2.5mm.
3. SAFETY PRECAUTION
• No specific safety precautions are applicable.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. SET ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT

5-1. Preparation
1. Measure room overall height, floor to ceiling.
2. Remove left cover from column housing (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
5-2. Determine optical sensor position

Determine the position of the optical sensor as follows:
1. Ceiling height 2.5m (8.22ft.) or greater:
- Install the optical sensor in the upper mounting hole (1 in Illust.1).
Note:
The Senographe is delivered with the optical sensor installed in this position.
2. Ceiling height 2.4m (7.9ft.) or greater, but less than 2.5m (8.22ft.):
- Install the optical sensor in the middle mounting hole (2 in Illust.1).
3. Ceiling height 2.3m (7.5ft.) or greater, but less than 2.4m (7.9ft.):
- Install the optical sensor in the lower mounting hole (3 in Illust. 1).
4. Ceiling height less than 2.3m (7.5ft.):
- In this case, the Senographe cannot be installed without special modification.
Note:
The adjustment of the metal plate which blanks off the upper and lower sensors only affects the
elevator lower travel limit.
5-3. Reposition the optical sensor (if required)

1. Remove the tyraps on the cable connected to the optical sensor.
2. Remove the two 2.5mm Allen screws securing the sensor.
3. Remove the optical sensor and reinstall it in its new position, as determined in 5.2 above.
4. Reinstall and tighten the two 2.5mm Allen screws, in the new position.
5. Reinstall tyraps on the sensor cable, as required.

ist011.fm
Job Card IST 011 - Set Elevator Upper Travel Limit
6. Switch on the Senographe. Carry out a column raising and lowering test and check that the tube
housing cover does not collide with the ceiling (check for a minimum safety clearance of at least
80 mm to 90 mm).
ILLUSTRATION 1 - OPTICAL SENSOR POSITIONS
1
1
POSITIONS FOR 2
2 UPPER OPTICAL
SENSOR
3
3
COLUMN FRONT VIEW

ist011.fm
Job Card IST 012 - Regulatory and Safety Labelling
Job Card IST 012 - Regulatory and Safety Labelling Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
• Regulatory product identification labels for the Generator, Gantry, and AWS Cart (supplied in the
installation kit).
• Safety labels for the X-ray Console (supplied with the X-ray Console).
2. TOOLS
None
Notice:
The attachment of appropriate regulatory and safety labelling to the equipment is a LEGAL RE-
QUIREMENT for operation of an X-ray producing unit.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. REGULATORY LABELLING ON GANTRY, GENERATOR, AND CART

• The objective is to select and attach appropriate regulatory product identification labels in the local
national language to the Senographe Gantry and Generator and the AWS Cart. This is done by affix-
ing the specific national language labels over the existing labels in English.
Note:
If the local national language is English, skip this section and proceed to section 6.
To affix product identification labels in the local national language proceed as follows:
1. In the emergency maintenance kit, locate the four small plastic bags containing labels in various lan-
guages.
2. In each of the four bags, select the label in the local national language.
3. At the bottom of the Gantry column, locate the product identification label.
Affix one of the smaller national language labels over the English label.
4. At the bottom of the Generator cabinet, locate the two product identification labels.
Affix one of the smaller national language labels over the corresponding English label.
Affix one of the larger national language labels over the corresponding English label.
5. At the bottom rear of the AWS Cart, locate the product identification label.
Affix the remaining larger national language label over the English label.
6. SAFETY LABELLING ON X-RAY CONSOLE

• The objective is to select and attach appropriate safety labels to the X-ray Console, according to local
safety regulations concerning the use of X-ray producing equipment.
• Locate and open the safety label envelope taped underneath the X-ray console. It contains two radi-
ation warning labels and a surface hygiene warning label.

ist012.fm
6-1. Radiation Warning Labels

• Identify the radiation warning labels illustrated below; select the one that corresponds to local regula-
tions.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - SAFETY LABELS
CEI (EUROPE) & ASIA
REDAC (CANADA)
CDRH (USA)
Note:
The CEI warning symbols are already screen-printed on the X-ray console.
• If one of the other warning labels is required, peel off the self-adhesive backing from the selected
label and affix it over the CEI warning symbols in the lower right or upper right corner of the X-ray
console (according to the type of X-ray console provided), as shown below:
Affix label here

ist012.fm
6-2. Surface Hygiene label (for US only)

1. If your installation is in the USA, locate the surface hygiene label, similar to that shown below.
CAUTION: Patient contact surfaces should be cleaned and disinfected between patients
2. Peel off the self-adhesive backing from the label, and affix the label in the center of the upper part of
the X-ray console, as shown below.
Affix label here

ist012.fm
This page is blank.

ist012.fm
Job Card IST 013 - Room Lamps and Door Configuration
Job Card IST 013 - Room Lamps and Door Configuration Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
• The necessary hardware (wires, lamp, switches, etc.) is field and/or customer supplied.
2. TOOLS
• None.
• None.
4. PREREQUISITES
• None.
5. PROCEDURE
1. Refer to Illustration 1; connect the room and lamp wiring to XJ1, XJ2, XJ3 on the 200PL4 board (see
Illustration 2 for locations).
2. Route the wires in the generator cabinet, along with the mains supply cable.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - ROOM LAMPS AND DOOR WIRING
DMR+ GENERATOR CUSTOMER-SUPPLIED HARDWARE
AC or DC
Board 30 V max
200PL4 Seno ON lamp
K1 XJ1
AC or DC
30 V max
K2 XJ2 X-ray ON lamp
K3
XJ3 ~
Room door switch 24v
(external power
Note:
The load current ratings of the relays K1 and K2 on 200-PL4 are 5A/30 VDC
Relay K3 must be supplied with 24 V ac.

ist013.fm
3. Locate board 400-PL1. Refer illustration 3; and set jumpers JP1 and JP2 as required according to the
table below. Place unused jumpers in the parking positions JP3 and JP4.
Note:
If there is no door switch, jumpers JP1 and JP2 should both be present (case 4 in the table).
TABLE 1 - JP1 AND JP2 JUMPER SETTINGS
JP1 JP2 Door closed Door opened
(PREP) (RADIOGRAPHY)
1 0 0 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY PREP and RADIOGRAPHY
enabled disabled
enabled disabled.
NOTE: if the door opens during
an exposure, the exposure is
NOT aborted and completes nor-
mally)
3 1 0 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY PREP enabled
enabled RADIOGRAPHY disabled
enabled enabled
0 = No jumper
1 = Jumper present
Note:
When the room door switch is present and configured for use, the signals valid-PR (1st trigger or
prep) and valid-GR (RADIOGRAPHY) are enabled through the switch.

ist013.fm
ILLUSTRATION 2 - LOCATION OF ROOM WIRING CONNECTORS
XJ1 Room
XJ2 lamps
and door
XJ3 wiring
200 PL4
ILLUSTRATION 3 - LOCATION OF JP1 TO JP4

ist013.fm
This page is blank.

ist013.fm
Job Card IST 014 - Automatic X-ray Tube Warm-Up
Job Card IST 014 - Automatic X-ray Tube Warm-Up Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
None
CAUTION
These procedures produce X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
This procedure should only be used when the performance of Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater
Current on page 199 has been impossible due to excessive arcing.
5. PROCEDURE
This procedure is to be used for re-starting an X-ray tube which was known to be good upon leaving the
factory, but now exhibits arcing after a long period of inactivity.
The principle is to take a series of 12 pre-determined exposures, starting at low kV values and progres-
sively increasing towards high kV values. If arcing occurs during an exposure, some or all exposures are
automatically repeated. If persistent arcing occurs, the warm-up procedure is automatically terminated.
Proceed as follows:
4. Start from application mode. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on
generator CPU board 400-PL3).
Note:
This must only be done if the Senographe has been switched off since the last access to SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL.
5. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/WarmUp on the X-ray console. The track/kV
combination for the first exposure should appear on the X-ray console display.
6. Press the 2nd trigger button and HOLD IT DOWN while the exposures are taken.
Note:
There is a time delay of 10 seconds between exposures. You can release the 2nd trigger button
during this 10 second period, then press it again to continue, but the minimum time between ex-
posures will still be 10 seconds. If the tube overheats at some point, exposures will be inhibited
until it cools down again. During the cooling period, the 2nd trigger button can be released; as soon
as the display shows that the X-ray tube has sufficiently cooled, press the 2nd trigger button to con-
tinue.
7. When the warm-up procedure is finished, the message Tube OK normally appears on the X-ray con-
sole display. If persistent arcing occurred during the procedures, the message Too many spits
appears on the X-ray console display.

ist014.fm
Job Card IST 014 - Automatic X-ray Tube Warm-Up
This page is blank.

ist014.fm
Job Card IST 015 - Installation of the CD-R writer (option)
Job Card IST 015 - Installation of the CD-R writer (option) Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
CD-R (CD-ROM Writer) unit.
2. TOOLS
• Allen keys (metric).
None
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Configure the CD-R unit
5-1-1. Yamaha CD-R unit
For Yamaha brand CD-R unit only:
Two switches at the rear of the Yamaha CD-R unit must be configured before installation. The correct
configuration is:
• Terminator switch: "ON".
• CDR-ID: "2".
5-1-2. Current models
• Check that the SCSI ID switch (Item 1 of illustration) is set to 2. If necessary, change the setting up or
down by inserting a small flat screwdriver or similar tool into one of the two slots above and below the
switch.

ist015-OC.fm
5-1-3. Earlier models

On the rear panel of earlier models there is a set of ON-OFF DIP switches beside a rotary SCSI ID
switch. Set the rear panel switches as follows:
• Power switch to ON (I).
• SCSI switch to 2.
PRTY
• DIP switches:
TERM
1. Parity (PRTY): ON
TEST
2. Terminator (TERM): ON BLOCK
3. Test (TEST): OFF
4. Block Size (BLOCK):
SCSI switch DIP switches
- If AWS version is 17.2.3 or earlier, BLOCK:
"ON"
- If AWS version is 17.2.10 or later, BLOCK: "OFF"
5. Not used.
5-2. Install and connect the CD-ROM Writer

1. Power OFF the system.
2. Remove cart rear cover (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
3. Locate the equipment tray second from top (i.e., under the AWS tray); remove the screw which
secures it to the Cart left upright.
4. Disconnect the ground wire from the terminal at the right of the tray.
5. Pull out the tray and place the CD-R unit on it, facing to your left.
6. Connect the SCSI cable (supplied with the CD-R unit) between the AWS SCSI connector and the
CD-R SCSI connector identified as follows:
• For Yamaha CD-R: "SCSI 1"
• For Plextor CD-R: 1
- For current models: Item 1 of illustra-
tion
- For earlier models: "SCSI-IN"
7. Locate an unused AC power supply cable (connected to the UPS) and plug it into the CD-R AC
power input socket.
8. Push the tray into its normal position, with the CD-R unit placed so that it is accessible through the
lower sliding hatch on the right of the cart (viewed from the front).
9. Reinstall the tray securing screw and the ground wire.
10. Set the switch on the front face of the CD-R unit to ON.
11. Power up the system, and check that the CD-R unit LEDs are lit.

ist015-OC.fm
5-3. Software installation

A software procedure must be run in order to declare the presence of the CD-R writer to the AWS. Pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Open a command window (right-click on screen background and select Service Tools/Command
Window).
2. Type: reboot -- -r <Return> (type: reboot, space, dash space, dash, r)
3. The workstation automatically restarts and goes to the login: prompt. Log in as sdc with adw3.1 as
password; wait until the station is correctly initialized
4. Open a command window.
5. Type:
su - <Return> followed by root password operator
cd ~sdc/install <Return>
install.cdr [cdr_key] <Return> (where [cdr_key] is the CD-R software key and is used for
U10 workstation only)
6. You will see a message CDR OPTION SUCCESSFULLY INSTALLED
7. Type again: reboot -- -r <Return> (type: reboot, space, dash space, dash, r)
The CD-R unit is now installed.
5-4. Verification of the installation

• A new icon CD-R writer should be visible in the upper left corner of the browser window.
• Insert a blank CD-ROM in the unit and write a test image on it.
5-5. Error actions

If a problem is encountered after the installation (either the message CDR OPTION SUCCESSFULLY
INSTALLED does not appear, or the verification of the installation fails), proceed as follows:
For AWS version 17.2.3 or earlier:

1. Open a command window
2. Type:
cd ~sdc/install <Return>
uninstall.cdr <Return>
For all AWS versions:

3. Check connections and configuration and repeat the software installation procedure (section 5-3).

ist015-OC.fm
This page is blank.

ist015-OC.fm
Job Card IST 016 - Modem installation
Job Card IST 016 - Modem installation Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
Modem
2. TOOLS
None.
None
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. PROCEDURE
1. Power OFF the system.
2. Remove the cart rear cover (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
3. Refer to the illustrations. Route modem cables to the
View on rear of cart
modem in its position on the shelf below the AWS. The
modem should be installed with the LEDs on the front
face visible from the rear of the cart: AWS
- Connect the lead marked Modem from the telephone Serial A
socket at the rear of the cart to the modem RJ-11
LINE socket; use an adaptor (RJ45/RJ11) if required.
Modem
The PHONE socket is not used.
AC adaptor
- Connect the modem serial cable from the AWS serial
port A (25-pin female connector on the AWS) to the
25-pin RS232 connector on the modem. IDC
- Plug the modem AC adaptor input lead into the UPS
output power strip. Connect its output to the POWER
input on the modem.
4. Secure the modem and AC adaptor in their positions
using the Velcro pads and straps supplied, and use tie-
UPS power out
wraps to secure the cables as necessary.

UPS
View on rear of Multitech modem Telephone connectors
POWER RS232 PHONE LINE

Ist016.fm
Job Card IST 016 - Modem installation
This page is blank.

Ist016.fm
Job Card IST 017 - Image Receptor Assembly/Unpacking
Job Card IST 017 - Image Receptor Assembly/Unpacking Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
Required if the Image Receptor is not pre-installed:
• Image receptor 2224137.
• Compression arm central cover (plate with 2 rails).
• Screw kit for image receptor assembly:
Name Reference Quantity Used for:
Screw CHC 6x25 2185581-7 4 Attaching the image receptor to the gantry column
Nut 1
Washer AZ5 99132748 2
Screw CHC5x10/10 99137572 1 Connecting the image receptor
Screw TF 4x12 99107110 2
Screw CHC5x50 99030316 2
Stove bolt 4x10 99116465 2
Attaching cover assemblies – lateral covers
White caps 45559940 2
2. TOOLS
• Standard service toolkit.
Power to the Gantry should be OFF before beginning the procedure.
4. PRE-REQUISITES
• The Gantry has been moved to its final position, and secured to the floor if required.
• All procedures likely to require movement and disturbance in the area of the Tube and Image Recep-
tor have been completed.
• Physical installation, inter-connection and a.c. connection of the Gantry, Generator Cabinet, and
AWS Cart have been successfully completed.

ist017.fm
5. PROCEDURE - UNPACKING A PRE-INSTALLED IMAGE RECEPTOR

Notice:
If the Image Receptor has been pre-installed, its packing must be removed before any movement
of Gantry components (tube arm rotation, etc.).
Do not do this before:
• The Gantry has been moved to its final position, and secured to the floor if required.
• All procedures likely to require movement and disturbance in the area of the Tube and Image
Receptor have been completed.
When these conditions have been met:
• Carefully remove the packing from the Image Receptor
.
6. PROCEDURE - IMAGE RECEPTOR INSTALLATION

Note:
If the system is delivered with the image receptor not installed, it is shipped in a separate box with
additional thermal protection. The Senographe 2000D system is assembled and calibrated as usu-
al on the manufacturing line; the image receptor is then disconnected from the system and pack-
aged separately.
If the Image Receptor is not pre-installed, install it after:
• The Gantry has been moved to its final position, and secured to the floor if required.)
• All procedures likely to require movement and disturbance in the area of the Tube and Image
Receptor have been completed.
6-1. Remove the front column lateral covers

• Remove both compression arm lateral covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page
539).
6-2. Unpack the image receptor

• Open the image receptor case and remove all packaging.
• Take the image receptor out of its plastic covering and place it carefully on a stable stand.

ist017.fm
6-3. Attach the image receptor to the gantry column

Notice:
The procedure requires the tube arm to be rotated for ac-
cess to locating screws behind the gantry
EITHER: Power the Gantry ON when the tube is to be
rotated, so that the arm can be turned in the normal way.
If this is done, it must be powered OFF again before A
making electrical connections.
OR: Use a screwdriver to release the arm locking pin
(A) while moving the arm.
CAUTION
The image receptor is heavy. Two people are

required to install it.
1. Rotate the tube to the right (see note above), to allow B

access behind the left of the gantry.
2. Remove the four securing screws from the detector.
3. Identify the two alignment pins (B) in the gantry column.
4. Carefully insert the image receptor into its alignment pins.
WARNING
WARNING: Take care not to pinch the cables behind
the image receptor.
5. While one person continues to support the image receptor

(C) in position, the other inserts two of the detector securing
screws (D) at the rear of the image receptor. Do not tighten
them completely. C
6. Rotate the tube to the left to allow access behind the right of
the gantry.
7. Insert the other two detector securing screws at the rear

right of the image receptor, but do not tighten them com-
pletely.
8. Rotate the tube to the right again; tighten the screws. D
9. Rotate the tube to the left again; tighten the screws.

ist017.fm
6-4. Make electrical connections

Notice:
It is important that electrical connections are made before connecting the cooling pipes. This is to
minimize any risk of coolant spill onto electrical connectors, which can result in corrosion damage.
1. Locate the bucky connector plate (C) on the end of a

cable descending through the gantry. Remove its
protection, and insert it in the corresponding holes of
the image receptor interconnection plate (D).
E
2. Secure it to the image receptor with two screws (E).
C
3. Remove the protection from the set of image receptor cables and pipes. This includes two water
pipes, two air pipes, two optical fiber cables, and the power supply connector.
4. Connect one end of the ground cable 2248904 to the

G
stud located at the rear of the image receptor connector
panel, using a washer and a nut (F).
5. Connect the other end of this ground cable, and the

ground cable 45559796 (included in the gantry cables),
to the receptor metal chassis (G), using a screw and a
washer.
6. Plug the power supply connector into its socket (H) at the
front of the image receptor connector panel and secure it
by tightening the two screws.
F H

ist017.fm
6-5. Make air, water, and optical connections

1. Connect the fiber-optic cables to their connectors (H) on the image receptor connector panel.
Note: one of these cables is marked with the letter L. Connect the other, unmarked cable to the con-
nector colored red (see sketch).
2. If Dryerless Conditioner P/N 2210405-15 (FRU P/N 2387548), do not connect the air pipes. If Condi-
tioner with Dryer, P/N 2210405-11 (FRU P/N 2386318) or P/N 2210405-14 (FRU P/N 2390024), con-
nect the air pipes to the smaller pair of connectors (J). The order is not important.
3. Connect the water pipes to the larger pair of connectors (K). The order is not important.
CAUTION
If any coolant is spilled, it must be cleaned up immediately.

K
Fiber-optic cable marked L
Red marker
J H

ist017.fm
6-6. Assembling the covers

Note:
You may choose to perform the cover installation at this point, or leave the arm uncovered and put
all the covers on at the end of the installation.
6-6-1. Central cover

Notice:
This cover is delicate, take care when installing it.
1. Remove the paddle and turn the arm to the right until it reaches the horizontal position.
2. Move the paddle support as close as possible to the tube.
3. Slide the central cover,under the paddle support until it clears the top of the image receptor.
4. Slide it back into position behind the image receptor.:
1 2
5. Connect the ground cable to the cen-

tral cover using pliers:
6. Move the paddle support to the mid position to keep the central
cover in position while preparing to install the lateral covers

ist017.fm
6-6-2. Lateral covers

Install both compression arm lateral covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
6-6-3. Check the central cover assembly

Push with your finger on different points of the central cover.
It should remain in place and not move towards the back of the col-
umn. If this is not the case, the three covers are not well assembled;
they must be removed and re-installed, taking care to use the lateral
cover guides.

ist017.fm
This page is blank.

ist017.fm
Job Card IST 018 - Bar Code Scanner (Option)
Job Card IST 018 - Bar Code Scanner (Option) Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
Two Bar Code Scanners and connecting cables can be supplied:
• For Seno 2000D equipped with an AWS station U10 type, use p/n 2258242 or 2393998 (configura-
tion A).
• For Seno 2000D equipped with an AWS station SB150 type, use p/n 2407693 (configuration B).
2. TOOLS
None
None
4. PRE-REQUISITES
The system must have been correctly installed and normal application software must be operational.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Introduction
The bar code scanner is a fast and accurate tool for scanning bar code symbols in AWS applications. It
allows patient information to be entered rapidly and accurately.
Available with an 80mm CCD scanning window and an integrated keyboard decoder, the scanner cap-
tures an entire bar code symbol instantly. The integrated decoder then transmits the data to the AWS
workstation just as if the data were entered from the AWS keyboard.
Supported bar code types are:
- Code 3 of 9 (standard & full-ASCII).
- EAN 13.
- Code 128.

ist018.fm
5-2. Configuration A: Installation for ADS Station Type U10

Follow the procedure in this section for ADS station type U10 (bar code scanner p/n 2258242 or
2393998).
Refer to the connection diagram below when connecting the bar code scanner:
bar code
scanner
RJ45
DIN8F
DIN8M
AWS Workstation
DIN8M
Keyboard
1. Power down the AWS workstation (if not, unplugging the keyboard may crash the ADS).
2. Unplug the keyboard cable from the AWS workstation rear panel.
3. Withdraw the keyboard cable from the cart and lift the keyboard from its normal position.
4. Pass the DIN 8-pin male branch of the scanner Y-cable to the AWS workstation, following the path of
the removed keyboard cable.
5. Connect the DIN 8-pin male connector to the keyboard connector on the workstation rear panel.
6. Connect the RJ45 connector on the long branch of the Y-cable to the bar code scanner handle con-
nector.
7. Connect the keyboard cable to the DIN 8-pin female connector on the Y- cable.
8. After checking the security of cable connections, route the keyboard cable and connectors inside the
cart, with the scanner cable exiting in a convenient position for use. Replace the keyboard in its nor-
mal position.
5-2-1. Check Installation
• Before trying to use the scanner, make sure that all cable connections are secure.
• Power up the AWS workstation and wait until the login banner is displayed.
5-2-2. Scan a bar code symbol
1. Hold the scanner handle horizontally directly over the bar code printed below.

ist018.fm
2. Press the scanner trigger located below the scanner handle; the scanner red LED beam lights. The
scanner has successfully scanned the symbol if:
- You hear a beep.
- The LED beam turns off.
- The handle light turns red.
5-2-3. Set default configuration
Use the scanner to scan the symbols below in the order given to activate the scanner and decoder
default configuration. Refer to the scanner documentation and/or the AWS operator manual to activate
other functions if necessary.
1. Reset the bar code scanner to factory settings. After scanning, wait until you hear 3 beeps:.
Start Settings (2 beeps):
Full ASCII: allow extended Code 39 128 characters transmission:
Extended Full ASCII: allow Function keys transmission on two characters:
Enables Keyboard/Display Model setting:
Enter 719 for QWERTY SUN Type 5/6 keyboard:

ist018.fm
Back to CAP LOCK OFFF after transmision:
No character sent after transmission (default is CR):
End Settings (2 beeps):.
Go directly to Section 5-4 to complete a Medical Procedure Card.
5-3. Configuration B: Installation for ADS Station Type SB150

Follow the procedure in this section for ADS station type SB150 (bar code scanner p/n 2407693).
Refer to the connection diagram below when connecting the bar code scanner:
ADS SB150
station Respect the connection’s configuration
as shown below
USB-pin male connectors
Keyboard
Bar Code Scanner
Mouse
1. Power down the AWS workstation (if not, unplugging the keyboard may crash the ADS).
2. Connect the USB-pin male connector of the Code Bar Scanner cable to the USB connector of AWS
workstation rear panel as shown in the picture above.
3. After checking the security of cable connections, route the Scanner cable and connectors inside the
cart in a convenient position for use.

ist018.fm
5-3-1. Check Installation

• Before trying to use the scanner, make sure that all cable connections are secure.
• Power up the AWS workstation and wait until the login banner is displayed.
• You will hear a beep from the Bar Code Scanner.
5-3-2. Scan a bar code symbol
1. Hold the scanner handle horizontally directly over the bar code printed below.
2. Press the scanner trigger located below the scanner handle; the scanner red LED beam lights. The
scanner has successfully scanned the symbol if:
- You hear a beep.
- The LED beam turns off.
5-3-3. Set default configuration
Use the scanner to scan the symbols below in the order given to activate the scanner and decoder
default configuration. Refer to the scanner documentation and/or the AWS operator manual to activate
other functions if necessary.
1. Reset the bar code scanner to factory settings. After scanning, wait until you hear a beep:
2. Set language to English:

Start Language setting:
Language is English:
3. Save settings:
4. End settings (2 beeps).

Go directly to Section 5-4 to complete a Medical Procedure Card.

ist018.fm
5-4. Complete a Medical Procedure Card (Configurations A and B)

Perform the following procedure to check for correct installation and configuration of the scanner.
1. Login as sdc on the AWS:
Login: sdc <Return>
Password: adw3.1 <Return> (factory loaded default sdc password)
2. Wait until AWS application has started.
3. Request a new exposure and open the Medical Procedure Card (MPC).
4. Click the first text input field Last Name with the left mouse button to set the keyboard focus.
5. Complete the MPC by scanning all the symbols given on the following page in order, scanning left-to-
right/top-down. As the MPC user interface may change from one AWS release to another, the layout
and entries given in these symbols are templates only: field values are not meaningful and can have
any value. To go to (change focus to) the next input field, scan the $I bar code symbol.
6. On completion, the Medical Procedure Card should appear as shown below:

ist018.fm
Enter manually a date.

ist018.fm
5-5. What If…

• If nothing happens when you follow the operating instructions:
- Check the system power.
- Check for loose cable connections.
• If the scanner does not scan a bar code symbol:
- Be sure that the scanning system is programmed to scan the type of bar code you are trying to
scan. Refer to Section 5-2-3 for default setting of Configuration A, and Section 5-3-3 for default
setting of Configuration B.
- Check that the bar code symbol is not defaced.
- The scan head must touch and cover every bar and space on the symbol as shown below. You
can tilt the scanner forward or backward to achieve a successful decode. Simple practice quickly
shows what tolerances to work within.
Right Wrong
• If the AWS workstation returns to displaying the monitor ok prompt:

- Connecting/disconnecting or resetting the bar code scanner may cause the workstation to go
back to the SUN monitor ok prompt. Type the go command to return to the normal working mode.
- If necessary, refresh the screen using the appropriate root window menu option.

ist018.fm
Job Card IST 019 - Conditioner Coolant Installation
Job Card IST 019 - Conditioner Coolant Installation Chapter 3
1. SUPPLIES
Cooling liquid kit (refer to the Generator and Conditioner Cabinet section of the Renewal Parts List for
part number) including:
- Coolant for conditioner.
- Funnel.
- Safety goggles.
- Purge tool 2249359 (short length of coolant pipe with connector).
- Empty container labelled Empty.
- Gloves.
- Documentation (INS type).
2. TOOLS
• Small flat screwdriver.
• When filling the Conditioner, take great care to keep coolant away from the vents, the ON/OFF switch
and the power cord connection. Do not immerse the Conditioner in any liquid.
• Dispose of surplus coolant with care as described in the section Surplus Coolant Disposal; refer to
the Caution below.
CAUTION
• Before adding coolant to the Conditioner, always switch OFF the Generator and MDR cir-
cuit breakers in the Generator Cabinet. Switch on the MDR breaker only as instructed.
• Always use a funnel when adding coolant to the Conditioner.
• Always wear goggles when working with the coolant.
• The coolant provided for filling the Conditioner circuit is water protected by a fungicide.
In its undiluted form this fungicide is toxic, but in the solution provided it is very dilute,
and is not dangerous to health if handled correctly. Waste solution in the concentration
used will not cause pollution if disposed of in a non-sensitive environment.
• However, when handling the solution you should treat it with care; avoid unnecessary
contact and wear goggles. See below for First Aid advice.
First Aid in case of contact with Conditioner coolant:
Immediately flush eyes or skin with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes.
If coolant contacts the eye, call a physician immediately.
If coolant is swallowed, drink one to two glasses of water or milk. Avoid alcohol. Call a physician
immediately.
Remove and wash contaminated clothing before reuse.

ist019.fm
Job Card IST 019 - Conditioner Coolant Installation
4. PRE-REQUISITES
The system must have been correctly installed and normal application software must be operational. In
particular, the sequence given in section 5 of Job Card IST 009 - First System Power On on page 79
must be followed.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Coolant Installation
A document describing an alternate procedure is provided in the coolant kit. For maximum safety and
minimum risk of spillage during coolant installation, we recommend using the procedure given below:
1. Check that all hoses are correctly connected.

MDR Breaker
2. Remove the reservoir cap, then slowly add liquid
from the container for the conditioner to the reservoir
until the liquid reaches the bottom of the cap
ON/OFF
threads. The total capacity of the cooling circuit is push buttons:
approximately 500 ml (1 pint). Conditioner
and Conditioner
3. Set the MDR and generator breakers to OFF.
MDR
4. Set the circuit breaker connecting the hospital to the Detector supply
Senographe 2000 D system to ON.
Cart
5. Switch on the unit (switch ON the MDR circuit
breaker and press the Conditioner ON button in the UPS
generator cabinet).
6. As the coolant circulates and air bubbles are flushed
Generator
from the coolant circuit, the coolant level falls. Add
liquid as necessary until the level is steady at the
bottom of the cap threads.
Generator
7. Replace the reservoir cap when you are satisfied Breaker
that the level is correct.
5-2. Surplus Coolant Disposal

• In a normal non-sensitive environment, surplus coolant may be disposed of by pouring down a drain.
• Triple-rinse containers before placing them in appropriate waste receptacles.

ist019.fm
CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION
This chapter contains information for configuration of the Senographe 2000 D, including a description of
basic functions available from the X-ray Console.

Config.fm
This page is blank.

Config.fm
Job Card CFG 001 - The X-ray Console
Job Card CFG 001 - The X-ray Console Chapter 4
1. INTRODUCTION
• This Job Card provides an introduction to use of the X-ray Console, its menu structure, etc.
Two types of X-ray console exist, as illustrated below. Although their appearance is different, the lay-
out and operation of the various displays and controls are identical.
kV mAs
2. HOW TO USE THE X-RAY CONSOLE

2-1. Basic functions
X-ray Console functions for the normal application are described in the Operator Manual; other operating
modes are summarized below.
• Access to functions. Press one of the X-ray console function keys to select a displayed function or
menu choice, which in turn may display a new set of menu selections. Continue selection until the
required function is displayed.
• Exit. To go up (back) one level in the menu structure, press the SETUP key on the X-ray console
once.
• Selection functions. These functions require simple selection of a menu choice from a display of
options or values; confirm the choice by selecting VALID.
• Modification functions. These functions allow a displayed value or parameter to be changed by rota-
tion of the X-ray console kV knob. When the required value or parameter is displayed, confirm the

cfg001.fm
selection by selecting VALID.

• Calibration functions. Some calibration functions require the 2nd trigger button to be pressed in order
to perform the calibration.
WARNING
NEVER modify a Senographe 2000 D parameter value that has already been calibrated
unless you have a specific reason. If you do, it will usually be necessary to enter the
default parameter value and completely re-calibrate the generator or gantry for the
affected parameter(s).
2-2. Application and Installation modes

Throughout the service documentation, reference is made to application mode and installation mode.
• Application mode. The normal operating mode; the Gantry enters application mode when it is pow-
ered up, regardless of previous settings. In application mode, the six function keys below the display
window carry out the functions indicated by their symbols (focal spot, track, filter, etc.).
For information on using the X-ray console in application mode, refer to the Operator Manual.
• Installation mode. Provides special setup functions. To enter or leave installation mode, press the
SETUP key on the X-ray console once.
In installation mode, the six function keys below the display window carry out functions or menu
selections which depend on the current procedure. The choice is indicated by a label displayed
above the key. The illustration below shows typical X-ray console displays before (left) and after
(right) entering installation mode. The normal key symbols (shown shaded) no longer apply, and in
the example shown two of the keys (shown shaded) have no function; the remaining four carry out
the functions displayed above them (e.g., the left hand key now gives access to the GENE menus).
• Some special installation menus are displayed only after changing the position of the installation
enable switch (see below).

cfg001.fm
2-3. Installation Menus

Installation Menus are special menus which allow specific Gantry or Generator installation procedures to
be performed. To access installation menus from application mode, proceed as follows:
1. Enter installation mode (press the SETUP key on the X-ray console once).
2. Change the position of the installation menu enable GENE CPU BOARD 400-PL3
switch (switch B1-8 on Generator CPU Board 400-
PL3). Note that the original position of the switch is
not important. When the system is powered up it
B1
automatically enters application mode with installa-
tion menus disabled; the switch position at that time ?
P1 P2
is memorized as the "installation-menu-disabled"
position.
The installation menus can also be accessed by pasword. Selct the PASSWORD key and enter your
password (given at the training course).
3. Two function keys are now labelled (on the display) as GENE and ARM. Select Gantry or Generator
installation menus as follows:
a. For Gantry installation menus: press the key labelled ARM, then press the VALID key. The two
right-hand keys are now labelled INSTAL and MAINT. Press the INSTAL key to access installation
menus (the MAINTenance menu is not available during installation).
b. For Generator installation menus: press the key labelled GENE. The VALID key is not required.
The two right-hand keys are now labelled INSTAL and MAINT. Press the INSTAL key to access
installation menus (the MAINTenance menu is not available during installation).
Notice:
When you have finished using installation mode, you must switch off the Gantry before handing
over the machine to the user, to lock out access to installation mode.
2-4. X-ray console Self-Test

To carry out a X-ray console self-test you must press five keys simultaneously. Refer to the illustration
below. Press and hold the two keys A, and press the three keys B.

cfg001.fm
2-5. Saved Parameters Checksum

Parameters resulting from installation or non-proprietary maintenance procedures are saved in memory
zones whose contents are not lost when the Gantry is switched off.
To perform the saved parameter checksum function CKSUM, select either SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/
CKSUM/CKSUM (for Generator parameters) or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CKSUM/CKSUM (for
Gantry parameters). You can now return to application mode without receiving a checksum error mes-
sage.
It is not mandatory to do a checksum each time you leave a menu. There is no risk of losing data if you
switch off the Senographe displaying a checksum error.
2-6. Re-loading Default (Initial) Parameters
WARNING
These functions are not normally used after the Senographe 2000 D has left the factory.
To re-load generator or gantry default parameters (prior to any installation or calibration procedures), use
the appropriate CLEAR menu. This executes a software power-up comparable to the first hardware
power-up of the generator or gantry.
When the Generator CLEAR menu is used, the Senographe returns to application mode (to return to
installation mode, you must change the position of the installation menu enable switch again).
When the Gantry CLEAR menu is used, the Senographe returns to the gantry installation entry level
(SETUP/ARM/VALID).
After use of the CLEAR menu, a CHECKSUM ERROR message is displayed. All generator or gantry
calibration procedures must be performed, followed by a CKSUM to enable use of the new
parameters.
WARNING
The generator CLEAR menu causes the recorded thermal condition of critical components
(tube, tube housing, generator, etc.) to be reset to the cold condition. This means that an
excessive temperature rise at the time that this menu is used may not be immediately
detected by the software thermal protection.
2-7. Representation of Numeric Parameters

When displayed on the X-ray console, most numeric values appear in the form of real numbers in scien-
tific notation floating point format with four significant figures, as shown in the examples below:
-1.250E+3 (= -1250.00); +4.345E-1 (= 0.4345) +1.000E+0 (= 1.000)
2-8. Display of Parameter Values

To display parameter values on the X-ray Console, access the calibration menu for the procedure that
computes the parameter. Typically this is done at a menu choice between CALIB and PARAM. Select
PARAM to display the parameter value.
If the calibration procedure computes more than one parameter, turn the kV dial to display the
parameters in sequence.

cfg001.fm
2-9. Modification and entry of values

At menu points allowing entry of a measured value or modification of a parameter, there are two possible
selections: NEXT and VALID. Select NEXT to allow the first character to be entered (by changing the dis-
played character). Select NEXT again to enter the following character, and so on.
Use the kV dial to change the character being entered. Numeric or alpha-numeric characters are
displayed, according to the function. Parameters are entered or modified in scientific notation form (see
above). Select VALID when all characters are correctly entered. If you make a mistake, select NEXT
repeatedly until you arrive at the faulty value, then correct it by rotating the kV dial.
To exit the modification routine, press SETUP once.
Note:
Pressing the VALID key is effective ONLY when the entire value, including exponent, is displayed.
This means that if you correct a digit after making a mistake, as described above, you must press
the NEXT key repeatedly until the entire parameter value is visible before you can enter the new
value using the VALID key.
2-10. The DISP Parameter

• The DISP (display) parameter is provided to aid service procedures; it controls the display of certain
parameters after an exposure. When it is set to YES, the two groups of exposure parameters shown
in the table below are displayed alternately:
Group 1: kV mAs mA Time Ih
Group 2: Composition Thickness Prep dose Prep kV Prep track Prep filter Delta grid
Composition Breast composition

Thickness: Breast thickness in equivalent cm of plexiglass.
Prep dose: Dose for pre-shot (returned by IDC)
Prep kV: kV used for pre-shot
Prep track: Track used for pre-shot
Prep filter: Filter used for pre-shot
Delta grid: Delta time (ms) from end of X-ray emission to grid U-turn
To change the DISP parameter, access SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DISP, and select YES or
NO. A CKSUM is NOT necessary because this parameter is not a saved parameter. When power is
turned off, the value of DISP is lost and reverts to NO at the next power-up.

cfg001.fm
This page is blank.

cfg001.fm
Job Card CFG 002 - Gantry and Generator Configuration
Job Card CFG 002 - Gantry and Generator Configuration Chapter 4
1. INTRODUCTION
This module provides information for initial configuration of a Senographe 2000 D system. It contains two
sections:
• Configuration procedures. Procedures which are required to set up the system for local site condi-
tions.
• Configuration check information. For use only if you suspect that certain important settings have
been changed; most settings are made in the factory and do not need to be changed on site.
2. CONFIGURATION PROCEDURES
2-1. Prerequisites
The system must have powered up and reached a stable state with no checksum error displayed on the
X-ray console.
• If, on the first power up, CHECKSUM ERROR (GEN) or ARM CHECKSUM ERROR is displayed,
proceed as follows:
Reload the Generator or Gantry (or both) saved parameters, using the diskette (p/n 2152250) deliv-
ered in the accessories kit. This diskette is labelled with the same product locator number as your
Senographe 2000 D. Files are identified as Gxxxx.DAT (Generator) and Axxxx.DAT (Gantry/Arm),
where xxxx is the factory serial number. There should be no checksum error after correct reloading of
these parameters.
• Enable access to installation menus by changing the position of the installation menu enable switch
(switch B1-8 on generator CPU board 400-PL3) as described in Job Card CFG 001 - The X-ray Con-
sole on page 121.
2-2. Set Language

• If necessary, change the X-ray console display language by selecting: SETUP/LANGUAGE/lan-
guage , where language is the desired language (FRENC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITAL, or
PORTU).
Note:
For compatibility with English language documentation, you are recommended to select ENGL
during installation of the system; change to the local language when installation is complete.
2-3. Set Maximum Generator Output Power

• Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PMAX/3.0, to set the maximum generator
power to 3.0 kW.
2-4. Set Maximum X-ray Tube mAs

• Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/MASMAX. Enter the maximum mAs value
according to local regulations, using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
Note:
The default (and maximum possible) value is +6.000E+2 (600) mAs.

cfg002.fm
2-5. Set Maximum X-ray Exposure Time

• Select SETUP//GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/T_MAX. Enter the maximum X-ray expo-
sure time according to local regulations.
Note:
The default value is +6.000E+0 (6) seconds; the maximum is +2.000E+1 (20) seconds.
2-6. Set Collimator Front Blade Presence

• Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/FRONT_B/YES.
The default setting is YES (collimator V4 with front blade control).
2-7. Set X-ray Beam Margins

Set the lateral, rear, and front beam margins as required to meet any specific local regulations and rec-
ommendations; note the current setting values for future reference. The tables below give examples of
margin settings for some of the main standards currently applicable.
1. Lateral margin: select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L
Standard Lateral margin (mm)
CDRH/CEI/MQSA/Factory default +5
UK +2
AUSTRALIA -4
Current setting ...
2. Rear Margin: select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_R.
Standard Rear margin (mm)
UK +2
AUSTRALIA -4
Current setting ...
3. Front Margin: select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_F.
Standard Front margin (mm)
UK +2
AUSTRALIA +2
Current setting ...
4. Perform CKSUM; return to application mode

cfg002.fm

.
2-8. Set Gantry Medical Parameters

1. Ask the doctor for the desired paddle compression speed (fast or slow). From application mode,
select SETUP/MEDICAL/SPEED. Select FAST or SLOW as required.
2. Ask the doctor for the desired maximum compression force in daN. Select SETUP/FORCE. Press +
or - on the X-ray console repeatedly until the desired force value is reached (possible values range
from 4 to 20 daN in steps of 1 daN). Select VAL on the X-ray console to confirm the desired value.
Note:
The ACR recommendation is 18daN (40lbs).
3. Ask the doctor if automatic decompression (i.e. return of the compression paddle to its home posi-
tion) following an exposure is desired. Select SETUP/DECOMP. Select YES or NO as required.
4. Ask the doctor if a beep tone is desired. Select SETUP/BEEP. Select YES or NO as required.
5. Ask the doctor for the desired maximum height during automatic decompression (between 10 and 38
cm). Select SETUP/HEIGHT. Press + or - on the X-ray console repeatedly until the desired maximum
height is displayed.
3. CONFIGURATION CHECK INFORMATION

Note:
It is not normally necessary to set the configuration parameters listed here. They are set to their
correct values in the factory, or by the link from the AWS. They are given here for convenience in
the event that you suspect that they have been changed, perhaps during trouble-shooting.
3-1. Set Date and Time

• The Generator clock is updated automatically by the AWS each time the Senographe subsystem is
powered up (either alone or when the complete system is powered up). It is not normally necessary
to change it manually.
Note:
After a Generator CLEAR operation, the current date and the date of the last installation mode ac-
cess are both set to the Generator software release date; the time is set to 0:00:00. The current
date and time are updated at the next power up.
• The clock is used for the following functions:
- Thermal protection cooling algorithms, whether or not the generator is turned on.
- Recording dates and times in the error log.
- Recording the date of last access to installation mode.
• If it is necessary to change the date or time on the Gantry manually, note the following points:
- Dates (menu path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE) are entered in the form DD/
MM/YY; e.g., for February 14th, 2001, you must enter 14/02/01.
- Time (menu path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/HOUR) is entered in 24-hour format;
e.g., for 3:13:27 pm you must enter 15:13:27.
3-2. Check X-ray Tube Housing Configuration.

• Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/TUBE/YES. (the X-ray tube housing is inclinable on all
Gantries).
Perform a gantry CKSUM and return to application mode. Check that NONE of the following error
messages appears on the X-ray console display:

cfg002.fm
S53 105/080 (incompatible housing configuration)

S53 105/081 (incompatible housing configuration)
S54 155/082 (incompatible tube type)
S54 155/083 (incompatible tube type)
3-3. Check X-ray Tube Type

1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/TUBE.
Verify that the X-ray console display shows the correct tube type: 2foc/2met/1ang (dual focus, bi-
metal, single anode angle or slope; This corresponds to tube type GS412-49).
If the configuration is not correct, proceed with steps 2 and 3 below.
2. If necessary, set the correct X-ray tube type:
Select FOCUS/DUAL on the X-ray console.
Select SETUP/ANODE/DM on the X-ray console.
3. Press SETUP; verify that the X-ray console display now shows the correct tube type (above).
3-4. Check Presence parameters

The following equipment presence parameters should normally be set to YES:
• Gantry (Arm) presence; SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GCONFIG/CONFIG/PRES/PRES_B
• Digital System presence; SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PRES/PRES_DS
• IDC presence; SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PRES/PRES_IDC
3-5. Check Paddle Deformation Parameters

• Check the values of paddle deformation parameters against the default factory settings given
below;. These parameters alter the X-Ray exposure behaviour in AOP mode...
Paddle Offset Value Gain Value
19 x 23 paddle in contact mode: access Standard metallic arm +1.000 E + 0 +6.000 E - 1
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/PADD/18x24 paddle for Senographe
2000 D (*)
Magnification paddles: access All magnification +2.000 E + 0 +2.000 E - 1
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/PADD/MAGNIF paddles(*)
• After any modification, perform a CKSUM and return to Application mode

cfg002.fm
Job Card CFG 003 - Senographe Jumpers and Switches
Job Card CFG 003 - Senographe Jumpers and Switches Chapter 4
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
None
None
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. JUMPERS AND SWITCHES

The information in this Job Card is provided only to allow verification of the position of jumpers and
switches if necessary. They should normally be factory-set.
Jumpers and switches are divided into three groups: Generator, Mains Distribution Rack, and Gantry.
5-1. GeneratorJumpers and Switches

1. Check (visually, do not remove it!) that the jumper on the Generator CPU board 400PL3 is installed in
position X2 as shown in Illustration 1.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - GENERATOR AND GANTRY CPU BOARD JUMPER X2
GENE CPU BOARD 400-PL3 or

GANTRY CPU BOARD 800-PL3
B46
B41
X2
BT1
! !
P1 P2
CAUTION
This jumper must NEVER be removed from position X2 and must NEVER be placed in
position TP1. If this jumper is either removed or placed in position TP1, the generator CPU
RAMs are totally erased, necessitating a TOTAL RE-CALIBRATION of the generator and
AEC.
2. Check that jumpers JP1 and JP2 are installed on generator command board 400PL1 (they must NOT
be installed in the parking position JP3 and JP4 at this point). See illustration 2.
Note:
JP1 and JP2 are connected to the room relays on 200PL4. See Job Card IST 013 - Room Lamps
and Door Configuration on page 89 for more information.

cfg003.fm
ILLUSTRATION 2 - GENERATOR COMMAND BOARD JUMPERS
5-2. Mains Distribution Rack Jumpers and Switches

• Check that the jumpers on the Mains Distribution Board are installed as follows:
Jumper Present? Where?
TP1 NO Between K2 and K6
TP2 NO Beside K8
TP3 YES Beside K10
5-3. Gantry CPU Board 800PL3 Jumpers and Switches

Check (visually, do not remove it!) that the jumper on the Gantry CPU board 800PL3 is installed in posi-
tion X2 as shown in Illustration 1.
CAUTION
position TP1. If this jumper is either removed or placed in position TP1, the gantry CPU
RAMs are totally erased, necessitating a TOTAL RECALIBRATION of the gantry.

cfg003.fm
5-4. Gantry Power Board 800PL1 Jumpers and Switches

There are two different sets of jumper and switch settings for Gantry Power Board 800PL1 depending on
the board’s reference number. You must inspect the board and refer to the following table to determine
which set of jumper and switch settings to use:
If your 800PL1 board Then apply the Jumpers and
has this ref. no.: Settings given in this Section:
5190800 5-4-1
2102082-9 5-4-1
2102082-8 5-4-2
2389981 5-4-2
5-4-1. Jumpers and Settings for 800PL1 Board Ref. No. 5190800 or 2102082-9
Check that the jumpers on the Gantry board 800PL1 are correctly set for the bucky motor type. If you are
installing a Senographe 2000 D equipped with Gantry Board ref. 5190800 or 2102082-9, they should be
set as follows (refer to Illustrations 3 and 4):
Jumper Present? Position
CC3 YES BUCKY OLD
CC4, CC5 and CC6 all YES BUCKY NEW
J1 and J2 NO n/a
J3 and J4 NO n/a
J5 and J6 NO n/a
J7 and J8 DON’T CARE n/a
J9 and J10 YES n/a

cfg003.fm
ILLUSTRATION 3 - LOCATION OF JUMPERS CC3 THROUGH CC6 ON 800PL1 VERSION 5190800 OR

2102082-9
OLD
BUCKY
Position CC3
CAUTION:
Jumper CC3 must
NEW
always be in OLD
BUCKY
BUCKY position (as
Position
shown).
OLD
NEW
BUCKY
BUCKY
Position
Position
CAUTION:
Jumpers CC4, CC5
CC4
and CC6 must al-
ways be in NEW
BUCKY position (as CC5
shown).
CC6

cfg003.fm
ILLUSTRATION 4 - LOCATION OF JUMPERS J1 TO J10 ON 800PL1 VERSION 5190800 OR 2102082-9
J9 J10
J6
J5
J8
J7
J4
J3
J1
J2

cfg003.fm
5-4-2. Jumpers and Settings for 800PL1 Board Ref. No. 2102082-8 or 2389981
The jumpers on 800PL1 Gantry Power Boards with ref. no. 2102082-8 or 23899812 should be set as fol-
lows:
Jumper Present?
TP104 NO
TP103 NO
TP106 NO
TP107 YES
TP102 YES
TP1056 YES

cfg003.fm
Job Card CFG 004 - Check Supply Voltages
Job Card CFG 004 - Check Supply Voltages Chapter 4
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Accurate digital voltmeter (Fluke 8060 or equivalent)
None
4. PREREQUISITES
The procedures described in Job Card IST 008 - AC Connection on page 73 must have been completed
correctly.
5. FIRST POWER-ON CHECK

The objective in this section is to detect incorrect mains supply configuration - before it is too late!
5-1. Check keep-alive supply voltage. POWER BOARD 200-PL1

R4
R1
1. Check that generator Mains Supply Switch 200-S1 is open
(i.e. in the ”0” position) and that the Mains Distribution Rack
TR2
circuit breaker is open (i.e. in the ”0” position ).
2. Close the main hospital supply circuit breaker.
3. Connect the voltmeter (set to 20 VDC scale) to generator
mains power board 200-PL1 between test points PT15 (+VE)
X1
and PT12 (0VE). See illustration. PT12 0VE
4. Close generator Mains Supply Switch 200-S1 (i.e., turn it to PT14 PT15 +VE
the ”1” position) and read the voltmeter immediately. It should
- VE + VE
read +8 ±2 VDC.
CAUTION
If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, turn mains source OFF IMMEDIATELY and
check configuration of voltage selection board IN2 on generator mains distribution board
200-PL1 (see Job Card IST 008 - AC Connection on page 73).
5. Move the voltmeter from PT12 to PT14 (-VE). The voltmeter should read -8V ± 2VDC
6. Connect the voltmeter (set to 500 VAC scale) to generator mains power board 200-PL1 between ter-
minals 1 (0V) and 4 (220V).

cfg004.fm
Job Card CFG 004 - Check Supply Voltages
7. Turn X-ray console on and read the voltmeter immediately. It should read 220 ± 20 VAC.
CAUTION
If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, open generator Mains Supply Switch 200-S1
IMMEDIATELY (turn it to the "0” position) and check mains voltage selection wire SEL on
generator mains distribution board 200-PL1 (see Job Card IST 008 - AC Connection on
page 73).
6. CHECK GENERATOR AND GANTRY DC SUPPLY VOLTAGES

6-1. Check generator DC supply voltages.
1. On generator CPU board 400-PL3, measure the DC voltage between TP110 and TP111 (GND). It
should be in the range +5.1±0.05 V. If necessary, adjust the voltage.
WARNING
The adjustment is made using the potentiometer located on the low voltage power supply
unit (on the rear of the board mounting plate).
To avoid any risk of electric shock, DO NOT TOUCH any of the other components on the
supply (later models are protected by a transparent cover).
2. On generator interface board 400-PL2, measure DC voltage (+12 V nominal) between PT3 and PT4.
The voltage should be in the range +11.5 to +12.5 VDC.
3. On generator interface board 400-PL2, measure DC voltage (-12 V nominal) between PT5 and PT4.
The voltage should be in the range -11.5 to -12.5 VDC.
Note:
Voltages measured in steps 2 and 3 above depend on the +5 V adjustment mentioned in step 1.
4. If the potentiometer located on the low voltage power supply unit (step 1) has been adjusted, apply a
suitable locking compound to prevent further movement.
6-2. Check gantry DC supply voltages.

1. On gantry power board 800-PL1, measure DC voltage (+27 V nominal) between terminals 3 and 1
(GND) of connector TB1. The voltage should be in the range +26 to +34 VDC.
2. On gantry CPU board 800-PL3, measure DC voltage (+5 V nominal) between TP110 and TP111
(GND). The voltage should be in the range +4.75 to +5.25 VDC.
Note:
Unlike the +5 V supply on the generator CPU board, the +5 V supply on the gantry CPU board can-
not be adjusted.
7. CHECK MAINS DISTRIBUTION RACK INPUT

If the above check for generator voltages was correct, this confirms that the correct voltage has been
selected for the generator input voltage.
Before switching power to the Mains Distribution Rack, check that the same voltage has been
selected for the Mains Distribution Rack transformer input tap.

cfg004.fm
Job Card CFG 005 - AWS Configuration
Job Card CFG 005 - AWS Configuration Chapter 4
1. SUPPLIES
None.
2. TOOLS
None.
No specific safety precautions are applicable.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Display the Configuration/System Overview Window
1. From the application browser screen, select Toolkit/Service Desktop/Configuration.
2. The System Overview window shows current site and communications settings.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - SYSTEM OVERVIEW WINDOW

cfg005.fm
5-2. Set Site Information

1. Click the Site button under Configuration to display the Site Information Screen (Illustration 2).
2. To change any of the displayed items, enter the new information and confirm the entry by clicking the
Submit button.
ILLUSTRATION 2 - SITE INFORMATION SCREEN
Note:
1. The entry Station Name is the name that will be used for the system when interacting with the
RIS server. It is recommended that this name be the same as that used for TCP/IP networking con-
figuration (see Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Connection and Configuration on page 151).
2. If there is more than one Senographe 2000 D system on the hospital site, the names chosen
must clearly differentiate between them (for example, by including the unit number or name).

cfg005.fm
5-3. Set General Configuration Parameters

1. Click the General button under Configuration to display the General Configuration screen (Illustration
3).
2. To change any of the displayed items, enter the new information and confirm the entry by clicking the
Submit button.
ILLUSTRATION 3 - GENERAL CONFIGURATION SCREEN
3. Auto Delete. By default, the auto-delete feature is not active. To activate it on request from the user,
select Toolkit/Medical application preferences/Auto delete. When the disk usage exceeds the config-
ured Upper Threshold value, images are automatically deleted in chronological order, oldest first,
until the disk space reaches the Lower Threshold. Images which have been on the disk for less than
the Minimum Image Storage time are not deleted.
Notice:
Do not activate Auto Delete or change Auto Delete settings without agreement from the user.
4. QAP Time-out. Sets the time at which a warning that QAP must be carried out will be displayed
5. System Clock. Sets the current date and time.
Notice:
After changing the clock the system must be shut down and restarted. If this is not done, system
behaviour may be unpredictable, because several interacting processes use the clock.
6. Language. Check the button beside the required application language
Notice:
If you change the application language, you must perform a shutdown and restart before the
change will take effect.

cfg005.fm
This page is blank.

cfg005.fm
Job Card CFG 006 - Declare Network Hosts
Job Card CFG 006 - Declare Network Hosts Chapter 4
1. SUPPLIES
None.
2. TOOLS
None.
3. APPLICABILITY
For network security purposes IP Filters have been implemented from ADS versions 17.4.5 and above.
The final steps in the following procedures that use the IPFreload.sh script are only applicable for ADS
versions 17.4.5.
WARNING
From ADS versions 17.4.5 and above a normal ping from a remote host to the ADS com-
puter will result in host unreachable message. This is normal and is due to the IP Filters
that have been implemented from ADS versions 17.4.5 for network security purposes.
However, a DICOM ping from a remote host to the ADS computer will work, and it is recom-
mended that you use a DICOM ping from the remote hosts for testing purposes.
5. PREREQUISITES
Obtain full details of the addresses, names and characteristics of the host(s) to be declared, from the
network administrator concerned and/or Remote Host Conformance statement documents.

cfg006.fm
6. PROCEDURE
Note:
Hosts may be declared before they are physically connected.
6-1. Remote Host Selection Window

• Click on the Tools icon in the upper right corner of the Browser to display the Tools menu; select
Network management in the menu to display the Remote host selection window. This window dis-
plays a list of all currently declared hosts. Click on a host name to select it. Click the appropriate but-
ton at the bottom of the window to Add or Remove a host. Click Update to apply the changes, or
Cancel to close the window without applying changes.

cfg006.fm
6-2. Declaration of a new host

To add a host to the List of Registered Hosts, click the Add button in the Remote host selection window.
The Remote host parameters window is displayed:
Complete the fields in this window according to the information received from the network administrator
concerned and the remote host device DICOM 3.0 Conformance Statement:
1. The following fields must be completed for all types of remote host devices (Review Station, Non-
Storage Commitment capable Archival device, and Storage Commitment capable Archival device):
- HOST LABEL: Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
- HOSTNAME: Enter the host name provided by the hospital network administrator.
- APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE: Enter the Application Entity Title (A.E.T.)
- NETWORK ADDRESS: The network address may be local (see Job Card CFG 008 - Networking
Connection and Configuration on page 151), or provided by the hospital network administrator.

cfg006.fm
- NETWORK PROTOCOL: Always select DICOM 3.0.

- PORT NUMBER: Refer to the device DICOM 3.0 Conformance Statement; normal value is 4006.
2. The following field must be completed if the remote host device is a Review Station:
- QUERY RETRIEVE: Select Patient, Study, or No Provider; (refer to the Review Station DICOM
3.0 Conformance Statement).
3. The following field must be completed if the remote host device is an Archival device:
- STORAGE COMMITMENT: Set to Yes if the the Archival device DICOM 3.0 Conformance State-
men lists this feature; set to No if the Statement does not list the feature.
• If STORAGE COMMITMENT is set to No; set MESSAGE SEND to Yes if you want an S to
appear in the Report Status column of the Study or Exam list when a study has been sent to the
Archival device.
• If STORAGE COMMITMENT is set to Yes; the fields Application Entity Title, Network Address,
and Port Number in the lower part of the window are highlighted. You must complete these fields,
even if the information is the same as that already entered (this is necessary to allow the possibil-
ity of images being sent to one remote host and committed to another).
4. On completion, click the Save button to update and close the window.
Note:
Network Remote Hosts are not updated in the /etc/inet/hosts file, but are found in the file /export/
home/sdc/Prefs/SdCRHosts. For this reason, it is not possible to use ping, telnet, spray and sim-
ilar commands using the hostname. The internet address must be used instead. For example, to
ping the MR operator's console from the workstation, do not use /usr/sbin/ping MR01_OC0. In-
stead, use the internet address, e.g., /usr/sbin/ping 192.9.200.1.
Therefore, though it is not mandatory to declare hosts in the /etc/hosts file when using the SdC
NET protocol, we recommend you to do it in any case.
5. For Senographe systems using ADS versions 17.4.5 and above you must reload the Senographe
system’s IP Filters so that the newly declared network host has access through the Senographe sys-
tem’s firewall via the DICOM protocol. To do this, perform the following sub-steps:
a. From behind the Browser, launch a command window
A command window appears.
b. Execute the IPFreload.sh script, by entering:
IPFreload.sh
c. When the Password: prompt appears requesting you to enter the root password, enter:
operator
An End of script message appears. The newly declared network host can now access the
Senographe system.

cfg006.fm
6-3 Update an existing host

To update an existing within the List of Registered Hosts perform the following steps:
1. In the List of registered hosts section within the Remote Host Selection window, click on the host
name of the host that you intend to update.
2. Click the Update button.

The Remote Host Parameters window appears, which contains the existing details of the select host.

cfg006.fm
Append the required fields in the Remote Host Parameters window according to the information
received from the network administrator concerned and the remote host device DICOM 3.0 Conform-
ance Statement:
3. If necessary, append one or more of the following fields:
- Host Label: Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
- Host Name: Enter the host name provided by the hospital network administrator.
- Application Entity Title: Enter the Application Entity Title (AET).
- Network Address: The network address may be local (see Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Con-
nection and Configuration on page 151), or provided by the hospital network administrator.
- Network Protocol: Always select DICOM 3.0.
- Port Number: Refer to the device DICOM 3.0 Conformance Statement; normal value is 4006.
4. If the remote host device is a review workstation, you may need to append the following field:
- Query Retrieve: Select Patient, Study, or No Provider; (refer to the Review Workstation DICOM
3.0 Conformance Statement).
5. If the remote host device is an Archival device, you may need to append one or more of the following
fields:
- Storage Commitment: Set to Yes if the Archival device DICOM 3.0 Conformance Statement lists
this feature; set to No if the Statement does not list the feature.
• If Storage Commitment is set to No; set Message Send to Yes if you want an S to appear in the
Report Status column of the Study or Exam list when a study has been sent to the Archival
device.
• If Storage Commitment is set to Yes; the fields Application Entity Title, Network Address, and Port
Number in the lower part of the window are highlighted. You must complete these fields, even if
the information is the same as that already entered (this is necessary to allow the possibility of
images being sent to one remote host and committed to another).
6. On completion, click the Save button to update and close the window.
You are returned to the Remote Host Selection window.
7. Click the Done button to close the Remote Host Selection window.
8. For Senographe systems using ADS versions 31.27 and above you must reload the Senographe
system’s IP Filters so that the recently updated network host has access through the Senographe
system’s firewall via the DICOM protocol. To do this, perform the following sub-steps:
IPFreload.sh
operator
Senographe system.

cfg006.fm
6-4 Remove an existing host

To remove a host from the List of Registered Hosts perform the following steps:
1. In the List of registered hosts section within the Remote Host Selection window, click on the host
name of the host that you intend to delete.
2. Click the Remove button in the Remote host selection window.

A Remove host dialog box that appears.
3. Click the OK button to confirm the removal of the selected host.

You are returned to the Remote Host Selection window.
4. Click the Done button to close the Remote Host Selection window.
5. For Senographe systems using ADS versions 31.27 and above you must reload the Senographe
system’s IP Filters so that the recently deleted network host no longer has access through the
Senographe system’s firewall via the DICOM protocol. To do this, perform the following sub-steps:
IPFreload.sh
operator
An End of script message appears. The newly deleted network host can no longer access the
Senographe system.

cfg006.fm
This page is blank.

cfg006.fm
Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Connection and Configuration
Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Connection and Configuration Chapter 4
1. SUPPLIES
HNS Performance Network Switch (networking connectivity kit containing six ethernet cables and a net-
work swich).
2. TOOLS
None
None.
4. PREREQUISITES
• System is installed and power is on.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Introduction
• The Senographe 2000 D must be configured in a local network with associated devices, e.g., Review
Workstation, Archive devices, Printers, and/or other Senographes. A typical installation is shown in
the diagram below.
• A networking kit containing six cables and a network switch is provided with the system for this pur-
pose.
• For HIS/RIS connection, a special optional HIS/RIS networking kit is required. Contact your GE HNS
representative for details.
• For connection to a hospital network, a special study is required. Contact your GE HNS representa-
tive for details.
The following diagram illustrates a possible network configuration. The distances quoted are the lengths
of cables typically used, but are not intended to indicate restrictions.
AWS
Mass
Archiver 60/15/3 m 60/15/3 m
(197/49/10 ft) (197/49/10 ft) RWS
60/15/3 m
Ethernet (197/49/10 ft)
3 m (10 ft)
Hospital HIS/RIS Switch
administrative Network kit
network
7.5 m (25ft)
a.c. power (16 A)
60/15/3 m DICOM
(197/49/10 ft) Printer
CAD

cfg008.fm
5-2. Ethernet Connection between AWS and Local Network

1. Route and connect the Ethernet cable from the network hub (provided in the Senographe 2000 D
networking kit) to the Ethernet network socket (C) on the AWS Cart patch panel. See illustration
below..
C
2. Connect the other local network devices to the hub. The hub connector positions used are not impor-
tant (except for special-purpose connector 8X, which must be left empty). However, you are recom-
mended to label the cables at the hub, to aid future trouble-shooting.
5-3. IP Addresses
This section explains how to change the Senographe 2000 D Hostname, IP address, subnet mask, and
other parameters.
Each Senographe 2000 D system is given a default external IP address during the factory check proc-
ess. To avoid conflicts (such as IP packet collision) inside the customer network, this Senographe 2000
D system’s external IP address should normally be changed at installation time to the recommended
address given below.
For the RWS, printer(s), archiving device, etc., refer to their respective documentation.
Notice:
If the system is connected to an external network (HIS/RIS, hospital network, etc.) the standard
recommended IP addresses may not be applicable. Suitable addresses will be defined by the GE
HNS consultant and the hospital network administrator.
Standard recommended external IP addresses:
Senographe 2000 D: 192.1.1.100
RWS 192.1.1.110
Printer 192.1.1.120
Archiver 192.1.1.130
DMPU (CAD) 192.1.1.140
If more than one S2000 D is connected to the network, use adresses 192.1.1.101, 192.1.1.102, etc. Sim-
ilarly, if other devices are duplicated, add 1 to the recommended base address for each additional
device.
Subnet mask:
ALL devices: 255.255.255.0

cfg008.fm
5-3-1 Distinction between the Senographe system’s internal and external IP address
The Senographe 2000 D system operates on two different networks, namely an internal network and an
external network, which are illustrated below.
Senographe 2000 D System
Internal Network : 192.168.1.0 External Network : 192.1.1.0
AWS
IDC
192.168.1.20 Ethernet Hospital
eri0 : 192.1.1.100
Switch Network
eri1 : 192.168.1.10
The Senographe 2000 D system’s internal network allows the internal components of the Senographe
2000 D system (that is, the AWS and IDC) to communicate internally amongst each other. By default,
this internal network uses a private network of 192.168.1.0 with a Netmask 255.255.255.0 on the inter-
face eri1, which is located in the AWS. Each Senographe 2000 D system component has a different
internal IP address of the format 192.168.1.x, where x varies depending on the component. The follow-
ing table summarizes each of the Senographe 2000 D component’s default internal IP addresses.
Component Host name IP Address

AWS Workstation ads 192.168.1.10
IDC idc 192.168.1.20
IDC Table idc_tbl 192.168.1.21
Laptop laptop 192.168.1.29
Titan titan 192.168.1.30
The IDC Table, Laptop and Titan entries in the table above are components that no longer exist,
but are still retained in the Senographe 2000 D system for legacy reasons.
The Senographe 2000 D system’s external network allows the AWS component of the Senographe
2000 D system to communicate with the rest of the hospital network. This external network is accesible
through the interface eri0, which is located in the AWS. As mentioned above on the previous page, it is
recommended that this interface has an extenal IP address of 192.1.1.100 with a Netmask
255.255.255.0.
Running the procedure in the following section will set all the Senographe 2000 D system’s internal IP
addresses back to their default values (which is beyond your control), and will allow you to configure the
Senographe 2000 D system’s external IP address to your preferred value.
The Senographe 2000 D system’s internal network must never be on the same network as the hospital’s
network. If the Senographe 2000 D system’s internal network is on the same network as the hospital’s
network, it will fail to communicate properly due to internal and external network routing problems There-
fore, if the hospital network is 192.168.1.0 then in addition to the configuration steps within this Job Card,
you must also perform Job Card CFG 010 - Changing Senographe 2000 D Internal IP Addresses on

cfg008.fm
page 179 so that the Senographe 2000 D system’s internal network is different to the hospital’s network.
If you need to perform Job Card CFG 010 - Changing Senographe 2000 D Internal IP Addresses ensure
that you run the network parameter configuration in this Job Card first. If you run the network parameter
configuration in this Job Card after you will overwrite the internal network settings that you modified in
Job Card CFG 010 - Changing Senographe 2000 D Internal IP Addresses.
6. NETWORK PARAMETER CONFIGURATION

6-1. Enter configuration mode
2. Log in as root on the AWS:
At the prompt type: su -root<Return>
At the password prompt type: operator <Return> (factory loaded default root password)
3. Type the following command:
> sys-unconfig<Return>
A warning mesage is displayed; answer Yes to continue.
4. The AWS shuts down. Wait until AWS power has been switched off by the UPS (AWS shut down,
power light on monitor goes out), then press the UPS ON switch on the Generator Cabinet to power
up the AWS.
5. The AWS starts up in configuration mode.
6. The system now displays a succession of screens in which you must enter the network parameters,
starting with the Hostname.
Enter parameters as outlined in the following sections. Where necessary, use the arrow keys to move
the cursor, and use the space bar to select an item.
6-2. Network Connectivity
- Network Connectivity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Specify if the system.............................
Networked :
X Yes
No
• Select YES for network connection (even if the system is not connected to a network).
• Press the <F2> key to continue.

cfg008.fm
Notice:
MAKE SURE that Yes (networked) is selected even though you do not intend to connect the work-
station immediately to a network.
6-3. DHCP
- DHCP - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .............................
Use DHCP :
Yes
X No
• You must specify if DHCP is used: Select No.

6-4. Primary Network Interface
- Primar y Netw ork I nterfa ce - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

On thi s scre en .. ...... ...... ..... ...... ..... ...
Prim ary N etwork Inter face
hme0
X hme1
eri0
If station is a Sun Ultra 10:

• Select hme1 as the primary network interface.
If station is a Sunblade 150:

• Select eri0 as the primary network interface.

cfg008.fm
6-5. Hostname
- Hostname - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .................................
A host name must be .............................

.................................................
Hostname :
• Enter the Hostname to be used for the workstation; press <Return> when done.
Note:
The Hostname will automatically be used as the Dicom A.E. Title for the workstation. If there is
more than one Senographe 2000 D system on the hospital site, the names chosen must clearly
differentiate between them (for example, by including the unit number or name).
Do not use the following characters in the Hostname:
! $ ” ‘ ’ { } [ ] * @ # ? ^ _ / etc.
ONLY USE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACES.
It is also possible to use the characters - (dash) and . (dot).
• Press the <F2> key to continue with the Network Connectivity screen.
6-6. IP Address
- IP Address - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .................................
IP addresses must .............................

.................................................
IP address :
• Enter the Network IP address to be used for the workstation. Press the <Return> key when done.

cfg008.fm
6-7. Subnets (NetMask) Information

- Subnets - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .................................
> To make a selection .............................
.................................................
System part of a subnet :
Yes
X No
• Select the appropriate response Yes or No. Do not guess, ask your network administrator.
6-8. Netmask
Notice:
Select Yes only when your Network Administrator explicitly requires a tree-like network with net-
masks. In this case only, the screen below is displayed. The Netmask value will be given by the
Network Administator. Erase the displayed default Netmask by back-spacing over it and type in
the new address.
- Netmask - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .................................
Netmask : 255.255.255.0

cfg008.fm
6-9. IPv6
- IPv6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .............................
Enable IPv6 :
Yes
X No
• Do not enable IPv6.

6-10. Confirmation Screen
- Confirm information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
> Confirm the following ...........................
.................................................
Networked : Yes
Use DHCP : No
Primary network interface : xxx
Host name : xxxxx
IP address : 3.249.15.107
System part of a subnet : Yes
Netmask : xxxxx
Enable Ipv6 : No
• Check that the correct information is displayed.

• A screen indicating a delay may be displayed:
Just a moment

cfg008.fm
6-11. Configure Security Policy
- Configure Security Policy - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Specify Yes if the system ........................
Configure Kerberos Security :
Yes
X No
• Do not configure Kerberos Security.

6-12. Name Service
- Name service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .................................
.................................................
Name Service :
NIS +
NIS
DNS
LDAP
X None
• Use the Down arrow key to move to None then press <Return> to select.
Notice:
DO NOT SELECT NIS+ or NIS or Client services. None is the primary selection.

cfg008.fm
6-13. Time Zone (Regions)
- Time Zone - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
On this screen .................................
.................................................
Regions :
Africa
Asia, Eastern
---
United States
X Other
• Use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Other region, then press <Return> to select.
6-14. Time Zone Selection
- Time Zone - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
> To match a selection .............................
.................................................
Time Zone :
Eastern
Central
-------
-------
Hawaï
• Use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the GMT Time Zone, then press <Return> to select.

cfg008.fm
6-15. Date and Time
- Date and Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

> Accept the default .............................
.................................................
Date and time : mm/dd/yy hh:mm
Year (4 digits) : 2004
Month (1-12) : XX
Day (1-31) : XX
Hour (0-23) : XX
Minute (0-59) : XX
• Use the Up or Down arrow keys to move to the field to be modified (as applicable), type in the correct
value then press <Return> to move to the next field.
6-16. Confirmation Screen
- Confirm information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
> Confirm the following ...........................
.................................................
Time Zone : XXX

Date and time : mm/dd/yy hh:mm
• Check that the correct information is displayed.


cfg008.fm
6-17. Root Password Screen
On this screen, you can create a root password .....

A root password .................................
> If you do not want ...........................
.................................................
Root password :
Press Return to continue.
• This screen allows you to change the Root password for the workstation. If you want to change it,
type in the new password and press the <Return> key when done. The password you type in will not
be displayed. The standard password for root is operator.
Notice:
Make sure that the caps-lock key is not engaged before entering the password.
• If you change the password, the system asks you to re-enter the new password. If there is a differ-
ence between the two entries, it will request it again.
• When the password has been correctly changed, or if you press <Return> without changing the
password, the system reboots.
6-18. Login
• The configuration process is now complete.
• On completion of the boot sequence, the prompt login: is displayed.
• Login with the user name sdc, and the password adw3.1, to restart the system.
7 DECLARE A ROUTER
Note:
This procedure is applicable only if station is a Sunblade 150.
To decleare a router you must create file called S93route in the /etc/rc2.d directory and add some lines
which declare the router. Each time the system boots the information in the /etc/rc2.d/S93route file is
processed automatically and the router is automatically declared. Use the following steps to declare a
router:
2. Log in as root as follows:
a. At the ADS prompt enter:
su -root
b. When requested to specify the root password, enter:
operator
3. Change to /etc/rc2.d directory by entering:
cd /etc/rc2.d
4. Open the S93route file in the vi text editor by entering:

vi S93route

cfg008.fm
The S93route file appears in a vi text editor window.

5. Press the i key to enter insert mode, then type the following four lines (seperated by carraige
returns):
#!/bin/sh
# Section for routing
echo Starting route service
route add net <network number> <gateway address>
where <network number> is the address to be accessed through the gateway, and <gateway
address> is the IP of the gateway (router) indicated by the administrator.
To calculate the network number (with relation to the network mask) you can use this link to a net-
work/node calculator: http://library.mobrien.com/net.shtml or http://www.subnetonline.com/subcalc/
subnet9.html
Typing the "echo" lines will help you to locate any possible faults during boot in case of mistyping
the router information.
6. Press the Escape key to exit from insert mode, then save the file and quit vi by entering:
:wq!
7. Make the S93route file executable by entering:
chmod 777 S93route
8. Reboot the system for the changes to take effect by entering:
reboot
8 CHANGE AUTONEGOTIATION OF NETWORK INTERFACE

Note:
This procedure is applicable only if station is a Sunblade 150.
The workstation SunBlade 150 computer uses a network interface on the motherboard which is called
"eri". By default this interface is configured for: full duplex, 100 Mb/s, autonegotiation = yes.
You can read the current settings of the Network Interface at any time by using the following steps:
su -root
operator
2. Get the current full duplex and speed settings by entering:
ndd -get /dev/eri adv_100fdx_cap
If the system is running in full-duplex & 100 Mb mode the command line responds with the value 1,
other wise it responds with 0.
3. Get the negotiation settings by entering:
ndd -get /dev/eri adv_autoneg_cap
If the system is running in autonegotiation mode the command line responds with the value 1, and if
system is not running in autonegotiation mode the command line responds with the value 0.
Upon request of the local network administrator it may be desirable to force the speed of the Network
Interface to 100 Mbit/s without negotiation. In this case, you need to run a couple of ndd -set commands
as root user to change autonegotiation of the Network interface.

cfg008.fm
To set the autonegotiation to off on the network interface:

su -root
operator
2. Select the eri0 interface you intend to change by entering:
ndd -set /dev/eri instance 0
3. Set the eri0 interface’s autonegotiation capabilities to no (i.e. 0) by entering:
ndd -set /dev/eri adv_autoneg_cap 0
Alternatively, to make this setting permanent (done at each boot), you can put these two set ndd -set
command lines in the /etc/rc2.d/S93route file (with or without a route). Each time the system boots the
information in the /etc/rc2.d/S93route file is processed automatically, which ensures that the router is
automatically declared (if the lines for the router declaration exist) and the Network Interface is automat-
ically running in autonegotiation=no mode. To do this, use the following steps:
su -root
operator
3. Change to /etc/rc2.d directory by entering:
cd /etc/rc2.d
4. Open the S93route file in the vi text editor by entering:
vi S93route
The S93route file appears in a vi text editor window.
5. Press the i key to enter insert mode, then type the following lines (seperated by carraige returns):
#!/bin/sh
# Section for routing
echo Starting route service
route add net <network number> <gateway address>
#
# Section for autoneg
echo Setting for no autoneg
ndd -set /dev/eri instance 0
ndd -set /dev/eri adv_autoneg_cap 0
where <network number> is the address to be accessed through the gateway, and <gateway
address> is the IP of the gateway (router) indicated by the administrator.
Typing the "echo" lines will help you to locate any possible faults during boot in case of mistyping
the router or autonegotiation information.
The example above includes sections for both declaring a router and disabling autonegotiation.
Type one or both sections according to your requirements.

cfg008.fm
6. Press the Escape key to exit from insert mode, then save the file and quit vi by entering:
:wq!
7. Make the S93route file executable by entering:
chmod 777 S93route
reboot

cfg008.fm
This page is blank.

cfg008.fm
Job Card CFG 009 - Declare Printers (Filming Devices)
Job Card CFG 009 - Declare Printers (Filming Devices) Chapter 4
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS REQUIRED
None
None
4. PREREQUISITES
The AWS must have been correctly installed and configured.
The local Network must have been correctly installed, and the Network Printers to be declared must
have been correctly installed and connected to the Network.
Make sure the following information is available before starting to install printers:
• Internet address and Hostname of Network printer(s). This information can be obtained either from
the Network Administrator of the Hospital, or from the Needs assessment Form completed by the
Net-work Champions.
• Application Entity Title (A.E.T.) of Network printer(s). This information can be obtained from the
Printer Supplier.
• Dicom Port number of Network printer(s). This information can be obtained from the Printer Supplier.
Make sure that the printer has been configured for Senographe 2000 D. Field Engineers from the printer
company should be familiar with the required process.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Test the network connection to the printer
Once a network printer is connected to the network and set with an IP address, it should respond to
TCP/IP messages from another Host on the network (e.g., the AWS). Before declaring a printer on the
AWS, check the network connection:
Type in the following ping command after the prompt:
ping <network_printer_IP_address><Return>
For example: [testmam041][1] ping 192.100.9.5 <Return>
The reply should be: <Network printer IP address > is alive
Note:
When entering the printer IP address, do not enter leading zeros in any of the four numeric fields
separated by dots, e.g., do not type in 192.100.009.005, but type 192.100.9.5 instead.
The "alive" answer from the system means that the Network printer can be reached from the Acquisition
Workstation system through the network.
If the system displays "unknown host", your printer may not be correctly declared on the network.

cfg009.fm
If the system displays "Network unreachable", you probably have given the printer an IP address incom-
patible with your Review Workstation's IP address. Check that they belong to the same network,
192.100.9.X, for example.
• Log out
5-2. Declare the Dicom printer(s) to the AWS

• Click on the Tools Menu icon in the Browser to open a Menu displaying available applications.
• Click on Printer Management on the just displayed menu to display the Dicom Printer Selection win-
dow:
Dicom Printer Selection
List of Registered Dicom Printers
Your choice :
Update Add Remove Cancel
• Click the Add button to display the DICOM Printer parameters window (Illustration 1).
• Complete the different fields according to the information given by the Dicom Printer manufacturer.
For text entries, click in the required field and type the text; click on check boxes to select/deselct
them.
• Click on Clear to clear all fields, Save to store the entered information, and Done to exit and return to
the Printer Selection window.
Refer to section 6 for information on entries for Konica 793, Agfa 5500/5503, Agfa 4500M, Fuji Drypix
4000 and Fuji Drypix 7000 printers.
5-3. Set Print Annotation level

Notice:
If the installation is in the USA or otherwise subject to MQSA (Mammography Quality Standards
Act) regulations, the following step is mandatory:
Set the Printing Annotations selection to Model 3, using the Annotations window in Medical Pref-
erences (refer to the Browser chapter in the Acquisition System Operator Manual for access to
this window).
Inform the client that "Model 3" is the only selection that provides content and positioning in
accordance with the requirements of the Quality Mammography Standards of the MQSA.

cfg009.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - THE DICOM PRINTER PARAMETERS WINDOW
DICOM printer parameters
DICOM printer label:
Hostname:
Application Entity Title (AET):
Network address:
Port number:
Layouts:
Slide formats: 35mm 40mm

Pixel depth: 10 12
Film size:
8 in x 10 in W H 14 in x 14 in W H
10 in x 14 in W H 24 cm x 24 cm W H
Printer pixel size (micron):
Configuration information:
Density: Min Max
Magnification type:
Smoothing factor:
Trim:
Printer memory size: M Bytes
Save Clear Done

cfg009.fm
6. PRINTER PARAMETERS
This section gives information on entries to be made in the Dicom Parameters window for printers quali-
fied for use with the Senographe 2000 D system. Refer to Illustration 2 (Kodak), Illustration 3 and 4
(Agfa), or Illustration 5 and 6 (Fuji).
Notice:
* Values marked with an asterisk can be left blank for normal printing, but must be set as specified
for successful use with the ScrapBook function.
6-1. Konica printers

6-1-1. Konica 793 Dicom printer
Validated using printer software version V1.00RO6.
Printer margin configuration: TOP/BOTTOM = 3.5 mm, LEFT/RIGHT = 1.5 mm.
• DICOM printer label: Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer, e.g., Konica
DPRO793.
• Hostname: Use printer Hostname if any, or a name unique to your Network, e.g., dpro793.
• Network address: A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator), e.g.,
3.249.15.130.
• Application Entity Title (AET): Must be DPRO793
• Port number: Must be 104
• Layouts: Must be 1 x 1 , 1 x 2* , 2 x 1* , or 2 x 2*
• Film size: Must be 8 in x 10 in W = 4596* H = 5674*
10 in x 12 in W = 5766* H = 6826*
• Pixel size Must be 43.75*
• Configuration information Must be KC_LUT=1
• Magnification type: Must be Cubic
• Trim: Must be No
• Printer Memory Size Must be 512

cfg009.fm
6-2. Agfa printers

6-2-1. Agfa 5500/5503 Dicom printer
Validated using printer software version R5.0.0 C2 plus AGfa software patch to adapt margin and
increase useable print area (refer to Agfa for detailed information).
• DICOM printer label: Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e.g., Drystar 5503.
• Hostname: Use printer Hostname if any, or a name unique to your Network e.g., drystar5503.
• Network address: A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator, e.g.,
3.249.15.137.
• Application Entity Title (AET):To be specified by Agfa Field Engineer
10 in x 12 in W = 4892* H = 5900*
• Pixel size 50*
• Density: Must be 355 Max
• Configuration information:Must be PERCEPTION_LUT=OEM921
• Smoothing factor: Must be 143
• Trim: Must be No
• Printer Memory Size Must be 100
6-2-2. Agfa Drystar 4500M Dicom printer

Validated using printer software version V3.0.1 C1 plus AGfa software patch to adapt margin and
increase useable print area (refer to Agfa for detailed information).
• DICOM printer label: Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e.g., DS4500M
Mammo.
• Hostname: Use printer Hostname if any, or a name unique to your Network e.g., DS4500M.
3.249.15.135.
• Application Entity Title (AET):To be specified by Agfa Field Engineer
10 in x 12 in W = 4892* H = 5900*
• Pixel size 50*
• Configuration information:Must be PERCEPTION_LUT=OEM921
• Trim: Must be NO
• Printer Memory Size 40

cfg009.fm
6-3. Kodak printers

6-3-1. Kodak 8900 Dicom printer
Validated using printer software version V3.18.
• DICOM printer label: Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e.g., Kodak8900.
• Hostname: Use printer Hostname if any, or a name unique to your Network e.g., DV8900.
3.249.15.138.
• Application Entity Title (AET):To be specified by Kodak Field Engineer
10 in x 12 in W = 6368* H = 7656*
• Pixel size Must be 39.08*
• Configuration information:Must be gsdlaa0p.w8u,3

cfg009.fm
6-4. Fuji printers

6-4-1. Fuji Drypix 7000 Dicom printer - provisional information
Notice:
At the time of publication, use of this printer had not been validated.
WARNING
Related to USA approval: Use of Fuji Drypix 7000 in the USA requires FDA approval for
digital mammography applications. This approval was not obtained at the time the release
of this document was made. For more information, please contact OLC.
• DICOM printer label: Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e.g., Fuji Drypix.
• Hostname: Use printer Hostname if any, or a name unique to your Network e.g., Fuji1drypix.
3.48.16.135.
• Application Entity Title (AET):To be specified by Fuji Field Engineer
• Pixel size 50*
• Configuration information:Must be 1
• Density: Must be 20 Min 360 Max

cfg009.fm
ILLUSTRATION 2 - TYPICAL KONICA 793 ENTRIES
Hostname:
Application Entity Title (AET): DPRO793
Network address:
Port number: 104
Layouts:
X X
CHECK BOXES X X

Pixel depth: 10 12
Film size:
X 8 in x 10 in 4596 W 5674 H 14 in x 14 in W H
Printer pixel size (micron): 43.75
Configuration information: KC_LUT=1
Density: 20 Min 400 Max
Magnification type: CUBIC
Smoothing factor:
Trim: NO
Printer memory size: 512 M Bytes
Save Clear Done

cfg009.fm
ILLUSTRATION 3 - TYPICAL AGFA 5500/5503 ENTRIES
Hostname:
Application Entity Title (AET): TO BE SPECIFIED BY AGFA FIELD ENGINEER
Network address:
Port number: 104
Layouts:
X X
CHECK BOXES X X

Pixel depth: 10 12
Film size:
Printer pixel size (micron): 50
Configuration information: PERCEPTION_LUT=OEM921
Density: Min 355 Max
Smoothing factor:
Trim: NO
Save Clear Done

cfg009.fm
ILLUSTRATION 4 - TYPICAL AGFA 4500M ENTRIES
Hostname:
Network address:
Port number: 104
Layouts:
X X
CHECK BOXES X X

Pixel depth: 10 12
Film size:
Printer pixel size (micron): 50
Configuration information: PERCEPTION_LUT=OEM921
Smoothing factor:
Trim: NO
Save Clear Done

cfg009.fm
ILLUSTRATION 5 - TYPICAL KODAK 8900 ENTRIES
Hostname:
Network address:
Port number: 104
Layouts:
X X
CHECK BOXES X X

Pixel depth: 10 12
Film size:
Printer pixel size (micron): 39.08
Configuration information: GSDLAA0P.W8U,3
Smoothing factor: 15
Trim: NO
Save Clear Done

cfg009.fm
ILLUSTRATION 6 - TYPICAL FUJI DRYPIX 7000 ENTRIES - PROVISIONAL INFORMATION

• To be validated; seesection 6-4-1:
Hostname:
Application Entity Title (AET): TO BE SPECIFIED BY FUJI FIELD ENGINEER
Network address:
Port number: 104
Layouts:
X
CHECK BOXES

Pixel depth: 10 12
Film size:
Printer pixel size (micron):
Configuration information: 1
Density: 20 Min 360 Max
Smoothing factor:
Trim: NO
Save Clear Done

cfg009.fm
Job Card CFG 010 - Changing Senographe 2000 D Internal IP Addresses
JobCardCFG010-ChangingSenographe2000DInternalIPAddressesChapter 4
1 SUPPLIES
None
2 TOOLS
None
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
4 APPLICABILITY : CONFLICT WITH HOSPITAL NETWORK

Within the Senographe 2000D is a TCP/IP network that allow the ADS Computer and IDC components
to communicate internally amongst each other. By default, this internal network uses a private network of
192.168.1.0 with a netmask 255.255.255.0.
On some sites the hospital network can also be 192.168.1.0. In this case there may be IP address con-
flicts between the hospital’s and Senographe 2000D’s networks, since some of the network nodes on the
hospital network may have the same IP address as the default IP addresses assigned to the
Senographe 2000D’s components. In the case of such a conflict, the Senographe 2000D cannot be used
on the hospital network until you have changed the Senographe 2000D’s internal IP addresses.
The new Senographe 2000D’s internal IP addresses can be one of the other non-routable, private net-
works: 10.xxx.xxx.xxx, 172.16.xxx.xxx to 172.31.xxx.xxx or 192.168.xxx.xxx.
In the following example, the Senographe 2000D’s default internal IP addresses on the 192.168.1.0 net-
work have been changed to be on the 192.168.100.0 network.
Component Host name IP Address

AWS Workstation ads 192.168.100.10
IDC idc 192.168.100.20
IDC Table idc_tbl 192.168.100.21
Laptop laptop 192.168.100.29
Titan titan 192.168.100.30
The IDC Table, Laptop and Titan entries in the table above are components that no longer exist, but still
need to be configured and retained in the Senographe 2000D for legacy reasons.
Changing the Senographe 2000D’s internal IP addresses does not affect any features of the system
(e.g. service features, service desktop, calibration menus, diagnostic menus, etc.). However, it does
affect performing upgrades of the Senographe 2000D’s components (see Steering Guide for future Com-
ponent upgrades on page 184).

cfg010.fm
5 PREREQUISITES
Ensure that you run the network parameter configuration in Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Connection
and Configuration on page 151 first to set the Senographe system’s external IP address. If you run the
network parameter configuration detailed in Job Card CFG 008 - Networking Connection and Configura-
tion after this Job Card you will overwrite the internal IP address of the ADS Computer that you modified
in this Job Card.
6 PROCEDURE
When you change the Senographe 2000D’s internal IP addresses, you must change the IP address of
each component in the order listed in the following sub-sections.
6-1 Change IDC IP Address

1. From the Browser, open a command window. Right click on the screen background, select Service
Tools and then select Command Window from the Root Menu pop-up menu.
A command window appears with an ADS prompt.
2. Change to the /tmp directory on the AWS, by entering:
cd /tmp
3. Connect to the IDC via FTP, by entering:
ftp idc
4. When prompted for a username and password to access the IDC via FTP, press the <Return> key.
An FTP prompt (>) appears.
5. Change to the /idc directory on the IDC, by entering:
cd /idc
6. Transfer the thisbox.cfg file to the AWS /tmp directory by entering:
get thisbox.cfg
7. Disconnect the current FTP session with the IDC by entering:
bye
The FTP connection with the IDC closes and you return to the usual ADS command prompt in the
command window.
8. Insert a blank DOS formatted floppy diskette in AWS floppy disk drive.
su
operator
10. Mount the floppy disk drive to /floppy, by entering:
mount -f pcfs /dev/fd0 /floppy
11. Copy the original thisbox.cfg file to the floppy disk for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /tmp/thisbox.cfg /floppy
12. Logout as the root user, by entering:
logout
You return to the command prompt as sdc user.
13. Open the thisbox.cfg file with the textedit command by entering:
textedit thisbox.cfg

cfg010.fm
The thisbox.cfg file appears in an X-Windows based TextEdit application window.
14. Within the TextEdit application window, change the current IDC IP address from 192.168.1.20 to your
preferred new address (e.g. 192.168.100.20).
15. Save the file (File > Save) and click the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor.
16. Copy the newly modified thisbox.cfg file to the floppy disk for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /tmp/thisbox.cfg /floppy/thisbox.cfg.new
17. Connect to the IDC via FTP again, by entering:
ftp idc
18. When prompted for a username and password to access the IDC via FTP, press the <Return> key.
An FTP prompt (>) appears.
19. Change to the /idc directory on the IDC, by entering:
cd /idc
20. Transfer the updated thisbox.cfg file from the AWS /tmp directory to the IDC /idc directory by enter-
ing:
put thisbox.cfg
21. Disconnect the current FTP session with the IDC by entering:
bye
The FTP connection with the IDC closes and you are returned to the usual ADS command prompt in
the command window. You must now reboot the IDC for the changes to take effect.
22. Make a telnet connection with the IDC by entering:
telnet idc
A -> prompt appears.
23. At the -> prompt, reboot the IDC by entering:
reboot
24. Press the Control and ] keys simultaneously to close the telnet session, then press the Control and
d keys simultaneously to return to the ADS command prompt.

cfg010.fm
6-2 Change the ADS Computer internal IP address

Before you undertake the following steps, ensure that you have already undertaken the steps described
in Change IDC IP Address above.
1. From the Browser, open a command window. Right click on the screen background, select Service
Tools and then select Command Window from the Root Menu pop-up menu.
A command window appears with an ADS prompt.
2. Add the local machine’s host name on the list of machines from which the X Server accepts connec-
tions by entering:
xhost+
su
operator
4. Copy the original /etc/inet/hosts file to the floppy disk for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /etc/inet/hosts /floppy
5. Move to the /usr/openwin/bin/xview directory, by entering:
cd /usr/openwin/bin/xview
6. Open the /etc/inet/hosts file with the textedit command by entering:
textedit /etc/inet/hosts
The /etc/inet/hosts file appears in an X-Windows based TextEdit application window.
7. Within the TextEdit application window, change all of the current Senographe systems IP addresses
from 192.168.1.x to match your preferred new address scheme (e.g. 192.168.100.x).
8. Save the /etc/inet/hosts file (File > Save) and click the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to
exit the editor.

cfg010.fm
9. Copy the newly modified /etc/inet/hosts file to the floppy disk for backup purposes, by entering:
cp /etc/inet/hosts /floppy/hosts.new
10. Ensure that /etc/hosts is a symbolic link to /etc/inet/hosts, by using the following sub-steps:
a. List all the symbolic links associated with the /etc/hosts file by entering:
ls -l /etc/hosts
b. Review the command line output.
If the command line output Then
begins with lrwxrwxrwx and finishes with hosts -> ./inet/hosts the symbolic link is set and
you can go to step 8
does not begin with lrwxrwxrwx and does not finish with the symbolic link is not set
hosts -> ./inet/hosts and you must go to
sub-step c
c. Remove the /etc/hosts file without prompting for confirmation, regardless of the file's permissions,
by entering:
rm -f /etc/hosts
d. Create a symbolic link from /etc/hosts is to /etc/inet/hosts by entering:
ln -s /etc/inet/hosts etc/hosts
11. Copy the original ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file to the floppy disk for backup purposes,
by entering:
cp ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment /floppy
12. Open the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file with the textedit command by entering:
textedit ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment
The ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file appears in an X-Windows based TextEdit applica-
tion window.

cfg010.fm
13. Within the TextEdit application window, on the last line of the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/
light_adjustment script, change the reference of http://192.168.1.10 to match the new address of the
AWS (e.g. 192.168.100.10).
14. Save the ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file (File > Save) and click the button in the top left
of the TextEdit window to exit the editor.
15. Copy the newly modified ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment file to the floppy disk for backup
purposes, by entering:
cp ~sdc/senovision/scripts/light_adjustment /floppy/light_adjustment.new
16. Unmount the floppy disk drive, by entering:
umount /floppy
17. Eject the floppy diskette which contains all of the original backed up files, by entering:
eject
reboot
19. From the Browser, click the Tools menu button and then click Service Desktop to launch the Ser-
vice Desktop. Ensure that the Service Desktop is working as expected.
7 COMPLETION
Make a noticeable entry in the maintenance log book that the internal IP addresses of the Senographe
2000D system have been changed.
8 STEERING GUIDE FOR FUTURE COMPONENT UPGRADES

Be aware that if you ever upgrade the software on any of the Senographe 2000D components in the
future, you must ensure that the internal IP addresses are reconfigured back to their default values
before you run the software upgrade for that component. To do this you would proceed as described in
the following sub sections.
8-1 Steering guide for future AWS software upgrades on the ADS computer
If you want to upgrade the AWS Workstation software on the ADS Computer, proceed as follows:
• Peform Section 6-2, page 182 to reconfigure each of the ADS Computer’s files back to their default
192.168.1.0 network address scheme.
• Run the upgrade of the AWS Workstation software.
Peform Section 6-2, page 182 to reconfigure each of the ADS Computer’s files back to your preferred
network address scheme (e.g. 192.168.100.0 network).
8-2 Steering guide for future software upgrades on the IDC
If you want to upgrade the software on the IDC, proceed as follows:
• Peform Section 6-1, page 180 to reconfigure the IDC back to the default IP address of 192.168.1.20.
• Peform Section 6-2, page 182 to reconfigure each of the ADS Computer’s files back to their default
192.168.1.0 network address scheme.
• Run the upgrade of the software on the IDC.
• Peform Section 6-1, page 180 to reconfigure the IDC back to your preferred IP address (e.g.
192.168.100.20).
Peform Section 6-2, page 182 to reconfigure each of the ADS Computer’s files back to your preferred
network address scheme (e.g. 192.168.100.0 network).

cfg010.fm
CHAPTER 5 CALIBRATION
This chapter contains information for calibration of Senographe 2000 D functions.

Calib.fm
This page is blank.

Calib.fm
Job Card CAL 000 - Calibration Interactions
Job Card CAL 000 - Calibration Interactions Chapter 5
1. CALIBRATION INTERACTIONS
• Many calibration procedures function correctly only if other related calibrations have already been
successfully completed. These are specified as Prerequisite Calibrations in the table below.
• Settings made during calibration procedures may interact with others. It may therefore be necessary
to carry out other procedures (calibrations or checks) after completing a calibration procedure. These
are specified as Post-Completion Requirements in the table below.
Calibration Prerequisite Calibrations Post-Completion Tasks

(If not already done) (Mandatory)
CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor None CAL 003 Tube heater Current
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale Factor None CAL 003 Tube heater Current
CAL 003 Tube heater Current CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor CAL 003 Tube heater Current
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale Factor
CAL 004 Tube mA Measurement
CAL 005 kV Scale Factor
CAL 004 Tube mA Measurement None None
CAL 005 kV Scale Factor CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor CAL 003 Tube heater Current
CAL 006 Comp. Force Detector None None
CAL 007 Breast Thickness CAL 006 Comp. Force Detector None
CAL 008 Minimum Force CAL 006 Comp. Force Detector None
CAL 009 Compression Arm Angle None None
CAL 010 Tube Tilt CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor CAL 011 Beam Alignment
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale Factor CAL 012 Collimator Format
CAL 003 Tube heater Current CAL 013 Bad Pixel
CAL 004 Tube mA Measurement CAL 014 Detector Gain
CAL 005 kV Scale Factor CAL 015 Conversion Factor
CAL 017 AOP
CAL 020 mAs Non-linearity
CAL 011 Beam Alignment CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor VF 008 Flat Field Test
CAL 003 Tube Heater Current
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 012 Collimator Format CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor VF 008 Flat Field Test
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 011 Beam Alignment

cal000.fm

CAL 013 Bad Pixel CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor CAL 014 Detector Gain
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale Factor CAL 015 Conversion Factor
CAL 003 Tube Heater Current CAL 017 AOP
CAL 004 Tube mA Measurement CAL 020 mAs Non-linearity
CAL 005 kV Scale Factor VF 008 Flat Field Test
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 014 Detector Gain CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor If Rh/Rh/LF/nogrid configuration has
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale Factor been calibrated, do:
CAL 003 Tube Heater Current CAL 015 Conversion Factor
CAL 004 Tube mA Measurement CAL 017 AOP
CAL 010 Tube Tilt For all configurations, do:
CAL 011 Beam Alignment VF 008 Flat Field Test
CAL 013 Bad Pixel
CAL 015 Conversion Factor CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor CAL 017 AOP
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale Factor VF 010 Acquisition in AOP Mode
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 012 Collimator Format
CAL 013 Bad Pixel
CAL 014 Detector Gain
CAL 016 Half-Value Layer CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor None
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 017 AOP CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor VF 010 Acquisition in AOP Mode
CAL 006 Comp. Force Detector
CAL 007 Breast Thickness
CAL 009 Compression Arm Angle
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 013 Bad Pixel
CAL 015 Conversion Factor
CAL 018 ISC Monitor None None

cal000.fm

CAL 019 Light Beam CAL 011 Beam Alignment None
CAL 020 mAs Non-linearity CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor None

cal000.fm
This page is blank.

cal000.fm
Job Card CAL 001 - Heater Current Scale Factor.
Job Card CAL 001 - Heater Current Scale Factor. Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• True R.M.S. AC ammeter, e.g.: Fluke 8060, Fluke 87, Fluke 45. HP 3457A, Tektronix DMM 254.
• HV unit/cable adaptor, Part number 36003399.
Notice:
IMPORTANT NOTE: To ensure accurate measurement:
• For ALL Digital Multimeters: The Autorange function MUST NOT be used, as it can lead to severe
measurement errors (>40% !!).
• For ALL Digital Multimeters: The Relative Measurement function MUST NOT be used to reset to zero
the natural offset displayed when there is no current measured. The offset is automatically reset to
zero by the principle of the rms measurement.
• Measurement configurations to be used are as follows:
- Fluke 8060: used with 20 A shunt in the 200 mV AC range (shunt reference: 80J10).
- Fluke 87: no shunt, in the 10 A AC range.
CAUTION
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this calibration proce-
dure, the resulting parameter values might become so unreasonable as to render the X-ray
tube filament supply circuit unusable. This can show up as an error message during
power up, and thus inhibit use of the calibration software. If this happens, the only way to
cancel the error is to manually re-enter the default parameter values (see section 5 for
default parameter values) and switch the Senographe off and back on again before again
attempting a calibration.
4. PREREQUISITES
• If not already done, carry out any procedure(s) specified as Prerequisites for this Job Card in Job
Card CAL 000 - Calibration Interactions on page 187.
5. CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR

The objective is to determine the scale factor K and fixed offset VOF between the X-ray tube filament
current command from the software and the real filament current value obtained. Each tube track has its
own filament supply circuit, so this calibration procedure is to be performed for each of the two tracks.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE K = +9.450E+0 (9.45) AND VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0).
5-1. Preparation
1. Turn the Senographe OFF.
2. Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400-PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy build-up in the HV unit

cal001.fm
during this calibration procedure.

3. Disconnect the Senographe HV cable at the HV tank end.
4. Connect the HV cable to the HV unit HV cable adaptor (36003399).
5. Connect the HV unit HV cable adaptor to the Senographe HV tank.
6. Connect the true r.m.s. AC ammeter in series with the filament being calibrated on the HV unit/cable
adaptor; and place a jumper on the other track (see illustrations 1 and 2).
Note:
1. See “important note” in section 2 to ensure an accurate measurement.
2. Keep the other filament connected in order to avoid error messages when the Senographe is
switched on.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter
From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield
-HT -HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter
Note:
For safety reasons, -HT is permanently connected to ground
ILLUSTRATION 2 - HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM
L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEAD-ON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT. G
POLARIZING TAB C
The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X-ray industry markings (L, S, C, and G). However,
the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe are as follows:
L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply
S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply
C = filament supply return and X-ray tube cathode HV
G = focal bias voltage supply
7. Switch on the Senographe.

cal001.fm
Note:
ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.
8. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board 400-
PL3, see Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure).
5-2. Perform the calibration procedure for the desired X-ray tube track.
1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1 (or TRACK2) /CALIB/1st pt/
CALIB on the X-ray console for the first calibration point.
Note:
The default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.
2. Press the 2nd trigger button (no X-rays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabilizes
(this may take a few seconds).
3. Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.
4. Release the 2nd trigger button.
5. Select SETUP/MeasI on the X-ray console.
6. Enter and confirm the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this first calibration
point.
7. Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the X-ray console for the second calibration point.
Note:
The default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.
8. Press the 2nd trigger button (no X-rays are produced); hold it until the ammeter reading stabilizes
9. Note the filament current value measured by the ammeter.
11. Select SETUP/MeasI on the X-ray console.
12. Enter and confirm the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this second calibration
point.
13. Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the X-ray console. This executes the calculation of the scale
factor and fixed offset of the filament current command from the software.
5-3. Check the calibration accuracy.

1. Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the X-ray console.
Note:
Again, the default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.
5. Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the X-ray console.
Note:
Again, the default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.

cal001.fm

9. The expected results are 4.0 ±0.02 A for the first point and 5.0 ±0.02 A for the second point. If the
results are within these tolerances, the calibration for this X-ray tube track is finished. If the results
are out of tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure in section 5-2 and the check procedure in sec-
tion 5-3 for the same X-ray tube track.
Note:
Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.
If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of cur-
rent for the two points (4.0 and 5.0 A) should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure
is probably not being followed correctly.
10. Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the X-ray console. Note down the calculated values of
scale factor K and offset VOF. The two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the X-ray con-
sole kV dial.
CAUTION
If the value of K is less than +8.000E+0 (8.0), either the calibration procedure was done
incorrectly or there is a hardware defect.
11. Repeat the calibration and check procedures on the other tube track, if necessary.
12. Perform a ”CKSUM”, then turn the system off.
13. Reconnect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400-PL1 connector XJ7; Remove the high
voltage cable adapter. Remember to secure the HV ring Allen screw, to insure proper ground continu-
ity.
6. COMPLETION
• Carry out any procedure(s) specified as Post Completion Requirements for this Job Card in Job Card
CAL 000 - Calibration Interactions on page 187.
• If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe off, then on
again.

cal001.fm
Job Card CAL 002 - X-Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor
Job Card CAL 002 - X-Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Voltmeter
• HV unit / cable adaptor, part number 36003399
CAUTION
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this calibration proce-
dure, the resulting parameter values might become so unreasonable as to render the X-ray
tube focal bias voltage supply circuit unusable. This can show up as an error message
during power up, and thus inhibit use of the calibration software. If this happens, the only
way to cancel the error is to manually re-enter the default parameter values (see section 5
for these values) and switch the Senographe off and back on again before attempting to
repeat the calibration.
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CALIBRATION OF X-RAY TUBE BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR

The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the X-ray tube focal bias
voltage command from the software and the real focal bias voltage value obtained. The focal bias volt-
age applied to the X-ray tube electron beam concentration device establishes the focal spot width.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +9.389E+1 (93.89) AND BETA = +3.801E-2 (0.03801).

cal002.fm
5-1. Preparation
1. Turn the Senographe OFF.
2. Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400-PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy build-up in the HV unit
during this calibration procedure.
3. Disconnect the Senographe HV cable at the HV tank end.
4. Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).
5. Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the Senographe HV tank.
6. Connect a DC voltmeter between common (C) and the focal bias voltage wire (G) (see illustrations 1
and 2).
ILLUSTRATION 1 - HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter
From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield
-HT -HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter
Note:
For safety reasons, -HT is permanently connected to ground
ILLUSTRATION 2 - HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM
L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEAD-ON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT. G
POLARIZING TAB C
S
The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X-ray industry markings (L, S, C and G). However,
the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe are as follows:
L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply
C = filament supply return and X-ray tube cathode HVG = focal bias voltage supply

cal002.fm
5-2. Check focal bias command values

1. Switch on the Senographe.
ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.
2. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch; switch B1 on generator CPU board 400-
PL3, see Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure.
3. Select setup/gene/INSTAL/gene/gene/BIAS/voltage on the X-ray console.
4. Rotate the kV dial in order to check that all four focal bias voltage command values are the same as
the values specified on the label on the X–ray tube housing:
MO/LF = (typical value is +70v)
RH/LF = (typical value is +70v)
MO/SF = (typical value is +250v)
RH/SF = (typical value is +250v)
Modify any values that appear different from these on the tube label by using the CHANGE key, rotat-
ing the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP keys. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Val-
ues” and ”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter xxxxx.
Note:
The bias voltages are repeated on a label inside the generator, above the CPU board.
5-3. Calibration procedure

1. Open the work list and declare a new Patient called "X-ray Tube BIAS cal",
2. First calibration point:
a. Select SETUP/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the X-ray console; press the 2nd trigger button (no X-rays
are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabilizes.
b. Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter; release the 2nd trigger button.
c. Select SETUP/MEASV on the X-ray console.
d. Enter and confirm the measured focal bias voltage value (see Entry of an Alpha-Numeric Value in
Job Card CFG 001 - The X-ray Console on page 121 for information on entering alpha-numeric
values).
3. Second calibration point:
a. Select setup/setup/2nd pt/calib on the X-ray console; press the 2nd trigger button (no X-rays
b. Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter; release the 2nd trigger button.
c. Select setup/MeasV on the X-ray console.
d. Enter and confirm the measured focal bias voltage value.
4. Select setup/setup/calcul/valid on the X-ray console. This calculates of the parameters alpha and
beta. The message CALCUL DONE appears on the X-ray console display.

cal002.fm
5-4. Calibration accuracy check.

1. First calibration point:
a. Select setup/1st pt/calib on the X-ray console; press the 2nd trigger button (no X-rays are pro-
duced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabilizes.
b. Note the measured focal bias voltage value; release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER
THIS MEASURED VALUE.
c. The expected result is the value of MO/LF ±5% (see above).
2. Second calibration point:
a. Select setup/setup/2nd pt/CALIB on the X-ray console; press the 2nd trigger button (no X-rays
b. Note the measured focal bias voltage value; release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER
c. The expected result is the value of MO/SF ±5% (see above).
3. If the results are within the tolerances given, the focal bias voltage calibration is finished. If the results
are out of tolerance, repeat the calibration and check procedures.
Note:
Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.
If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of focal
bias voltage for the two points should become increasingly accurate. If not, check that you are fol-
lowing the procedure correctly.
4. Select setup/setup/setup/param on the X-ray console. Note down the calculated values of parame-
ters alpha and beta. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV dial on
the X-ray console,
5. Delete the previously created patient called "X-ray Tube BIAS cal".
6. Perform a ”CKSUM”, then turn the system OFF.
7. Re-connect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400-PL1 connector XJ7.
8. Remove the high voltage cable adapter. Remember to secure the HV ring correctly using the Allen
screw, to insure proper ground continuity.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal002.fm
Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current
Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
Detector protection steel cover.
WARNING
This procedure produces X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CALIBRATION OF X-RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT

The objective is to determine the X-ray tube heater current required to produce the desired X-ray tube
anode current at a given kV value.
The calibration procedure must be performed on each of the four focal size/track combinations. Four
repetitions of the calibration procedure are therefore necessary.
Three exposures are taken automatically at different kV values. Using the results, the software calcu-
lates the necessary parameters to determine the X-ray tube heater current needed to produce the
desired X-ray tube anode current for all possible kV values.
5-1. Preparation
• Place a lead cover on the top of the image receptor to protect the detector panel from excessive X-
ray doses.
• Enter installation mode on the X-ray console (change the position of installation menu enable switch
B1 on Generator CPU board 400-PL3 if the Senographe has been switched off since the last access
to install menus,)
5-2. Calibration procedure.

1. Open the work list and declare a new Patient called "X-ray Tube Heater current",
2. Select: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB.
Perform the calibration procedure first on the LF/MO focal size/track combination, then on the others
in any order (SF/MO, LF/RH, SF/RH).

cal003.fm
CAUTION
Before proceeding to make exposures, be sure that the detector panel has been protected
from excessive X–ray doses as instructed (by placing a lead cover on the top of the image
receptor).
3. Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO 2,
EXPOSURE NO 3, and CALIBRATION END appear in sequence on the X-ray console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.
Note:
1.Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO WARM appears on
the X-ray console display when tube temperature is too high for taking the next exposure. It is not
necessary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not
exit the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO WARM message disappears, continue
the calibration by pressing and holding the 2nd trigger button.
2. In case of arcing, the software re-attempts the same exposure automatically.
3. The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warm-up may be necessary.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations.
5. Carry out the following steps only if the warning message Limited Ich (limited heater current) is dis-
played on the X-ray console at the end of the tube current calibration. This message indicates that
one or more filament heating current values were calculated above 5.6 A (but internally limited to
5.600 A when stored in memory); the message is only a warning and is not associated with an error
code. Proceed as follows:
a. Access the Senographe installation menu to read the heater parameters with the LF/MO combi-
nation (the path is: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/HEATER/LF/MO/Param/I-
Value).
b. Explore the 28 kV/A combinations; note the kV values showing a current value equal to 5.600 A.
c. Repeat steps a and b for the LF/RH combination (there is a very low probability of current limita-
tion occurring in small focus).
d. Return to Application Mode (press SETUP).
e. Set the Senographe for 2-point exposure technique at 60 mAs. Make an exposure for each kV
point detected at 5.600 A (LF/MO and LF/RH). Allow at least 60 seconds between each expo-
sure.
f. Repeat steps a and b: If no more kV points are set to 5.600 A, the problem has been resolved. If
one or more points still show a current value of 5.600 A, repeat Job Card CAL 001 - Heater Cur-
rent Scale Factor. on page 191, then restart this procedure from step a above. If the problem
recurs, replace the X-ray tube

cal003.fm
5-3. Check results.

1. Be sure that the gantry presence parameters PRES_A, PRES_IDC, and PRES_ADC are set to yes
before proceeding.
2. Activate the display of parameters following an exposure (select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/
CONFIG/DISP/YES).
3. Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.
4. Set up the Senographe for a manual (2-point) exposure at 30 kV and 60 mAs. For each of the four
focal size/track combination, take an exposure following a 3–second preparation time. Note the
resulting X-ray tube anode currents displayed on the X-ray console display.
Note:
A lower mAs value would decrease the measurement accuracy.
5. Expected X-ray tube anode currents for each focal size/track combination are:
LF/MO - 100 mA ± 5% (± DVM accuracy)
SF/MO - 40 mA ± 5% (± DVM accuracy)
LF/RH - 75 mA ± 5% (± DVM accuracy)
SF/RH - 40 mA ± 5% (± DVM accuracy)
6. Delete the prevously created patient called "X-ray Tube Heater current" .
If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe off, then on again.

cal003.fm
This page is blank.

cal003.fm
Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measurement
Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measurement Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Milliammeter
None
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CALIBRATION OF X-RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT

The objective is to determine the scale factor F/mA between the X-ray tube mA measurement input to
the software and the real X-ray tube mA value.
The default parameter value is F/mA = +1.000E+3 (1000) Hz/mA
CAUTION
DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701-PL1 at any point in this
procedure.
5-1. Preparation
1. Turn off the Senographe.
2. Remove strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board
701-PL1.
3. Connect the milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA
board 701-PL1. Set the milliammeter to its 100 mA DC scale.
4. Turn on the Senographe.
5. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board 400-
PL3).
5-2. Perform the calibration procedure.

1. Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/mA_meas/CALIB/CALIB
on the X-ray console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701-PL1 and HOLD IT
DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While still holding SW2 down,
select MEASUR on the X-ray console (this request for a measurement of X-ray tube current is
needed by the calibration software, but the value displayed on the X-ray console at this point is of no
importance to the service engineer). Release pushbutton SW2.
2. Select SETUP/I_MEAS on the X-ray console. Enter the value of current (in milliamperes) read from
the milliammeter by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of
Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Job Card

cal004.fm
Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measurement
CFG 001 - The X-ray Console on page 121.

Note:
Only values between +4.000E+1 (40) and +6.000E+1 (60) mA are accepted by the calibration soft-
ware. An error message appears on the X-ray console display if a value outside of this range is
entered.
3. Select SETUP/CALCUL/VALID on the X-ray console to execute the calculation. If the calculated F/
mA value is between 850 and 1150 mA calib END appears on the X-ray console display - if it is not,
then an error message appears.
5-3. Check results.

1. Select SETUP/CALIB on the X-ray console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701-
PL1 and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While still
holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the X-ray console. Verify that the measurement on the X-ray
console display now corresponds to the value read on the milliammeter ±400 µA ± milliammeter
error. Release pushbutton SW2. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
2. Change the milliammeter scale to 200 mA DC. Press pushbutton SW1 on generator kV/mA board
701-PL1 and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter (the
current should be approximately 120 mA). While still holding SW1 down, select MEASUR on the X-
ray console. Verify that the difference between the measurement on the X-ray console display and
the value read on the milliammeter is less than 2.4 mA. Release pushbutton SW1. DO NOT ENTER
3. Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the X-ray console and note down the displayed value of F/mA.
5. Turn off the Senographe.
6. Disconnect the milliammeter and replace the strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and
MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board 701-PL1.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal004.fm
Job Card CAL 005 - Calibration of kV Scale Factor
Job Card CAL 005 - Calibration of kV Scale Factor Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• RMI 232 or Rad Cal 4082 kV peak meter is recommended. Keithley 35080 may be used when RMI
232 or Rad Cal 4082 is not available on site.
Note:
The calibration curve attached to the meter (a curve obtained during periodic recalibration of the
meter) must be used to correct the meter reading throughout this procedure.
• Lead sheet.
CAUTION
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR

The objective is to determine the scale factor G and offset VOF between the X-ray tube kV command
from the software and the real kV value obtained.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE G = +6.554E+1 (65.54) and VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0)
CAUTION
Procedure.
5-1. Preparation
1. Set up the Senographe in the following configuration:
- no compression paddle
- maximum magnification mode (the purpose here is simply to reduce the distance between the kV
peak meter and the X-ray source - see applicable documentation for minimum acceptable dis-
tance from X-ray source, if any).
2. Install a lead sheet on the top of the image receptor (to protect the detector from excessive exposure
to X-rays).
3. Place the kV peak meter chamber on the magnification device. Turn it on and set it to the MO/MO
position. Set the waveform selector to CP (constant potential). For Rad Cal 4082, turn it on by press-
ing the "normal" button.
4. Use the Senographe light centering device to center the kV peak meter target with the X-ray zone.

cal005.fm
5. Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1
on generator CPU board 400-PL3).
Note:
GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
5-2. Perform the calibration procedure.

1. Open the work list and declare a new Patient called "X-ray Tube kV scale factor"
2. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/KV/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the X-ray console.
Note:
By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 1st point is 25 kV.
3. Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. CALIBRATION
END appears on the X-ray console display. Release the 2nd trigger button. Note down the kV value
displayed on the kV peak meter.
Note:
If for some reason this exposure has to be repeated, select SETUP/CALIB on the X-ray console
before pressing the 2nd trigger button again.
4. Select SETUP/kV_M on the X-ray console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of Parameter Values and
Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Job Card Job Card CAL 000 - Cali-
bration Interactions on page 187.
Note:
By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 2nd point is 40 kV. Due to Senog-
raphe software, the Mo filter remains selected.
6. Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. CALIBRATION
END appears on the X-ray console display. Release the 2nd trigger button. Note down the kV value
displayed on the kV peak meter.
Note:
If for some reason this exposure has to be repeated, select SETUP/CALIB on the X-ray console
before pressing the 2nd trigger button again.
Note:
Select SETUP/kV_M on the X-ray console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by
using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See sections 2-8 and 2-9 in Job Card
7. Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the X-ray console to execute the calculation. Normally, KV
CALIB END appears on the X-ray console display. The message OUT OF RANGE the X-ray console
display indicates either faulty kV measurement(s) in the steps above, or a hardware failure.
5-3. Check results.

1. Leave the Senographe set up as given in step 1 of section 5-1, with the kV peak meter on the cas-
sette holder, and select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the X-ray console.
2. Press the exposure button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRATION
END” appears on the X-ray console display. Release the 2nd trigger button. Note down the kV value
displayed on the kV peak meter. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

cal005.fm
3. The kV value read on the kV peak meter should be 25 kV ± 0.3 kV.

Note:
The generator kVp accuracy is ±1% (one per cent) when measured just after a calibration.
CAUTION
Before proceeding to make exposures, be sure that the detector has been protected from
excessive X–ray doses as instructed (by placing a lead sheet on the top of the image
receptor).
5. Press the exposure button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRATION
END” appears on the X-ray console display. Release the 2nd trigger button. Note down the kV value
displayed on the kV peak meter. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
6. The kV value read on the RMI kV peak meter should be 40 kV ± 0.4 kV.
Note:
The generator kVp accuracy is ±1% (one per cent) when measured just after a calibration.
Note:
If the need should arise to check this point in application mode, it is not possible to do so because
exposures at 40 kV are prohibited with the Mo filter in application mode.
7. Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the X-ray console. Note down the displayed values of G
and VOF by rotating the kV dial.
8. Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode,
9. Delete the previously created Patient called "X-ray Tube kV scale factor".
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal005.fm
This page is blank.

cal005.fm
Job Card CAL 006 - Calibration of Compression Force Detector
Job Card CAL 006 - Calibration of Compression Force Detector Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Calibrated force detector capable of measuring compression force between the compression paddle
and the image receptor; required accuracy ±0.5 daN. The Mammo compression scale Part No. 46–
194427P407 is recommended.
None
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR

The objective is to calibrate the compression force detector.
WARNING
If a power line failure occurs during the calibration (before a checksum is done), it is man-
datory to repeat this calibration from the beginning.
5-1. Preparation
Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on
Note:
5-2. Perform the calibration.

1. Set up the Senographe in the following configuration:
- Arm rotation at 0°
- Contact mode
- Any compression paddle installed
2. Raise the compression paddle and place the force detector on the image receptor.
3. Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/FORCE/CALIB/
MEASURE on the X-ray console.
4. With the compression paddle completely raised and out of contact (i.e. in its home position), press
the 0daN key on the X-ray console.
5. Lower the compression paddle into contact with the force detector. Using the compression fine-
adjustment knob, adjust the compression to exactly 3 daN on the force detector.
6. Press the 3daN key on the X-ray console.

cal006.fm
Job Card CAL 006 - Calibration of Compression Force Detector
7. Still using the compression fine-adjustment knob, increase the compression to exactly 6 daN on the
force detector.
8. Press the 6daN key on the X-ray console.
9. Continue this process for 9 and 12 daN, then press the 1 ->2 key on the X-ray console and proceed
with 15, 18, 21, 24, and 27 daN.
10. Select SETUP/CALCUL on the X-ray console. This executes the calculation of the new force detec-
tor calibration parameters.
12. Request a total decompression of the compression paddle (the paddle must return to its home posi-
tion).
5-3. Check results.

1. With the arm at 0° (i.e. X-ray tube above the image receptor), bring the compression paddle into con-
tact once again with the force detector. Increase the compression until maximum force is reached
(i.e. compression cannot be further increased). Read the force detector measurement and check that
it is within ±1 daN of the maximum compression force chosen in the SETUP/MEDICAL/FORCE
menu.
2. Repeat the above check with the arm rotated to 180° (i.e. X-ray tube below the image receptor).
Note:
The maximum compression force must never exceed 30 daN. This limit must always be checked
after any maintenance (preventive or corrective) of the compression assembly to insure patient
safety.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal006.fm
Job Card CAL 007 - Calibration of Breast Thickness Measurement
Job Card CAL 007 - Calibration of Breast Thickness Measurement Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Plexiglass in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 mm)
None
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT

The objective is to calibrate the breast thickness measurement. Since the compression paddle and its
drive train, as well as the image receptor or magnification device undergo deflection when under com-
pression, a compensation factor must be calculated to correct for changes in compression force at a
fixed breast thickness.
Two calibrations must be done, one for contact mode and one for magnification mode.
5-1. Prepare the Senographe for the calibration.

Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on
Note:
This must be done only if the Senographe has been switched off since the last access to SETUP/
5-2. Perform contact mode calibration.

1. Set up the Senographe in contact mode with the 19 x 23 compression paddle installed.
2. Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position.
Note:
This MUST be done before entering the gantry installation menus.
3. Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/THICK/CONTACT/
CALIB on the X-ray console.
4. Lower the compression paddle into contact with the image receptor. Using the compression fine-
adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display
panel. Press the <5daN key on the X-ray console.
5. Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
>15daN key on the X-ray console. The Calcul key appears on the X-ray console display.
6. Press the Calcul key on the X-ray console. This executes the calibration calculation for contact mode.
5-3. Check the contact mode calibration results.

1. Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.

cal007.fm
Job Card CAL 007 - Calibration of Breast Thickness Measurement
2. Keeping the Senographe in contact mode, place 40 mm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
3. Lower the compression paddle into contact with the plexiglass.
4. Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the gan-
try display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not exceed
the range of 35 to 45 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, ± 5 mm).
5-4. Perform the magnification mode calibration.

1. Install the magnification device and the 19 x 23 compression paddle.
2. Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/THICK/MAGNIF/CALIB on the X-ray console.
3. Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position, using the appropriate
pedal.
4. Lower the compression paddle into contact with the magnification device. Using the compression
fine-adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display
panel. Press the <5daN key on the X-ray console.
5. Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
>15daN key on the X-ray console. The Calcul key appears on the X-ray console display.
6. Press the Calcul key on the X-ray console. This executes the calibration calculation for magnification
mode.
5-5. Check the magnification mode calibration results.

1. Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.
2. Place 40 mm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
4. Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the gan-
try display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary out-
side the range of 37 to 43 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, ± 3 mm).
5-6. Return the Senographe to its normal state.

2. If you are handing the system back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe off, then back on
again.

cal007.fm
Job Card CAL 008 - Compression/Decompression Minimum Force
Job Card CAL 008 - Compression/Decompression Minimum Force Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• A 3 kg weight suitably sized to allow it to be placed on top of the compression paddle.
None.
4. PREREQUISITES
5. MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS

The objectives are:
• Check that a compression force (limit IC: In Compression) of at least 22 daN can be reached when
the arm is rotated by 180° with the paddle drive motor current limit value set between 50% and 70%
(motor’s maximum current rating).
• Check that a decompression force (limit OC: Out of Compression) of at least 3 daN can be reached
when the arm is at 0° with the paddle drive motor current limit value set to 65% of the motor’s maxi-
mum current rating (this ensures that the compression paddle will rise and stay up when decompres-
sion is requested).
5-1. Prepare the Senographe

1. Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1
on generator CPU board 400-PL3).
Note:
This must be done only if the Senographe has not been switched off since the last access to
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL.
2. Set up the Senographe in contact mode with a compression paddle installed.
3. Inhibit the cassette detection in medical menu: starting from application mode, select: SETUP/MEDI-
CAL/FILM/NO
5-2. Check and adjust the limit IC

1. Starting from application mode, select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the X-ray console. Check
that the limit IC is set between 50% and 70% for the motor current value and perform the test.
2. Rotate the arm to 180° (i.e., X-ray tube below the image receptor).
3. Bring the compression paddle into contact with the image receptor.
Note:
Be ready to read the compression force displayed on the gantry readout unit. The paddle should
release and fall towards the tube housing for a compression close to 22 daN.

cal008.fm
Job Card CAL 008 - Compression/Decompression Minimum Force
4. Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing. If the compression paddle releases for a force
lower or higher than 22 daN, perform the following adjustment ; otherwise go straight to section 5-3.
a. Set up the limit IC to its minimum: Starting from application mode, select
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the X-ray console.Use the
+ and – key on the X-ray console to set the motor current value to 50%. Enter this values with the
VAL key on the X-ray console.
b. Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to
reach 22 daN without the compression paddle releasing.
c. If the compression paddle releases before a force of 22 daN is reached, increase the compres-
sion motor current value by 5%, then try again to reach 22 daN. Continue increasing the maxi-
mum in compression motor current value in steps of 5%, if necessary, until 22 daN can be
reached.
Note:
Between each compression, request a total decompression of the compression paddle, using the
appropriate footswitch.
5-3. Check the limit OC.

1. Rotate the arm to 0° (i.e., X-ray tube above the cassette holder).
2. Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.
3. Select SETUP/LIMIT_OC on the X-ray console. The maximum motor current value (in decompres-
sion mode) should be set to 65% otherwuise use the + and – key on the X-ray console to set this
value. Enter this value with the VAL key on the X-ray console and return to the application menu.
4. Place the 3 kg weight on top of the compression paddle.
5. Request a total decompression of the compression paddle using the appropriate pedal. The com-
pression paddle must rise smoothly to its home position.
6. If the compression paddle slips or releases, check that the compression paddle drive belt is not slip-
ping. If it is slipping, adjust or replace the belt.
Note:
The maximum out-of-compression motor current adjustment range is limited to 65%.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal008.fm
Job Card CAL 009 - Compression Arm Angle Calibration
Job Card CAL 009 - Compression Arm Angle Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• None
• None (calibration is performed from the X-ray console; no X-rays are required).
4. PREREQUISITES
5. PROCEDURE
Note:
The compression arm angle must be calibrated for automatic selection of view names.
Note:
The sign convention for Senographe 2000 D applications is illus- 0°
trated here, shown looking at the tube head or chest wall of the Se-
nographe. + -
180°
1. Turn the Compression arm clockwise to the mechanical stop (-178°).

2. Set MIN compression arm rotation value:
arm/valid/instal/calib/angle/calib/MIN
3. Turn the Compression arm counterclockwise to the mechanical stop (+178°)
4. Set MAX compression arm rotation value:
Select: MAX
5. Perform calculation:
Select: CALCUL
6. Go up the menu and perform cksum
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal009.fm
Job Card CAL 009 - Compression Arm Angle Calibration
This page is blank.

cal009.fm
Job Card CAL 010 - Tube Tilt Calibration
Job Card CAL 010 - Tube Tilt Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• None.
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
• All detector calibrations must have been cleared (select Service desktop/Calibration/Detector; then
selectClear Calibrations and perform the clear procedure as indicated on the screen).
5. CALIBRATION OF X-RAY TUBE TILT

The objective is to determine the X-ray tube angle when in its reference position. This calibration is done
by taking an exposure with the field coverage depth limited by the anode geometry (and not by the rear
collimator blade), measuring this field coverage depth, and entering this depth into the Senographe,
which can then calculate the X-ray tube angle when in its reference position.
Notice:
DO NOT perform Tube Tilt Calibration unless it is strictly necessary (e.g., after tube replace-
ment or when there is clear evidence of bad calibration parameters).
BEFORE performing Tube Tilt Calibration, clear all detector calibrations (select Service
desktop/Calibration/Detector; then selectClear Calibrations and perform the clear procedure as in-
dicated on the screen).
AFTER performing Tube Tilt Calibration, it is essential to perform the following CAL Job Cards:
- Job Card CAL 013 - Bad Pixel Calibration on page 225.
- Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration on page 229 (for all techniques).
- Job Card CAL 015 - Conversion Factor Measurement on page 231.
- Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration on page 237.
5-1. Procedure
• Before performing this calibration, make an exposure in normal application mode; check that the red
X-ray inhibition light is not on, and no errors are reported. The exposure required by the calibration is
not made correctly if the detector temperature is out of range; the pre-exposure is aborted and
relaunched as long as the exposure button is pressed, but no exposure is possible. Error messages

cal010.fm
Job Card CAL 010 - Tube Tilt Calibration
may be confusing or non-existent.
1. Select Service Desktop from the Browser Toolkit menu.

2. Click the Calibrations button, then the Tube Tilt button.
3. A full screen appears on the AWS monitor.
4. On the X-ray console, parameters are automatically set to HOUSING ANGULATION CALIB.
5. Remove Bucky and compression paddle. No phantom should be present.
6. Press EXPOSE on the X-ray console.
7. Verify that the mAs are set to 25, press VALID/VALID.
8. When the message "ADJUST EXPOSURE" is displayed, press and hold the exposure button (no
PREP) while the calibration exposure is taken.
Be sure to hold the button until the message "Calibration End" is displayed.
The screen displays the measured chest wall to anode heel distance (for information only).
Note:
Do not try to make another exposure at this point without terminating the calibration. If you want to
re-calibrate, first end the current calibration by performing the next step (press SETUP/SETUP),
then restart the calibration from step 2.
9. Press SETUP/SETUP. The message "HOUSING ANGULATION CALIB calibration OK". should be
displayed. If an error is detected, repeat the calibration.
10. To exit the calibration, press SETUP on the X-ray console.
11. Click the Refresh button on the CAL SUMMARY page to update the calibration date.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal010.fm
Job Card CAL 011 - X-ray Beam Alignment Calibration
Job Card CAL 011 - X-ray Beam Alignment Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• Screw driver to open cover.
• Set of metric Allen wrenches.
• 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
Note:
Before performing this calibration, make an exposure in normal application mode. Check that the
red X-ray inhibition light is not on, and no errors are reported. The exposures required by the cal-
ibration are not made correctly if the detector temperature is out of range; the pre-exposure is
aborted and relaunched as long as the exposure button is pressed, but no exposure is possible.
Error messages may be confusing or non-existent.
5. DESCRIPTION
The calibration function automatically calculates and displays measurements indicating the position of
the X-ray beam in relation to the detector. It uses these measurements to determine whether the calibra-
tion was successful. If so, no further action is required.
If an error is signalled, you must use the displayed values to determine the source of the problem and
make appropriate adjustments before repeating the calibration. Two checks are required:
• Collimator Blade Parallelism. Use the displayed angles to check for correct parallelism of the two
pairs of collimator blades; adjust the collimator position if necessary.
• Lateral Centering of X-ray Beam. Use the displayed values to check for correct positioning of the
beam on the detector; adjust the beam position if necessary.
Notice:
The Collimator Blade Parallelism check must be completed, and any errors corrected, before mak-
ing the Lateral Centering of X-ray Beam check.

cal011.fm
6. PROCEDURE
1. Remove the bucky or breast holder and remove the compression paddle. No phantom should be
present
2. From the Service Desktop, click the Calibration button and select X-ray Alignment. Exposure param-
eters are automatically set by the system.
3. Press EXPOSE on the X-ray console
4. Verify that mAs is set to 25 and press VALID/VALID
5. On the X-ray console, parameters are automatically set to PARAL. CENTERING PROCESS.
6. When the message ADJUST EXPOSURE is displayed, press and hold the exposure button (no
PREP) until an exposure has been taken and the message "calibration end" is displayed (about 10
seconds).
7. The system uses the acquired image to assess the position of the collimator and displays a list of
measurements. Disregard these measurements at this time.
8. Press SETUP/SETUP. The message "calibration OK" should be displayed.
9. If an error is signalled, follow the instructions given in the section "Error Actions".
7. ERROR ACTIONS
7-1. Measurements
If an error is signalled, first note the values displayed on the screen and use them in the calculations
described below:
Displayed Measurement Value Units Comment
Distance from detector center to front blade mm
Distance from detector center to rear blade mm Not used for service
Distance from detector center to left blade mm

Distance from detector center to right blade mm
Angle between detector column and front blade radians
Angle between detector column and rear blade radians Use for collimator blade
parallelism
Angle between detector row and left blade radians
Angle between detector row and right blade radians
Distance from detector edge to left blade mm
Distance from detector edge to right blade mm Use for X-ray beam
lateral centering
Lateral offset mm

cal011.fm
7-2. Collimator Blade Parallelism check

Perform the instructions of this section only if an error is signalled. They must be completed, and adjust-
ments made if necessary, before continuing with the Lateral Centering check.
1. After performing the calibration measurement as described above, note the displayed angular values
(shown in the table below with references α1 through α4):
2. Calculate the differences |α1 - α2| and |α3 - α4|.
3. Check the displayed and calculated angles against the maximum values given in the table::
Displayed and calculated angles Ref. Value (radians)
Actual Maximum
Angle between detector column and front blade |α1| 0.007
Angle between detector column and rear blade |α2| 0.007
Angle between detector row and left blade |α3| 0.008
Angle between detector row and right blade |α4| 0.008
Calculate the difference between α1 and α2 |α1 - α2| 0.018
Calculate the difference between α3 and α4 |α3 - α4| 0.016
4. If all values are less than the maxima given in the table, no action is necessary; the check is com-
plete, and you can proceed to check lateral centering of the X-ray beam.
5. If any value exceeds that given in the table, proceed as follows:
• If the value |α1 - α2| is greater than 0.018 radians,
or the value |α3 - α4| is greater than 0.016 radians,
Change the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.
• If the displayed value for |α1| exceeds 0.007 radians:
- Loosen the collimator assembly mounting slightly; adjust the front blade position as required and
secure the assembly
- Press SETUP once; repeat the calibration measurement to check the new position.
- Repeat as necessary until the criterion for α1 is met.
• If the displayed value for |α2|, |α3|, or |α4| exceeds the value given:
Change the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.

cal011.fm
7-3. Lateral Centering of X-ray Beam check

Carry out this procedure only if an error has been signalled and all angles calculated in the Collimator
Blade Parallelism procedure are within the specified limits.
1. After performing the calibration measurement as described above, note the displayed Lateral offset,
which is the measurement t2 - t1 (see diagram).
Detector FOV
Collimator
t1 t2
Chest Wall
2. If offset⏐t2 -t1⏐ is equal to or less than 1 mm, no adjustment is required; the procedure is complete.
3. If offset⏐t2 -t1⏐is greater than 1 mm, the beam position must be adjusted. Proceed as follows:
7-3-1. Adjustment
• If the offset ⏐t2 -t1⏐is greater than 1 mm adjust the beam position as follows:
- If t2 -t1 is POSITIVE, adjust from the LEFT side of housing.
If t2 -t1 is NEGATIVE, adjust from the RIGHT side of housing
1. Place the 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket around the adjustment screw locknut on the side of the
collimator housing (right or left as determined above).
2. Holding the adjustment screw in the center of the locknut in place with the 2.5 mm Allen wrench,
loosen the locknut.
3. Use the 2.5 mm Allen wrench to UNSCREW (turn COUNTER-clockwise) the adjustment screw
according to the formula: NUMBER OF TURNS = 0.2 x (t2 -t1).
4. While holding the adjustment screw in place, tighten the locknut.
5. On the OPPOSITE side; loosen the adjustment screw locknut. TIGHTEN (turn CLOCKWISE) the
adjustment screw until snug, then re-tighten the locknut.
6. After adjustment, press SETUP once and repeat the Beam Position Measurement procedure.
7. Repeat the measurement and adjustment until the offset ⏐t2 -t1⏐ < 1 mm.
7-3-2. After adjustment
• After making any adjustments, repeat the calibration. When all required actions have been com-
pleted, press SETUP three times on the X-ray console and click the Refresh button to validate. The
CAL SUMMARY page is updated for the X-ray beam alignment.
• If any adjustments were required to correct the X-ray beam alignment, carry out the procedures given
in Calibration Job Card Job Card CAL 012 - Collimator Format Calibration on page 223.
8. COMPLETION
again.

cal011.fm
Job Card CAL 012 - Collimator Format Calibration
Job Card CAL 012 - Collimator Format Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• None.
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Presentation
The collimator blade movement must be calibrated in order to produce the different fields of view (large,
medium, or small) on the detector. The exact magnification of the collimator blades must be calibrated.

cal012.fm
Job Card CAL 012 - Collimator Format Calibration
5-2. Description
1. Select Service Desktop from the Browser Toolkit menu; click the “Calibrations” button, then the “Col-
limator Format” button.
2. A full screen appears on AWS monitor.
3. On the X-ray console, parameters are automatically set to COLLIMATOR FORMAT CALIB.
4. Remove Bucky and compression paddle. No phantom should be present.
5. Press EXPOSE on the X-ray console.
6. Verify that the mAs are set to 25; press VALID/VALID.
7. When the message “ADJUST EXPOSURE” is displayed, press and hold the Exposure button (no
PREP) while three exposures are taken. Be sure to hold the button until the “Calibration end” mes-
sage is displayed (about 45 seconds). A table of measurements is displayed; they have no signifi-
cance for this procedure.
8. Press SETUP/SETUP. You should have the message Calibration OK.
If a Calibration error message is displayed, repeat the calibration.
10. Click the “Refresh” button on the CAL SUMMARY page to update the calibration date.
5-3. Error messages

• If Calibration errors persist, first check that the X-ray Beam Alignment Calibration has been correctly
carried out. Then verify the status of the collimator blades and motor, and change them if necessary.
• Collimator blades are not detected within detector FOV. This error occurs when the collimator blades
do not enter the field of view for medium and small format. It usually indicates a failure in the step
motor.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal012.fm
Job Card CAL 013 - Bad Pixel Calibration
Job Card CAL 013 - Bad Pixel Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
- Flat Field phantom (25 mm lucite).
Notice: The lucite must be clean and free from scratches. This is essential to avoid incorrect detec-
tion of dead pixels.
WARNING
These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
• It is strongly recommended to perform bad pixel calibration when the detector has not been used for
a while (typically on a Monday morning if the detector is not used over the weekend).
• The temperature of the detector must be stabilized and within the specified Image Quality range
before starting and during bad pixel calibration.
• The X-ray Console must be in the Medical Application menu.
• There is no medical exam opened in ADS. If an exam is opened on ADS, close it before starting the
calibration.
5. BAD PIXEL CALIBRATION

5-1. Description
A Bad Pixel is an Image Receptor cell which has a response curve very different from that of other cells
subject to the same dose, even after flat field correction. It thus provides no useful information, and
appears as a white or black pixel on the image.
Bad Pixel Calibration is a process which uses a number of acquisitions to identify such cells and store
their positions in a Bad Pixel Map. The bad pixel correction process, applied to acquired images, uses
the map to replace the level read from each bad pixel with the mean level of neighboring cells.
Notice:
It is important that the phantom used in these procedures, and all surfaces in the beam (detector,
tube, etc.) be very clean and free from imperfections, which can affect the calibration.

cal013.fm
5-2. Procedure
Notice:
Before starting the calibration, check that the Conditioner temperature has stabilized at:
- 20°C ±2°C for systems with Detector 1.0.
- 26°C ±2°C for systems with Detector 1.1.
1. Remove the Bucky and remove the compression paddle.
2. Open the Service Desktop; click the Calibration button and select Detector Calibration, after Sum-
mary display, click again on Detector.
3. Select Bad pixel and Start; follow the on-screen instructions to run the calibration.
4. The IDC automatically acquires 16 offset images (no X-rays) and computes results.
5. When the offset acquisitions and calculations are complete, you are requested to install the Flat Field
phantom (25 mm of lucite) on the Image Detector.
6. The parameters are automatically set to Rh/Rh 30kV, 11mAs. Take one acquisition for Image Quality.
The IDC computes a first image quality check. If the result is OK, the Bad Pixel Calibration can con-
tinue.
7. The parameters are automatically set to Rh/Rh; 30 kV; 56 mAs. Take four exposures. Release the
Prep and Expose buttons between each exposure. Wait a few seconds between acquisitions until the
exposures status is updated in ADS Service Desktop page.
8. You are requested to make a low dose exposure. The parameters are automatically set to Rh/Rh;
30kV; 5.6mAs.
9. You are requested to make a high dose exposure using the following parameters: Rh/Rh; 30 kV;
80mAs.
10. The IDC uses the acquired images to create the bad pixel map. This image map will be used for sub-
sequent image correction.
11. The bad pixel results are displayed on the screen in the form of a table indicating Pass or Fail for all
tested specifications.
5-3. Errors
Exposure abort during calibration
• If the X-ray exposure is aborted during bad pixel calibration, the buzzer sounds and the calibration is
terminated at the end of the current set of exposures. The calibration must be started again.
Failures detected in the Results Column at the end of Calibration
• If any failure is reported, check to see if the collimator blades are within the detector FOV. If so, cor-
rect the problem and try again.
• If an Isolated bad pixels failure is reported, check detector temperature and repeat the calibration
when the temperature is correct.
• If a Cluster or Bad Columns failure is reported, check the Flat Field phantom for imperfections such
as scratches or dust, and repeat the calibration after correction.
• When a Bad Columns failure is reported, also check that the floppy disk supplied with the detector
was correctly loaded when the Image Receptor was installed, as instructed in Job Card D/R 103 -
Image Receptor on page 547. It contains bad column information specific to the detector.

cal013.fm
6. COMPLETION
• After completing the Bad Pixel calibration, Gain Calibration must be performed for all techniques
(perform Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration on page 229).
again.

cal013.fm
This page is blank.

cal013.fm
Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration
Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• Flat Field phantom (25 mm lucite).
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
• It is strongly recommended to perform bad pixel calibration when the detector has not been used for
a while and when Flat Field test fails.
• The Senographe must be in the Medical Application menu.
• If an exam is opened on ADS, close it before starting the calibration.
5. DETECTOR GAIN CALIBRATION

5-1. Principle
The goal of gain calibration is to compensate for differences in pixel responses. This calibration allows
an image of a flat uniform object to look flat (flat field uniformity).
5-2. Procedure
1. From Browser open the Service Desktop; click the Calibration button and select Detector Gain Cali-
bration, after Summary display, click again on Detector.
2. Before starting the calibration, follow the on-screen instructions for pre-requisites.
3. Select the configuration that you want to calibrate and Initialize.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the system:
- Remove/Install the Bucky
- Remove the compression paddle
- Install the flat field phantom on the Image Receptor / Magnification Device.
5. You are requested to check that the collimator is in full FOV, and then to make an exposure for a first
image quality check. The IQ checks technique and parameters are selected automatically.
6. If the check is successful you are requested to make four exposures for gain calibration. The system
selects the calibration technique and parameters.
7. The system uses information from the four exposures to update the gain map; a message is dis-
played to indicate successful completion.
8. Repeat the procedure for each of the listed techniques.

cal014.fm
Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration
The following table lists the techniques to be calibrated, with specified parameters and configurations.
Technique for calibra- Exp. IQ check technique; Configuration

tion Calibration technique
1 Mo/Mo 26 kV 64 mAs, LF; Bucky installed, no paddle.

Mo/Mo/LF/grid Phantom on bucky.
4 Mo/Mo 26 kV 320 mAs, LF
1 Mo/Mo 26 kV 32 mAs, LF; No bucky, no paddle.

Mo/Mo/LF/nogrid Phantom on image receptor.
4 Mo/Mo 26 kV 160 mAs, LF
1 Rh/Rh 30 kV 22 mAs, LF; Bucky installed, no paddle.

Rh/Rh/LF/grid Phantom on bucky
4 Rh/Rh 30 kV 110 mAs, LF
1 Rh/Rh 30 kV 11 mAs, LF; No bucky, no paddle.

Rh/Rh/LF/nogrid Phantom on image receptor.
4 Rh/Rh 30 kV 56 mAs, LF
1 Mo/Mo 26 kV 64 mAs, SF; No bucky, no paddle.

Mo/Mo/SF/nogrid/mag Phantom on mag. device (1.8;
4 Mo/Mo 26 kV 160 mAs, SF middle hole).
1 Rh/Rh 30 kV 20 mAs, SF; No bucky, no paddle.

Rh/Rh/SF/nogrid/mag Phantom on mag. device (1.8;
4 Rh/Rh 30 kV 100 mAs, SF middle hole).
6. ERROR ACTIONS
If an error is found, an error message is displayed, with a request for further action. Possible error mes-
sages are:
1. IQ check failed - Detector not ready. You are informed that the IQ check failed because the check for
detector lag failed, or because the detector temperature was outside limits. You are then requested to
try the test again after a 15 minute delay or after the detector temperature has stabilized.
2. IQ check failed - system configuration is not OK. You are asked to repeat the IQ check after checking
the system configuration (phantom position, removal of paddle, collimator in field of view).
7. COMPLETION
again.

cal014.fm
Job Card CAL 015 - Conversion Factor Measurement
Job Card CAL 015 - Conversion Factor Measurement Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• RADCAL Dosimeter (6 cc chamber).
• Dosimeter support with steel protection sheet.
• IQST standard phantom p/n 2222686
WARNING
This procedure requires the use of X–rays. Take all due precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
5. CONVERSION FACTOR MEASUREMENT

5-1. Description
The X-ray dose accumulated for the acquired image (measured with the dosimeter) is compared, by the
IDC, with the brightness of the acquired image. The obtained result represents the conversion factor
ratio. This ratio will be used by the system to convert brightness to dose, among thus for all AOP-related
calculations. The brightness and dose values are also sent to the AWS for the image quality tests.
5-2. Procedure
1. Close medical Exam if required.
2. Open the Service Desktop; click the Calibration button and select Detector/Detector/CF Measure-
ment.
3. Before starting the calibration, follow the on-screen instructions for pre-requisites.
4. Select Conversion Factor Measurement and start.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions:
a. Remove the bucky and the compression paddle.
b. Install the dosimeter support.
c. Install steel sheet for detector protection.
d. Place the IQST phantom on the dosimeter support and the dosimeter in the low position (Source-
Dosimeter distance = 622.5 mm).
e. Take an exposure (parameters set automatically: Rh/Rh; 30 kV; 56 mAs).
f. Read the value indicated on the dosimeter and enter the dose value (in microGray or mR).

cal015.fm
Job Card CAL 015 - Conversion Factor Measurement
g. Remove the dosimeter and steel sheet.

h. Take a second exposure using the same technique.
6. The IDC calculates the brightness level in the pre-defined region of interest.
7. The IDC computes the counts/microGray value and checks the result. If good, it displays the mes-
sage Calibration successful.
5-3. Error codes

• Calibration calculation failed - Repeat the calibration and check the dosimeter/chamber connectors.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal015.fm
Job Card CAL 016 - Half-Value Layer Measurement
Job Card CAL 016 - Half-Value Layer Measurement Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• RADCAL dosimeter and 6M ionization chamber (6cc) calibrated at mammographic X ray beam ener-
gies,
• Dosimeter support with steel protection sheet,
• Two sheets of 0.2 and 0.5mm thickness of 99.9% pure aluminum, of length and width sufficient to
fully cover the ionization chamber. The stated thickness should be accurate within ±1%,
• 19x23 compression paddle.
CAUTION
This procedure produces X Rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
Notice:
The Detector must be protected by the steel protection sheet; it is not required for this measure-
ment
5. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this procedure is to verify that the Half-value layer of the X-ray beam is adequate to min-
imize patient breast dose, while not so excessive that contrast is lost in the resultant image.
The tube yield is measured for all track/filter/focal spot combinations and the values used for skin dose
computation.
For each spectrum the HVL and tube Yield are determined and stored on the Senographe, for use in the
skin dose and Mean Glandular Dose evaluation.
• The following techniques will be set automatically by the Senographe:
Configuration Technique
Mo/Mo 26kV/63mAs/LF
Mo/Rh 28kV/56mAs/LF
Rh/Rh 30kV/45mAs/LF
• The calibration of each configuration (focal spot, track/filter) is independent of the results obtained in
other configurations.

cal016.fm
6. PROCEDURE
Notice:
The dose values to be entered in the Senographe menu must be expressed in mGy.
- If your dosimeter displays dose values in mR, divide the reading by 114.2 to obtain mGy.
- If your dosimeter displays dose values in μGy, divide the reading by 1000 to obtain mGy.
Note that you must use the format x.xxx E+0 to enter a dose value x.xxx.
1. Ensure that paddle decompression at end of exposure is set to “NO”. In the Senographe menu, set:
MEDICAL/DECOMP/NO
2. Place the 19 cm x 23 cm compression paddle upside down as close as possible to the X-ray tube.
3. Remove the bucky or breast support; place the dosimeter support with steel protection plate on the
image receptor.
4. Place the dosimeter with 6M chamber on the high position of the dosimeter support (the source-to-
dosimeter distance SDD = 592mm).
5. Select the 9x9 collimator format; verify using the light beam that the 6M ionization chamber is fully in
the beam.
6. In the HVL/Yield calibration menu on the X-ray console, enter:
SET UP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/DOSE/LF/MoMo/CALIB/0/CALIB
7. The Senographe automatically selects the acquisition parameters (see table above).
8. Take the calibration exposure (press Senographe exposure button) with no aluminum sheet on pad-
dle, and read the dose value on the dosimeter.
9. Press Set Up once on X-ray console, select Meas.D, enter the dose value E0 in mGy (see Notice
above) and press Valid.
10. Press Set Up twice, and select 0.2.
11. Place 0.2 mm aluminum on top of the paddle; verify using the light beam that the aluminum sheet
fully covers the ionization chamber field of view.
12. Repeat steps 8 and 9 with 0.2 mm aluminum
13. Press Set Up twice, and select 0.5
14. Place 0.5 mm aluminum on top of the paddle. Verify using light beam that the aluminum sheet fully
covers the ionization chamber field of view.
15. Repeat steps 8 and 9 with 0.5 mm aluminum
16. Press Set Up twice, and press Calcul
17. Press Set Up, press Param, verify that the value is within the limits given below (Acceptable Values)
18. If the values are within limits, the Senographe stores HVL and Yield values.
If not, check the following and repeat the calibration:
• Paddle is present,
• Dosimeter is properly calibrated,
• 6M probe is correctly placed in the high position of the dosimeter holder tool
• Tube tilt and format are correctly calibrated, and probe is in the 9x9 field of view
• Generator kV and mA are properly calibrated.
If the calibration still fails, the tube must be replaced.
19. Repeat steps 6 through 18 for the other track/filter/focal spot combinations: LF/MoRh, LF/RhRh, SF/
MoMo, SF/MoRh and SF/RhRh techniques

cal016.fm
6-1. Acceptable values:

The specification limits for HVL and Yield values measured under these conditions are:
Configuration HVL (mm Al) Yield (μGy/mAs)
MoMo 26kV 0.29 - 0.38 35 – 130
MoRh 28kV 0.31 - 0.47 35 – 130
RhRh 30kV 0.33 - 0.52 35 – 130
6-2. Information:
The Senographe automatically computes the HVL by interpolation using the following formula:
0.5 * ln(2 E 0.2 / E 0 ) − 0.2 ∗ ln(2 E 0.5 / E 0 )
HVL =
ln( Ε 0.2 / Ε 0.5 )
(the units are mm of Al)
Where E0, E0.2, E0.5, are dose values measured behind 0, 0.2 mm and 0.5 mm aluminum respectively.
The Senographe calculates Tube Yield as E0 / mAs (unit: mGy/mAs) for this technique.
7. COMPLETION
again.

cal016.fm
This page is blank.

cal016.fm
Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration
Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• Flat Field Phantom (25 mm Lucite).
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Presentation
This procedure will be done for the three following techniques:
• With Grid and Large Focal Spot.
• With No Grid and Large Focal Spot.
• With No Grid and Small Focal Spot.
Note:
AOP Calibration is required to adapt AOP parameters to tube yield (mGy/mAs).
5-2. Calibration with Grid/Large Focal Spot configuration

1. Close the exam window if opened.
2. Insert the bucky.
3. Place the Flat Field Phantom on the bucky.
4. Compress the phantom.
5. Select Large Focal Spot from X-ray console.
6. From X-ray console, enter SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/CALIB/GRIDLF menu.
7. Press CALIB
8. Press the Acquisition button on the X-ray console (not PREP button) and hold it down until the sys-
tem has performed 3 acquisitions (about 20 seconds).
9. A message is displayed to indicate that the calibration is finished.
10. Perform a checksum from X-ray console: SETUP/GENE/INSTALL/CKSUM.

cal017.fm
Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration
5-3. Calibration with No Grid/Small Focal Spot configuration

1. Remove the bucky.
2. Install the magnification stand
3. Place the Flat Field Phantom on the magnification stand.
4. Compress the phantom.
5. Select Small Focal Spot from X-ray console.
6. From X-ray console, enter SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/CALIB/NOGRIDSF menu.
7. Press CALIB.
8. Press the acquisition button of X-ray console (not PREP button) and hold it down until the system
has performed 3 acquisitions (about 20 seconds).
9. A message is displayed to indicate that the calibration is finished.
10. Perform a checksum from X-ray console: SETUP/GENE/INSTALL/CKSUM.
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal017.fm
Job Card CAL 018 - ISC Monitor Adjustments
Job Card CAL 018 - ISC Monitor Adjustments Chapter 5
Notice:
This Job Card applies only to monitors manufactured by Image Systems Corporation (refer to the
label on the rear panel if in doubt).
For other monitors, consult the appropriate documents.
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
- Image Systems’ Remote Commander (RC1), p/n 2190157.
- Gray reference card 18% p/n 2110360 (or equivalent).
None
4. PREREQUISITES
5. USING THE REMOTE COMMANDER (RC1)

Light meter
Adjustments to Image Systems monitor are made using a hand-
held digital controller, the Remote Commander (RC1), illustrated
here.
When connected to an Image Systems monitor, the RC1
accesses microprocessors in the monitor electronics. Internal
parameters may be monitored and adjusted, using the keyboard
and display. The RC1 also functions as a light meter.
- +
1 2 3
LCD 4 5 6
display
7 8 9
0 #
The Calibrator
image
SYSTEMS
To connector A

cal018.fm
1. Connect the 3.5 mm jack plug on the RC1 lead to the connector
(A) at the rear of the Image Systems monitor (remove the rear
panel for access).
2. Select the required internal processor unit (see Table 1 for a list
of available processor units):
a. Press the # key; the RC1 responds by displaying: Proces-
sor?
b. Select the processor unit by pressing the corresponding
number (Table 1). the RC1 displays the name and software A
revision of the processor unit selected.
3. Select the required function (see Tables 2 and 3 for lists of available functions).
Selection can be made in two ways:
a. By direct access: press the * key; the RC1 responds by displaying: Function? Then press the two-
digit number given in the Code column of the function table for the required function.
b. By scrolling: press the ↵ key to access the next function in the menu (in the order given in the
function table). Press it as many times as required to display the required function.
Note that when you reach the last function, the next press will return you to the first function which
has a number in the Scroll column of the function table.
4. After the name of the function, the RC1 displays the value of the associated parameter (see table).
5. To alter the value of the parameter (where this is possible it is indicated by: Adjustable? = Y in the
table), press the + key to increase the value, or the - key to decrease the value.
Notice:
The following tables are given for information only. They may not be correct for all models of Re-
mote Commander. Refer to the table on the back of the Commander.
TABLE 1 - PROCESSOR UNIT SELECTION

Selection key Unit Processor
1 Unit 1 I/O Interface Board
9 Unit 9 Remote Commander (RC1)

cal018.fm
TABLE 2 - UNIT 1: I/O INTERFACE BOARD FUNCTION

Code Function Parameter Value Adjustable? Scroll
00 Unit 1: Name & software rev. IP3–C N Ø
01 Date: Software rev. date month/day/year N Ø
02 Hours: Total hours of operation 0-9999 N Ø
03 Cycles: Total no. of ON/OFF cycles 0-9999 N Ø
10 Vert Size Vertical size -128 to +127 Y →1 ↓
11 Vert Pos Vertical position -128 to +127 Y 2 ↓
12 Horiz Size Horizontal size -128 to +127 Y 3 ↓
13 Horiz Pos Horizontal position -128 to +127 Y 4 ↓
20 White level Video gain brightness intesity -128 to +127 Y 5 ↓
21 Black Level Raster brightness intensity -128 to +127 Y 6 ↓
22 Rotation Magnetic field correction -128 to +127 Y 7 ↓
30 Hsync: Horizontal input frequency 50-150 kHz N 8 ↓
31 Vsync: Vertical input frequency 45-255 Hz N 9 ↓
40 B/W Mode: A/B brightness mode switch A or B Y ↑ 10
TABLE 3 - UNIT 9: REMOTE COMMANDER FUNCTIONS
Code Function Parameter Value Adjustable? Scroll
00 Unit 9: Name & software rev. RC1–EX N Ø
01 Date: Software rev. date month/day/year N Ø
10 Lambda: Light meter function 0-500 cd/m2 N →1↓
11 Black Display black value setting value cd/m2 Y 2 ↓

12 White Display white value setting value cd/m2 Y ↑ 3
21 cal black Set black value (use +/- keys) value cd/m2 Y *
22 cal white Set white value (use +/- keys) value cd/m2 Y *
24 fl/Cd mode Toggles units: cd/m2 or ftLamberts Cd or fL Y *
* Direct access only

cal018.fm
6. MONITOR GEOMETRY AND LINEARITY

Notice:
Before beginning any check or calibration, be sure that the monitor has been powered on for at
least 20 minutes. The viewing position can impact checks and adjustments; all observations must
be made while directly facing the center of the screen.
1. Connect the RC1 at the rear of the monitor as described above.
2. Display the Monitor Pattern: in the Service Calibration screen, click on the AWS Monitor button.
Click Start to display the Monitor Pattern; shown below with reference points for linearity and bright-
ness checks. The pattern (BDLJ) is shown in a full screen window (AMOI).
A B C D M
Ref. 3
E F G H N
Ref. 1
Ref. 2
Ref. 4
I J K L O
6-1. Geometry Check and Adjustment
Check/adjust monitor geometry. Observe the full screen displayed image:
1. Measure the overall horizontal width of the displayed image (EN) with a flexible rule at the top, bot-
tom and center of the screen: it must be 350 mm +3 mm (13.8” +0.12”) at all points. If necessary, use
the RC1 to adjust the width. Note the result in the table in section 11 of this Job Card.
2. Measure the height of the pattern (CK) with a flexible rule at the left, right, and center of the screen: it
must be 280 mm +3 mm (11” +0.12”) at all points. If necessary, use the RC1 to adjust the height.
Note the result in the table in section 11 of this Job Card.
3. Verify that the image is not rotated. If necessary, use the RC1 to make the pattern horizontal. Note
the result (OK, or the deviation from horizontal) in the table in section 11 of this Job Card.
4. Verify that the image is well centered vertically and horizontally with the monitor fascia (front cover). If
necessary, use the RC1 to adjust horizontal and vertical centering. Note the results in the table in
section 11 of this Job Card.

cal018.fm
6-2. Linearity Check

1. Verify screen linearity by measuring and noting the sizes of the various monitor pattern line segments
listed in the tables below, as defined in the Illustrations.
2. Calculate the difference between segments as shown in the tables below (e.g. BC - CD). For FG-GH,
and for CG-GK, the difference must not exceed +1.5 mm. For the other checks, the difference must
not exceed +3 mm.
• No linearity adjustment is possible, but note that apparent linearity errors may be caused by incorrect
geometry adjustment. Check geometry adjustment carefully if linearity errors are observed.
A B C D M
CG
E F G H N
GK
I J K L O
Horizontal linearity checks:
BC CD BC - CD
FG GH FG - GH
JK KL JK - KL
Vertical linearity checks:

BF FJ BF - FJ
CG GK CG - GK
DH HL DH -HL

cal018.fm
7. AMBIENT LIGHT ESTIMATION

Conditions for ambient light estimation should be as close as possible to normal working conditions. Ver-
ify that the cart and monitor are oriented as they will be in normal use, and verify that the ambient light is
at the level desired by the customer. If, as recommended, the room has a a light dimmer, use it to adjust
the level as required.
For more accurate measurement, a gray reference card should be used; if this is not available, the side
of the monitor rear cover may be used as a substitute, as described below.
1. Set the RC1 for use as a light meter:
a. Press # 9 on the RC1 to select the RC1 processor.
b. Enter *10 to select the light measurement function.
2. Check that the light measurement units are set to cd/m2 (this is the ISO unit of luminance, and should
be used for all procedures in this Job Card). To change the units proceed as follows:
b. Enter *24 for direct access to the unit select function.
c. Enter + or - to toggle the selected unit between cd/m2 (cd displayed) and foot lamberts (fL dis-
played). Note that 1 fL = 3.4 cd/m2.
d. Enter *10 to return to the measurement function.
3. Position the reference surface (from which the ambient light will be measured) as closely as possible
to the normal screen posiiton:
• If the gray reference card p/n 2110360 is available, place it against (and parallel to) the monitor
screen.
• If no gray reference card is available, rotate the monitor left or right to 90°. The side of the monitor
rear cover will be used as the reference surface.
4. Position the RC1 toward the reference card or the monitor cover, at about 300 mm distance , Make
sure that no shadow (from yourself for example) can affect the measurement; record the measured
light value ML (in cd/m2) shown on the RC1.
5. Calculate the ambient light level IA (in lux): IA = π x ML/RR, where RR is the Reflection Ratio of
the surface used. The table shows RR and values for the reference card and the monitor cover.
Parameter Gray reference card Monitor cover
Reflection Ratio RR 0.18 0.75
Ambient Light IA (lux) 17.5 x ML 4.2 x ML
Measured value ML for 50 lux IA 2.8 cd/m2 12 cd/m2
Notice:
1. If the ambient light level is over 50 lux, image quality cannot be guaranteed; the customer must
be warned of the problem.
2. Screen luminance cannot exceed 275 Cd/m2 (80 fL) without loss of resolution!
6. Note the result in the table in section 11 of this Job Card.
7. Remove the gray reference card or rotate the monitor to its normal position.

cal018.fm
8. BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST

8-1. Select RC1 Light Measurement Units
Check that the the light measurement units are set to cd/m2. If necessary, change the measurement
units as described in the previous section.
8-2. Prepare room and monitor for adjustment

• The monitor must be displaying the Monitor Pattern (as described in section 6)
• The ambient light (as measured in section 7) must be at a low value (about 50 lux).
• There must be no direct or reflected light shining on the screen.
8-3. Check the displayed black and white levels

1. Set the RC1 for use as a light meter:
b. Enter *10 to select the light measurement function.
2. Measure the brightness of the central black box of the Monitor Pattern; use the RC1, touching the
screen at the center of the box. Wait until the displayed Black Level light output value is steady.
The Black Level value B should be in the range 1.0 to 1.5 cd/m2.
3. Measure the brightness of the central white box of the Monitor Pattern; use the RC1, touching the
screen at the center of the box. Wait until the displayed White Level light output value is steady.
The White Level value should be in the range 165 to 175 cd/m2.
4. If either of these values is outside the specified range, adjust the value(s) as described below (sec-
tion 8-5).
5. Note the values (after adjustment if necessary) in the table in section 11 of this Job Card.
8-4. Check gray level visibility

1. Check that each of the following items can be seen clearly against adjacent parts of the pattern (refer
to the illustration of the Monitor Pattern):
a. The 5% black square within the 0% black square (Ref. 1).
a. the 95% white square within the 100% white square (Ref. 2).
b. Each of the 10% percent step levels (Ref. 3; 10% through 100%).
c. Each of the step levels in the gray-scale map (Ref. 4).
2. If any of these gray levels is not clearly visible, check that the ambient light level and the displayed
black and white levels have been correctly set. Adjust the levels if necessary.
8-5. Adjust the monitor black and white levels

1. Before adjusting these levels, check that the ambient light level at the screen is below 50 lux.
2. If the value of the displayed black or white level is out of the ranges specified above, or gray level vis-
ibility is not correct, the Black and/or White level settings must be adjusted. In case of difficulty, it may
be advisable to return the settings to their nominal values before repeating checks and adjustments.
The nominal values of the Black and White Levels are: black = 40; white = 80.
3. To change Black and White Levels:
a. Press # 1 on the RC1 to select the I/O function.l
b. Press the ↵ key to access the Black Level function (or enter *21 for direct access). Enter + or - to

cal018.fm
adjust the level as required.

c. Press the ↵ key as often as required to access the White Level function (or enter *20 for direct
access). Enter + or - to adjust the level as required .
Notice:
The following points may be helpful:
• Always adjust the black level first.
• Always check both levels, black and white, after adjustment, even if only one has been changed.
• If the displayed black level is below 1.0 cd/m2, increase the level. If it is above 1.5 cd/m2, reduce
the level.
If the displayed white level is below 165 cd/m2, increase the level. If it is above 175 cd/m2, reduce
•
the level.
4. Repeat the checks and adjustments for black and white levels and gray level visibility as required.
Notice:
Under certain site conditions (where the ambient light cannot be reduced to 50 lux), or if requested
by the customer, it may be necessary to readjust the Black Level value in the range 0.5 to 1 cd/m2.
Black levels above 1.5 cd/m2 will affect image quality.
9. RESOLUTION CHECK
1. Observe the resolution patterns located in the four corners of the screen. They must all be equally
visible, sharp, and well contrasted.
2. Note your evaluation in the table in section 11 of this Job Card.
Note that no resolution adjustment is possible.
10. RETURN TO CALIBRATION SCREEN

When all measurements are satisfactorily completed, return to the Calibration screen by clicking the
close button at the top left corner of the Monitor Pattern screen.

cal018.fm
11. RECORD OF MONITOR ADJUSTMENTS

Use the table below to keep a record of monitor measurements and adjustments.
When recording the values shown on the RC1, be sure to note the sign (+/-).
Adjustment Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:
1 H position
2 H size
3 V position
4 V size
5 Rotation
6 Black level
7 White level
8 Measured ambient value
9 Resolution check
(OK/Not OK)
10 Remarks
12. COMPLETION
again.

cal018.fm
This page is blank.

cal018.fm
Job Card CAL 019 - Light Beam Centering
Job Card CAL 019 - Light Beam Centering Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• White paper and adhesive tape.
• 4 coins.
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Settings
1. Note the current collimator margin settings:
MARG_L = , MARG_R = , MARG_F = .
2. Configure the collimator with the following margins
ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM /MARG_L = -5
ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM /MARG_R = -5
ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM /MARG_F = -5
3. Go up the menu and press CKSUM twice.
4. Set technique to large focal spot, MoMo, 25kV, 25mAs.
5. Install bucky with no additional filtration, select full FOV.
6. Use adhesive tape to attach white paper on the bucky, covering the full FOV.
7. Press the light beam button and place a coin tangential to each internal border of the light beam.
Bucky
White paper
Light beam borders
Coin

cal019.fm
5-2. Mechanical adjustment of light position

1. Open the work list and declare a new Patient called "Light Beam centering".
2. Take an exposure, select zoom = fit to screen;
3. Check that the 4 coins are tangential to X-ray field of view;
4. If not, move the light FOV as described in the following sections (5-2-1 and 5-3). Use the software
adjustment procedure for fine adjustment when coincidence has been almost achieved using the
mechanical procedure.
5. Correct the position of the coins for the new light beam field of view.
6. Repeat the procedure until coincidence is reached between the light beam and the X-ray beam.
7. Return the collimator margin settings to those noted in step 5-1;
OR use the settings specified for your system in Job Card CFG 002 - Gantry and Generator Configu-
ration on page 127.
8. Go up the menu and press CKSUM twice.
9. Delete the previously created Patient called "Light Beam centering".
5-2-1. Mechanical Adjustment of Lamp
Refer to the illustration below.
1. To move in Rear-Front direction, use the Mirror adjusting screw (1).
2. To move in Lateral direction, use the Light Box screw (2).
(2)
MIRROR FRAME
TUBE HOUSING ARM
MIRROR MOUNTING SC REWS

AND LOCKNUTS
(1) MIRROR ANGLE ADJUS TMENT SCREW

AND SPRING

cal019.fm
5-3. Software adjustment of blade position

1. For a finer adjustment of front blade:
- Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/LIGHT/ALIGN.
- Adjust the front blade position by rotating the X-ray console kV knob as described in Job Card
2. Fora finer adjustment of lateral and rear blades:
- Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/LIGHT/COVERAGE.
- Adjust lateral and rear blades by rotating the X-ray console kV knob as described in Job Card
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal019.fm
This page is blank.

cal019.fm
Job Card CAL 020 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration (Automatic)
Job Card CAL 020 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration (Automatic) Chapter 5
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• Flat Field Phantom (25 mm Lucite).
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Presentation
The object of mAs non-linearity calibration is to compensate for the non-linearity of exposure delivered
by the Generator at low mAs values, as used in AOP pre-exposure operations.
This procedure measures pre-exposure linearity deviation, and stores a correction factor in the
Senographe menu, to be applied to the mAs value of all AOP exposures.
The correction factor is automatically calculated as: MASPRE CORR = S100 / (25 x S4), where S100 and
S4 are the signals measured in the 100 mAs image and the 4 mAs image respectively.
5-2. Procedure
1. Remove the compression paddle and install the Flat Field Phantom on the Bucky.
2. From the X-ray console menu, enter:
SET UP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/APOLLO/CALIB/mAsPRE/CALIB.
3. Press CALIB. The 9x9 collimator format is automatically selected.
4. Press the X-ray console acquisition button (not PREP button) and hold it down until the system has
performed two acquisitions (about 20 seconds). Parameters for the two exposures are automatically
set to MoMo/28 kV/4 mAs and MoMo/28 kV/100 mAs.
5. Press SETUP once, then press PARAM.
6. Verify that the value displayed for MASPRE CORR is within the limits given below (Acceptable val-
ues).
7. Perform a checksum from X-ray console: GENE/INSTALL/CKSUM.
5-3. Acceptable Values

• The value displayed for MASPRE CORR should be within the limits 1.00 and 1.20.
• If it is outside this range, check the Generator calibration and repeat the calibration.

cal020.fm
Job Card CAL 020 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration (Automatic)
6. COMPLETION
again.

cal020.fm
CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
This chapter contains information for verification of Senographe 2000 D functions.

VF.fm
This page is blank.

VF.fm
Job Card VF 001 - Boot/Init and Shutdown
Job Card VF 001 - Boot/Init and Shutdown Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
None.
2. TOOLS
None.
3. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
• To remove power from the complete system, switch off the external circuit breaker which con-
nects the system to the hospital supply. There are two circuit breakers inside the Generator Cabi-
net, one for the Gantry and Generator, the other for the Cart and imaging equipment. Switching off
one of these breakers removes power from only part of the system.
• Remember that the UPS will continue to supply power to parts of the Cart and imaging equipment
until it is shut down.
• NEVER switch off the UPS manually (risk of data loss).
• NEVER switch off power to the Conditioner except in emergency (risk of damage to the Detector if
the correct conditions of temperature and humidity are not maintained).
WARNING
In normal operation (circuit breakers closed):
Power is present in the Generator Cabinet, MDR, and AWS Cart at all times, even after the
AWS, UPS, and other components have shut down. Cart components remain powered by
the UPS for about two to three minutes after switch off. The 230 V supply to the Condi-
tioner the UPS, and the Light Box is maintained at all times.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.

vf001.fm
5. PROCEDURE
This Job Card provides check lists for confirmation of the correct operation of power up and power down
sequences, and for the steady state conditions to be expected with power on or off.
• Refer to the Power Supply Schematic diagram overleaf for an overview of power connections.
• In normal operation, system power switches are used as follows:
Power comes from the hospital supply circuit breaker to the Generator Circuit Breaker and to a circuit
breaker in the MDR (the Main Distribution Rack; at the top of the Generator Cabinet), in parallel.
Both circuit breakers are normally left ON.
All subsystem power switches (items in the Cart, Conditioner, etc.) are normally left ON.
The system is normally switched ON using the ON switch (I) on the X-ray Console.
The system is normally switched OFF by clicking the System Off button in the AWS Browser
window. When switching off, wait for complete system and UPS shut down (about two to three min-
utes).
The Gantry and Generator can be switched OFF without affecting components in the AWS Cart by
pressing the power-off on the X-ray console.
MDR Breaker
ON/OFF
pushbuttons:
Conditioner
and Conditioner
MDR
Detector supply
Cart
UPS
Generator
Generator
Breaker

vf001.fm
vf001.fm
Revision 1
Generator Cabinet Gantry AWS Cart

GE Healthcare
Conditioner Conditioner state (chiller, dryer, on/off)
Detector Detector output and control

FE Conditioner
ON/ OFF
Detector PS Detector
HV & LV Detector 0n/0ff
ON/OFF MDR (Main Power Supply
AWS Cart Distribution Rack)

Operator ON/OFF
UPS breaker
ON IDC
Conditioner, Detector, Modem

All system power OFF
and Cart on/off Light Box
ILLUSTRATION 1 - POWER SUPPLY SCHEMATIC
CD writer
AWS monitor
Hospital Supply
circuit breaker UPS
breaker
Page no. 259

a.c. mains HV & LV AWS
ON/ OFF
Generator Gantry
UPS off
Gene. off
Emergency UPS on
Control Stop
console
Gantry/Gene. off
System ON; Login;

Operator
Gantry & Gene. OFF System OFF
Power supplies
Legend: Control signals
Manual operations
Chapter 6
6. POWER OFF STATE CHECKS

Remove Generator Cabinet covers as required for access to the main circuit breaker in the MDR, the
Generator circuit breaker, the Conditioner, and to the pushbuttons controlling power to the Conditioner
and the Detector.
6-1. Normal power OFF state checks

For these power OFF checks, the MDR and Generator circuit breakers should be closed (ON), and the
system should have been switched off using the normal power off sequence (by clicking the System Off
button in the AWS Browser window). Check:
OK NOT OK
• No display on the X-ray Console and STOP push-button is lit.
• No display on the AWS monitor and no monitor LED lit.
• None of the UPS front panel LEDs are lit (visible through the Plexiglas
cover at the base of the Cart).
• The Cart and Conditioner pushbuttons ON (inside the MDR) are lit.
• The Conditioner is powered up and operating normally.
6-2. Complete power OFF state checks

For these checks, all items, including the UPS and conditioner, must first be switched off. Starting from
the normal power off state as described above, proceed as follows:
1. Switch the MDR circuit breaker OFF
2. Switch the Generator circuit breaker OFF
Remember that mains power is still present in the cabinet, at the input to the breakers.
3. Check the following:
• No LED lit in the Generator Cabinet
• No LED lit in the MDR.
• None of the internal and external pushbuttons in/on the MDR are lit.
• The Conditioner is not running (no LCD display, no sound from the pump)

vf001.fm
7. POWER UP SEQUENCE CHECKS

Remove Generator Cabinet covers as required for access to the main circuit breaker in the MDR, the
Generator circuit breaker, the Conditioner, and to the pushbuttons controlling power to the Conditioner
and the Detector.
7-1. Preliminary Power-Up sequence check

Start this sequence with the MDR and Generator circuit breakers switched OFF (as described for the
Complete power OFF state checks above).
1. Switch the Generator circuit breaker ON.
2. Switch the MDR circuit breaker ON.
OK NOT OK
3. Press the CART ON button on the Generator Cabinet; The button lights and
power is supplied to the Cart; check by switching the Light Box on.
4. Press the CONDITIONER ON pusbbutton at the top of the MDR; the button
lights and the Conditioner starts.
5. Press the UPS ON push-button on the Generator Cabinet for at least one sec-
ond; the AWS starts up (see Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batteries on page 267 if
you suspect a problem with the UPS).
6. The Login prompt appears on the AWS monitor within 90 seconds of switch-
on. Enter sdc<Enter>. At the Password prompt, enter adw3.1<Enter>. The
browser application begins to load.
Notice:
At this point of the sequence, communication errors between AWS and the Senographe will appear
because the Senographe is not yet switched ON. This is normal and does not indicate any prob-
lem.
7. Press the GANTRY ON push-button in the MDR; the button lights.
8. Press the GANTRY OFF push-button in the MDR; the light goes out.
9. Shut the system down by clicking the System Off button on the Browser window; wait for com-
plete shut down.
The system is now in the normal switched-off state, ready for the normal power up sequence (below).

vf001.fm
7-2. Normal power UP sequence check

Start this sequence with the system in the normal switched-off state (above).
OK NOT OK
1. Press the power ON push-button on the X-ray Console. Power is applied
to all parts of the system:
2. The X-ray Console central LCD panel displays default settings for kV and
mAs, and displays a message indicating temporary communications errors.
3. The AWS Monitor LED lights. On the UPS the orange LEDs flash during the
selftest process, then the On-line LED (green) is lit. No red LED should
be lit and no LEDs should continue flashing.
4. The Login prompt appears on the AWS monitor within 90 seconds of switch-
on. Log in as described above.
5. The X-ray Console displays the two following messages: S95 Medical Appli-
cation Not Active . This message is normal, because an exam has not been
started.
6. The Browser screen is displayed on the AWS monitor within about 5 minutes
of switching on.
7. The popup message System Is Operational appears on the AWS monitor.
8. It is possible to use the Start Exam button in the Worklist window (see Opera-
tor Manual).
8. POWER ON STATE CHECKS

These checks confirm normal operation after the normal power up sequence (above);
1. The Browser screen is displayed on the monitor.
2. None of the UPS front panel LEDs are flashing; the On–line LED
(green) is lit.
3. The Conditioner is running (pump audible and no conditioner error messages
displayed).

vf001.fm
9. NORMAL POWER OFF SEQUENCE CHECKS

1. Click the System Off button in the AWS Browser window. OK NOT OK
2. A message appears, requesting confirmation of the shutdown request. Con-
firm by clicking OK.
3. After a few minutes, the Console display goes blank.
4. The Cart and AWS system perform the shut down sequence, which takes
approximately three minutes. A message indicating that the system is shutting
down is displayed on the monitor. The user is asked to NOT login.
Wait 3 minutes, and if at any time the Ups did not shut down after the System Off request, the UPS
should be turned off by pressing the CART OFF button at the front of the Generator Cabinet.
5. Within about two to three minutes after confirmation of the shutdown request,
the Cart system is switched off and the Gantry/Generator system is switched
off (check again at the X-ray Console).
6. No LED lit or flashing on the front side of the UPS.
7. Check that the conditioner continues to operate; check that the CART ON but-
ton (at the front of the Generator Cabinet), and the CONDITIONER ON button
(inside the MDR) are still lit.
10. THERMAL CUTOUTS

Two thermal cutouts are fitted in the Generator Cabinet, one in the autotransformer, and the other on the
200PL1 board.
If either of these cutouts operates, the effect is the same as if the Gantry Emergency Stop button had
been pressed, except that it is impossible to restart the system; the X-ray console ON push-button has
no effect. The system will not start until it has cooled and the cutout has recovered.
• Autotransformer cutout. Operates at 120°C; the OFF button on the Main Supply Rack remains lit, but
it is impossible to restart the system. Recovery time is one to two hours.
• 200PL1 board cutout. Operates at 110°C; the OFF button on the Main Supply Rack is not lit; it is
impossible to restart the system. Recovery time is about half an hour.

vf001.fm
11. SYSTEM COMPONENT RESET

It may occasionally be necessary to reset one or more components of the system. This usually involves
switching the component(s) off and on again. The following table shows suggested switch-off points,
classified for use by operating personnel or by FEs (i.e., trained personnel with access to system cabi-
nets).
TABLE 1 - RESET OPERATIONS
System / Subsystem Operator Actions FE Actions Comments
Whole system Hospital supply ON/OFF Hospital supply ON/OFF

switch switch
Chiller (Conditioner) Hospital supply ON/OFF Conditioner OFF button

switch inside MDR
Gantry and Generator OFF/ON at X-ray console Generator Circuit breaker Also resets the Detector
in Generator Cabinet and its power supply
Detector and Detector OFF/ON at X-ray console Detector OFF button OFF/ON at X-ray console
Power Supply (DPS) inside MDR also resets the Gantry
and Generator
Cart with its subsys- Click on System Off but- Cart OFF button on side System Shutdown
tems:AWS system, moni- ton in Browser. Wait two of Generator cabinet includes shutdown of
tor, IDC, modem, CD- to three minutes for UPS Gantry and Generator.
RW, light-box shutdown
UPS Click on System Off but- Cart OFF button on side System Shutdown
ton in Browser. Wait two of Generator cabinet includes shutdown of
to three minutes for UPS Gantry and Generator.
shutdown
IDC Click on System Off but- IDC reset button at rear System Shutdown
ton in Browser. Wait two of the IDC or, open a tel- includes shutdown of
minutes for UPS shut- net window on IDC and Gantry and Generator.
down type reboot.
See Caution below.
AWS Click on System Off but- Open a command win-

ton in Toolkit menu. dow, and type kill.sdc
Reboot The browser and the
medical application are
closed.
Then type reboot
CAUTION
It is recommended that the IDC should not be booted or reset by itself without a complete
system shutdown/power on.
If the IDC is rebooted, a minimum interval of two (2) minutes must be allowed before boot-
ing it again. Booting the IDC twice within two minutes may seriously damage the detector.

vf001.fm
Job Card VF 002 - Cart Check
Job Card VF 002 - Cart Check Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
None.
None.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
Inspect the FFDM Cart for any signs of damage or impairment. In particular, check the following points:
1. Wheels and brakes. Check that the Cart can be easily moved, with no indication of noise or binding
on any of the wheels. Check that the brakes on the front wheels can be easily operated, and that they
prevent movement of the Cart when operated.
2. Centre table. Check that the centre table (keyboard support) can be easily raised from the normal
°
horizontal position to +60 , and locks correctly in both positions.
3. Side tables. Check that each of the side tables (mouse pad and light box) can be easily lowered from
°
the normal horizontal position to -90 , and locks correctly in the horizontal position.
4. Sliding doors. Check that all sliding access panels open and close smoothly.
5. Check the operation of the light box tube.

vf002.fm
Job Card VF 002 - Cart Check
This page is blank.

vf002.fm
Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batteries
Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batteries Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
None
.None
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. UPS FUNCTION CHECK

The LEDs and control buttons of the UPS front panel may be observed and accessed through the plexi-
glass panel at the front of the AWS Cart.
ON/TEST BUTTON CHARGE/LINE VOLTAGE

INDICATOR (5 LEDS)
LOAD INDICATOR
(5 LEDS)
A D
STATUS LEDS:
A - SMART TRIM (INPUT HIGH) B E
B - ON LINE
C - SMART BOOST (INPUT LOW) C F
D - OVERLOAD
E - ON BATTERY
F - REPLACE BATTERY OFF BUTTON
Notice:
If you intend to re-calibrate the battery capacity indicator (procedure described below), you should
do this before the function check, to avoid an additional delay while the battery recharges.
Proceed as follows to carry out the function check:
1. With the system powered on as normal, observe the state of the front panel LEDs:
a. The On Line LED (B) should be lit.
b. If any of the remaining five status LEDs (A, C, D, E, F, G) are lit, the cause should be investigated.
c. The Load Indicator LEDs indicate the power being drawn from the UPS as a percentage of the
rated capacity. Normally, four LEDs or less should be lit.
d. The Charge/Line Voltage LEDs indicate the current state of battery charge. With all five LEDs lit,
the battery is fully charged. When the lowest LED flashes, the battery can supply less than two
minutes of run time; you must wait for the battery to recharge before using the system.

vf003.fm
Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batteries
2. Start a UPS self test; press and hold the ON/TEST button until a beep is heard and the On Line LED
(B) flashes.
During the test the UPS briefly supplies the load from the battery; the On Battery LED (E) is lit. If
the test passes, the On Battery LED goes out and the On Line LED (B) again lights steadily.
If the test fails, the UPS returns to on-line status, but the Replace Battery LED (F) is lit. The
cause should be investigated.
3. To check the input voltage (hospital supply), press and hold the ON/TEST button for at least four sec-
onds (this will start a self test as above):
The Charge/Line Voltage LEDs now indicate the input voltage status; normally two, three, or four
LEDs should light.
If all five LEDs are lit, the input is more than 247 V; if one LED is lit or no LEDs are lit, the input is less
than 213 V.
6. BATTERY CAPACITY RE-CALIBRATION

About once a year, it may be desirable to re-calibrate the battery capacity indicator.
The procedure, including battery recharge, takes about one hour
Notice:
It may not be possible to start this procedure immediately after the function check described above,
because it requires the battery charge to be 100% of capacity.
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Service Desktop, click the Diagnostics button, then the UPS button.
2. To prevent the system from being shut down during the calibration process, select Configuration/
Event Actions, and then the UPS Battery is Discharged event; remove the check mark from the Shut-
down Server box.
3. Note that the calibration process will not start if the battery charge is less than 100%. To display Bat-
tery Capacity (in place of Run Time Remaining), select Configuration/Monitoring Preferences, and
select the parameter to be displayed in the left hand graphical bar of the PowerChute interface.
4. Start the calibration process by selecting Diagnostics/Initiate run Time Calibration.
5. Once started, the calibration process continues until battery capacity falls to 25% (the time from
100% to 25% is about 10 minutes).
With the AWS system powered off and power applied to the UPS, the battery takes 45-60 minutes to
recharge.
6. Before returning the system to normal operation, you must ensure that it will be shut down if battery
capacity is low:
- EITHER: In the PowerChute interface menu, select Configuration/Event Actions, and select the
UPS Battery is Discharged event; click the Shutdown Server box to restore the check mark.
- OR: Log in as root in a command window; execute the command ups stop, then ups start.

vf003.fm
Job Card VF 005 - Senographe Functional Checks
Job Card VF 005 - Senographe Functional Checks Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
- Digital mAs meter (GSPONER type) able to display tube current
- Compression measurement tool: GAMMEX RMI model 817 or Mammo compression scale # 46-
194427P407 (digital display)
- Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. GENERATOR TESTING
The objective is to check quickly the generator kV, mA and mAs calibrations, which have already been
done in the factory.
5-1. Set up generator for testing.

1. Configure the Senographe for the following exposure:
- Mode manual (2-point)
- Focal spot: large
- Track: Mo
- Filter: Mo
- mAs: 60 (lower mAs value may give inaccurate measurements)
- HV: 22 kV
2. Activate display of parameters following an exposure by selecting SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/
CONFIG/DISP/YES on the X-ray console (see Job Card CFG 001 - The X-ray Console on page 121).
Return to application mode.
3. Connect the digital mAs meter to kV mA board 701-PL1 (on HV tank unit 701) between terminals
MES_MA_POS and MES_MA_NEG. Disconnect the jumper that is normally between these same
two terminals.
4. Set the mAs meter to current (mA) measurement.
5. Protect the detector with 2.5 cm of plexiglass.
6. Open New Patient in the Browser, and take 5 exposures at approximately 20 second intervals, incre-
menting the HV by 2 kV each time (i.e., 22 - 24 - 26 - 28 - 30 kV).
7. Take 5 more exposures at the same interval, leaving the HV set at 30 kV.

vf005.fm
8. The X-ray tube current value displayed on the X-ray console (Idisplay) must be 100 mA ± 5 mA AND
should agree with the value read on the mAs meter (Imeasure) ± 5%.
If Idisplay is not equal to Imeasure then perform Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measurement on
page 203, followed by Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current on page 199.
9. Take 2 exposures at 40 kV and 50 mAs at an interval of 30 seconds. No arcing should be detected. If
arcing is detected, perform the procedure given in Job Card IST 014 - Automatic X-ray Tube Warm-
Up on page 93.
10. Reconfigure the Senographe to 30 kV and 25 mAs. Take one exposure for each of the three following
focal spot/track combinations and verify the expected X-ray tube current reading on the X-ray con-
sole display:
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/MO TRACK => I = 40 mA ± 2 mA
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 40 mA ± 2 mA
LARGE FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 75 mA ± 4 mA
11. Disconnect the mAs meter from the Senographe and reconnect the jumper on kV mA board 701-
PL1.
12. Verify kVp using a non-invasive kVp meter and, if needed, perform Job Card CAL 005 - Calibration of
kV Scale Factor on page 205. This step may be mandatory, when required by local regulations.
6. GANTRY TESTING
The objective is to quickly check the basic functions of the gantry.
Note that the following functions are tested by the software during each power-up sequence:
- Filter holder rotation
- Lateral, front and rear collimator blade movement
- X-ray tube housing movement
- Compression paddle movement to home position
- Column movement limit stops
- Coherency between focal spot size, magnification and X-ray tube housing angulation
- Grid movement
- Generator-gantry communications link
- Gantry CPU board
6-1. Check gantry readout.

Immediately following the power-up sequence, the gantry readout should indicate the X-ray format.
6-2. Check column movement.

1. With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four sets of column up/down control
buttons are operational (check each button for up and down movement of column).
2. Move column to its upper and lower limits. Optical sensors should stop movement. If optical sensors
have failed, mechanical safety stops halt movement. Total one-way movement time (going either up
or down) between upper and lower limits should be 16 ±2 seconds. This time includes initial acceler-
ation, which lasts 3 seconds.
6-3. Check arm rotation.

1. With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four arm rotation control buttons are
operational (check each button for release and re-locking of arm rotation).

vf005.fm
2. Rotate arm through its full range of ±180°. Check in several positions that electro-brake is sufficient,
by manual action on the handles.
3. Check alignment of angle markings at 0°.
6-4. Check light centering device.

Press one of the light centering device activation buttons. The light centering device should light for 30
seconds.
6-5. Check format control.

Check that repeated pressing of each of the two format control pushbuttons, gives the sequence:
1) light centering device lights; 2) first format reduction; 3) second format reduction; 4) full format.
6-6. Check magnification sensors.

1. With magnification device removed, the gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.0.
2. Install the magnification device into the lower, middle and upper holes successively. The gantry read-
out should show a magnification of 1.5, 1.8, and 1.9, respectively.
6-7. Check tube housing arm detents.

1. Activate the tube housing arm locking lever and rotate the tube housing arm to its ± 15° and ± 27°
detents. When tube housing arm is locked in each of these four positions, the error message Incor-
rect X_Ray Incidence should appear on the X-ray console display.
2. Rotate the tube housing arm so that it is "floating" between detents. After five seconds, the error mes-
sage Tube Housing Arm Unlocked should appear on the X-ray console display and Arm Unlocked
should appear on the gantry readout.
6-8. Check paddle compression.

1. Verify that both sets of compression/decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs
located on the paddle holder all function correctly (i.e., the paddle moves up or down in response to
each command).
2. Use the mammo compression scale placed between the detector and the compression paddle to
check calibration of the compression force display on the gantry readout. Measure one point at 5 daN
and one point at 15 daN. The value on the gantry readout must agree within ±1 daN. If it does not,
perform Job Card CAL 006 - Calibration of Compression Force Detector on page 209.
Note:
If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available, this verification can be done
by lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the cassette holder, installing the magnification
device in the upper pair of holes, and connecting a spring dynamometer (calibrated from 0 to
15 kg) between the compression paddle and the magnification device.

vf005.fm
6-9. Check breast thickness measurement.

1. Install the bucky and place 10 mm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
3. Slowly increase compression force on the plexiglass while watching the breast thickness display on
the gantry readout. The displayed value should remain in the range 10 mm ±3 mm for any value of
compression force (as displayed on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 daN.
4. Replace 10 mm of plexiglass with 50 mm of plexiglass and repeat the above check. Now the dis-
played value should remain in the range 50 mm ±3 mm for any value of compression force (as dis-
played on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 daN.
5. If either or both of the above checks does not give a satisfactory result, perform Job Card CAL 007 -
Calibration of Breast Thickness Measurement on page 211.
6-10. Check grid presence sensor.

• Select ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/GRID/CALIB on the X-ray console.
- With the bucky present, the reponse should be CALIBRATION OK .
- If the bucky is not present or is not recognized, the response is GRID ABSENT.
6-11. Check emergency stop buttons.

Pressing either of the emergency stop buttons (located on either side of the gantry column base) should
result in a complete power-down of the generator and gantry (but not the AWS Cart).

vf005.fm
Job Card VF 008 - IQ Tools Flat Field Test
Job Card VF 008 - IQ Tools Flat Field Test Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
• None
2. TOOLS
• Flat field phantom (25 mm lucite).
• ACR standard phantom (16 cells Nuclear Associates 18-220 or RMI-156).
• These procedures produce X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
• The system must have been correctly installed and calibrated.
5. FLATFIELD TESTS
5-1. Objective
The flatfield test measures the ability of the detector to reproduce the image of a flat and homogeneous
phantom.
The ideal response of the detector is a uniform image with no large or small defects, with no pixel having
a signal much higher or much weaker than its neighbours, and with a uniform signal-to-noise ratio. The
quantities to look for are thus:
- Brightness uniformity: the magnitude of low frequency structures (large shapes).
- High frequency modulation: the magnitude of high frequency structures (small defects).
- Number and density of bad pixels: the number of pixels having signals significantly different
from those of their neighboors (new bad pixels appeared since the latest bad pixel calibration),
and the density of these bad pixels.
- Signal-to-noise ratio uniformity: the variation of signal-to-noise ratio over the image.
A test failure indicates incorrect test conditions (phantom position, cleanliness), or an artifact causing
inconsistency between the current image and the associated gain map. Such an inconsistency means
that either the gain calibration needs to be updated, or the current image contains a defect which must
be identified (see section 7). Possible sources of artifacts include the tube output window, the mirror, the
Molybdnenum filter, the collimator blades, and the detector.

vf008.fm
5-2. Method
The flatfield image is analyzed by measuring the mean
signal level, the noise, and the number of new bad pix-
Measurements made i
els in a moving analysis box (a 20 mm x 20 mm region a moving analysis box
of interest scanning the flatfield image with a 10 mm
overlap). The total number of new bad pixels is
summed over the whole image.
The following checks are performed:
- Brightness uniformity (BNU): compute maximum deviation of the mean signals measured in
each ROI.
- High frequency modulation (HFM): measure the minimum signal–to–noise from all ROIs
- New bad pixels: detect and count all bad pixels in the whole image
- New bad ROIs: count number of regions of interest containing more than 2 bad pixels
- Signal–to–noise ratio (SNR) uniformity: compute maximum deviation of the SNR measured in
each ROI.
6. PROCEDURE
1. From the Browser, click on the QAP button, then select Flat Field Test.
2. Follow the on–screen instructions. You are asked to:
e. Remove the bucky or breast holder and the compression paddle, and to place the flatfield phan-
tom on the image receptor.
f. Verify using the light beam that the collimator is in full field of view.
g. Verify that the tube arm angle is 0 degrees.
h. Make two exposures using the parameters set automatically (Large focal spot; Mo/Mo; 26 kV; 200
mAs).
3. Use the middle-button mouse function to adjust the image for optimum viewing conditions. Sug-
gested starting values are WC = 3000 and WL =4500.
4. The system calculates and displays test results in a format similar to that shown below. The LSL and
USL columns show the minimum acceptable values (Lower Specification Limit) and the maximum
acceptable values (Upper Specification Limit) for each test.
Test Measurement LSL USL Pass/Fail
Brightness Uniformity n/a 10.00
High Frequency Modulation n/a 0.80
Bad Pixel n/a 100.0
Bad ROI n/a 0.00
SNR n/a 40.00

vf008.fm
7. CORRECTIVE ACTIONS IN CASE OF FAILURE

7-1. Brightness Uniformity test fails
Typical causes are:
1. The flatfield phantom does not cover the full FOV; Brightness
check the position of the flatfield phantom. The flat- non-uniformity:
Significant signal
field phantom must exceed the detector field of view variation detected
in every direction. in the image
2. A collimator blade is within the FOV; make an acqui-
sition in the Medical application in the same condi-
tions as the flatfield test (flatfield phantom, MoMo,
26 kV, 200 mAs) and verify in the raw image that the
X-ray beam field covers the detector field of view by
adjusting the contrast such that window width is less
than 200. If collimator blades are visible at the bor-
ders, check tube tilt, collimator centering, parallelism
and format calibrations
3. The gain map is no longer valid; calibrate gain in the MoMo/no grid configuration, move the phantom
slightly and run the test again.
7-2. High Frequency Modulation test fails

Typical causes are:
High frequency
1. The detector temperature is not stabilized; check that the modulation:
system has not been powered on too recently. High noise detected
within a ROI
2. The gain map is no longer valid; calibrate gain in the
MoMo/no grid configuration, and run the test again.

vf008.fm
7-3. BadPixels or Bad ROI test fails

7-3-1. Typical causes are:
1. Dust is present on the flatfield phantom or the
image receptor; ensure that the phantom and the
image receptor are completely clean and run the
test again.
2. The flatfield phantom contains inclusions or is
scratched;
- Run the flatfield test, select bad pixel graphi-
cal window, locate the bad ROIs or bad pix-
els.
- Move the phantom, run the flatfield test again
and note whether the bad ROIs or pixels have
moved.
If you have difficulty in observing a moving spot, repeat the test in application mode. After making
an exposure, adjust the viewing contrast to make the spot visible. Then move the phantom
slightly, make a second exposure, and switch the display from one image to the other to observe
any movement in the spot of interest.
If the bad pixels move, there are some inclusions inside the phantom. Obtain a new phantom and
run the test again.
3. The collimator is visible in the field of view;

- Run the flatfield test, select bad pixel graphical
Collimator visible in
window, locate the bad ROIs or bad pixels. field of view
Check that they are not concentrated on the bor-
ders of the image. If they are, check tube tilt, cen-
tering, parallelism and format calibrations.

vf008.fm
4. Detector response is unequal at some rows, columns,

or groups of pixels; Visible bad row or
- Check that there is no visible bad row or bad col- bad column
umn in the flatfield image displayed in the IQ tool
viewer (use the mouse middle button to adjust con-
trast and brightness such that window width WW is
less than 200). If necessary, take an image in the
Medical Application and use the AWS display tools.
- If there is a distinct bad row or a bad column
(exactly parallel to the detector matrix), or a distinct
cluster, calibrate bad pixels.
If the bad row, bad column, or cluster is detected in
the bad pixel calibration and is above the Upper Specification Limit, the detector must be
changed. If not, calibrate gain in the MoMo/no grid configuration, and run the test again.
If gain calibration succesfully corrects bad rows or columns, use the ACR phantom to check the
correction. Place the ACR phantom so as to partially cover the suspect rows or columns (e.g., to
the left or top of the detector) and make an acquisition at MoMo/26 kV/100 mAs/no grid, so that
the detector is saturated outside the area of the phantom. Verify in the raw image that the rows or
columns do not appear again in the phantom area. If they do appear, contact your OLC; it is likely
that the detector must be changed.
7-3-2. Other possible causes are :

1. During the last gain calibration, dust was present (on the flatfield phantom, image receptor, mirror, or
filter), or the flatfield phantom contained inclusions or scratches; verify that the bad pixels do not
move with the phantom and that they persist after careful cleaning of phantom, image receptor, mir-
ror, and Mo filter. Calibrate gain in the MoMo/no grid configuration, move the phantom slightly, and
run the test again.
2. Dust is present on the light beam alignment mirror or on the Mo filter; clean the mirror and Mo filter
without direct contact and run the test again.
3. Metallic particles have been deposited on the tube output window; tilt and move the tube and verify in
the image or in the bad pixel graphical window that the bad pixels have moved after the tube move-
ment. If you are sure that particles are present on the tube output window, change the tube and per-
form the resulting calibrations. before repeating the test.

vf008.fm
7-4. Signal–to–Noise Ratio uniformity fails

Typical causes are:
1. The X-ray beam is badly centered; carry out: Significant
a. Job Card CAL 010 - Tube Tilt Calibration on signal-to-noise variation
detected in the image
page 217
b. Job Card CAL 011 - X-ray Beam Alignment Cal-
ibration on page 219
c. Job Card CAL 012 - Collimator Format Calibra-
tion on page 223
2. The detector sensitivity is not uniform; locate in the

graphical window the area having a poor SNR (low
mean signal or high standard deviation). Calibrate
gain in the MoMo/no grid configuration, and run the test again. If the SNR uniformity result is still
above the Upper Specification Limit, call your OLC for a possible detector replacement.
7-5. Final checks

Notice:
If a new gain calibration was done, you are recommended to recalibrate all other gain configura-
tions.
After investigating and correcting the suggested causes of error, repeat the test.
If the test still fails, call your OLC.

vf008.fm
Job Card VF 009 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score
Job Card VF 009 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• ACR standard phantom (16 cells Nuclear Associates 18-220 or RMI-156).
• Standard toolkit with metric wrenches.
• These procedures produce X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
• The system must have been correctly installed and calibrated.
5. TEST DESCRIPTION
5-1. ACR Phantom
The phantom used in this procedure is a block of plexiglass containing 16 cells. Each cell simulates an
anatomical structure which may be found in breast tissue.
The plexiglass gives attenuation equivalent to a breast of average density compressed to a thickness of
45 mm.
Starting from the top left hand corner, as shown in the illustration,
the cells are of three types:
1. Fibres.
Six cells represent fibrous calcifications; they contain fibers
with sections from 1.56 mm to 0.40 mm.
2. Specks (Calcifications).
Five cells represent groups of specks or micro–calcifications,
with sizes from 0.54 mm to 0.16 mm.
3. Masses.
Five cells represent tumors or masses, with sizes from 2 mm
to 0.25 mm; each has a different attenuation.
5-2. ACR Score

The ACR Score check program obtains and displays an image of the phantom. After suitable adjustment
of the viewing parameters, the user notes the visibility of the object in each cell, using a three-point scale
of 1, 0.5, or 0. For each cell, score:
- 1 If the object (fiber, mass, or group of six specks) is completely visible.
- 0.5 If the object is partially visible, according to the following guidelines;
Fibres; More than half of the fibre is visible.
Masses; The mass does not appear circular, but is visible.
Specks; At least two specks are visible
- 0 For all other cases,

vf009.fm
Job Card VF 009 - Image Acquisition and ACR Score
6. PROCEDURE
1. Install the Bucky, with compression paddle.
2. Place the ACR phantom on the Bucky, against the chest wall side and laterally centered.
3. Lightly compress the phantom with the compression paddle.
4. Verify that the collimator is in full FOV and that the tube arm angle is 0 degrees.
5. Enter the Phantom IQ test. From the Browser, select: Tools Menu/Service Desktop/Image Quality/
New Acquisition/Phantom IQ.
6. The system applies suitable parameters. Make an exposure and display the image.
7. The image is displayed with standard parameters which may need adjusting for your system. Press
the right mouse button to display a two-item menu which allows you to select the middle button func-
tion. Use it either to control brightness and contrast (WL changes with vertical movement and WW
changes with horizontal movement) or to obtain the magnifying glass function. As a rough guide, it is
suggested that the contrast should be adjusted to obtain an on-screen displayed value for WW of
less than 200 for good viewing.
8. Obtain the best viewing conditions for an accurate assessment of the score (if necessary complete
the test and repeat it with the phantom in a better position) and observe the 16 cells in the phantom
image. Note the ACR score (1, 0.5, or 0, as described in the Test Description above) for each cell,
and total the scores for each type of cell (fibers, masses, speck groups).
9. A group of three on-screen sliders are displayed at the top right of the screen.For each type of cell,
move the on-screen slider (with the cursor on the slider, press and hold the mouse button while mov-
ing the mouse) until the correct score is displayed. Then click on OK to enter the score into the sys-
tem.
10. The results of the test are displayed in a format similar to that shown below. The LSL and USL col-
umns show the minimum acceptable score (Lower Specification Limit) and the maximum score
(Upper Specification Limit) for each item. The figures given here in the Measurement and Status col-
umns are for example only.
Test Measurement LSL USL Status
Masses 4.00 3.00 5.00 Passed
Speck groups 2.50 3.00 5.00 Failed
Fibers 5.00 4.00 6.00 Passed
Score 11.50 11.00 16.00 Passed
11. The test is successful if the total score is 11 or more, with scores for masses of at least 3, for speck
groups of at least 3, and for fibers of at least 4.
In the example shown the total score is 11.5, but the test fails because the speck group score is less
than 3.
12. If the test fails, repeat the flatfield test and then try again. If the flatfield test passes successfully but
the ACR Score test fails, the cause must be identified and corrected before further patient examina-
tions are made.
.

vf009.fm
Job Card VF 010 - Acquisition in AOP Mode
Job Card VF 010 - Acquisition in AOP Mode Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
• Set of acrylic plates (PMMA) (minimum size 20 cm x 20 cm) allowing thicknesses of 25 mm, 40
mm and 60 mm to be used, with a tolerance of ±0.1 mm.
• Take all normal precautions when operating with X–rays.
4. PREREQUISITES
• The system must have been correctly installed and completely calibrated.
• Breast thickness calibration must have been carefully checked in contact mode.
5. TEST DESCRIPTION
The tests described here are designed to check the following aspects of system operation:
• Selection of parameters in AOP (Automatic Optimization of Parameters) mode.
• The level of SNR (Signal-to-Noise Ratio) in images acquired in AOP mode.
6. PROCEDURE
Notice:
To avoid false results, the acrylic plates used must be clean and free from scratches.
1. Create an AOP patient file by selecting New Patient on the Browser; complete the Medical Procedure
Card as required, with AOP as the patient name.
2. Install the bucky on the image receptor and select Large field of view.
3. Carry out the following procedure three times, with different thicknesses of acrylic in the field of
view (25, 40, and 60 mm). The table below shows the values expected for each thickness:
a. Place acrylic plates of the chosen thickness on the bucky.
b. Apply 5daN compression to the plates
c. Check that the breast thickness indicated on the X-ray console Display is equal to the expected
value (25, 40, or 60 mm) ±2 mm.
d. Select the AOP STD mode and make an exposure.
e. Record the exposure parameters (track/filter/kV/mAs) selected.

vf010.fm
Job Card VF 010 - Acquisition in AOP Mode
f. Check that the exposure parameters selected are as shown in the table below:
Acrylic Exposure Parameters
Thickness Track/Filter mAs kV
(mm)
25 Mo/Mo 20 - 60 27
40 Mo/Rh 35 - 90 28
60 Rh/Rh 35 - 90 32
4. On the AWS, close the exam, then open the three raw images for review.
5. For each of the three images in turn:
- Use the ellipse ROI tool (use the default size) to measure the mean value (MV)and standard devi-
ation (sd) of the image, in the region close to the chest wall and laterally centered.
- Calculate the SNR as MV/sd. The value of SNR should exceed 50.
Note that a calculator can be displayed on the AWS screen by obtaining the root menu (in the
background) and selecting calculator. Use the Front key to hide/display the calculator.
7. COMPLETION
• The check is successful if the exposure parameters are within the limits shown in the table above,
and if all SNR values exceed 50.
• If the check fails because of incorrect track/filter or kV selection, carry out AOP calibration in contact
mode with grid, and repeat the check.
• If the check fails because of incorrect mAs or SNR values, carry out Conversion Factor and HVL/
Yield calibrations, and repeat the check.

vf010.fm
Job Card VF 011 - Light Beam Centering
Job Card VF 011 - Light Beam Centering Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• White paper and adhesive tape.
• 4 coins.
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
• None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Settings
1. Configure the collimator with the following margins (take note of the current values to re-introduce
them at the end of the verification:
ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM /MARG_L = -5
ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM /MARG_R = -5
ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM /MARG_F = -5
2. Go up the menu and press cksum.
3. Set technique to large focal spot, MoMo, 25kV, 25mAs.
4. Install bucky with no additional filtration, select full FOV.
5. Use adhesive tape to secure white paper onto the bucky, covering the full FOV.
6. Press the light beam button and place a coin on the paper tangential to each internal border of the
light beam. The coins must be placed at the edge between the completely lit area and the twilight
area as indicated below:
Bucky
White paper
Twilight area
Light beam borders
Coin

vf011.fm
Job Card VF 011 - Light Beam Centering
7. Take an exposure, select zoom = fit to screen

8. Check that the 4 coins are tangential to X-ray field of view
If not, perform the instructions of Job Card CAL 019 - Light Beam Centering on page 249.
9. Reconfigure the collimator to previous margins.
10. Go up the menu and perform a cksum

vf011.fm
Job Card VF 012 - Dicom Printer Adjustments and Checks
Job Card VF 012 - Dicom Printer Adjustments and Checks Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• Densitometer
• None.
4. PREREQUISITES
• The printer must be correctly calibrated
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Preparation and Print
• Install the SMPTE pattern (together with the Test_pattern pattern): from the root menu, select Service
Tools/Install SMPTE.
• If the display WW and/or WL values have been changed, select Auto to return them to the default val-
ues of WW =1500 and WL = 2000.
• Select the FFDM_printer_pattern patient from the Browser menu.
- Select Review Exam.
- Click on the PRINT button.
- Select the DICOM printer to be checked in the Printing window; click on Printing Properties.
- In the Properties window, select blue film, processor and portrait. Then Save and Done.
- Click on the PRINT button.
- The image is sent to the printer. Check the quality of the printed image as described below.
CAUTION
Make sure that the SMPTE pattern is displayed with WW =1500 and WL = 2000 for the
image quality tests.
CAUTION
Before you start to check the calibration of an Agfa LR5200 printer, make sure that it has
been properly calibrated between OD max= 3.5 and OD min = 0.14. Refer to Agfa documen-
tation.

vf012.fm
5-2. Image Quality checks

• Examine the printed image (illustrated below).
• Check the image quality according to the points listed.
Step
1 12
2 13
3 14
4
15
[7] 5
16 [7]
[1] 6
17
7
18
8 19
[2] 9 20
10 21
11
[4]
[6]
[3]
[5]
- Verify continuity of the white diagonal lines [1]. Check that they do not show steps.
- In the two white squares [2] the vertical and horizontal lines must be well separated for good res-
olution.
- In the large light gray square, check that the arc [3] is not duplicated.
- The small black square [4] within the larger square must not be surrounded by a white line.
- The small white square [6] within the larger square, must not be surrounded by a black line.
- Check that the optical density is the same everywhere in the long grey rectangle (+7%) [5]
- Measure the density of each of the grayscale rectangles 1-21 [7] with a densitometer and com-
pare the measured values to the Expected O.D. values in the table given on the next page. The
values must be accurate to +0.05 O.D.

vf012.fm
Admittance criterion: The difference between (M) and (E) must be less than 0.05.
Expected O.D.
Step Gray Level Agfa LR5200 Agfa 4500M Fuji FMDP/L, Kodak 8600/8610 Measured O.D.
(E) (E) Fuji Drypix 7000 (E) (M)
(E)
1 0 3.50 3.55 3.58 3.59
2 12 2.98 2.94 3.02 2.80
3 25 2.66 2.55 2.61 2.46
4 38 2.42 2.30 2.38 2.23
5 51 2.22 2.07 2.19 2.04
6 63 2.04 1.88 2.02 1.89
7 76 1.87 1.72 1.84 1.74
8 89 1.72 1.59 1.70 1.61
9 102 1.58 1.45 1.57 1.48
10 114 1.44 1.34 1.45 1.37
11 127 1.30 1.23 1.35 1.25
12 140 1.18 1.12 1.29 1.14
13 153 1.05 1.00 1.16 1.03
14 165 0.93 0.90 1.02 0.93
15 178 0.81 0.80 0.89 0.82
16 191 0.69 0.69 0.75 0.72
17 204 0.58 0.59 0.63 0.61
18 216 0.47 0.49 0.53 0.51
19 229 0.35 0.40 0.42 0.41
20 242 0.24 0.29 0.32 0.31
21 255 0.14 0.20 0.21 0.21
CAUTION
Before proceeding to OD measurement, reset the Zero of the Densitometer with no film.

vf012.fm
This page is blank.

vf012.fm
Job Card VF 014 - Check kVp settings
Job Card VF 014 - Check kVp settings Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• kVp meter. The meter must be in good condition and possess valid certification.
Suitable meters are:
- Radcal 4083 kVp meter (2384916). Requires use of acrylic plates (2299008-2).
- RMI 232 kVp meter
- Keithley 35080B kVp meter.
Note:
The Keithley 35080B kVp meter is not recommended for use in Europe; It does not meet the Eu-
ropean accuracy requirement of 3%.
CAUTION
This procedure produces X-Rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
• None.
5. PROCEDURE
The procedures described below are designed to verify that the values of kVp delivered by the equip-
ment correspond to the values selected by the operator.
Select the appropriate procedure according to the meter to be used.

vf014.fm
6. PROCEDURE - RMI 232 KVP METER

6-1. kVp meter calibration
1. Note the meter identification number and date of most recent calibration:
kVp meter
identification number
Date of calibration:
(dd/mm/yy)
2. Note the required kV correction values by copying CP row values from the meter calibration curve
Measured kVp 26 28 30 32 34
kV Correction
value
6-2. Position the meter

1. Remove the compression paddle.
2. Install the largest magnification stand (1.8).
3. Place the kVp meter on the magnification stand.

vf014.fm
6-3. kVp measurements - RMI 232 kVp meter

• Make a series of kVp measurements as described here:
1. Set the X-ray field to the smallest size greater than the kVp meter measurement area shown on the
meter.
2. Switch on the meter. Set the waveform selector to CP (constant potential).
3. Select manual exposure mode, and set the X-ray parameters to:
Mo track/Mo filter, 50 mAs, LF
4. Make exposures at the Selected kVp values shown in the table below. For each exposure note the
Measured kVp value shown on the meter:
Focus mAs Selected Measured Corrected Upper Limit Lower Limit Result
KVp (S) KVp KVp (S+3%) (S-3%) Pass/Fail
0.3 50 26 26.78 25.22
0.3 50 28 28.84 27.16
0.3 50 30 30.90 29.10
0.3 50 32 32.96 31.04
0.3 50 34 35.02 32.98
5. Use the kVp correction values noted above to calculate and enter Corrected kVp values.
6. For the check to be passed, each of the Corrected kVp values must lie between the specified
Upper and Lower Limits.
7. If the check fails at any value, repeat the complete procedure.
8. If the repeated check fails again, kVp calibration is necessary. Perform the procedure described in
Job Card CAL 005 - Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 205.

vf014.fm
7. PROCEDURE - RADCAL 4083 KVP METER

• Note the meter identification number and date of most recent calibration:
kVp meter
(dd/mm/yy)

2. Install the largest magnification stand (1.8). 2cm
3. Place 5 cm of acrylic on the magnification stand.

4. Place the kVp meter chamber on the acrylic, centralized left-
to-right, and positioned 2 cm behind the front of the magnifi- 5 cm Plexiglass
cation stand, as shown
L/2
2 cm
Radcal
kVp
P lexiglass
M ag Stand 1,8

vf014.fm
7-3. kVp measurements - RADCAL 4083 kVp meter

1. Set the X-ray field to the smallest size greater than the kVp meter measurement area.
2. Switch on the meter.
Measured kVp value shown on the meter:
Focus mAs Selected Measured Upper Limit Lower Limit Result
KVp (S) KVp (S+3%) (S-3%) Pass/Fail
0.3 50 26 26.78 25.22
0.3 50 28 28.84 27.16
0.3 50 30 30.90 29.10
0.3 50 32 32.96 31.04
0.3 50 34 35.02 32.98
5. For the check to be passed, each of the Measured kVp values must lie between the specified

vf014.fm
8. PROCEDURE - KEITHLEY 35080B KVP METER

Notice:
This meter is not recommended for use in Europe; it does not meet the European accuracy require-
ment of 3%.

• Note the meter identification number and date of most recent calibration:
kVp meter
(dd/mm/yy)

2. Install the largest magnification stand (1.8).
3. Place the kVp meter on the magnification stand.
8-3. kVp measurements - Keithley 35080B KVp meter

1. Set the X-ray field to the smallest size greater than the kVp meter measurement area shown on the
meter.
2. Switch on the meter.
Measured kVp value shown on the meter.:
Focus mAs Selected Measured Upper Limit Lower Limit Result
KVp (S) KVp (S+0.5 kV) (S-0.5 kV) Pass/Fail
0.3 50 26 26.50 25.50
0.3 50 28 28.50 27.50
0.3 50 30 30.50 29.50
0.3 50 32 32.50 31.50
0.3 50 34 34.50 33.50
5. For the check to be passed, each of the Measured kVp values must lie between the specified

vf014.fm
Job Card VF 016 - Check mA and mAs settings
Job Card VF 016 - Check mA and mAs settings Chapter 6
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• Set of acrylic plates (2299008-2)
• Meter(s) for measurement of mA and mAs. The meters used must be in good condition and possess
valid certification.
Suitable meters are:
- Fluke 87 multimeter (12062-Fluke 87 type 5).
- Keithley 35035 mAs meter (46-194427P435).
- GS Poner 165 mA-mAs meter.
CAUTION
This procedure produces X-Rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
4. PREREQUISITES
• The Generator covers must have been removed for access to the kV/mA board 701-PL1 on the HV
tank unit. Refer to Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.
5. PROCEDURE
The procedures described below are designed to verify that the values of mA and mAs delivered by the
equipment correspond to the values selected by the operator.
CAUTION
procedure.
5-1. Preparation
1. Switch off the system.
2. Remove the strap between test points MES_M_NEG and
3. Connect a milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and
4. With any compression paddle installed, place 6 cm of acrylic
plates on the Bucky (to protect the detector).
5. Switch on the system. 701-PL1
6. Configure the SetUp menu to display exposure parameters:
select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DISP/YES.

vf016.fm
Job Card VF 016 - Check mA and mAs settings
5-2. Check mA displayed on the Control Console

1. Use the parameters shown in the following table to make an exposure.
2. Note the Nominal mA value (N) displayed on the console, and the Measured mA value (M) on the
meter. Calculate the values N +5% and N -5%.
Filter/Track/ kV Selected Nominal mA Measured N+5% N-5% Test result
Focal spot mAs (N) on Console mA (M) Pass/Fail
Mo/Mo/LF 30 100
3. For the check to pass, the Measured mA value (M) must be within ±5% of the Nominal mA value (N).
4. If the check fails, perform the calibrations described in Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measure-
ment on page 203 and Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current on page 199.
5-3. Check mA calibration

1. Make four exposures, using the parameters shown in the following table.
2. For each exposure, note the Measured mA value (M) on the meter.
Filter/Track/ kV Selected Measured Expected Nominal mA (N) Test result
Focal spot mAs mA (M) N-5% N N+5% Pass/Fail
Mo/Mo/LF 30 63 95 100 105
Mo/Mo/SF 30 63 38 40 42
Rh/Rh/LF 30 63 71.3 75 78.8
Rh/Rh/SF 30 63 38 40 42
3. For the check to pass, each Measured mA value (M) must be within ±5% of the corresponding
Expected Nominal mA value shown (N).
4. If the check fails, there is a system error which must be corrected.
5-4. Check mAs calibration

1. Follow the instructions of section 5-1 Preparation, but this time connect an mAs meter in place of the
milliammeter.
2. Use the parameters shown in the following table to make an exposure.
3. Note the meter reading Measured mAs.
Filter/Track/ kV Selected Measured Lower limit Upper limit Test result
Focal spot mAs mAs (63 mAs -5%) (63 mAs +5%) Pass/Fail
Mo/Mo/LF 30 63 59.9 66.2
4. For the check to pass, the meter reading Measured mAs must be between the Lower and Upper lim-
its shown.
5. If the check fails, there is a system error which must be corrected.

vf016.fm
CHAPTER 7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains recommendations for protection of Senographe 2000 D system equipment.

EP.fm
This page is blank.

EP.fm
Job Card EP 001 - Detector protection during system shutdown
Job Card EP 001 - Detector protection during system shutdown Chapter 7
1. HOSPITAL/SYSTEM SHUTDOWN
• The Digital Detector used in the Senographe 2000 D system contains components which are
extremely sensitive to variations of temperature and humidity.
Any large or long term variation in temperature or humidity may cause permanent damage to the
detector.
In normal operation, including normal shut-down, the detector is protected from damage by the Con-
ditioner, which controls the temperature and internal humidity of the detector within close limits.
• If the system must be completely shut down for any reason, for example if the hospital depart-
ment is closed for a vacation period, special precautions must be taken to avoid damage to
the detector.
2. DETECTOR PROTECTION DURING SHUTDOWN

There are two possible methods of protecting the detector if the normal system power must be switched
off during a prolonged shutdown:
• Connect the Conditioner to a normal power outlet and leave it switched on. This ensures
that power is returned after any brief power outages (due to storms, etc.). If the Generator system
is left on standby, it does not start up automatically after a power outage, and power is switched
off permanently
• Disconnect and drain the cooling circuit as much as possible. Ensure that no coolant is left
in the Detector or in the Conditioner. Use a syringe or similar tool if necessary.
Notice:
When the Detector is not protected by connection to a functional Conditioner, the following
storage conditions must be respected:
Humidity: 10% min., 50% max. (up to 95% R.H. can be tolerated for less than two weeks).
Temperature: +10°C (50°F) min. to +25°C (77°F)max.
(-10°C (14°F) min. to +50°C (122°F) max. for less than one day).
Atmospheric pressure: 500 hPa min., 1060 hPa max.

EP001.fm
Job Card EP 001 - Detector protection during system shutdown
This page is blank.

EP001.fm
CHAPTER 8 PLANNED MAINTENANCE
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains recommendations for planned maintenance of the Senographe 2000 D Acquisition
System.

PM.fm
This page is blank.

PM.fm
Scenario PM 001 - Planned Maintenance Steering Guide
Scenario PM 001 - Planned Maintenance Steering Guide Chapter 8
1 CONTEXT
This scenario is to be used in planning and performing planned maintenance visits (PM visits).
• Actions required in preparation for each PM visit are described in section 2 Actions prior to PM visit.
• Actions to be carried out on-site during each PM visit are listed in the tables in sections 4 PM Task
Schedule on page 306.
The tables list each of the recommended on-site planned maintenance tasks. For each task, they
give the recommended frequency (Int.; interval between tasks in months) and the expected duration
(Drn.; time in minutes)
• PM visits should be made at six-monthly intervals. The tables show a suggested sequence of tasks to
be performed at successive PM visits, in columns numbered from1 through 12. For each visit an "X"
in the column indicates that the corresponding task should be performed.
• The total time required for each PM visit depends upon the tasks scheduled and any additional work,
such as FRU replacements, calibrations, etc., found to be required. The schedules proposed take
account of the estimated time for each task, so as to balance the times required for each visit.
• The sums of estimated times for tasks specified at each visit are shown here:
PM Visit no.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Total time (hours) 6h40 6h25 6h40 6h40 6h40 6h50 6h40 6h40 6h40 6h25 6h40 7h05
2 ACTIONS PRIOR TO PM VISIT

• Check that any appplicable mandatory FMIs have been carried out.
Refer to System Evolution on page 605.
• Carry out the following tasks in preparation for the visit:
Task Title Task Definition
Obtain site status information and error logs Job Card PM 005 - Site Status on page 317
Analyze AWS Error Codes Job Card ERR 002 - AWS Error Messages on page 343
Analyze IDC Error Codes Job Card ERR 001 - IDC Error Messages on page 341
Analyze Gantry Error Codes Job Card ERR 003 - Gantry and Generator Error Codes
on page 345
Analyze Generator Error Codes Job Card ERR 003 - Gantry and Generator Error Codes
on page 345

pm001.fm
3 SUPPLIES AND SPECIAL TOOLS PER PM VISIT
Chapter 8
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
3-1 Supplies and consumables required per PM visit
The following table lists the supplies and consumables required for each PM visit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Supplies
Gantry Lithium battery X X
CPU Lithium battery X X
Consumables
Blank DOS formatted HD 3.5 floppy disk X X X X X X
Lubricant 46-194427P85 X X X X X X
Light oil suitable for lubrication of compression guide rail X X X X X X
HV Grease C333633 X X X X X X
HV Oil C158117 (Z30118) X X X X X X
Cooling liquid kit including: X X X X X X

Page no. 304
- Coolant for conditioner

- Funnel
- Safety goggles
- Purge tool 2249359 (short length of coolant pipe with connector)
- Empty container labelled Empty
- Gloves
- Documentation (INS type)

Roll of adhesive tape X X X X X X

pm001.fm
3-2 Special tools required per PM visit
pm001.fm
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
The following table lists the special tools required for each PM visit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Calibrated tools
kVp meter: X X X X X X
- Radcal 4083 kVp meter (2384916)
- RMI 232 kVp meter
- Keithley 35080B kVp meter.
Note:
The Keithley 35080B kVp meter is not recommended for use in Europe;
It does not meet the European accuracy requirement of 3%.
Meter(s) for measurement of mA and mAs: X X X X X X
- Fluke 87 multimeter (12062-Fluke 87 type 5)
- Keithley 35035 mAs meter (46-194427P435)
- GS Poner 165 mA-mAs meter
RADCAL Dosimeter 2026C X X X X X X X X X X X X
Other tools
Page no. 305
Mammography compression scale with digital display (46-194427P407) X X X X X X

or Compression measurement tool (GAMEX RMI model 817)

Flat Field Phantom (25mm Lucite) X X X X X X X X X X X X
ACR standard phantom (16 cells): Nuclear Associates 18-220 or RMI- X X X X X X X X X X X X
156
IQST Standard Phantom X X X X X X X X X X X X
6M ionization chamber (6cc) for RADCAL Dosimeter X X X X X X X X X X X X

Dosimeter support X X X X X X X X X X X X
Steel protection sheet X X X X X X X X X X X X
Set of acrylic plates (PMMA) (min. size 20cm x 20cm) allowing thick- X X X X X X X X X X X X

nesses of 25mm, 40mm and 60 mm with a tolerance of +/-0.1mm
Two sheets of 0.2 mm and 0.5 mm thick pure aluminium X X X X X X
Standard 19 x 23 compression paddle X X X X X X
Plexiglass in thickness increment of 0.5 cm X X X X X X X X X X X X
Set of acrylic plates (2299008-2) X X X X X
Four coins X X X X
Chapter 8
4 PM TASK SCHEDULE
pm001.fm
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
Note:
Some of the tasks listed in this schedule may overlap with similar tasks required by your local regulations. If this is the case you
can skip these particular tasks and perform the tasks required by your local regulations instead.
Task Title Task Definition Int. Drn. PM Visit no.

mth. min. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
On-site Preliminary:
Backup Senographe param- Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/ 12 10 X X X X X X
eters Restore procedure, sections 5-
1, page 475 and 5-2, page 476
Inspection:
Visual inspection of cables Check the appearance of all 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
visible cables and correct haz-
ardous trailing cables in the
room.
Page no. 306
Visual inspection of equip- Check for signs of damage to 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X

ment covers and monitor support.

Inspect the Radiation Screen Check for breaks or cracks in 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
the glass, gaps or cracks in the
frame, and for correct, stable
mounting. See Job Card PM
006 - Check Gantry and Gener-

ator Safety, section 3, page
320.

Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
mth. min. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Generator/Tube:
Remove Generator Covers. Job Card PM 007 - Removal/ 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replacement of Covers for
Planned Maintenance on page
321
Clean Conditioner Air Filter Job Card PM 002 - Conditioner 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Air Filter Cleaning on page 313
Check and top-up Condi- Job Card PM 004 - Conditioner 12 5 X X X X X X
tioner coolant Coolant Level Check and Top-
up on page 315
Change Conditioner Coolant Job Card PM 012 - Conditioner 12 15 X X X X X X
Coolant Replacement on page
335
Check Cable Grounding Job Card PM 006 - Check Gan- 24 15 X X X
try and Generator Safety, sec-
Page no. 307
tion 2, page 319

Change Generator CPU Lith- Job Card D/R 021 - Generator 36 25 X X
ium Battery CPU Battery on page 495
Check HV Unit Job Card PM 008 - Check HV 12 5 X X X X X X
Unit on page 327
Check Half Value Layer Job Card CAL 016 - Half-Value 12 20 X X X X X X

(HVL) Layer Measurement on page
233
Check kVp settings Job Card VF 014 - Check kVp 12 20 X X X X X X
settings on page 289

Check mA and mAs settings Job Card VF 016 - Check mA 12 30 X X X X X X
and mAs settings on page 295
Reinstall Generator covers. Job Card PM 007 - Removal/ 6 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X
321
Generator cover check Check covers for security and 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
presence of screw caps, and
for damage, scratches.
pm001.fm
pm001.fm
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
mth. min. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Gantry:
Remove Gantry covers. Job Card PM 007 - Removal/ 12 30 X X X X X X
321
Change Gantry CPU Battery Job Card D/R 009 - Gantry 36 45 X X
CPU Battery on page 457
Check Breast Thickness Job Card VF 005 - Senographe 6 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Measurement Functional Checks, section 6-9,
page 272
Check Grid Presence Sen- Job Card VF 005 - Senographe 12 10 X X X X X X
sor Functional Checks, section 6-
10, page 272
Check Gantry functions Job Card VF 005 - Senographe 12 10 X X X X X X
Functional Checks, section 6-2,
Page no. 308
page 270 to section 6-7, page

271

Check Light Beam centering Job Card VF 011 - Light Beam 24 15 X X X
Centering on page 283
Check and lubricate Gantry Job Card PM 010 - Column 12 30 X X X X X X
mechanisms Movement on page 331

Reinstall Gantry covers Job Card PM 007 - Removal/ 12 60 X X X X X X
321

Gantry cover check Check covers for security and 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Check Compression Job Card PM 011 - Compres- 12 10 X X X X X X
sion on page 333
Check Gantry emergency Job Card PM 006 - Check Gan- 12 5 X X X X X X
stop buttons. try and Generator Safety, sec-
Chapter 8
tion 1, page 319

Chapter 8
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
mth. min. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Control Station - UPS:
Check UPS function Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batter- 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
ies, section 5, page 267
Recalibrate UPS Battery Job Card VF 003 - UPS Batter- 12 25 X X X X X X
Capacity ies, section 6, page 268
Control Station cover check Check covers for security and 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Page no. 309

pm001.fm
pm001.fm
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
mth. min. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Acquisition IQ:
IQ Tools Flat Field Test Job Card VF 008 - IQ Tools Flat 6 30 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Field Test on page 273
Check Image Acquisition Job Card VF 009 - Image 6 8 X X X X X X X X X X X X
and ACR Score Acquisition and ACR Score on
page 279
Calibrate mAs Non-Linearity Job Card CAL 020 - mAs Non- 6 8 X X X X X X X X X X X X
(Automatic) linearity Calibration (Auto-
matic) on page 253
AOP mode check Job Card VF 010 - Acquisition 6 15 X X X X X X X X X X X X
in AOP Mode on page 281
Page no. 310

Chapter 8
Chapter 8
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
mth. min. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Seno Advantage (SA1 or SA2; if present)
Clean monitors and key- Refer to the Seno Advantage 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
board Service Manual
(Job Card PM001)
Remove core and log files Refer to the AW4.2P Service 6 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X
from Workstation disk Manual
Backup Seno Advantage 1.2 Refer to the Seno Advantage 6 5 X X X X X X X X X X X X
Workstation Service Manual
(Job Card PM002)
Check the calibration and Refer to the Seno Advantage 12 30 X X X X X X
adjustment of the 21" moni- Service Manual
tors. (Job Card PM000)
Check DICOM Printer Refer to the Seno Advantage 12 15 X X X X X X
Service Manual
(Job Card PM003)
Page no. 311
CAD system (CADX or CADR2; if present)

Clean interior fans Refer to the CAD System Ser- 12 5 X X X X X X
vice Manual
(Job Card PM001)
Change UPS battery Refer to the CAD System Ser- 24 30 X X X
vice Manual

(Job Card PM001)
Completion:
Check site ready for cus- Check the cleanliness and pre- 6 10 X X X X X X X X X X X X

tomer sentation of the site; correct
any hazards such as trailing
cables.
Check site records Check that all PM documents, 6 15 X X X X X X X X X X X X
records, etc., are stored with
the site log book.
Customer briefing Review the PM visit with the 6 15 X X X X X X X X X X X X
customer.
pm001.fm
This page is blank. Page no. 312 Chapter 8
pm001.fm
Job Card PM 002 - Conditioner Air Filter Cleaning
Job Card PM 002 - Conditioner Air Filter Cleaning Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
• Roll of adhesive tape.
2. TOOLS
• Metric Allen wrenches (including 5.5 mm).
• Large flat screwdriver.
• Slim flat blade (knife or similar).
WARNING
Before beginning work, shut down the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospital
supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to
prevent others from applying power.
4. PREREQUISITES
• Shut down and switch off the equipment as per the Warning above.
• Remove Generator Cabinet covers as required for access to the Conditioner. Refer to Job Card D/R
101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.
5. PROCEDURE
To clean the Conditioner air filter, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen, without removing, screw (1) securing air 2 1
duct (2) in place, then carefully remove air duct.

pm002.fm
Job Card PM 002 - Conditioner Air Filter Cleaning
2. Remove the air filter from its housing. Pull the plastic tab (3)
towards the rear of the unit then pull the tab out to begin dislodg-
ing the air filter (4).
3. Wash the air filter by holding the clean side of the air filter under 4
running water for either two minutes or until the dirty side of the
filter is clean.
4. Allow the filter to dry.
5. Use a piece of adhesive tape to remove any lint in the filter. 3
6. Replace the air filter in its housing.
7. Reassemble the air duct and secure it by tightening the screw.
8. Reassemble the Generator Cabinet covers. Refer to Job Card D/
R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.

pm002.fm
Job Card PM 004 - Conditioner Coolant Level Check and Top-up
Job Card PM 004 - Conditioner Coolant Level Check and Top-up Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
Cooling liquid kit (refer to the Generator and Conditioner Cabinet section of the Renewal Parts List for
part number) including:
- Coolant for conditioner.
- Funnel.
- Safety goggles.
- Gloves.
2. TOOLS
• When filling or topping up the Conditioner, take great care to keep coolant away from the vents, the
ON/OFF switch and the power cord connection. Do not immerse the Conditioner in any liquid.
• Dispose of old and surplus coolant with care as described in the section Coolant Disposal; refer to
the Caution below.
CAUTION
immediately.
Remove and wash contaminated clothing before reuse
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove Generator Cabinet covers as required for access to the Conditioner. Refer to Job Card D/R
101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.

pm004.fm
Job Card PM 004 - Conditioner Coolant Level Check and Top-up
5. PROCEDURE
CAUTION
When performing any of the following procedures, be careful to avoid spillage of coolant,
especially onto or near electrical connections. If any coolant is spilled, it must be cleaned
up immediately.
Note:
A document describing an alternate procedure is provided in the coolant kit. For maximum safety
and minimum risk of spillage, we recommend using the procedure given below:
1. Check the coolant level weekly or when the CHECK FLUID message appears.
2. Remove the conditioner reservoir cap and check the liquid level.
3. If necessary, add liquid until it reaches the bottom of the cap threads.
4. Replace the conditioner reservoir cap when the level is correct.
5. Clean the exterior of the Conditioner with a soft cloth and warm, soapy water. Never use abrasive or
solvent-based cleaners to clean the Conditioner.

pm004.fm
Job Card PM 005 - Site Status
Job Card PM 005 - Site Status Chapter 8
1. SITE LOGBOOK
1. Review the site Logbook to identify recently applied FMI procedures and last Planned Maintenance
Operation Report.
2. Verify the presence of the following log diskettes with the site logbook:
- PM log diskette
- Acquisition log diskette
- Review log diskette
2. REVIEW SYSTEM OPERATION WITH CUSTOMER

1. Discuss with customer to find out if there are any specific problems with the system. Make a list of
problems and distinguish between problems that can be solved by:
- Corrective maintenance
- Planned maintenance
2. Propose solution(s) with the customer and come to an agreement on what actions are to be taken.

pm005.fm
Job Card PM 005 - Site Status
This page is blank.

pm005.fm
Job Card PM 006 - Check Gantry and Generator Safety
Job Card PM 006 - Check Gantry and Generator Safety Chapter 8
1. EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS

Check red emergency stop buttons:
- Pressing either of the emergency stop buttons (located on either side of the gantry column base)
should result in a complete power-down of both the generator and gantry.
WARNING
The cart is not powered down.
2. CHECK CABLE GROUNDING

Check grounding of the following cables:
- Starter motor cable. The screen of this cable is terminated with a metal grounding clip which
must be securely fixed.
- Gantry power cable and Generator AC Mains cable.
- HV cable. To ensure proper grounding of the HV cable, tighten the 1.5 mm screw on the top of
the cable locking ring.
Note:
If the HV cable is not properly grounded, then intermittent X-ray console lockup and random error
messages could occur - in such an event, check the grounding at both ends of the cable.
- Anode return wire. Check that X-ray tube
anode return wire (marked BLOC + HT) is
connected to the threaded stud marked with
a ground symbol on the top of the HV unit. Anode Return Wire
HV Connector
700-PL1

pm006.fm
Job Card PM 006 - Check Gantry and Generator Safety
3. CHECK LEAD GLASS SHIELD

Visually inspect lead glass shield condition security:
• Make sure it is not unstable.
• Glass is not cracked or broken.
• Check for cracks or openings in the frame or between frame and glass.
•

pm006.fm
Job Card PM 007 - Removal/Replacement of Covers for Planned Maintenance
Job Card PM 007 - Removal/Replacement of Covers for Planned Mainte-

nance Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
WARNING
NEVER switch off at the UPS except in emergency (risk of data loss).
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Covers to be removed
• First, look at the list of PM operations to be carried out.
Use the following table to decide which covers need to be removed:
If these operations are to be carried out: Remove these covers: Refer to
PM Group Task Title Section
Generator Any (except Check Generator Calibration) Generator covers 5-2
Gantry Column Movement Both gantry half-covers 5-3
Gantry Check X-ray Tube Tube Housing Spacer covers 5-5
Gantry Check Compression Compression arm cover 5-4
Gantry Replace Gantry CPU Lithium Battery Left gantry half-cover only 5-3

pm007.fm
5-2. Remove/replace generator covers

Refer to the illustration for screw and panel locations. 1
1. Remove all power from the Senographe.

2. Remove the four plastic plugs covering the generator top
panel securing screws.
3. Use an Allen wrench to remove the four generator top
panel retaining screws (1).
4. Remove generator top panel by lifting upwards.
3 2
5. It is not normally necessary to remove the rear panel or
the right-hand side panel for PM operations.
6. For the front panel (panel with operator switches, ref. 2), and for the left-hand side panel (3):
a. Remove the two screws securing the panel.
b. Slightly lift the panel upwards and towards yourself.
c. Disconnect the ground wire at the Generator end to avoid risk of creating a short circuit.
7. Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement.
Be sure to reconnect the ground wires.
Take care when replacing the Generator Cabinet covers, especially if the conditioner air and water pipes
have been disturbed. Check that the covers do not block the pipes.

pm007.fm
5-3. Remove/replace left or right gantry half-cover

2. Use a hex wrench to remove screw (3).
3. Remove the plastic plugs and two screws (4) from the top of
the column half-cover.
4. DO NOT touch two screws (5). Undo hex bolt (6) by 2 or 3
turns (accessible through a slot at rear of the base); this
method retains correct alignment of the cover with the safety
stop switch. 4
5. Slide the complete half-cover towards you to remove it.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH OR DAMAGE CABLES.
5
3

pm007.fm
5-4. Remove/replace compression arm covers

1. Set the compression arm in the horizontal position, tube
on the right, and unlock the tube housing arm to set it at
27 degrees, with the tube below the horizontal.
2. Switch OFF the Senographe electrical power.
3. Refer to the illustration. Use the flat screwdriver and 4 mm 1
Allen wrench to remove the two left hand cover securing
screws (1 and 2).
4. Remove the left half-cover by slightly lifting it on the com-
pression motor side, and then gently pulling it to the left.
5. Switch the Senographe electrical power back on.
6. Reset the tube housing arm to 0 degrees. 2
7. Rotate the compression arm through 180 degrees and
unlock the housing arm to set the tube 27 degrees down-
wards.
9. Use the flat screwdriver and 4 mm Allen wrench, remove
the two right hand cover securing screws.
10. Remove the right half-cover by slightly lifting it on the com-
pression motor side, and then gently pulling it to the right.
11. Remove spacer plate (on the top of the sensor indicator plate) and remove the indicator plate by gen-
tly pulling it towards the bottom of the compression arm.
12. To reinstall the compression arm covers, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
CAUTION
When replacing the covers, reinstall the spacer plate as quickly as possible. It will stay in
place when one of the half-covers has been reinstalled. To prevent the indicator plate from
falling, do not set the compression arm in the vertical position until at least one half-cover
has been installed.

pm007.fm
5-5. Remove/replace tube housing spacer covers
WARNING
Be careful when touching the tube housing, as its temperature can be up to 80 °C (about
180 °F)
• Refer to the following illustration and instructions:.
5 B
6
7
8
3
P
4
1. Remove strip B (clipped in position).

2. Set the tube housing arm horizontal, with the head on the right.
3. Remove the plastic covers and screws 3, 5 and 7.
4. Remove the left half-cover.
5. Rotate the arm through 180 degrees (head on the left).
7. Remove the right half-cover.
8. To reinstall the tube housing spacer covers, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
Take care to install the short screws in positions 3 and 4.

pm007.fm
This page is blank.

pm007.fm
Job Card PM 008 - Check HV Unit
Job Card PM 008 - Check HV Unit Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
• HV Grease C333633
• HV Oil C158117 (Z30118) (available in 30-liter tin only)
2. TOOLS
None
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove rear and left side covers from Generator and Conditioner Cabinet. Refer to Job Card PM
007 - Removal/Replacement of Covers for Planned Maintenance on page 321.
5. PROCEDURE
To check the HV Unit, proceed as follows: Primary Winding
1. Remove HV connector and visually inspect earth

braid continuity.
HV Measurement
2. Check presence of oil or grease in HV connector.
If necessary, add the appropriate product. Vent Screw
3. Reconnect HV connector and secure the locking
screw.
4. Check for presence of oil leakage around the
connectors on the top of the HV unit. If there is
oil leakage, replace the HV unit as per Job Card
D/R 025 - HV and kV/mA tank on page 499. XJ2
5. Check that vent screw is open.
6. Perform a visual check of connectors on HV unit. XJ1
HV Connector
XJ3
700-PL1

pm008.fm
Job Card PM 008 - Check HV Unit
This page is blank.

pm008.fm
Job Card PM 009 - Tube Check
Job Card PM 009 - Tube Check Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
• HV grease, p/n C333633
2. TOOLS
• Standard toolkit.
• Vacuum cleaner: 46-194427P392 (for 120V supply) or 46-194427P391 (for 230V supply).
WARNING
Be sure to follow the instructions for switching off power before working on tube housing
connections.
• NEVER switch off at the UPS except in emergency (risk of data loss).
WARNING
Be careful when touching the tube housing; its temperature can be up to 80° C (180° F).
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove the Tube Housing Spacer covers. Refer to Job Card PM 007 - Removal/Replacement of
Covers for Planned Maintenance on page 321.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Check Tube Tilt
• Activate the tube housing arm locking lever.
Rotate the tube housing arm to its ±15° and ±27° detents.
• When the tube housing arm is locked in each of these four positions, the error message Incorrect X-
ray Incidence should appear on the X-ray console display.
• Rotate the tube housing arm so that it is “floating” between detents. After five seconds, the error mes-
sage Tube Housing Arm Unlocked should appear on the X-ray console display, and the message
Arm Unlocked should appear on the Gantry readout.

pm009.fm
Job Card PM 009 - Tube Check
5-2. Check HV cable connector
WARNING
Before beginning work on the Tube Housing, shut down the equipment and switch OFF the
Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly
with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power.
Refer to the illustration below:
1. Remove and check the HV connector.
2. Clean and regrease the connector (use HV grease, p/n C333633).
3. Refit the HV connector; ensure that it is correctly in place and secure it using the locking screw.
HV connector
Ground connector screw
+HV screw
Stator, pressostat,
and thermal switch Metal grounding clip
connectors
Stator connector
Pressostat
connector
5-3. Check fans and clean the Tube Housing Compartment

1. Use a suitable vacuum cleaner to remove accumulated dust from the tube compartment.
2. Apply power to the system.
3. Check that the Tube Housing fans are operating.

pm009.fm
Job Card PM 010 - Column Movement
Job Card PM 010 - Column Movement Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
• Lubricant 46-194427P85.
2. TOOLS
WARNING
Before beginning work on the column mechanism, shut down the equipment and switch
OFF the Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or mark it
clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power.
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove the Gantry Column covers. Refer to Job Card PM 007 - Removal/Replacement of Covers for
Planned Maintenance on page 321.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Check column movement
1. With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four sets of column up/down control
buttons are operational (check each button for up and down movement of column).
2. Move column to its upper and lower limits. Optical sensors should stop movement. If optical sensors
have failed, mechanical safety stops halt movement. Total one-way movement time (going either up
or down) between upper and lower limits should be 16 ±2 seconds. This time includes initial acceler-
ation, which lasts 3 seconds.
3. During column movement, check for any noise which might indicate excessive friction or binding.
5-2. Check and clean the column mechanism 1

1. Raise the column to its maximum height, to facilitate access to the
column mechanism.
2. Switch off system power (see the Warning above). 2
3. Check for any sign of oil leakage from the gas spring (1). Leakage
may indicate the need to change the spring.
3
4. Clean and lubricate the jack screw (2) and guide rails (3).
Use 46-194427P85.
5. Check the motor drive belt (4) manually for adequate tension.
4

pm010.fm
Job Card PM 010 - Column Movement
This page is blank.

pm010.fm
Job Card PM 011 - Compression
Job Card PM 011 - Compression Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
• Light oil suitable for lubrication of compression guide rail.
2. TOOLS
• Compression measurement tool: GAMMEX RMI model 817 or Mammo compression scale
p/n 46-194427P407 (digital display).
WARNING
Before beginning work on the compression mechanism, shut down the equipment and
switch OFF the Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or
mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power.
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove the Compression Arm covers. Refer to Job Card PM 007 - Removal/Replacement of Covers
for Planned Maintenance on page 321.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Check compression.
1. Check the compression paddle mounting for signs of cracks or other damage.
2. Verify that both sets of compression/decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs
located on the paddle holder all function correctly (i.e., the paddle moves up or down in response to
each command).
3. Use the mammo compression scale placed between the cassette holder and the compression paddle
to check calibration of the compression force display on the gantry readout. Measure one point at 5
daN and one point at 15 daN. The value on the gantry readout must agree within ±1 daN. If it does
not, perform Job Card CAL 006 - Calibration of Compression Force Detector on page 209.
Note:
If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available, this verification can be done
by lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the cassette holder, installing the magnification
device in the upper pair of holes, and connecting a spring dynamometer (calibrated from 0 to
15 kg) between the compression paddle and the magnification device.

pm011.fm
Job Card PM 011 - Compression
5-2. Check and clean the compression mechanism

1. Switch off system power (see the Warning above).
2. Check the small compression drive belt (1) manually for

adequate tension.
3. Check the large compression drive belt (2) manually for

adequate tension.
4. Clean and lubricate the guide rail (3). 1

2
5. Check the full length of the flexible flat cable (4) and its
securing ties for any signs of damage.

pm011.fm
Job Card PM 012 - Conditioner Coolant Replacement
Job Card PM 012 - Conditioner Coolant Replacement Chapter 8
1. SUPPLIES
• Cooling liquid kit (refer to the Generator and Conditioner Cabinet section of the Renewal Parts List on
page 395 for part number) including:
- Pre-mixed coolant for conditioner.
- Funnel.
- Safety goggles.
- Gloves.
2. TOOLS
• Standard Tool Box.
• Purge tool 2249359 (short length of coolant pipe with connector).
• When filling or topping up the Conditioner, take great care to keep coolant away from the vents, the
ON/OFF switch and the power cord connection. Do not immerse the Conditioner in any liquid.
• Dispose of used and surplus coolant with care as described in the section Surplus Coolant Disposal.
Refer to the following Caution:
CAUTION
• Always wear protective gloves and goggles when working with coolant.
• When working with coolant you should treat it with care; avoid unnecessary contact .
See below for First Aid advice:
immediately.
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove Generator Cabinet covers as required for access. See Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Cov-
ers on page 539.

pm012.fm
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Conditioner Coolant Replacement
The coolant must be changed every 12 months. This procedure and the procedure to top up the coolant
alternate per site visit, and are both undertaken on a 12 month basis.
minimum risk of spillage, we recommend using the procedure given below:
1. Shut down the entire system by clicking the System Shutdown button on the Browser window.
2. Switch OFF the Generator and MDR circuit breakers in MDR Breaker
the Generator Cabinet.
3. Prepare the Empty container provided in the Cooling
Liquid kit to receive the used coolant. Place the end of ON/OFF
push buttons:
the purge tool tube into the container.
Conditioner
and Conditioner
4. Disconnect the coolant input pipe from the Condi- MDR
tioner. The pipe connector seals automatically. Detector supply
5. Connect the disconnected coolant input pipe to the Control Station

purge tool. The connector is now unsealed, and coolant UPS
can drain into the prepared container.
6. Switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and press the Condi-
tioner ON button in the generator cabinet. Generator
7. Coolant drains into the container, until the Check Fluid
alarm stops the flow.
Generator
8. Switch OFF the MDR circuit breaker and refill the Condi-
Breaker
tioner reservoir with clean pre-mixed coolant from the
container labelled Flush.
9. Switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and press the Condi-
tioner ON button in the generator cabinet.
10. Coolant drains into the container, until the Check Fluid alarm again stops the flow.
11. The cooling circuit now contains fresh clean liquid.
12. Switch OFF the MDR circuit breaker; fill the Conditioner reservoir to the bottom of the cap threads.
13. Disconnect the coolant input pipe from the purge tool; reconnect it to the Conditioner input .
14. Switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and press the Conditioner ON button in the generator cabinet.
15. As the coolant circulates and air bubbles are flushed from the coolant circuit, the coolant level falls.
Add liquid as necessary until the level is steady at the bottom of the cap threads.
16. Replace the reservoir cap when you are satisfied that the level is correct.
17. Label the container containing the drained coolant to indicate the nature of its contents; cross out the
word Empty on the label, and copy the information from one of the coolant containers (Flush or Top-
ping) provided in the kit. See below for disposal.
18. Switch ON the MDR and Generator circuit breakers; replace the Generator Cabinet covers.

pm012.fm

• In a normal non-sensitive environment, used and surplus coolant may be disposed of by pouring
down a drain.

pm012.fm
This page is blank.

pm012.fm
CHAPTER 9 ERROR MESSAGE INFORMATION
This chapter includes job cards listing error messages generated by Senographe 2000 D sub-systems.

Errors.fm
This page is blank.

Errors.fm
Job Card ERR 001 - IDC Error Messages
Job Card ERR 001 - IDC Error Messages Chapter 9
1. HOW TO VIEW THE ERROR LOG

Errors reported by the IDC diagnostic routines are recorded in a common system error log which also
contains error messages generated by the AWS and Gantry/Generator applications.
To view the error log content, right click on the AWS screen background; select Service Tools/Service
Desktop/Error Log from the drop-down menu.
The most recent error code generated by the IDC can also be viewed on the display on the rear of the
IDC computer.
2. IDC DIAGNOSTICS
Each time that the IDC sub-system is booted (powered up or reset), it carries out a series of diagnostic
self-tests, first under the control of the BIOS, then under software control. As each test is performed, a
corresponding code is displayed on the four-digit green LCD panel at the rear of the IDC unit.
2-1. BIOS Diagnostic Display

While the BIOS tests are running, the LCD displays two blank digits followed a two-digit code corre-
sponding to the current test. If a test detects an error or fails to complete, the tests are halted and the
code of the failing test remains displayed.
2-2. Software Diagnostic Display

• Three sets of software diagnostics are carried out. While these test are running, the display shows
X000, where X may be 1, 2, or 3.
• If all tests are completed without failure, the display shows FFFF.
• If a test fails, the display shows a code in the form XXFF for two seconds. XX is a code correspond-
ing to the failing test. The tests then continue.
• On completion of the tests after a failure occurs, the display shows F0FF.
3. ERROR DETECTION
• If the IDC halts with a display in the format FFFF, all power-up tests have passed without failure.
• If the IDC halts with a display in the format --XX, where XX can be any number, a BIOS test has
failed. If the problem occurs again after reset, the recommended action is to change the IDC unit.
• If the IDC halts with a display in the format F0FF, a software test has failed. Reset the IDC and watch
the LCD display.
If the failure is repeated, a code XXFF is displayed for two seconds. Note the error code XX.
Table 1 gives a list of IDC diagnostic error codes, with recommended sequences of actions.

err001.fm
Job Card ERR 001 - IDC Error Messages
TABLE 1 - IDC DIAGNOSTIC ERROR CODES
Error Code Displayed Actions (in recommended order)
FFFF No action; all tests passed.
- - XX A BIOS test (code XX) has failed. If the problem persists, change
the IDC.
FOFF A software test has failed. Reset the IDC and watch the LCD dis-
play. Note any error code displayed (XXFF for two seconds).
01, 02, 03 Reset IDC.

Restore IDC software.
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 23, Reset IDC.

41, 53, 55 Change IDC.
21 Change IDC-Conditioner cable.

Change Conditioner.
Change Detector.
22 Check/top up conditioner coolant.

Change conditioner.
24 Change IDC-Senographe serial link cable.
31 Check/change IDC-Detector Power Supply cable.
32 Change Detector Power Supply.
33 Change Detector Power Supply ac cable.

Change Detector Power Supply.
40 Check/change IDC-Detector fiber-optic cables.

Change Detector.
42 Check/change IDC-Detector fiber-optic cables.
51 Change IDC-Senographe serial link cables.

Change Senographe board 400PL2.
Change IDC.
54 Change IDC-Senographe serial link cables.
56 Change IDC-Senographe RT line cables.
60 Check Detector temp./humidity; if OK Change Detector.
64 Check/change IDC-Conditioner air and water pipes.

Change Conditioner.
Change Detector.
66 Repeat calibrations.
Change IDC.

err001.fm
Job Card ERR 002 - AWS Error Messages
Job Card ERR 002 - AWS Error Messages Chapter 9

Errors reported by AWS software applications are recorded in a common system error log which also
contains error messages generated by the IDC and Gantry/Generator applications.
2. AWS ERROR MESSAGES

TABLE 1 - AWS DIAGNOSTIC ERROR MESSAGES
Error Code Error Text Actions (in recommended order)
1 Software failure None (automatic server restart).
2 Software integrity error Run fsck.
Reinstall software.
3 Communication problem with Reset IDC and/ or restart AWS browser.
IDC subsystem* Check cable connection between AWS and IDC).
4 Communication problem with Check that Senographe is on.
Senographe subsystem Check cable connection between AWS and Generator.
Change Generator Interface Board or change AWS.
6 Communication problem with Check network cable connection.
external network Check/change network hub.
7 Communication problem with Check cable connection between AWS and UPS.
UPS Try to restart the system.
Change UPS or AWS.
8 Battery low or discharged Charge UPS battery (press Cart ON switch on Generator
Cabinet, wait approx. 45 minutes).
Change UPS if necessary.
10 Failure accessing hardware Check HW key validity and integrity.
key Check HW key serial port on AWS.
Change HW key or AWS.
12 DICOM communication prob- The DICOM worklist provider is not DICOM compliant.
lem with worklist provider Check dicom compatibility with hospital network adminis-
trator.
Check dicom worklist provider declaration parameters.
18 Wrong value received from X Check AWS and generator releases; if not compatible,
Generator upgrade system.
19 Wrong value received from Check AWS and IDC releases; if not compatible, upgrade
IDC system.
* Note: This message is displayed each time the acquisition system is rebooted (X-ray Console OFF/
ON).

err002.fm
Job Card ERR 002 - AWS Error Messages
This page is blank.

err002.fm
Job Card ERR 003 - Gantry and Generator Error Codes
Job Card ERR 003 - Gantry and Generator Error Codes Chapter 9
1. INTRODUCTION
This Job Card lists error codes generated by the Gantry and Generator sub-systems and displayed on
the X-ray Console. Each message may contain two codes, the User error code and the Service error
code (refer to the explanation below). Error codes containing a Service Error Code are listed here; codes
containing a User Error code are listed in the Operator Manual. Many messages contain both, and
appear in both manuals.
Refer to Section 3 Error Code Structure for an explanation of the error code display.
Section 4 Gantry and Generator Error Codes lists the error codes, with corresponding error descriptions.
Where possible (mainly for recently developed codes), the list also includes the text of a displayed error
message, and suggestions for corrective action.

Errors reported by the Gantry and Generator sub-systems are recorded in a common system error log
which also contains error messages generated by the AWS and IDC.
3. ERROR CODE STRUCTURE

Error codes are displayed on the X-ray Console in the format shown here:.
E 5 5 Error text 1 6 1 0 1 3
a bb ccc ddd
User error code Service error code
• The User Error Code is the code given in the Operator Manual; it is easy to use and communicate,
and gives sufficient information for use by the customer.
It includes a code for the type of error (a) and a message number (bb). The example given, E55, indi-
cates that a tube angulation fault has occurred which caused exposure inhibition,
- a: Type of error:
I: Warning; exposure not inhibited.
S: Warning; exposure inhibited.
E: Fault; exposure inhibited.
K: Fault; power shut down for safety.
- bb: Message number indicating the origin of the fault.
• The Service Error Code is the code used in this document; it gives more information, and is recom-
mended for use in GE internal communication. It includes two reference codes:
- ccc: Indicates the affected subassembly (hardware or software). The example given, 161, indi-
cates a tube housing fault.
- ddd: Indicates the origin of the fault The example given, 013, indicates that no reference crossing
was detected during tube movement.
• The following abbreviations are used in the error code descriptions:
IST: Installation

err003.fm
MNT: Maintenance
VRTX: Real time operating system
• Software errors. Many of the codes are described as software errors (e.g., 002/001; Gene. CPU soft-
ware error). These errors should never occur. If they do, and especially if they are repeated, please
contact Service Engineering with as much information as possible (including a copy of the error
codes file on diskette).

err003.fm
4. GANTRY AND GENERATOR ERROR CODES
Code Message Text Description Recommended Actions
002/001 Gene CPU software error: VRTX error

during init
002/002 Gene CPU software error: reboot by

watch_dog_hard or reset button
002/003 Gene CPU software error: reboot by

watch_dog_soft
002/004 Gene CPU: reboot after power micro-fail-

ure
003/000 Gene CPU software error: bus error
003/001 Gene CPU software error: address error
003/002 Gene CPU software error: format error
003/003 Gene CPU software error: illegal instruc-

tion
003/004 Gene CPU software error: privilege viola-

tion
003/005 Gene CPU software error: trace error
003/006 Gene CPU software error: emulation line

1010 error
003/007 Gene CPU software error: emulation line

1111 error
003/008 Gene CPU software error: CHK error
003/009 Gene CPU software error: TRAPV error
004/001 Gene interface: reset error
004/002 Gene interface: read/write error on timer

PTM1

PTM1

PTM2

PTM2
004/006 Gene interface: interrupt error on

DUART1
004/007 Gene interface: PTM1 timer 1 defective

err003.fm
004/013 Gene interface: interrupt error on PTM1

timer 1

timer 2

timer 3

timer 1

timer 2

timer 3 D208
006/000 Generator: fault at exposure command
006/001 Generator: fault at exposure command
006/002 Generator: signal kV_Inf_5

(Less_than_5kV) not rising
006/003 Generator: Signal En_Pose

(Exposure_On) not rising
006/004 Generator: fatal security triggered during

exposure
006/005 Generator: fatal security triggered at end

of exposure or signal En_Pose
(Exposure_On) stays ’high’
006/011 Generator: signal Secu_Rattrap

(No_Fatal_Security) stays ’high’ after ’arc-
ing recovery’
007/xxx Gene init tests: one fatal security input <>

0; xxx identifies input.Access generator
error log display for full error decoding.
011/001 Focus bias software error: unknown com-

mand
011/002 Focus bias software error: unknown task

status

err003.fm
012/001 Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar

(Bias_Presence) ’high’ in stand-by status

(Bias_Presence) stays ’low’ when bias
generation starts

(Bias_Presence) goes ’low’ after stabiliza-
tion

(Bias_Presence) stays ‘high’ after bias
generation stopped
016/001 Anode starter software error: unknown

command
016/002 Anode starter software error: unknown

task status
017/001 Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation

(Rotation_Presence) ’high’ in stand-by
status

(Rotation_Presence) not rising during
acceleration to 9000 rpm

(Rotation_Presence) not rising during
acceleration to 6000 rpm

(Rotation_Presence) goes ’low’ during
rotation at 9000 rpm

rotation at 6000 rpm

rotation (speed < 9000 rpm)

rotation (speed < 6000 rpm)

(Rotation_Presence) stays ’high’ during
9000 rpm braking

6000 rpm braking

err003.fm

rotor failure

(Rotation_Presence) stays ’low’ during
rotation
021/001 Heater software error: unknown command
021/002 Heater software error: unknown task sta-

tus
021/003 Heater software error: Heater scaling

parameters (ICH) or heater values are not
valid
022/001 Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf

(Heater_Presence) ’high’ in stand-by sta-
tus

(Heater_Presence) stays ’low’ when
heater started

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during pre-
heater phase

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during 1st
trigger

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during
exposure
022/006 Heater track 1: mA value not significant

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ after expo-
sure

(Heater_Presence) stays ’high’ when
heater stopped

(Heater_Presence) ’high’ in stand-by sta-
tus

(Heater_Presence) stays ’low’ when
heater started

err003.fm

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during pre-
heater phase

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during 1st
trigger

(Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during
exposure
023/006 Heater track 2: mA value not significant

No mA measurement; change 701PL1
(kV/mA board).

(Heater_Presence) ’low’ after exposure

(Heater_Presence) stays ’high’ when
heater stopped
026/001 Grid sync software error: ACQ_NTR or

ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply
when starting
026/002 Grid sync software error: ACQ_NTR or

when stopping
026/003 Grid sync software error: unknown com-

mand
026/004 Grid sync software error: unknown task

status
027/001 Grid sync: signal Synchro_Bras

(Synchro_Arm) ’high’ in standby status
027/002 Grid sync: grid start signal not received or

grid fault detected
027/003 Grid sync: signal Synchro_Bras

(Synchro_Arm) ’low’ after grid start
027/004 Grid sync: grid stop signal not received or

grid fault detected
027/005 E04 Arm fatal fail- A Gantry error was signalled during the 1. Reset Senographe
ure exposure. 2. Check communications
between Gantry and generator.
027/006 E04 Arm fatal fail- A Gantry error was signalled during the 1. Reset Senographe
ure exposure. 2. Check communications
between Gantry and generator.

err003.fm
031/001 Generator: delay task software error:

unknown command
031/002 Generator: delay task software error:

unknown task status
041/001 Gene thermal protection software: VRTX

error

error

error

error
041/005 Gene thermal protection software:

unknown anode starter status

error
046/001 Gantry thermal protection software: VRTX

error
051/001 Filter wheel software error: ACQ_NTR or

051/002 Filter wheel software error: unknown com-

mand
051/003 Filter wheel software error: unknown task

status
052/001 Filter wheel: filter change request not

transmitted or filter fault
056/001 Focus software error: ACQ_NTR or

056/002 Focus software error: unknown command
056/003 Focus software error: unknown task status
057/001 Focus: focus change request not transmit-

ted or focus fault
061/000 Gene to gantry communication driver: no

reply from gantry after 2 attempts
062/000 Gene to control panel communication

driver: no reply from control panel after 2
attempts
063/006 Gene init tests: no gantry status feedback

after 10 requests

err003.fm
066/000 Gene date/time: access timeout during

date init

read sequence

write sequence

time write sequence
067/000 Generator: Zero divide
068/xxx Generator: floating point calculation error.

xxx is VRTX task number
071/081 Generator: checksum error on battery

saved memory
071/082 Generator: timeout on signal

Alim_Puis_OK (Inv_Supply_OK) (going
’low’ or ’high’)
071/083 Generator: error reading ’kV law table’ in 0

pt technique (AOP)
072/001 Exposure software error: ACQ_NTR or

ACQ_OVR received at start of 1st trigger
072/003 Exposure software error: ACQ_NTR or

ACQ_OVR received at end of 1st trigger
072/004 Exposure software error: unknown origin

of aborted exposure
072/005 Exposure software error: aborted by PM in

2 pt technique
072/006 Exposure software error: unknown expo-

sure technique
072/007 E06 Software Error One system task (at least) not stable after This error is either caused by
(gen. CPU) a delay of 7s when a Prep is performed. A IDC or Senographe. When a
Senographe component (tube, rotor, etc.) Senographe sub-system is not
or IDC is not ready for the exposure (prep- ready, there should be a second
StatusOk message not sent to Senogra- error message displayed relat-
phe by IDC). ing to the sub-system causing
the error
072/008 Exposure software error: unknown task

status
072/009 Exposure software error: 0 pt or 1 pt expo-

sure and gantry absent

err003.fm
073/001 Gene software error (IST, standby):

parameter display problem

unknown tube type

alpha=0.0 when calculating value
P_NDac_HTPM
073/004 Gene software error (IST, standby): incor-

rect thickness for correlation calculation
073/005 Gene software error (IST, standby): bias

calibration task problem
073/006 Gene software error (IST, standby): heater

scale calibration task problem
073/007 Gene software error (IST, standby): HV/

DAC calibration task problem

FREQ/HV calibration task problem
073/009 Gene software error (IST, standby): PM




073/013 Gene software error (IST, standby): gantry

connection task problem

connection fault

connection fault

connection fault
073/017 Gene software error (IST, standby): mA

measurement calibration problem
074/001 Gene software error (IST, exposure):

unknown exposure end

unknown gantry reply

err003.fm

unknown gantry reply

unknown exposure status
075/010 Gene software error (MNT): anode starter

speed impossible
075/011 Gene software error (MNT): anode starter:

abnormal test task status
075/020 Gene software error (MNT): heater:

impossible track


075/030 Gene software error (MNT): bias: abnor-

mal test task status
075/040 Gene software error (MNT): HV test:

075/041 Gene software error (MNT): gate test:

075/042 Gene software error (MNT): inverter test:

075/050 Gene software error (MNT): mA value:

075/051 Gene software error (MNT): mA measure-

ment: abnormal test task status
075/060 Gene software error (MNT): grid sync:

075/070 Gene software error (MNT): PM test:



measurement timeout
075/090 Gene software error (MNT): error codes:

display problem

display problem

err003.fm

display problem

display problem
075/100 Gene software error (MNT): transfer:

frame code error

abnormal transfer task (save) status

abnormal transfer task (save) status

abnormal state transfer task (load) status

abnormal state transfer task (load) status

unknown frame
075/106 Gene software error (MNT): transfer: end

of loading error

abnormal transfer task (protocol) status
078/002 Gene init tests software error: timeout on

system task
078/003 Gene init tests software error: defective

function will self-identify


078/128 Gene init tests software error: error follow-

ing VRTX request
079/001 Exposure aborted: timeout
079/002 Exposure aborted: heater fault

No mA measurement; change 701PL1
(kV/mA board).
079/003 Exposure aborted: anode starter fault
079/004 Exposure aborted: power fault
079/005 Exposure aborted: generator fault

err003.fm
079/006 Exposure: no gantry acknowledgement (at

start of 1st trigger) or gantry fault
079/008 Gantry fault detected before start of expo-

sure
079/009 Exposure: no sync signal from gantry to

start exposure
079/010 Exposure aborted by mA meter (0 pt or 1

pt technique)
079/011 Exposure: no gantry acknowledgement (at

end of 1st trigger) or gantry fault
079/014 E05 Failure during Falling XRayAuthorizedRT signal not Switch Off the system.Switch On
exposure received from IDC again; repeat the exposure.
Check IDC-Senographe com-
munication
079/015 E05 Failure during Brightness value not received from IDC Switch Off the system.Switch On
exposure again; repeat the exposure.
079/017 E16 AWS/SENO The acquisition was not correctly per- Reset system and try again. If
Synchro fail formed on ADS (image not correctly trans- error persists, check AWS is
ferred from IDC for example) running correctly; try rebooting
AWS and Senographe.
080/001 Gene (IST, exposure): heater fault
080/002 Gene (IST, exposure): anode starter fault
080/003 Gene (IST, exposure): power failure
080/004 Gene (IST, exposure): interface fault
080/005 Gene (IST, exposure): no gantry reply -

timeout after 1 second
080/006 Gene (IST, exposure): gantry fault
080/007 Gene (IST, exposure): no gantry reply to

exposure command
080/008 Gene (IST, exposure): no grid sync feed-

back after timeout
082/000 Gene: ’Endurance’ error code

err003.fm
083/002 I17 AWS./SENO Senographe/AWS communication failure: Check Senographe/AWS con-

Comm. lost the Senographe did not receive any mes- nections.
sage from AWS during a period of 2 min-
utes.
084/008 E24 Failure before An error occurred before X-ray emission This error may be caused by the
exposure. but after the Radiography key has been IDC or the Gantry. Reboot the
pressed, relating to a signal not correctly entire system and check IDC-
received by the exposure automaton from Senographe communications.
the IDC or Gantry.
the IDC or Gantry.
the IDC or Gantry.
090/000 Generator: PROM checksum error
092/000 I19 IDC/Seno Communication error between Senogra- Verify the link/cable between
comm. lost. phe and IDC: the connection is lost (no Senographe and IDC. Verify IDC
answer from IDC for 15 seconds). If the is ON.
error condition continues for 2 minutes,
E19 is displayed.
092/000 E19 IDC/Seno Communication error between Senogra- Verify the link/cable between
down, DPS is off. phe and IDC: the connection is lost (no Senographe and IDC. Verify IDC
answer from IDC for 2 minutes). When is ON.
this error occurs, the detector power sup-
ply is set off.
094/001 E18 IDC/Seno syn- An error occurs on IDC or on Senographe Check Senographe/AWS con-
chro failure. which generates an error on a signal/mes- nections, perform comm diag-
sage expected from the IDC task of the nostics
Senographe: bad command received by
the IDC task
094/002 E18 IDC/Seno syn- An error occurs on IDC or on Senographe Check communication between
chro failure. which generates an error on a signal/mes- IDC and Senographe, perform
sage expected from the IDC task of the comm diagnostics, perform IDC
Senographe: Prep command not received diagnostics
by the IDC task
Senographe: Stop command at end of diagnostics
exposure not received by the IDC task.

err003.fm
Senographe: XRayAuthorizedRT status diagnostics
not received by the IDC task.
Senographe: Stop command not received diagnostics
by the IDC task at the end of the Radiog-
raphy.
Senographe: Prep command not received diagnostics
by the exposure automaton (task
T_APPLI)
Senographe: XRayAuthorizedRT signal diagnostics
active in idle status
096/019 I43 Prepa glnd Scf Error on Scf glandular factor during the none (warning)
out of range Prep
096/020 I50 Prepa fat Scf Error on Scf fat factor during the Prepa none (warning)
out of range
096/021 I51 Pre-exp. Scf Error on Scf factor for the pre-exposure none (warning)
out of range
096/022 I52 Expo. AOP Scf Error on Scf factor for the AOP exposure none (warning)
out of range
096/023 I53 Exposure mAs value performed for the pre-exposure Reset Senographe.
aborted by mAs out of range
level
096/024 I54 Exposure Dose value returned by IDC out of range Reset Senographe.
aborted by bright.
level
096/025 I55 Track/Filter Track/filter configuration changed none (warning)

change between the pre-shot and the exposure
096/033 I56 Exposure IDC sends an invalid dose value to the Reset the entire system and
aborted, bright. Senographe. retry the exposure.
unknown.

err003.fm
097/026 I48 U-turn before The exposure time for the pre-shot (AOP none (warning).
end of pre-shot. mode) is greater than the grid motion
duration to the first turn-back point.
097/027 I49 U-turn before The exposure time (manual and AOP none (warning).
end of exposure. mode) is greater than the grid motion
duration to the first turn-back point.
100/001 Gantry software error: VRTX error during

init
101/001 Gantry interface: Reset error
101/002 Gantry interface: read/write error on timer

PTM1

PTM1

PTM2

PTM2
101/006 Gantry interface: interrupt error on

DUART1
101/007 Gantry interface: PTM1 timer 1 defective
101/013 Gantry interface: interrupt error on PTM1

timer 1

timer 2

timer 3

timer 1

timer 2

timer 3

err003.fm
101/020 Gantry interface: PROM checksum error
101/023 Gantry interface: unexpected interrupt

received (level 2)
105/000 Gantry software error: unknown origin of

task call
105/001 Gantry software error: boolean expected
105/002 Gantry software error: unknown generator

grid request

request for HTPM/IPM switch
105/004 Gantry software error: unknown 1st trigger

status
105/005 Gantry software error: unknown language

choice requested by generator

command
105/009 Gantry software error: unknown VRTX

error code
105/016 Gantry software error: unknown acknowl-

edgement (light centering)
105/017 Gantry software error: unknown task com-

mand (light centering)

edgement (compression)

mand (compression)
105/023 Gantry software error: unknown compres-

sion pedal status

edgement (lateral collimator)

mand (lateral collimator)

edgement (rear collimator)

mand (rear collimator)

edgement (filter wheel)

err003.fm

mand (filter wheel)

edgement (tube angulation)

mand (tube angulation)

mand (format)
105/048 Gantry software error: unknown format

edgement (column up/down)

mand (column up/down)
105/051 Gantry software error: unknown column

command button status code

edgement (arm rotation)

mand (compression arm rotation)
105/054 Gantry software error: unknown status

code of compression arm rotation control
button

edgement (tube arm rotation)

mand (tube arm rotation)
105/057 Gantry software error: unknown status

code of tube arm rotation control button

edgement (grid)
105/065 Gantry software error: unknown event

(grid)

edgement (power calculation)
105/067 Gantry software error: unknown event

(power calculation)
105/068 Gantry software error: unknown tube type
105/069 Gantry software error: unknown focus

change code

err003.fm
105/070 Gantry software error: unknown filter code

requested by generator
105/071 Gantry software error: unknown code for

’Exposure’/’No Exposure’ status manage-
ment
105/072 Gantry software error: unknown exposure

end code
105/073 Gantry software error: unknown ’Endur-

ance’ code
105/074 Gantry software error: unknown ’Endur-

ance’ event
105/080 Gantry/tube housing type configuration

incompatibility (angulation/angulation)
105/081 Gantry/tube housing type configuration

incompatibility (angulation/focus)
106/002 Gantry software error: column: unknown

task return

task status

task status

task status

task status

order transmitted to task
107/001 Gantry software error: compression: too

long between task calls
107/002 Gantry software error: compression:

unknown task return

unknown task status

unknown order transmitted to task
108/001 Gantry software error: lateral collimator:

positioning timeout

unknown task return

err003.fm

unknown task status

unknown task status

unknown task status



position reference value is outside toler-
ance
109/001 Gantry software error: rear collimator:

positioning timeout

unknown task return

unknown task status

unknown task status

unknown task status



ance
111/002 Gantry software error: tube angulation:

unknown task status

unknown task return

unknown task status

unknown task status

err003.fm



ance

task triggered by timeout
112/000 Gantry software error: filter wheel:

unknown task return

unknown task status

unknown task status

unknown task status

114/000 Gantry software error: light centering:

117/000 Gantry software error: unknown set-up

message
117/002 Gantry set-up access: generator end of

exposure timeout
117/003 Gantry set-up access: communication

sync problem at set-up access
118/000 Gantry software error: grid: task triggered

by timeout (calibration time too long)
118/001 Gantry software error: grid: unknown task

return

status

status

status

err003.fm
118/005 Gantry software error: grid: unknown

118/006 Gantry software error: grid: unknown

118/007 Grid movement: overcurrent detected
118/008 Grid movement: grid calibration time too

long
118/009 Grid movement: overcurrent detected
118/010 Grid movement: invalid offset
118/011 Grid movement: invalid gain
118/012 Grid movement: limit of travel not found
120/000 Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown

task return

task status

task status

121/000 Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown


task status

task status

task return

122/007 Gantry software error: Reset triggered by

Watch_dog_soft
122/013 Gantry software error: grid sensor

Presence_Trame (Grid_Presence) not
’high’ or ’low’
122/014 Gantry software error: tube housing ther-

mal contact not ’high’ or ’low’
151/000 Gantry: checksum error on battery saved

memory

err003.fm

received (level 0)

received (level 1)
153/075 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: synchroni-

sation
153/076 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: column
153/077 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: compres-

sion
153/078 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: compres-

sion arm rotation
153/079 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: tube hous-

ing arm rotation
153/080 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: lateral col-

limator
153/081 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: rear colli-

mator
153/082 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: light

centering device
153/083 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: filter
153/084 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: grid move-

ment
153/085 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: tube hous-

ing angulation
153/086 Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: other func-

tion
155/082 Tube housing type/gantry configuration

incompatibility (focus/angulation)
155/083 Tube housing type/gantry configuration

incompatibility (focus/angulation)
156/008 Column up/down: Both end of travel sen-

sors are closed
156/009 Column up/down: is locked in both direc-

tions (from speed measurement)
156/010 Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc

(Column_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ sta-
tus

err003.fm

(Column_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ sta-
tus

(Column_Soft_Pres) too long in ’high’ sta-
tus
156/013 Column up/down: signals Asc_Inactif &

R_On_Asc (Column_Power_Inactive &
On_Column_Return) both ’high’
156/014 Column up/down:

Pres_Log_Asc*Pres_Oper_Asc*On_Asc
(Column_Soft_Pres*Column_Operator_Pr
es*On_Column) = 1 & R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) = 0
156/015 Column up/down:

Pres_Log_Asc*Pres_Oper_Asc*On_Asc
(Column_Soft_Pres*Column_Operator_Pr
es*On_Column) = 0 & R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) = 0 & Asc_Inactif
(Column_Power_Inactive) = 1
156/016 Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement

risk (column);Asc_Inactif & R_On_Asc
(Column_Power_Inactive &
On_Column_Return) both ’low’

risk (column);Asc_Inactif
(Column_Power_Inactive) ’low’ & column
defective

risk (column); signal Asc_Inactif
(Column_Power_Inactive) ’high’ during init
156/019 Column up/down: signal R_On_Asc

(On_Column_Return) ’high’ during init
156/020 Column up/down: direction of movement

is opposite to the desired direction
156/021 Column up/down: ’up’ end of travel sensor

is defective
156/022 Column up/down: ’down’ end of travel

sensor is defective

risk (column); R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) ’high’ without legal
command

err003.fm
156/024 Column up/down: column is driven up but

measured speed = 0 cm/s
156/025 Column up/down: column is driven down

but measured speed = 0 cm/s
156/027 Column up/down: emergency stop pro-

duced if movement continues more than
500 mS after command release
157/005 Compression: motor slipping during refer- Check for play between com-
ence search pression motor axis and pulley
(screw not tightened).
157/006 Compression: abnormal immobility of pad- Check for bad feedback from the
dle compression encoder.
157/007 Compression: loss of steps detected at Check for defective cable on the
reference crossing compression steel spring.
157/008 Compression: abnormal step generation

detected (during init)
157/009 Compression: signal Valid_Comp

(Comp_Valid) cannot inhibit paddle move-
ment (during init)
157/010 Compression: counter used by force sen-

sor no longer incremented
Loss of compression feedback; a square
wave should be always present between
TP14 and TP1 (0 V) of 800PL2.
157/011 Compression: position sensor closed too

long during compression
157/012 Compression: no reference crossing dur-

ing decompression
Check cable between 800PL8 and
800PL5.
157/013 Compression: signal Pres_Oper

(Operator_Presence) cannot inhibit pad-
dle movement (during init)
157/014 Compression: signal Pres_Ajust

(Comp_Adjust) too long in ’low’ status
157/015 Compression: signal Pres_Ajust

(Comp_Adjust) too long in ’high’ status
157/016 Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp

(Comp_Soft_Pres) cannot inhibit paddle
movement (during init)

err003.fm

(Comp_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ status

(Comp_Soft_Pres) too long in ’high’ status
157/020 Compression: power supply problem (sig-

nal Alim_OK (Power_Supply_Active))
157/021 Compression: phase1 & phase2 cannot

be ’low’ at the same time (during init)

(Comp_Soft_Pres) ’high’ (during init)
157/023 Compression: slipping during decompres- Check for play between com-
sion movement pression motor axis and pulley
(screw not tightened).
158/009 Lateral collimator motor: loss of steps

detected at reference crossing



158/013 Lateral collimator: no reference crossing

during movement

during movement

during movement

during movement
158/017 Lateral collimator: optical sensor detection

problem
158/018 Lateral collimator: optical sensor detection

problem
158/019 Lateral collimator: slipping during collima- Check for play between collima-
tor movement. tor lateral motor axis and pulley
(screw not tightened). Possible
problem with 800PL1 (Gantry
power board)
159/009 Rear collimator motor: loss of steps


err003.fm



159/013 Rear collimator: no reference crossing

during movement

during movement

during movement

during movement
159/017 Rear collimator: optical sensor detection

problem
159/018 Rear collimator: optical sensor detection

problem
159/019 Rear collimator: slipping during collimator

movement
Check for play between collimator rear
motor axis and pulley (screw not tight-
ened).
160/009 Front collimator motor: loss of steps




160/013 Front collimator: no reference crossing

during movement

during movement

during movement

during movement

err003.fm
160/017 Front collimator: optical sensor detection

problem
160/018 Front collimator: optical sensor detection

problem
160/019 Front collimator: slipping during collimator Check for play between collima-
movement tor front motor axis and blade
(screw not tight).
Check for poor position of the
flag in optocoupler fork.
Check front blade calibration.
161/000 Tube housing angulation: no reference

crossing during movement

161/009 Tube housing angulation: loss of steps








162/006 Filter wheel: step number error between

two references

two references

two references

two references

two references

err003.fm
162/011 Filter wheel: no reference crossing during

rotation
162/012 Filter wheel: in standby, wheel moved

from stable position
164/001 Light centering device: signal

Centreur_OK (Light_Centering_OK) too
long in ’low’ status
168/020 Grid movement: power supply problem

(signal Alim_OK (Power_Supply_Active))
170/005 Inter-arm lock: signal Pres_Log_Ver

(Lock_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ status
170/006 Inter-arm lock: signal Pres_Log_Ver

(Lock_Soft_Pres) too long in ’high’ status

risk (arm lock); Eta_Verrou_Off
(Lock_Power_Inactive) ’low’ during init

risk (arm lock); Eta_Verrou_Off &
R_On_Verrou (Lock_Power_Inactive &
On_Lock_Return) both ’low’
170/009 Inter-arm lock: signals Eta_Verrou_Off &

R_On_Verrou (Lock_Power_Inactive &
On_Lock_Return) both in ’high’ status
170/010 Inter-arm lock: R_On_Verrou

(On_Lock_Return) = 0 &
Pres_Log_Ver*Pres_Oper_Ver*On_Verro
u
(Lock_Soft_Pres*Lock_Oper_Pres*On_L
ock) = 1
170/011 Inter-arm lock: signal R_On_Verrou

(On_Lock_Return) ’high’ without legal
command
170/012 Inter-arm lock: signal R_On_Verrou

(On_Lock_Return) ’high’ during init

risk (arm lock); R_On_Verrou
(On_Lock_Return) ’high’ without legal
command
171/005 Arm rot. brake: signal

Pres_Log_Frein_Rot
(Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres) from compres-
sion arm too long in ’low’ status

err003.fm
171/006 Arm rot. brake: signal

Pres_Log_Frein_Rot
(Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres) from compres-
sion arm too long in ’high’ status
171/007 Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein

(On_Brake_Return) ’high’, but signal
Eta_Rot_Off (Rotat_Power_Inactive) ’low’
171/008 Arm rot. brake:

Pres_Log_Frein_Rot*Pres_Oper*On_Frei
n_Rot
(Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres*Operator_Present
*On_Rotation_Brake) = 1 &
R_On_Frein_Rot
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) = 0
171/009 Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein_Rot

(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) ’high’ with-
out legal command

risk (arm brake); Eta_Rot_Off
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) &
R_On_Frein_Rot
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) are ’low’

(Rotat_Power_Inactive) ’low’ & comp. arm
defective

(Rotat_Power_Inactive) ’low’ during init
171/013 Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein_Rot

(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) ’high’ during
init

risk (arm brake); R_On_Frein_Rot
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) ’high’ with-
out legal command
171/015 E76 Angle sensor Rotation angle sensor frequency too high Verify the rotation angle sensor
Failure or too low calibration, then the rotation
angle sensor itself (change if
necessary).
171/016 E76 Angle sensor Rotation angle sensor in “dead” area for Verify the rotation angle sensor
Failure more than 30 min calibration, then the rotation
necessary).

err003.fm
171/017 E76 Angle sensor Rotation angle sensor in “dead” area for a Verify the rotation angle sensor
Failure short time calibration, then the rotation
necessary).
171/018 E76 Angle sensor Angle sensor output not did not stabilize 1. Reset Senographe.
Failure. during a minute following arm movement. 2. Verify sensor stabilization.
3. Check/change sensor.
171/019 E76 Angle sensor Angle sensor output change exceeded 5° 1. Reset Senographe.
Failure. for more than a minute, with no arm move- 2. Check for friction point in sen-
ment. sor; change if necessary.
3. If problem persists, note soft-
ware version and call your OLC.
171/020 E76 Angle sensor Angle sensor output change exceeded 5° 1. Reset Senographe.
Failure. for more than a minute, with no arm move- 2. Check for friction point in sen-
ment. sor; change if necessary.
3. If problem persists, note soft-
ware version and call your OLC.
171/021 E76 Angle sensor Angle sensor output changed by more 1. Reset Senographe.
Failure. than 20°, with no arm movement. 2. Check sensor, connections,
and board 800PL5; change if
necessary.
necessary.
necessary.
necessary.
172/003 Magnification sensor: unknown magnifica-

tion code
172/004 Gantry interface: arm lock temperature

calculation problem
172/005 Gantry interface: Bouclage_OK

(Loops_OK) signal ’low’ during init
172/006 Power failure due to CPU reset

If this appears at power on, the Gantry
interface board is probably defective.
172/007 Gantry interface: date write error

err003.fm
172/008 Gantry interface: time write error
172/009 Button interlock: signal

Presence_Operateur (Operator_Pres) too
long in ’high’ status
172/010 Button interlock: signal

Presence_Operateur (Operator_Pres) too
long in ’low’ status
172/011 SID sensor: unknown SID code
172/012 Arm angulation sensor: unknown angula-

tion code
172/014 Gantry interface: date/time function read

error
172/015 Signal On_Asc (On_Column) ’high’ but

Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’
172/016 Signal On_Centreur

(On_Light_Centering) ’high’ but
172/017 Signal On_Comp ’high’ but Bouclage_OK

(Loops_OK) still ’low’
172/018 Signal On_Frein (On_Rotation_Brake)

’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still
’low’
172/019 Signal On_Verrou (On_Lock) (Arm lock)

’low’
172/020 Signal On_Trame (On_Grid) ’high’ but

172/021 Signal Mot_Diaph_L_1

(Lat_Diaph_Motor_1) ’high’ but
172/022 Signal Mot_Diaph_L_2

(Lat_Diaph_Motor_2) ’high’ but
172/023 Signal Mot_Diaph_A_1

(Rear_Diaph_Motor_1) ’high’ but
172/024 Signal Mot_Diaph_A_2

(Rear_Diaph_Motor_2) ’high’ but

err003.fm
172/025 Signal Mot_Gaine_1 (Housing_Motor_1)

’low’
172/026 Signal Mot_Gaine_2 (Housing_Motor_2)

’low’
172/027 Signal Mot_Filtre_1 (Filter_Motor_1) ’high’

but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’
172/028 Signal Mot_Filtre_2 (Filter_Motor_2) ’high’

but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’
172/029 Signal R_Standby_Gaine

(Housing_Standby_Return) ’high’ but
172/030 Signal R_Standby_Filtre

(Filter_Standby_Return) ’high’ but
172/031 Signal R_Standby_Diap_L

(Lat_Diaph_Standby_Return) ’high’ but
172/032 Signal R_Standby_Diap_P

(Rear_Diaph_Standby_Return) ’high’ but
172/055 Compression: one pedal pressed and sig-

nal Pres_Pedale (Pedal_Presence) ’low’
172/056 Compression: no pedal pressed and sig-

nal Pres_Pedale (Pedal_Presence) ’high’
172/064 Fuse fault: signal Fuse_OK ’low’
172/065 Power supply: ’ISO’ supply defective on

800-PL4
172/067 Power supply: ’+15V’ supply defective on

800-PL2
172/068 Power supply: one (or more) supplies

defective on 800-PL1 (except +27V)
172/088 Power micro-failure detected

err003.fm
This page is blank.

err003.fm
CHAPTER 10 DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
This chapter includes job cards describing Senographe 2000 D diagnostic operations.
Note:
While entering the Service Desktop or when doing diagnostics, a small Netscape WARNING win-
dow may appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen while the system is performing some
background functions. Ignore the message, it has no effect on the operation of the system.

Diags.fm
This page is blank.

Diags.fm
Job Card DIAG 001 - AWS Sun-VTS Diagnostics
Job Card DIAG 001 - AWS Sun-VTS Diagnostics Chapter 10
1. INTRODUCTION
This Job Card describes Sun-VTS diagnostic procedures for the AWS (Acquisition WorkStation)
The AWS consists of a Solaris workstation, some components connected externally (e.g., modem) and a
set of subsystems. AWS diagnostics include diagnostics for the workstation hardware, software pro-
cesses in the workstation, and connection to the subsystems.
The objective of the diagnostics is to test AWS hardware components, locate any non-functional sub-
system, and then locate a non-functional FRU (Field Replaceable Unit).
1-1. Access to the tests

There are three ways to launch an AWS diagnostic:
• From a command window as sdc or root user (local use only)
• From the prompt ok (local use only)
2. COMMON PROCEDURES
2-1. Open a command window
Right click on the screen background; select Service tools and then select a Command window from root
menu.
2-2. Go to ok prompt
2. Log in as user root
3. Type the command: halt
4. At prompt ok, type the command: setenv auto-boot? false
5. At prompt ok, type the command: reset
2-3. Relaunch AWS application

1. At prompt ok, type the command: setenv auto-boot? true
3. Log in as sdc user
2-4. Change user

Type the command: su - username and enter your password.

diag1.fm
3. PROCESSOR TESTS
3-1. Short test
• Type of test: SUN VTS
1. Open a command window as sdc user
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/fputest –v –n
3-2. Long test

2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/fputest –v –f
4. HARD DRIVE TESTS

4-1. Short test
2. Type the commands:
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/disktest –v -n -o dev=c0t0d0
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/disktest –v -n -o dev=c0t1d0
4-2. Long test
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/disktest –v -f -o dev=c0t0d0
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/disktest –v -f -o dev=c0t1d0
5. PHYSICAL MEMORY TESTS

2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/pmem –v -f -o size=100
6. VIRTUAL MEMORY TESTS

6-1. Short test
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/vmet –v -f -o amount=100
6-2. Long test


diag1.fm
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/vmem –v –f -o reserve=100
7. VIDEO BOARD TESTS

1. Open a command window as sdc
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/m64test
8. FLOPPY DRIVE TESTS

2. Change user to root
3. Insert a formatted floppy disk
4. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/disktest –v -f -o dev=diskette
9. INTERNAL CD-ROM TESTS

9-1. Short test
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/cdtest –v -n -o dev=c0t2d0
9-2. Long test

2. Insert a formatted cd-rom disk (not blank)
3. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/cdtest –v –f -o dev=c0t2d0
10. EXTERNAL CD WRITER TESTS

10-1. Short test
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/cdtest –v -n -o dev=c1t2d0
11. ADS-UPS LINE TESTS

11-1. Internal test
1. Boot the station
2. Log as root
ups stop
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/sptest –v -f -o dev=se0,L=I,T=b

diag1.fm
ups start
11-2. Full test without cable
1. Boot the station
2. Log as root
3. Remove the UPS cable from the serial port b of AWS
4. Plug the loopback connector in serial port b of AWS
ups stop
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/sptest –v -f -o dev=se0,L=P,T=b
ups start
6. Reconnect the cable when the test is complete
11-3. Full test with cable

1. Boot the station
2. Log as root
3. Remove the cable from UPS serial port
4. Plug the DB9 loopback connector in the end of the cable
5. Re-connect the cable when the test is complete
ups stop
/opt/SUNWvts/bin/sptest –v -f -o dev=se0,L=P,T=b
ups start
12. ADS-SENOGRAPHE LINE TESTS

12-1. Full test without cable
• Type of test: Unix command
1. Boot the station.
2. Log in as user roo.t
3. Remove the Senographe cable from the port 1 of Digi Board (additional serial board.)
4. Plug the loopback connector in port 1 of Digi Board.
5. Type the command: tip /dev/dty/a001s.
6. The system answers Connected.
7. Type some alphanumeric characters on the keyboard. If the board is good, they should be echoed
immediately on the screen
8. To exit the test, type the command: <Return>~. It may be necessary to repeat the sequence several
times.
9. Reconnect the cable when the test is complete
12-2. Full test with cable

• Type of test: Unix command

diag1.fm
1. Boot the station

2. Log as user root
3. Remove the Senographe cable from the Senographe serial port
4. Plug the loopback connector in the end of the cable
5. Type the command: tip /dev/dty/a001s
6. The system answers Connected.
7. Type some alphanumeric characters on the keyboard. If the cable is good, they should be echoed
immediately on the screen
8. To exit the test, type the command: <Return>~. It may be necessary to repeat the sequence several
times.
9. Reconnect the cable when the test is complete.
13. AWS-IDC LINE TEST (EXTERNAL)

2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/nettest –v -f -o dev=hme0,target=IDC
14. MOTHER BOARD SERIAL PORTS TESTS

14-1. Internal test
2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/sptest –v –n -o L=I,T=a_b

diag1.fm
This page is blank.

diag1.fm
Job Card DIAG 002 - AWS Ethernet Port Diagnostics
Job Card DIAG 002 - AWS Ethernet Port Diagnostics Chapter 10
1. INTRODUCTION
This Job Card describes diagnostic procedures for the AWS (Acquisition WorkStation) Ethernet ports.

Right-click on the screen background; select Service tools and then select Command window from the
root menu.

2-4. Change user


diag2.fm
3. AWS-IDC LINE TESTS

3-1. Internal test
• Type of test: Open boot command
1. Go to prompt ok
2. Type the command: test net
3. Relaunch AWS application
• Result interpretation:
After the command has been entered, the following information is displayed:
Internal loopback test – Result 1
Transceiver check – Result 2
where Result 1 and Result 2 are the results of each sub-test.
- If Result 1 is not Succeeded, the AWS mother board is faulty.
- If Result 1 & Result 2 are OK, the AWS Mother Board and the cable are good.
- If Result 1 is OK & Result 2 is NOT OK, either the AWS transceiver or the cable may be faulty.
Repeat the test with a new cable to locate the bad device.
3-2. External test

2. Type the command: /opt/SUNWvts/bin/nettest –v -f -o dev=hme0,target=IDC

diag2.fm
4. AWS-NETWORK TESTS (INTERNAL)

4-1. Internal test
• Type: Open boot command
1. Go to prompt ok
2. Type the command: watch-net-all
After the command has been entered, the following information is displayed:
/pci@1f,0/pci@1/pci@1/SUNW,hme@0,1
Looking for Ethernet Packets
‘.’is a Good Packet. ‘X’ is a Bad Packet
Type any key to stop
...........
/pci@1f,0/pci@1,1/network@1,1
Looking for Ethernet Packets
‘.’is a Good Packet. ‘X’ is a Bad Packet
Type any key to stop
...........
The first group is for the additional ethernet board which manages communication with external network.
Result 1 and Result 2 are the results of each sub-test.
The second group is for the ethernet board of the mother board which manages communication with the
IDC. Do not consider it for this test.
- If Result 1 is different from Succeeded, the AWS mother board is faulty.

- If Result 1 & Result 2 are OK, the AWS Mother Board and the cable are good.
- If Result 1 is OK, and Result 2 is NOT OK, either the AWS transceiver or the cable may be faulty.
Repeat the test with a new cable to locate the faulty device.

diag2.fm
This page is blank.

diag2.fm
Job Card DIAG 003 - AWS File System and SCSI Board Diagnostics
Job Card DIAG 003 - AWS File System and SCSI Board Diagnos-
tics Chapter 10
1. INTRODUCTION
This Job Card describes diagnostic procedures for the AWS (Acquisition WorkStation) File system and
SCSI board.

Right click on the screen background; select Service tools and then select a Command window from root
menu.

2-4. Change user


diag3.fm
Job Card DIAG 003 - AWS File System and SCSI Board Diagnostics
3. FILE SYSTEM FSCK TEST

• Type: Unix command
• Description:
This test checks the file system. It must be launched when file system is suspected to be corrupt (station
has been powered off manually, files can not be found, boot does not succeed, or some basic system
functions are not available). These problems are detected by the operating system during the boot and
the user is warned to run fsck.
• Procedure:
1. Shutdown the station
2. Log in as root
3. Type the command: fsck -y
4. Type the command: echo $status
5. If the result is not equal to 0 or 40:
a. Backup the AWS configuration on floppy (see Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on
page 475) if not done since the last configuration modification.
b. Re-install the AWS system from scratch (see Job Card D/R 108 - Software reload on page 601,
section 5-1).
4. SCSI BOARD TESTS

• Type: Open boot command
1. Go to prompt ok
2. Type the command: probe-scsi-all
If no SCSI identifier is found, the SCSI board is faulty.
On a system with a cd-writer, two identifiers should be detected, the SCSI controller itself and the CD-
writer.
An example of a result showing two SCSI identifiers is given below:
/pci@1f,0/pci@1/pci@1/SUNW,isptwo@4

diag3.fm
CHAPTER 11 RENEWAL PARTS
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information for the identification of Renewal Parts for Senographe 2000 D equip-
ment. A list of contents is given overleaf.

Renew.fm
Illustration 1 - Senographe 2000D System 2298472

Illustration 2 - Gantry Main Harness (white, from generator to gantry, 2225059)
Illustration 3 - Conditioner-Bulkhead Harness (black, from gantry to generator, 2270037)
Illustration 4 - Bulkhead/IDC-AWS-UPS Harness (black, from cart to gantry, 2231556)
Illustration 5 - Senographe Onyx (2302045)
Illustration 6 - Senographe Onyx (2302045) (continued)
Illustration 7 - Senographe Onyx Gantry (2302047)
Illustration 8 - Column Assy (2223734)
Illustration 9 - Column Assy (2223734) (continued)
Illustration 13 - Gantry Board Assemblies (2302050)
Illustration 14 - Examination Arm (2228940)
Illustration 15 - Examination Arm (2228940) (continued)
Illustration 18 - Compression Arm (2215680)
Illustration 19 - Compression Arm (2215680) (continued)
Illustration 22 - Generator + Conditioner Cabinet (2302051)
Illustration 23 - Generator + Conditioner Cabinet (2302051) (continued)
Illustration 24 - Generator + Conditioner Cabinet (2302051) (continued)
Illustration 25 - Generator With HV Unit (2300422)
Illustration 26 - Generator With HV Unit (2300422) (continued)
Illustration 29 - Accessories Kit for ONYX (2302267)
Illustration 30 - Accessories Kit for ONYX (2302267) (continued)
Illustration 31 - Miscellaneous items
Illustration 32 - Console AWS Onyx (2302056)
Illustration 33 - Console AWS Onyx (2302056) (Continued)
Illustration 34 - Console AWS Onyx (2302056) (Continued)
Illustration 35 - Acquisition Workstation Sun U10 (2293685)
Illustration 36 - Acquisition Workstation SUN SB150 (5109928)
Illustration 37- Acquisition Workstation SUN SB150 (5113759 or 5113759-2)

Renew.fm
Renewal Parts List
Renewal Parts List Chapter 11
2. FRU INFORMATION
• Information shown for each FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) is explained below.
• Wherever possible, the FRU or its position is illustrated for easy identification.
FRU name
Part number for ordering

Left table with light box
2190112
FRU: 2 FRU Codes:
Job Card D/R031 FRU: 1 Critical
• Light box Tube FRU: 2 Not Critical
2190113 FRU: N Not Available
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R032 The quantity is 1 if not specified
• Lightbox AC Power Cable
2190114
FRU: 2
Notes:
Items shown in this way are included in
the FRU shown immediately above, but These may include:
Reference to an illustration with more information.
may also be ordered separately. Reference to a relevant Disassembly/Reassembly
Job Card or items included with the FRU, etc.

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
3. RENEWAL PARTS
ILLUSTRATION 1 - SENOGRAPHE 2000D SYSTEM 2298472
SENOGRAPHE ONYX
2302045
FRU: N
FRU detail: Illustration 5, 6
Console AWS Onyx

2302056
FRU: N
FRU detail: Illustration 32
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Gantry main harness Conditioner-bulkhead harness Bulkhead/IDC-AWS-UPS harness

(white, gantry to generator) (black, from gantry to generator) (black, from cart to gantry)
2225059 2270037 For systems with IDC Dione III:
FRU: N FRU: 2 2340735
Gantry main harness (packaged) FRU detail: Illustration 3 For systems with IDC Dione I or II:
2235109 2231556
FRU:detail:
FRU 2 Illustration xx FRU: N
FRU detail: Illustration 2 Accessories kit for Onyx FRU detail: Illustration 4
2302267
FRU: N Miscellaneous items
FRU detail: Illustration 29, 30 FRU detail: Illustration 31

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 2 - GANTRY MAIN HARNESS (WHITE, FROM GENERATOR TO GANTRY, 2225059)
GANTRY MAIN HARNESS (NOT ILLUSTRATED):
4-Pin HV Cable assembly Set of cables, main harness

45475034 2231108
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Gasket for C185129 • Optical fiber cable (Gene - Transmit)

C133902 45553497
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
• Optical fiber cable (Gene - Receive)

45553498
FRU: 1
• Optical fiber cable (Arm Sync.)

45553499
FRU: 1
• Optical fiber cable (send PM)

45553500
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 3 - CONDITIONER-BULKHEAD HARNESS (BLACK, FROM GANTRY TO GENERATOR,

2270037)
CONDITIONER-BULKHEAD HARNESS (NOT ILLUSTRATED):
AWS - Generator link Conditioner control

2226623 2226611
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
IDC - Generator link Water hose assy. (blue)

2226613 2266811
FRU: 2 FRU: 1
Water hose assy.
cable detector ac supply (W2)
2266812
2225467
FRU: 1
FRU: 2
Cable UPS ac supply (W5)

2225470
FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 4 - BULKHEAD/IDC-AWS-UPS HARNESS (BLACK, FROM CART TO GANTRY)
FOR USE WITH IDC DIONE III AND DIONE IV:

BULKHEAD/IDC-AWS-UPS HARNESS; P/N 2340735
(NOT ILLUSTRATED)
AC UPS Power Cable IDC-Senographe Cable
2231555 2240227
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
Detector PS-IDC Power Cable Conditioner DMR-IDC cable

2226621 2226612
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
AWS-DMR Cable IDC Fiber-optic cable

2226625 2340426
FRU: 2 FRU: 1
UPS-Senographe Cable Conduit Wallbox to Console

2226615 2191670
FRU: 2 FRU: 1
FOR USE WITH IDC DIONE I OR DIONE II:

BULKHEAD/IDC-AWS-UPS HARNESS; P/N 2231556
(NOT ILLUSTRATED)
AC UPS Power Cable IDC-Senographe Cable
2231555 2240227
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
Detector PS-IDC Power Cable Conditioner DMR-IDC Cable

2226621 2226612
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
AWS-DMR Cable IDC-DMR Fiber-optic cable

2226625 2226619
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
UPS-Senographe Cable Conduit Wallbox to Console

2226615 2191670
FRU: 2 FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 5 - SENOGRAPHE ONYX (2302045)
Generator + Conditioner Cabinet

2302051
FRU: N
FRU detail: Illustration 22, 23, 24
Mammo Console
2282675-6 Senographe Onyx Gantry
FRU: 1 2302047
replaces: FRU: N
Console CDRH EMC S2000D FRU detail: Illustration 7
2223736
FRU: N
• Pushbutton without light
2227911
FRU:1
• Pushbutton with light
2227912
FRU:1
• Button
45474409
FRU:1
• Label (cleaning)
2153236
FRU:1
RX Maxiray 70 TH-D Tube Housing

2299551-2
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 011
Detector Supply Harness

2296388
FRU: 1
Bucky S2000D CDRH Image Receptor 1.1 Onyx Detector Water/Air Harness
2225445-2 2224137-2 (packaged)
FRU: 1 FRU: 1 2318738
• FFDM Grid Job Card D/R 103 FRU: 1
2211408
FRU: 2
Bucky S2000D without grid Bucky cover with handles Image Receptor additional mounting hardware kit
(not illustrated) (not illustrated) (not illustrated)
2222414 2235106 2231485
FRU: 1 FRU: 1 FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 6 - SENOGRAPHE ONYX (2302045) (CONTINUED)
White cap (to hide cover screws)

(not illustrated)
45559730
FRU: 2
Front panel, screen printed

2225775 Leaded cover, right (packaged)
FRU: 2 2235125
FRU: 1
Leaded cover, left (packaged)

2235126
FRU: 1
Central cover (packaged)

2235124
FRU: 1
Set of four silk-screened

covers
45561897
FRU:1
Cover, right, labelled (packaged)

Ccover, left, labelled (packaged) 2235120
(not visible) FRU: 1
2235121
FRU: 1
Compression cover, left Compression cover, right

2290258 2290259
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Column cover, left

2235118-2
FRU: 2
Column cover, right
2235117-2
FRU: 2
Inspection door assembly (packaged)
(not visible)
2235119
FRU: 1
Cover mounting hardware kit (not illustrated)

45560702
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 7 - SENOGRAPHE ONYX GANTRY (2302047)
Examination Arm
2228940
FRU: N
FRU detail: Illustration 14, 15, 16, 17
Column Assembly (packaged)

2235104
FRU: 2
FRU detail: Illustration 8, 9, 10, 11, 12
Double Footswitch
2235874
Onyx Gantry board assemblies FRU: 1
2302050
FRU: N Quadruple Footswitch (not illustrated)
FRU detail: Illustration 13 2234897
FRU: 1
S2000D Display assembly (packaged)

2235105
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 8 - COLUMN ASSY (2223734)
Elevator Motor wired

2151017
FRU: 1
Emergency stop button D30 RED 1 RT
45067225
FRU: 2
Detector Power Suppy

2292162-2
(replacing 2210695)
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 102
Gas Spring
91726753
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 016

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 9 - COLUMN ASSY (2223734) (CONTINUED)
Capacitor AL 33000 UF 63V

99091203 Belt 73-tooth 12 T5/365
FRU: 1 91726709
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
Bearing, Ball
15 x 32 x 13 - 2 RO
91726743
Roller assembly FRU: 2
single RO 6 mm 19 mm
2260917
FRU: 1
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Grease tube
46-194427P5
FRU: 1
Bearing, Ball, single

RO 15 mm 32 mm
99142807
FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
Encoder Wheel
45554615
FRU: 1
800-PL13 Encoder board
2148752
FRU:1
A B A
B Elevator Encoder cable

45553524
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
C C
A
Optointerrupter (elevator at low)
45553520
FRU: 1
A
V1
B
V2
Optointerrupter (elevator at high)

45553521 C
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 13 - GANTRY BOARD ASSEMBLIES (2302050)
800 PL3 CPU Gantry Onyx M3

2298456-2
FRU: 1
800 PL2 Gantry interface board (packaged)

2247116
FRU: 1
800 PL1 Gantry power board

5190800
FRU: 1
Cable PL1/PL2-1 Cable PL1/PL2-2

45553502 45553503
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Jumper, red (for CPU board)
99171545
FRU: 2
Battery, lithium 850 mAh

99171019
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 009

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 14 - EXAMINATION ARM (2228940)
Compression Arm
2215680
FRU: N
Electro-magnet assy. with bracket

45560090
FRU: 1
• Magnet D4X20
91671876
FRU:2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 15 - EXAMINATION ARM (2228940) (CONTINUED)
3-filter wheel assy.

A 45560092 B
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 015
Rocker switch 3 pos.

2186192
800 PL6 Tube housing FRU: 1
arm board (packaged)
2245986
FRU: 1
A
Belt 43-Tooth 10 T5/215

91726679
FRU: 1
Screw (Tube rotation)

2232982
FRU:1
Anti-rotation bushing B
C 45554501
FRU: 2
Wired socket
(centering light)
2251680
FRU: 1
Mirror
2128546
Halogen Lamp 12 V 100 W FRU: 1
2188568 Job Card D/R 013
FRU: 1
Collimator Set of 3 opto-sensors
Optical box Anti-scatter box
2229927-2 (in Collimator)
45562593 FRU: 1 2223340
2109584
FRU: 1 Job Card D/R 007 FRU: 2
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
Tube Angulation Motor assy

45553539
FRU: 1
2139272 ADW REV. A
Tube Housing Arm Buttons

2254365
FRU:1
Optointerrupter (filter position)

45553543
FRU: 1
Optointerrupter (tube housing position)

45553546
FRU: 1
Tube Housing Fan assy.

36006829
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
A
C
C D
B
Examination Arm
Angle indicator
45554401
FRU:1
Kit for compression cable

2248165
FRU:1
D
Ball bearing B
91632919
FRU:2
Locking plate
2210109
FRU:2
Brake assy., wired
2178230
FRU: 1
Brake adjustment tool

56052522
FRU: 1
Belt
36005885
FRU:1
Compression belt assembly

36006659
FRU:1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 18 - COMPRESSION ARM (2215680)
800PL5 Compression distribution

board (packaged)
2198843-3
FRU: 1
Magnification stand holder
right
45554436
FRU:2
Magnification stand holder left
36005971
FRU:2
Belt 49-tooth
91726680
FRU:1
C
A
B
Encoder wheel
45554615
FRU:1
2148752
FRU:1
Release handles L & R

(packaged)
Angle sensor assy. 2235110
2229137-2 FRU:2
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 19 - COMPRESSION ARM (2215680) (CONTINUED)
Ball bearing, linear

91633373
Ball bearing 6X19X6 FRU:2
99146577
FRU:1
C D
800PL15 Tilt sensor board
2210221
FRU: 1
800PL14
Magnification
Sensor board
45553870
FRU:1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
Cable (SID) W37

45553527
FRU:1
Compression motor assembly

45553529
FRU: 1
Cable (Compression Board / Bucky) W38

2393779
FRU:1
Tilting
45553534
FRU:1
Magnification
45553535
FRU:1
Paddle position
45553537
FRU:1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
Rocker switch 3 pos.

2186192
FRU: 1
Set of handles
2227069
FRU: 1
• Set of 4 silk-screened covers
45561897
FRU: 1
Paddle support assembly

2225076
FRU: 1
• Cable (paddle fine movement)
45553536
FRU: 1
Not visible:
2148752
FRU: 1
800-PL8 Paddle board
45554410
FRU: 1
Encoder Wheel
45554615
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 22 - GENERATOR + CONDITIONER CABINET (2302051)
Top Cover Generator (packed)

2235112
FRU: 2
Left Cover S2000D Generator (packed)

2235115
Rear Cover Generator, including fan (packed)
FRU: 2
2235113
FRU: 2
Fan, Generator cooling

2331316
Front Cover Generator (packed) FRU: 1
2235114
FRU: 2
Right Cover Generator (packed)

2235116
FRU: 2
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Generator with HV unit
2300422
FRU: N

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 23 - GENERATOR + CONDITIONER CABINET (2302051) (CONTINUED)
Conditioner
With dryer and system
with Detector 1.0
2386318 (2210405-11)
or 2390024 (2210405-14)
X-ray detector coolant FRU: 1
Detector coolant kit (bottle of coolant alone)
2355459 2369908 Without dryer and
FRU: 1 FRU: 1 system with Detector 1.1
and IDC SW V2.2.2 or
greater, or IDC SW
V3.2.1 or greater
2387548
FRU: 1
Coaxial cable
200PL4 Relay board
HV unit IC
2106963-2
45203215 or 45203148
FRU: 1
FRU:1
701HV unit
2107399
FRU: 1
200PL1 Mains distribution board

2108592-2
FRU: 1
Line Filter Box • Relay K1, K2

2102774 2100312
FRU: 2 FRU:1
• Relay X1
91682082
FRU:1
• Coiled Resistor 280W
99182099
FRU:1
• Coiled Resistor 160W
99120760
FRU:1
Protection cover (plastic)
CPU Power supply cable (located between 200PL1 and
45440115 200PL2 boards)
45563301
FRU:1
FRU: 2
Data control cable
45440116
FRU:1
200PL2 Supply command board
250 V distribution cable (WG4) 2121398
2110070 FRU: 1
FRU:2
• Fast Fuse 27 X 27 125A 150VAC
91684676
FRU:2
• Set of Fuses (6 x 32)

58079166
FRU:1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 24 - GENERATOR + CONDITIONER CABINET (2302051) (CONTINUED)
Service Interface
Line filter 250VAC 2221383
2229249 FRU:1
FRU:2
Operator Interface
2221381
FRU: 1
Circuit breaker 30 A
2228461
FRU: 1
Power supply 220V.23AMP

2228059
FRU:1
Mains distribution
2221053-2
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 25 - GENERATOR WITH HV UNIT (2300422)
Fixed jack D=40 M10X25 HR:43 Transportation wheel D2X50mm DELRIN

91719024 91727258
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
A
300PL1 Inverter Board
2121509-2
FRU: 1
300-PL2 Anode Starter Power Board

45553694-2
FRU: 1
Thermostat 55/45oC 1R 6A F6
58079252
FRU: 1
Thermostat 40/30oC 1T 6A F6
58079253 Thyristor (TH1) (TH2)
FRU: 1 2326401
FRU: 1
Filtering inductor 2X125 UH 5% A
2185713
FRU: 2
Diode module DD31N 1.4 KV 60A UL
58079525
FRU: 1
Capacitor unit
2110227
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 26 - GENERATOR WITH HV UNIT (2300422) (CONTINUED)
Main Emergency switch

91717300
FRU:1
Relay 18 A 230 V 22 V
2327235
FRU:1
Fuse Holder 2P 60x27 600V

91685123
FRU:2
Fast Fuse 27x60 35A 600V C 100KA

99184154
FRU:1
Cable PSRS/CTRS (W12)

Cable REL/CTRS (W10) 2110067
2110066 FRU: 2
FRU: 2
Capacitor AL 2200µF 350V

58079856 Transformer 9kW 52A 415V
FRU:1 2262737
FRU: 1
Diode DD31N400K
(D24, D25)
91707990
FRU: 2 Line Supply Contactor cable (W14)
2111145
FRU: 2
Diode DD61N400K
(D26, D27)
91707991
FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
A
400-PL3 CPU Gene. Onyx M3
2298455-2
FRU: 1
Jumper, red (for CPU board)
99171545
FRU: 1
Battery, lithium 850 mAh
2315533
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 021
400-PL2 Generator Interface Board

2198369-3
FRU: 1
400-PL1 Generator Command Board

2107747
FRU: 1
Power supply 50W 5V5A 12V2A - 12V0.5A

2264280
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
Cable 40-cond. 0.50 m

C801418
FRU: 1
Cable 400PL1 - 200PL2
2110271
FRU: 2
2110264
FRU: 2
2110262
FRU: 2
2110259
FRU: 2
Heater & bias cable

45474577
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 29 - ACCESSORIES FOR ONYX (2302267)
• Magnet D4X20
91671876
FRU:2
• Pins
91355182
FRU:2
19 x 23 cm Compression paddle
2218965-2
FRU: 2 Axillary paddle for S2000D
• Plastic plate for 19 x 23 paddle 2228169-2
FRU: 1
2241745
FRU: 1 • Plastic plate for axillary paddle Magnification stand CDRH
2255606 36006563
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Square spot compression paddle Round spot compression paddle Shoulder guard (packaged)
2218966-4 2218967-4 2227387
• Plastic plate for square paddle • Plastic plate for round paddle
2241747 2241746
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Calibration plate
2233248
FRU: 2
Installation kit Senographe 2000 D

2228457
FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 30 - ACCESSORIES FOR ONYX (2302267) (CONTINUED)
Service terminal cable EMC Line supply cable

2116257 2114797
Console-GeneratorCable L=10m FRU: 1 FRU: 2
(packaged)
For customers in China: the line supply cable from GEMS
2150064
must not be ordered. Instead Chinese customers must locally
FRU: 1
order an equivalent CCC-certified supply cable from their
local electrical supplier.
Loopback kit X-ray protection plate Dosimeter support

2247879-2 2238777 2238771
• Loopback connector UPS
2248665
FRU: 2
• Loopback connector DMR panel

2248430
FRU:2
• Loopback connector FO SC
2248316 Purge tool
FRU:2 2249359
FRU: 1
• Adaptor sub D 9F/25M
2198175-2
FRU:2
• Wall connector (2 x Optical Fiber) Bucky support (packaged)

2231528 2235128
FRU:2 FRU: 2
• Wall connector (2 x Optical Fiber, with plug)
2255935
FRU:2
• Service Loopback cable for use with Dione III Emergency kit
2350524 2223818
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
• Fuse 6x32 10A 380VC 10 KA ULL
Global Modem kit 58079166
2245794 • Hardware
• Global Modem adapter assy. for Europe 91348401
2249450
• Cable RJ11 25 FC
2216697

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 31 - MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Radiation screen glass Bucky FFDM without grid CDRH Detector Temperature Troubleshooting kit
2111764 2222414 2303052
Radiation screen mounting kit Breast Holder Cover FFDM • Syringe kit
(rails, screws, etc.) 2227909 2270096
2149381 FRU: 1 FRU: 1
FRU: 1
IQST Phantom Connector replace kit for
2222686 compression motor cable
Bracket for Console FRU: 2 2247102
45554829 FRU:2
FRU: 1 FFDM Biopsy Paddle assy.
2248758-2 Light meter
Accessory Trolley Foam FRU: 1 2109716
2148017 FFDM Biopsy Localizing Pointers FRU: 2
FRU: 1 36005574
FRU: 1
HNS Performance Network Switch (Not for Asia and the Americas)
2305067
FRU: 1
Networking kit including Ethernet switch, six cables, and service manual
Documentation Onyx:
Senographe 2000 D p.i.m. Senographe 2000 D o.m. (English)
2319618-100 2285097-100
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
Senographe 2000 D s.m. Senographe+ & 2000 D Schematics

2319594-100 2269412-100
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
Hi-Bright 21" AWS Monitor s.m. HNS Performance Network Switch s.m.
2288737-100 2318018-100
FRU: 2 FRU: 2
2000D DICOM Conformance Statement

2246811-100
FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 32 - CONSOLE AWS ONYX (2302056)
Onyx Console
2302058
FRU: N
Rear cover
2232764 Accessory storage
FRU: 2 2232766
FRU: 2
Side covers, left and right

2190106
FRU: 2
UPS with support
5104584 Battery for UPS
FRU: 2 2295553
FRU: 2
Set of wheels
2190105
FRU: 2
Monitor AWS Hi-Brite 21"

2316918
FRU: 1
Mouse support
Cart adaptor for Sun keyboard 2190155
2265802 FRU: 2
FRU: 2
Light box tube

2190113
FRU: 1 Right table and keyboard support
2190110
Left table with light box
FRU: 2
2190112
FRU: 2
Light box with AC power cable
2190114
FRU: 2

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 33 - CONSOLE AWS ONYX (2302056) (CONTINUED) AND IDC ASSEMBLY

Acquisition Workstation (Sun U10 shown)
FRU detail:
- For Sun U10 see Illustration 35
- For Sun SB150 see Illustrations 36 and 37
Job Card D/R 107
IDC Processor Assemblies

For Dione I & II: 2286100 (T3486EJ)
For Dione III: 2346842
For Dione IV: 2375961
FRU: 1
Job Card D/R 104
Note: Refer to D/R 104 for required parts when ordering
Dione III to replace Dione I or II
FFDM-IDC Software Media Sets
For Dione II (SW 2.2.2): 2387366
For Dione III or IV (SW 3.2.1): 2380803
FRU: 1
IDC Dione III Optical Fiber
2340426
FRU: 1
IDC Loopback Cable
2350524
FRU: 2
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Global Modem kit FFDM Bar Code Reader
2245794 For Sun U10 Station: 2393998
FRU: 1 For Sun SB150 Station: 2407693
• Global Modem adapter assy. for Europe FRU: 1
2249450
FRU: 2
• Cable RJ11 25 ft.
2216697
FRU: 2
Cable, extension, M/F IEC 1.2M

2189417
FRU: 1
Cable, 0.5M, W/Multiplug 4 UTE

2173762
FRU: 1
Gn/Ylw cable C5-C5 AWG12 LG400

2181484
FRU: 1
Gn/Ylw cable Faston-Fork AWG LG150

2191674
FRU: 1
Gn/Ylw cable C5-C5 AWG12 LG150

2181485
FRU: 1
Gn/Ylw cable C5-Faston AWG12 LG150 Gn/Ylw cable C5-Faston AWG12 LG250
2181486 2181488
FRU: 1 FRU: 1
Gn/Ylw cable C5-C5 AWG12 LG800 Gn/Ylw cable Faston-Faston AWG12 LG150
2181487 2195199
FRU: 1 FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 34 - CONSOLE AWS ONYX (2302056) (CONTINUED)
Proprietary Key cable

2244433
FRU: 1
AWS-Modem Serial cable IDC-AWS Ethernet cable

2226627 AWS Monitor cable 2226628
FRU: 1 2306204 FRU: 1
FRU: 2
Patch panel - modem cable

Patch panel - local printer cable 2226630
2226633 Patch panel - AWS (external ethernet) cable
FRU: 1
FRU: 1 2226632
FRU: 1

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 35 - ACQUISITION WORKSTATION SUN U10 (2293685)
ADS Workstation Sun U10

2299357-3
Job Card D/R 107
FRU: 1
2 x serial port adaptor*
2232092
FRU: 1
Ethernet/SCSI combo adaptor*
2258672
FRU: 1
Fan for Sun U10* (Sun Ref 370-3169)
2232050
FRU: 1
Floppy drive* REF 370-3159 SUN U10

2232053
FRU: 1
CD-Writer*:
To replace failed existing unit: 2369031
Option kit for add-on: 2372446
FRU: 1
Keyboard, Type-6 Unix, SUN
2242723
FRU: 1
Mouse, SUN
2265191-2
FRU: 1
Power supply* 250W REF 370-3169 SUN
2219808-2
FRU: 1
CD-ROM drive*, SUN
2299141
FRU: 1
Hard disk*, internal, 20 GB, 7200 RPM
2232052-2
FRU: 1
FFDM Software backup kit
2232045-6
FRU: 1
* For disassembly/reassembly of Sun U10 workstation components, refer to the following URL:
https://www.sun.com/products-n-solutions/hardware/docs/Workstation_Products/Workstations/UltraSPARC_Workstations/Sun_Ultra_510/index.html

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 36 - ACQUISITION WORKSTATION SUN SB150 (5109928)
ADS Workstation Sun SB150

5109928
Job Card D/R 107
FRU: yes
2404715
FRU: yes
2258672
FRU: yes
Power supply* 250W
2404714
FRU: yes
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Floppy drive* Sun Ref 370-4211 ADS Software backup media set (v17.2.10)
2356697 5104340
FRU: yes FRU: yes
Keyboard, Type-6 Unix, and Mouse SUN
2404717 CD-Writer (to replace existing option):
FRU: yes 2303825
or
CD-ROM drive*, SUN 2369031
2404719 or
FRU: yes 2303825-2
FRU: yes
Hard disk*, internal, 40 GB
2404716 SCSI Cable for CD-Writer
FRU: yes 2150580
FRU: yes
* For disassembly/reassembly of Sun SB150 workstation components, refer to the following URL:
https://www.sun.com/products-n-solutions/hardware/docs/Workstation_Products/Workstations/Sun_Blade_Workstations/Sun_Blade_150/index.html

Spares-Onyx.fm
Renewal Parts List
ILLUSTRATION 37 - ACQUISITION WORKSTATION SUN SB150 (5113759 OR 5113759-2)
ADS Workstation Sun SB150

5113759
or
5113759-2
Job Card D/R 107
FRU: yes
2404715
FRU: yes
5114699
FRU: yes
Power supply* 250W
2356690
FRU: yes
NOT ILLUSTRATED:
Floppy drive* Sun Ref 370-4211 ADS Software backup media set (v17.3)
2356697 5113760
FRU: yes FRU: yes
Keyboard, Type-6 Unix, and Mouse SUN CD-Writer (to replace existing option):
2404717 5140781
FRU: yes
FRU: yes
DVD & CD-ROM drive*, Sun Ref 370-4439
SCSI Cable for CD-Writer
5114708
FRU: yes 2402214
FRU: yes
Hard disk*, internal, 80 GB
5114381
FRU: yes
* For disassembly/reassembly of Sun SB150 workstation components, refer to the following URL:
https://www.sun.com/products-n-solutions/hardware/docs/Workstation_Products/Workstations/Sun_Blade_Workstations/Sun_Blade_150/index.html

Spares-Onyx.fm
CHAPTER 12 DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
This chapter contains information for the removal and replacement of Senographe 2000 D components.

D-R.fm
This page is blank.

D-R.fm
Job Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement
Job Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement Chapter 12
1. CALIBRATION AFTER FRU REPLACEMENT

• The table below lists Calibrations and Checks which must be carried out after replacing each listed
FRU (Field Replaceable Unit).
• The Calibrations and Checks listed should normally be carried out in the order given.
D/R FRU Required Calibrations and Checks
002 Paddle board 800PL8 CAL 006 Comp. Force detector
007 Collimator CAL 011 Beam Alignment
011 X-ray Tube Housing CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale factor
CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 013 Bad Pixel
CAL 017 AOP
CAL 016 Half-Value Layer
VF 008 Flat Field Test
012 Centering Lamp CAL 019 Light Beam
013 Mirror CAL 019 Light Beam
015 Fillter Wheel CAL 016 Half-Value Layer
025 HV Tank CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor
CAL 002 X-ray Bias Scale factor
CAL 017 AOP
026 Mag Holder CAL 014 Detector Gain
027 Arm Angle Sensor CAL 009 Compression Arm Angle
028 Gantry CPU Board 800PL3 D/R019 Backup/Restore (restore Gantry Parameters)
If restore is not possible, do Gantry calibrations:
CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 019 Light Beam
CAL 009 Compression Arm Angle

DR_000.fm
Job Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement
D/R FRU Required Calibrations and Checks

29 Generator CPU Board 400PL3 D/R019 Backup/Restore (restore Gene. Parameters)
If restore is not possible, do Generator calibrations:
CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor
CAL 017 AOP
103 Detector CAL 010 Tube Tilt
CAL 013 Bad Pixel
CAL 015 Conversion Factor
CAL 017 AOP
104A IDC CAL 013 Bad Pixel
104B CAL 014 Detector Gain
104C CAL 015 Conversion Factor
CAL 017 AOP
Cal 020 mAs Non-linearity
Generator I/F Board 400PL2 CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor
Gene. Command board 400PL1 CAL 001 Heater Scale Factor
Gantry Power Board 800PL1 CAL 006 Comp. Force detector
Compression Distribution. Board CAL 009 Compression Arm Angle
800PL5 CAL 007 Breast Thickness
Bucky CAL 014 Detector Gain
19 x 23 Paddle CAL 017 AOP
Breast Holder CAL 017 AOP
RCN Filter CAL 016 Half-Value Layer

DR_000.fm
Job Card D/R 001 - FRU replacement (no specific D/R instructions)
Job Card D/R 001 - FRU replacement (no specific D/R instruc-
tions) Chapter 12
1. PROCEDURE
If a FRU must be changed, and no specific Disassembly/Reassembly procedure is given in this manual:
• Determine whether any specific pre- or post-installation procedures are required. If so, they are listed
in Job Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement on page 435.
• Remove and replace the FRU, following all usual procedures for safety and equipment protection.
• Carry out the procedure(s) specified as Required Calibrations and Checks for the replaced FRU in
Job Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement on page 435.

DR_001.fm
Job Card D/R 001 - FRU replacement (no specific D/R instructions)
This page is blank.

DR_001.fm
Job Card D/R 002 - Paddle board 800PL8
Job Card D/R 002 - Paddle board 800PL8 Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Paddle board 800PL8.
2. TOOLS
• 1 mm and 2.5 mm Allen wrenches.
• Circlip pliers (5 mm circlip).
• Flat screwdriver, 1/4".
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal of paddle board 800PL8
Refer to Illustration 1.
1. Remove buttons B1 and B2 (1 mm Allen wrench).
2. Remove screws S1 and S2 from the two plastic half-covers.
3. Remove the two plastic half-covers.
4. Set the arm in the horizontal position.
6. Slacken locking screw on encoder wheel C (21).
7. Remove circlip (18) from one end of the shaft only, and remove washers 34,17 and 16.
8. Remove the two mounting screws (23/24) from the support plate.
9. Gently extract the encoder wheel from the optointerrupter by pushing it downwards, and then push
the shaft downwards until the circlip groove is at the encoder wheel level.
10. Remove the paddle board support plate.
11. Cut the tyraps to release connector XJ1 and the ground cable.
12. Remove the three mounting screws on paddle board 800PL8 (2.5 mm Allen wrench).
13. Remove paddle board 800PL8.

DR_002.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - PADDLE BOARD 800PL8 AND DETAIL OF BUTTON/SHAFT MOUNTING
B1
S1
25
23
24 FRONT
21 Ball latch
adjustment screw
S2
B2 3.5 mm pin protusion
B1
18
17
34
16

DR_002.fm
5-2. Installation of paddle board 800PL8

1. Install paddle board 800PL8 on its support plate.
2. Reconnect connector XJ1.
3. Insert the equipped support plate into its housing.
4. Reset the shaft and encoder wheel to their initial positions.
CAUTION
The encoder wheel is flexible but FRAGILE.

5. Reinstall the washers (see Illustration 1, bottom) on the shaft, and reinstall the circlip.
6. Install the paddle board support plate (two mounting screws, 23/24).
CAUTION
The magnet assembly (25) must not be in contact with the Hall effect transducer (clearance
approx. 1 mm).
7. Mount the encoder wheel on its shaft, ensuring that it is central in relation to the optointerrupter.
8. Tighten the encoder wheel locking screw.
9. Reinstall the two tyraps.
10. Ball latch protusion (see illustration 1): check that the ball latch pin protudes 3 to 3.5 mm (about
0.14inch). If adjustment is necessary unclamp the nut located inside the compression support and
rotate the screw to obtain the right protusion value. Then reclamp the screw with the nut.
11. Install the two half-covers (screws S1 and S2).
12. Install buttons B1 and B2 (1 mm Allen wrench).
13. Check that compression fine adjustment operates correctly - the button shaft must not rotate too
freely. If the slight rotation resistance is not as required, check that the washers are correctly installed
(para.5.2.5 and Illustration 1, items 34, 17 and 16).
14. When pressure is applied with a paddle, check that a compression force is indicated.
6. COMPLETION
• Carry out the procedure(s) specified as Required Calibrations and Checks for this Job Card in Job
Card D/R 000 - Calibration after FRU Replacement on page 435.
Note:
It is mandatory to check that the maximum compression force cannot be more than 30 daN (max-
imum allowed by regulations).
• Check that the compression system operates normally in application mode.
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH A NEW PADDLE BOARD 800PL8.

DR_002.fm
This page is blank.

DR_002.fm
Job Card D/R 003 - Magnification sensor board 800PL14
Job Card D/R 003 - Magnification sensor board 800PL14 Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Magnification sensor board 800PL14.
2. TOOLS
2.5 mm and 5 mm Allen wrenches.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal of magnification sensor board 800PL14
1. Remove the compression arm covers and sensor plate (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers
on page 539, section 5-3-2).
3. Remove the two mounting screws on the magnification unit support (left support only).
4. Remove the support.
5. On magnification sensor board 800PL14, disconnect connector XJ1.
6. Remove board 800PL14 and its support plate.
7. Separate board 800PL14 from its support plate by removing the two mounting screws (2.5 mm Allen
wrench).
5-2. Installation of magnification sensor board 800-PL14

1. To install magnification sensor board 800PL14, carry out the removal operations (above) in reverse
order.

DR_003.fm
Job Card D/R 003 - Magnification sensor board 800PL14
ILLUSTRATION 1 - LOCATION OF MAGNIFICATION SENSOR BOARD AND SUPPORT PLATE
800PL14 MAGNIFICATIO N SENSOR BOARD
LEFT SUPPORT PLATE
5-3. Functional check

1. Switch ON the Senographe electrical power.
2. Set the magnification unit in each of its three positions, and check that the indication on the column
display corresponds to the selected position.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH NEW MAGNIFICATION SENSOR BOARD

800PL14.

DR_003.fm
Job Card D/R 004 - Inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15
Job Card D/R 004 - Inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15 Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15.
2. TOOLS
• 2.5 mm Allen screwdriver (or wrench).
• 3 mm Allen wrench.
• 7 mm flat wrench.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal of inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15
1. Remove the compression arm covers and sensor plate (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers
2. Raise the column, to set board 800PL15 at a convenient working height.
4. Remove the lower screw S1 from the cable guide support plate, and remove the corresponding
spacer (7 mm flat wrench).
5. Remove the two mounting screws on board 800PL15.
CAUTION
There are two nylon spacers under the board

6. Disconnect the connector on board 800PL15 and remove the board.

DR_004.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - CENTER PART OF COMPRESSION ARM
CABLE GUIDE
SUPPORT
PLATE
S1
BOARD 800PL15
5-2. Installation of inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15

1. To install inter-arm tilt sensor board 800PL15, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
CAUTION
Do not forget to reinstall the two nylon spacers under the board.

DR_004.fm

2. Unlock the tube support arm and check that the three positions are correctly detected.
- Message S50: Incorrect X-ray incidence: at ±27 degrees
- No message at 0 degrees
3. Check that at 0 degrees, X-Ray exposure is available,
4. Check that at ±27 degrees, X-Ray exposure is forbidden.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH NEW INTER-ARM TILT SENSOR BOARD
800PL15.

DR_004.fm
This page is blank.

DR_004.fm
Job Card D/R 007 - Collimator
Job Card D/R 007 - Collimator Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Collimator.
• Tyraps.
2. TOOLS
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal of collimator
1. Set tube housing arm to a convenient position.
3. Remove tube housing arm covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539,
section 5-3).
4. Remove collimator light shield box (one mounting screw).
5. Remove rod retaining front of collimator (two locking pins).
6. Remove tyraps along cable harness between collimator and tube housing arm distribution board
800PL6.
7. On tube housing arm distribution board 800PL6, disconnect connectors XJ7, XJ8, XJ9, XJ10, XJ15
and XJ16 and separate these cables from the rest of the harness.
Notice:
Before the next step, look to see If there is a washer between the centering tool support and the
collimator (see illustration overleaf). If so, remove it with the retaining rod and keep it safely. The
use of this washer is mandatory on mobile systems.
8. Remove the rod (and washer if present) which retains the rear of collimator (two locking pins). Push
or tap the rod out to the right to release the collimator.
9. Remove ground cable on rear of collimator (screwdriver).
10. Remove collimator.

DR_007.fm
Job Card D/R 007 - Collimator
5-2. Installation of collimator

1. Install the new collimator (install rear rod and locking
pins, followed by front rod and locking pins).
2. If there was a washer between the centering tool sup-

port and the collimator (1), reinstall it when replacing
the rear rod.
Notice:
This washer must be present on mobile systems.
1
3. On tube housing arm distribution board 800PL6, reconnect connectors XJ7, XJ8, XJ9, XJ10, XJ15
and XJ16, reconstitute the cable harness, installing new tyraps.
4. Reinstall collimator light shield box (one mounting screw).
5. Reinstall tube housing arm covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539,
section 5-3).

1. Switch ON the Senographe electrical power and check that the self-test is correctly executed.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW COLLIMATOR.

DR_007.fm
Job Card D/R 008 - Compression Motor and Belts
Job Card D/R 008 - Compression Motor and Belts Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Compression motor.
• Compression belts.
2. TOOLS
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
Carry out the following preliminary actions:
• Remove the compression arm covers and sensor plate (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers
• Set the compression paddle mounting in contact with the image receptor.
• Switch OFF the Senographe electrical power.
5-1. Removal of compression motor and small belt

Refer to illustrations 1 and 2.
1. Disconnect the connector from the compression motor.
2. Remove the cable support plate P1 (supporting the cable between 800PL5 and XJ4) and release the
harness by cutting the tyrap located under the motor.

DR_008.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - COMPRESSION ARM WITH COMPRESSION MOTOR MOUNTING DETAIL
COMPRESSION MOTOR
S1 S2
P1
S3 to S6
SLIDE BAR PROTRUSION
SLIDE BAR
MAGNIFICATION RIGHT SUPPORT PLATE

DR_008.fm
ILLUSTRATION 2 - PULLEY AND MOTOR MOUNTING, WITH COMPONENT ASSEMBLY SEQUENCE
LARGE BELT PULLEY
SMALL BELT PULLEY
S10
RIGHT S7
COMPRESSION
MOTOR
LEFT
S8 S9
ENCODER WHEEL
3. Remove the crank pulley bearing support plate (two 4 mm Allen screws, S1 and S2).
4. Remove the four screws, S3 to S6 (4 mm Allen wrench), from the motor support plate.
CAUTION
Check that the slide bar does not protrude from the front of the pulley, this prevents the
mounting of the small belt. If necessary, push the slide bar slightly downwards.
5. Carefully extract the motor and the small toothed belt
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the encoding wheel.

6. Remove the two left-hand motor mounting screws (S8 and S9 - see above), on the motor support
plate.
7. Remove the encoder board, thus releasing the toothed belt.
8. Remove the other two screws (S7 and S10, on the right), followed by the encoding wheel and the
pulley, if the motor is being changed.

DR_008.fm
5-2. Encoder Board

• Before reinstalling the compression motor, check
for the presence of washers (A) between the fin-
gers of the black supporting bracket and the spac-
ers on which the encoder board is mounted.
• If these washers are present, remove them (to
move the board further away from the motor axis).
• To assist in adjustment after reinstallation, it may be
useful to place a mark on the side of the LED
assembly to indicate the position of the center of A
the LED.
5-3. Installation of compression motor and small belt

Refer to Illustrations 1 and 2.
• To install the compression motor and small belt, carry out the above operations in reverse order (8
through 1).
• Do not tighten the four mounting screws (Illustration 2, items S7 to S10) until the adjustment
described below has been carried out. They are used to tension the small toothed belt by moving the
motor on its mounting plate, and to position the encoder board with respect to the encoder wheel.
5-4. Adjustment
1. Tension the belt by pushing the motor (to the left in the illus-
tration). Take care to avoid excessive belt tension.
2. Tighten the two right hand screws.
3. Position the encoder board so that the encoder LED is
positioned at the center of the encoder wheel slots (if you
have marked the side of the LED assembly use the mark
as a guide), by pushing the board assembly away from the
motor axis (down in the illustration).
• It is important that the rotating wheel does not touch
any part of the LED assembly. If it does, it will generate
dust which will obscure the LED and cause failures.
4. When you are satisfied that the position is correct, tighten the two left hand screws.
5-5. Removal of large compression belt

Refer to Illustrations 1 and 2.
WARNING
The compression motor and small belt must be removed before the procedure described
below can be executed (see section 5-1).
1. Release the lock, behind the arm, to offset the compression arm in relation to the tube housing arm.
3. Set compression arm horizontal (the most convenient position).

DR_008.fm
5. Remove the magnification right support plate (accessible behind arm - two 5 mm Allen screws).
6. Set paddle support opposite hole left free by removal of magnification right support plate.
7. Slacken the two screws on the paddle support, to release the belt joining piece.
Note:
In the case of routine maintenance; if the belt is being replaced; then the old belt can simply be cut.
8. On the end of the belt, unscrew the small tensioner screw (7 mm flat wrench - see Illustration 3), to
release the spring.
Note:
It is not necessary to remove the spring. The tensioner screw need only be unscrewed a few turns.
9. Remove the end piece from the adjustment end of the belt (spring end; two small slot-head
screws).Remove the spring housing/belt joining piece (two 3 mm Allen screws).
CAUTION
Check that the slide bar does not protrude out of the front of the pulley as this prevents the
mounting of the small belt. If necessary, push the slide bar slightly downwards.
10. After the belt has been removed or cut, remove the two pulleys and spindles.
ILLUSTRATION 3 - BELT JOINING PIECE, SHOWING BELT ENGAGEMENT AND TENSIONER SCREW
BELT TENSIONER SCREW
COIL SPRING
FIRST FOUR TEETH, ON EACH END, ENGAGED IN

FIRST FOUR NOTCHES IN BELT JOINING PIECE
5-6. Installation of large compression belt

Refer to Illustrations 1, 2, and 3.
1. Install new belt.
Note:
Belt is already cut to exact length (1215 mm).
2. While leaving some slack on the belt, install the belt joining piece.
3. Engage the first four teeth, on each end of the belt, in the corresponding four notches in the belt join-
ing piece (see Illustration 3).
CAUTION
Take care not to twist the belt.

4. Engage belt on small pulley.

DR_008.fm
Note:
This operation is facilitated by the insertion of a packing piece on the end of the spring, to compress
the spring and slacken the belt - Remove packing piece after belt is engaged on pulley.
5. Tension (compress) the spring (7 mm flat wrench), using a little locking compound (Loctite or similar)
on the tensioner threads.
6. Reinstall the bearings and pulleys.
Note:
To do this it will be necessary to pull on the belt.
7. Recentralize the paddle and mount the belt central piece on the paddle support.
8. Reinstall the motor support plate and motor (4 screws).
9. Reinstall small belt and cable support plate.
10. Reconnect small coding wheel connector.
11. Tension small toothed belt by moving motor.
12. Tighten all four screws (motor mount).
13. Reconnect motor connector.
14. Reinstall the magnification plate support.
Note:
See Functional check, below.
15. Install compression paddle.
16. Reinstall covers and small cable protector on motor flange (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Cov-
ers on page 539, section 5-3-2).
CAUTION
Cables must pass outside protector plate, and plate must not be in contact with pulley.

The functional check should be carried out both before and after the reinstallation of the compression
paddle and arm covers.
2. Check that the belt runs correctly over its full travel range.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW COMPRESSION MOTOR AND BELTS.

DR_008.fm
Job Card D/R 009 - Gantry CPU Battery
Job Card D/R 009 - Gantry CPU Battery Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Lithium battery.
2. TOOLS
• 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
• Soldering iron.
• DMR data diskette.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
WARNING
Before removing gantry CPU board 800-PL3, save the gantry parameters, to ensure that
these parameters (saved using battery power) are not accidentally lost while the battery is
being changed - see Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page 475.
5-1. Removal of gantry CPU battery and installation of new battery

1. Back up the gantry parameters - see Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page 475.
2. Remove the column cover (CPU side only) (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page
539).
3. On gantry CPU board 800PL3, remove the two 800-PL3
mounting screws (2.5 mm Allen wrench), and Gantry
remove the board. CPU
4. Solder the new lithium battery in the free position board
(BT1 or BT2), respecting the polarities.
5. Unsolder the old battery.
6. Reinstall gantry CPU board 800PL3 in its position Gantry
in the gantry. Lithium
CPU
7. Reinstall the column cover (CPU side).
Battery

DR_009.fm
Job Card D/R 009 - Gantry CPU Battery

2. The following message should NOT be displayed after initialization:
SAVED MEMORY ERROR 151/000
If this message is displayed, reload the gantry parameters and repeat the initialization.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW GANTRY CPU BATTERY.

DR_009.fm
Job Card D/R 010 - Optical Fiber (Gantry to Generator)
Job Card D/R 010 - Optical Fiber (Gantry to Generator) Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Optical fibers.
• Tyraps.
2. TOOLS
• None.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
CAUTION
When disconnecting optical fibers, always pull on the connector AND NOT on the cable. If
in doubt, check that the core of the fiber is flush with the end of the connector.
5-1. Removal and reinstallation of optical fibers

2. Remove the generator covers and the gantry column covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of
Covers on page 539).
3. Disconnect the optical fibers at both ends.
4. Disengage the harness connecting the generator and the gantry, particularly if the harness is coiled
under the generator.
5. Open the harness protection housing.
6. Disengage the black ribbed outer cover protecting the optical fibers.
Note:
It will be necessary to cut some of the tyraps in the generator and the gantry.
7. Remove the harness clamp at the bottom of the gantry column.
8. Gently pull the black ribbed outer cover out of the generator and the gantry.
CAUTION
Take care to avoid rubbing or dirt on the ends of the "good" fibers.
9. Open the ribbed outer cover, over its entire length, and remove the defective fiber.
10. Replace this fiber, respecting connector color coding.
11. Temporarily reconnect the four fibers to the generator and gantry, and check that the system oper-
ates correctly when the electrical power is switched ON.
12. Disconnect the four fibers and reinstall the ribbed outer cover in the harness.
13. Carefully install new tyraps, particularly inside the gantry and between the base plate and gantry

DR_010.fm
Job Card D/R 010 - Optical Fiber (Gantry to Generator)
interface board 800PL2.

2. Raise and lower the column and visually check that the movement is not fouling any of the cables.
3. Reinstall the generator covers and the gantry column covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of
Covers on page 539).
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW OPTICAL FIBERS.

DR_010.fm
Job Card D/R 011 - X-ray Tube Housing
Job Card D/R 011 - X-ray Tube Housing Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• X-ray tube housing.
• HT grease.
2. TOOLS
Be careful when touching the tube housing, as its temperature can be up to 80°C (about 180°F).
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
Notice:
Take great care to avoid damage to the rhodium filter; it is extremely expensive!
5-1. Removal of X-ray tube housing

1. Select Aluminium filter (to avoid possible damage to rhodium or moly filters).
2. Remove tube housing spacer cover (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
4. Disconnect HT connector on housing.
5. Disconnect stator cable connector (see illustration 1).
6. Remove HT positive cable and one ground cable from the grounding points.

DR_011.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - TUBE HOUSING CONNECTIONS
HT connector (female)
Ground connector screw
+HT
screw
Stator, pressostat
& thermal switch
connectors Stator connector
Thermal switch
Pressostat connector
7. On board 800PL6, disconnect connector XJ4.

8. Slacken two screws at rear of housing and remove two at front.
9. Remove housing by gently pulling forwards.
CAUTION
Do not touch the molybdenum and rhodium filters with fingers.
5-2. Installation of X-ray tube housing

1. Prepare new housing.
2. Remove protection cover from tube housing window.
3. Remove cap from HT pot and insert grease.
4. Carefully slide the new housing into position.
5. Reinstall the two front screws on housing and tighten all four screws.
6. Reinstall the three cables on the housing grounding point.
7. Reconnect green connector XJ1 (anode motor power).
8. Reconnect connector XJ4 on board 800PL6 (other end of thermal cable).
9. Reconnect HT cable into rear of housing.

DR_011.fm
5-3. Check and adjustment of cradle centering, check for lateral play
• Lateral play may exist between Items 1 and 2 (Illustration 2) due to loosening of the screw (Item 3)
which causes the setscrew to loosen.
• In Application Mode, and following tilt of the arm, there is a risk of the X-ray field shifting to the left or
to the right in relation to the image receptor. There is also a risk of motion blurring due to vibration
from tube rotation.
Note:
The two setscrews (Illustration 2, Item 2) should touch the two tube joint shafts at the left and right
of the tube, without applying pressure to them.
ILLUSTRATION 2 - TOP VIEW OF TUBE HOLDER CRADLE (THROUGH ROTATION SHAFT)
2 2
3 3
1 1

DR_011.fm
6. COMPLETION
1. Disconnect connector XJ4 from board 800PL6 and check that the message: TUBE HOUSING OVER
TEMPERATURE is displayed on the control panel.
2. Reconnect connector XJ4 and check that the message disappears.
3. Before proceeding with the calibrations and checks as specified below, perform a Clear Calibrations
operation. From the Service Desktop, click the Calibrations button, then select Detector, and Clear
Calibration.
4. Carry out the procedure(s) specified as Required Calibrations and Checks for this Job Card in Job
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW X-RAY TUBE HOUSING.

DR_011.fm
Job Card D/R 012 - Centering Device Lamp
Job Card D/R 012 - Centering Device Lamp Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• New centering device lamp (only genuine part number 2188568 must be used, to ensure correct light
intensity, easy filament centering and reliability)
2. TOOLS
• Standard screwdrivers, open–end wrenches, etc.
• Ruler calibrated in mm.
Not applicable.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
Note:
The objective is to replace the centering device lamp and set it to the correct vertical height.
5-1. Remove old lamp.

1. Turn the Senographe off.
2. Remove the two half-covers from the gantry head.
3. Remove the anti-scatter box (2 parts); first remove the side part then loosen slightly the attachment
screw (at center underside) of the box and remove the anti-scatter box by pulling it gently forward.
4. Remove collimator assembly retaining pins by first removing the two cotter pins from one end of each
retaining pin. Pivot the collimator assembly downwards.
5. Loosen the two light box securing screws slightly; remove the light box by pulling it gently forward.
CAUTION
Wait for the lamp to cool before removing it.

6. Remove the old lamp by pulling firmly but gently downwards.

DR_012.fm
Job Card D/R 012 - Centering Device Lamp
5-2. Install and Position New Lamp
CAUTION
When handling the new lamp, be sure not to touch the glass surface with your fingers.
Always use a clean dry cloth or paper handkerchief.
1. Insert the leads of the new lamp into its socket SLOWLY, and PUSH THEM IN ALL THE WAY.
Note:
The distance of 30 mm between filament center and pin end is guaranteed by the lamp manufac-
turer, see Illustration 1.
2. Reinstall the light box but do not tighten the securing screws.
CAUTION
The light box is for protection in case of any explosion of the new lamp being installed.
3. Turn on the Senographe and verify that the
new lamp lights when activated, then turn the
Senographe off again.
4. Tighten the two light box securing screws.
5. Check that the CENTER of the filament is
aligned with the CENTER of the small slot in
the light box when your eye is at the level of
the small slot (see illustration 1). If not, start
5.2 again.
6. Pivot the collimator assembly back up and
reinstall its retaining pins and cotter pins.
CAUTION
CORRECT LAMP FILAMENT HEIGHT: 30 ± 0.5 mm
6. COMPLETION

DR_012.fm
Job Card D/R 013 - Mirror
Job Card D/R 013 - Mirror Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Mirror.
2. TOOLS
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
WARNING
GREAT CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID TOUCHING THE MIRROR (NO FINGER
PRINTS) AND TO AVOID DAMAGING THE FILTER WHEEL, WHICH IS EXTREMELY FRAG-
ILE AND LOCATED JUST ABOVE THE MIRROR
5-1. Mirror Removal

1. Affix a piece of adhesive tape on the Bucky to mark the rear edge of the light field.
2. Set the tube housing arm to convenient position.
4. Remove tube housing arm covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539,
section 5-3).
6. Remove rod retaining front of collimator (2 locking pins).
7. Open the collimator.
8. Remove the mirror adjustment screw and its spring.
Notice:
If a lock nut and serrated washer are present on the mirror adjustment screw (see illustration over-
leaf), remove them with the screw and spring, and keep them safely. The use of this lock nut and
washer is mandatory on mobile systems.
9. Remove the lock nuts on the two mirror mounting screws.
10. Remove the two mirror mounting screws (3 mm Allen key) and the mirror.

DR_013.fm
Job Card D/R 013 - Mirror
5-2. Mirror Installation

• To install the new mirror, carry out the above operations in reverse order (10 through 1).
Notice:
If a lock nut and serrated washer were present on the mirror angle adjustment screw, reinstall
them. The use of this locknut and washer is mandatory on mobile (van-mounted) systems.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - TUBE HOUSING ARM WITH MIRROR INSTALLATION DETAIL
Mirror mounting screws

and lock nuts
Mirror angle adjustment

lock nut and washer Mirror frame
(se Notice above)
Mirror angle adjustment

screw and spring
5-3. Adjustment of mirror

• Adjust the mirror angle so that the rear edge of the light field coincides with the adhesive tape refer-
ence position made in 5-1-1 above.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW MIRROR.

DR_013.fm
Job Card D/R 015 - Filter wheel
Job Card D/R 015 - Filter wheel Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Filter wheel.
2. TOOLS
• Circlip pliers.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal of filter wheel
1. Set tube housing arm to convenient position.
3. Remove tube housing arm covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539, section
5-3).
5. Remove the front rod retaining the collimator (two spring clips).
6. On tube housing arm distribution board 800PL6, disconnect connectors XJ6 and XJ11.
CAUTION
In the following operations concerning the filter wheel and motor, take great care TO
AVOID TOUCHING THE MIRROR.
7. Remove the filter motor mounting screws, one each side of motor (5 mm Allen wrench).
8. Remove the motor, complete with filter wheel.
9. Remove the nut and washer, retaining the filter wheel spindle to the support plate (8 mm flat wrench).
10. Separate the spindle from the wheel by removing the circlip.
5-2. Installation of filter wheel

To install the new filter wheel, carry out the above operations in reverse order (section 5-1 10 through 1).

DR_015.fm
Job Card D/R 015 - Filter wheel

• Switch on the Senographe electrical power supply and check that the self-test is correctly executed.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW FILTER WHEEL.

DR_015.fm
Job card D/R 016 - Gas Spring
Job card D/R 016 - Gas Spring Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Gas spring.
2. TOOLS
• Service Terminal.
• Set of steps (for access to top of column).
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. GAS SPRING REPLACEMENT

1. Remove the column covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
3. Remove three plastic caps on column top cover.
4. Remove the three cover mounting screws and the cover.
5. Disconnect cable from XJ1 on board 800PL12 (inside, on cover).
6. Raise column approx. 30 cm, to raise the safety plate above the fixed part of the gas spring.
7. Remove jack (gas spring) safety plate inside column (two 8 mm Allen screws).
CAUTION
For safety, the two 8 mm screws are installed using thread locking compound (loctite or
similar). An extension will probably be required on the Allen wrench when slackening the
screws.
8. Remove clamp on front edge, at bottom of column (two bolts; 7 mm flat wrench).
9. Lower column and insert new gas spring (inner plunger downwards), next to the existing gas spring,
in the corner where the motor is located.
10. Raise column to maximum height (gas spring is then not under load).
11. Try to move the gas spring. If no movement is possible on the upper and lower mounting rods, use
the column maintenance menu on the Service Terminal to raise the column, very gently, to the upper
mechanical stop.
12. Remove the upper and lower gas spring mountings to release the spring (two small rods, secured by
locking pins - no tool required).

DR_016.fm
ILLUSTRATION 1 - GAS SPRING INSTALLATION IN COLUMN
GAS SPRING
CLAMP
COLUMN MOTOR
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
13. Install the new gas spring in place of the old.

14. Reinstall upper and lower gas spring mounting rods, complete with locking pins (align pins vertically).
15. Place old gas spring in one corner of column.
16. Check cable harness is correctly positioned. Adjust as required.
17. Lower column to approx. 30 cm above lower end of travel stop (check movement of cable harness).
18. Reinstall clamp on front edge, at bottom of column (two bolts, 7 mm flat wrench).
19. Reinstall the gas spring safety plate inside column (two 8 mm Allen screws).
CAUTION
Apply thread locking compound (loctite or similar) to the two 8 mm screws before installa-
tion.

DR_016.fm
20. Lower the column to the fully down position.

21. Remove the old gas spring.
22. Reconnect cable to XJ1 on board 800PL12 (inside, on cover).
23. Reinstall the cover, and the three cover mounting screws.
24. Reinstall the three plastic caps on column top cover.
25. Reinstall the column covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH NEW GAS SPRING IN COLUMN.

DR_016.fm
This page is blank.

DR_016.fm
Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure
Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Blank DOS formatted HD 3.5 floppy disk.
2. TOOLS
• None.
4. PREREQUISITES
Before performing the Back-up the system must be fully functional.
In order to ensure that the system is functional, perform one acquisition before starting the backup pro-
cedure.
On the Browser, open exam, compress a phantom, and perform an acquisition.
WARNING
This procedure produces X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions. Check that the
image is displayed on the AWS display. Check that only the message S23 is displayed on
the X-Ray console at the end of the exposure.
5. BACKUP/RESTORE PROCEDURE
Backup and Restore procedures are described on the following pages.
5-1. Introduction
When a Backup procedure is performed, the following operations occur:
• If a Backup 1 file already exists on the AWS disk, it is renamed to Backup 2.
• A new backup file named Backup 1 is created on the AWS disk. This contains:
- AWS configuration data.
- IDC configuration data.
- Senographe data (Generator and Gantry parameters).
• The AWS configuration data may also be copied to a floppy disk. No IDC or Senographe backup data
are written to the floppy.
It is possible to carry out a Restore procedure in several ways:
• AWS configuration data can be restored from Backup 1 or Backup 2, (both located on AWS hard
disks), or from the backup floppy diskette.
• IDC data can be restored from the AWS disk file Backup 1 or Backup 2.

DR_019.fm
• Senographe data can be restored from the AWS disk file Backup 1 or Backup 2.
Notice:
A system backup is recommended after each change of configuration of any part of the system,
and after each set of calibrations.
A system backup is not recommended after a single calibration or configuration change when the
change is to be followed by more changes. Each time that a system backup is made, the current
AWS file backup Backup 2 is lost (overwritten by Backup 1), and this must be taken into account
when considering a new backup.
Notice:
When a complete reinstallation of the AWS is performed, the system backups are lost. Always
check the compatibility before restoring the IDC parameters (when the IDC subsystem is replaced
or the IDC software version is upgraded). Always check the compatibility of parameters when re-
storing ADS data from floppy disk. Call your On-Line Center for details.
5-2. Backup procedure

1. Select Root menu /Service Tools /Service Desktop; click Submit, then click the Utilities button.
2. If you want to perform a backup on the floppy disk, then insert a blank 3.5" HD floppy disk into the
floppy drive on the AWS unit (not the IDC). To access the floppy drive, remove the Cart rear cover
and pull back the AWS station. Click the Floppy Format button, and wait for the format to complete.
Note:
The presence of a floppy disk is not essential for the backup. If no floppy is inserted, AWS param-
eters are still copied to the hard disk.The floppy disk contains only AWS parameters. It doesn't con-
tain any IDC or Gantry / Generator parameters.
3. Click the Backup button. The Back up screen is displayed (see illustration below).
4. Enter a suitable name into the text field System Backup Description Text; click the START button to
continue. If no floppy disk is present, the message Floppy disk error or not formatted is displayed;
ignore this message; click Continue to continue the backup. The process takes about 15 minutes.
5. An AWS reset is carried out automatically; click OK when it completes.
6. The message System Backup Completed is displayed at the end of the backup operation.
7. To check that the backup copy is available, click the RESTORE button: The name of the system
backup, Backup 1, appears on the screen.
8. If the backup is not completed successfully, refer to section 6-3.

DR_019.fm
9. If the backup was also performed on the floppy disk, then remove it and label it with the name and
date of the backup and keep it safely.
5-3. Restore procedure

Note:
Before performing the restore of the subsystem parameters check the version compatibility:
Never restore the IDC, ADS or DMR parameters coming from a software version to a different
software version.
Never restore the IDC parameters when the image detector is replaced.
Call your On-Line Center for details.
1. Select Root menu /Service Tools /Service Desktop; click Submit, then click the Utilities button.
2. Click the Restore button: the Restore screen is displayed (see illustration below).
3. Select the appropriate restore procedure: you may restore separate sub-system data - AWS, IDC, or
Gantry/Generator (DMR) as required.
4. Select the data source (Backup1 or Backup 2 on the AWS disk, or 3.5" floppy).
5. If restoring from floppy, insert the diskette containing the backup data into the drive on the AWS unit.
To access the floppy drive, remove the Cart rear cover and draw back the AWS unit.
6. Click the START button to proceed, and wait for restore completion.

DR_019.fm
7. A message indicating successful completion is displayed at the end of the restore procedure.
8. If IDC data has been restored, the IDC must be rebooted. See section 5-4.
9. If the restore is not completed successfully, see section 6-3.
10. For Senographe systems using ADS versions 17.4.5 and above, if AWS has been restored, you
must reload the Senographe system’s IP Filters so that the newly declared network host has access
through the Senographe system’s firewall via the DICOM protocol. To do this, perform the following
sub-steps:
IPFreload.sh
operator
Senographe system.

DR_019.fm
5-4. IDC Restore

• After IDC data has been restored, the IDC must be rebooted so that it can recognize the changed
data. The IDC can be rebooted either by power OFF/ON on the IDC, or using a command window.
• To reboot the IDC using a command window:
- Open a command window
- Enter the command: telnet idc<Return>.
- When IDC asks for user/password, enter <Return> two times.
- Type reboot<Return>
The ID reboots; the message Connection closed by foreign host is displayed. If you wish to view IDC
startup messages you must reconnect by entering the command telnet idc<Return> again.
The X-ray console first displays the message S86 AWS/IDC Communication lost, and then displays
the message S83 Detector environment not OK until the reboot is complete - roughly 3 minutes.

DR_019.fm
6. TROUBLE-SHOOTING NOTES
Use the information in the following sections as a guide in trouble-shooting backup/restore problems.
6-1. AWS Backup from Service Desktop

The diagram below illustrates the backup process. File sizes depend on AWS, IDC and Generator ver-
sions.
AWS config floppy
AWS Hard Disk
ads.tar (1 M)
iip.data.tar (10 k)
DMR CPUs iop.tar (100 k)
AWS Config files
brgen.dat (17 k) browser preferences, hosts declared, printer config.,
brgan.dat (0.6 k) config from Service Desktop, etc.
ads.tar (1 M)
ads_hd.tar (1 M)
iip.data.tar (1 M)
Optional
iop.tar (100 k)
Backup
Backup 1
/export/home/iqst/subsystems/ads/backup/current/
/export/home/iqst/subsystems/dmr/backup/current/
IDC /export/home/iqst/subsystems/idc/backup/current/
Complete directory
/idc (160 M) Next Backup
about 200 files
Backup 2
/export/home/iqst/subsystems/ads/backup/previous/
/export/home/iqst/subsystems/dmr/backup/previous/
/export/home/iqst/subsystems/idc/backup/previous/
6-2. Backup Process

When the Backup button in service desktop is clicked:
1. Files from a previous backup stored in ~/current (backup 1) are copied into ~/previous (backup 2).
2. Files in ~/previous (backup 2) are then lost.
3. The IDC directory is copied to backup 1.
4. Numerous AWS configuration files spread in many locations are gathered into four files and copied
into backup 1.
5. Senographe calibration files are copied through AWS/Senographe serial link to backup 1.
6. If a formatted floppy was inserted (optional), three AWS configuration files are copied to the floppy.

DR_019.fm
6-3. Backup/Restore Troubleshooting

6-3-1. If IDC Backup Fails
• Check communication between the AWS and the IDC.
• Check that there is enough space on the AWS disk to receive the backup data.
Note:
In normal operation, the backup function can be done whenever required, as current (Backup1)
and previous (Backup2).
In case of back-up failure, the procedure described below can be performed in order to clear the
space allocated for the backup of IDC files.
1) Open a "command window" and login as root

type su -root<Return>
for password type: operator<Return>
type cd /export/home/iqst/subsystems/idc/backup<Return>
2) Check that the directory is the good one:

type pwd<Return> (the answer must be: /export/home/iqst/subsystems/idc/backup else,
return to step 1)
3) Delete files in IDC backup directories (current and previous):

type \rm -rf current<Return>
type \rm -rf previous<Return>
type mkdir current<Return>
type mkdir previous<Return>
4) Reboot the entire system

5) Perform a new backup
6-3-2. If AWS Backup to Hard Disk Fails

• Check that there is enough space on the AWS disk to receive the backup data.
6-3-3. If AWS Backup to Floppy Fails
• Check that the floppy is correctly formatted.
• Check that the floppy is not damaged.
• Check that there is enough space on the floppy to receive the backup data.
Note:
If backup to floppy is not possible, it may be necessary to record AWS parameters manually so
that they can be restored later (e.g., after an upgrade procedure). See pages below.

DR_019.fm
Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure - Manual record sheets
JobCardD/R019-Back-up/Restoreprocedure-ManualrecordsheetsChapter 12
7. MANUAL PARAMETER BACKUP

If backup to floppy is not possible, it may be necessary to record AWS parameters manually so that they
can be restored later (e.g., after an upgrade procedure).
The following pages provide information and space to note each of the following sets of parameters:
1. Site Information and General Configuration
2. Browser Filter Management
3. Browser Preferences
Layout
Filter
Sort
4. Medical Application Preferences
Auto Push
Auto Print
Annotations
Auto Delete
Names
5. Worklist Management
6. Network Management
7. Printer Management

DR_019.fm
7-1. Site Information and General Configuration

• Access: Tools menu/Service Desktop. Click on Submit to enter the Service Desktop then click the
Configuration button. Click Site to view and note Site information, then General to view and note
the General Configuration.
Site Information Copy the current settings into the table below. (note that your hardware key must
be installed to display all settings):
Parameter Current setting

Site Name:
Site Address:
Phone:
Fax:
Contact Person:
Phone:
Station Name:
System ID:
Installation date:
Contract Number:
Contract Expiry Date:
General configuration. Copy the current settings into the table below.
Auto Delete: Language:

QAP timeout Upper threshold: English
. . . . . . . days ........ % Français
Lower threshold: Español
........ % Deutsch
Screen Blank Timeout Maximum Image Storage Time: Italiano
. . . . . . . days . . . . . . . . hours Portugès
Edit Patient: <> On
<> Off

DR_019.fm
7-2. Browser Filter Management

• Access: Tools menu/Filter management. For each filter name, click Update to view the settings,
and copy them into one of the tables below. Copy this sheet if you need additional space.
1.
Filter name:
Circle the current value Note current value of the parameter
Patient level:
Patient Name Begins with / Contains / Is
Patient ID Begins with / Contains / Is
Exam level:
Exam description Begins with / Contains / Is
Performing Physician Begins with / Contains / Is
Referring physician Begins with / Contains / Is
Exam modality MG / DX N/A
Exam date Between / Before / After / On
Exam time
Series level:
Series description Begins with / Contains / Is
Series Type SCPT / RAW /PROCESSED N/A
Application level:
Apply this filter up to Patient / Exam / Series N/A
the selected level

DR_019.fm
2.
Filter name:
Patient level:
Exam level:
Exam time
Series level:
Application level:
Apply this filter up to the Patient / Exam / Series N/A
selected level

DR_019.fm
3.
Filter name:
Patient level:
Exam level:
Exam time
Series level:
Application level:
Apply this filter up to the Patient / Exam / Series N/A
selected level

DR_019.fm
7-3. Browser Preferences

• Access: Tools menu/Browser preferences.
Select each set of preferences in turn: Layout; Filter; Sort.
Layout:
Record the current settings on the illustration.

Mark each selected button clearly with a cross.
Filter:
Record the current filter names for local and remote lists. If none, write "None".
Local lists. Current setting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote lists. Current setting: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sort:
For each parameter, circle the currently selected option:
Sort patients by: Name / Identifier / Last study date
Sort exams by: Date / Identifier / Description / Performing Physician / Referring Physician
Modality: MG / DX
Sort series by: Type / Number
Sort images by: Number / Old-new date / New-old date
Split series: Yes / No

DR_019.fm
7-4. Medical Application Preferences

• Access: Tools menu/Medical application preferences.
Select each set of preferences in turn:
Auto Push; Auto Print; Annotations; Auto Windowing; Quality Check; Auto Delete; Names.
Auto push
Circle the current selection: Auto Push ON / OFF .
If Auto Push is ON, use the table below to enter the names in the Remote Host window, and circle the
selected push criterion for each host:
Remote Host Name Criterion
Raw / Proc / Both / None
Auto print
Circle the current selection: Auto Print ON / OFF .
If Auto Print is ON, enter Dicom printer information in the table below For each named printer, note the
name, the selected print mode and the selected number of copies; click the Printer properties button to
obtain the selected print parameters: Parameters shown in square brackets in the table (e.g., [Fit to film])
are default values which normally do not change. Copy this sheet if you need additional space.
Dicom printer Name Criterion Criterion
Print mode [Fit to film]
Number of Copies
Printer properties
Format [standard]
Media type Paper / Clear film / Blue film
Destination Magazine / Processor
Film orientation Portrait / Landscape
Magnification type [Cubic]
Film size [8 in by 10 in]

DR_019.fm
Annotations
Record the annotation settings: place a cross in the box beside each option currently selected:
Annotation level Selected annotations Printing annotations
Patient information
Acquisition date and time
Full Hospital information Model 1
Partial X-ray parameters Model 2
None Anatomical information Model 2
Custom Processing Information
Display parameters
Measurements
Auto Windowing
Circle the current selection: Standard / High / Low / User .
Quality check
Circle the current selection: OK / NOT OK .
Auto Delete
Circle the current selection: Auto Delete ON / OFF .
If Auto Delete is ON, use the table below to record the auto delete profile: place a cross in the box beside
each of the options currently selected:
Raw images sent Raw images committed Both images committed
Processed images sent Processed images commit- Processed images
ted printed
Both images sent

DR_019.fm
Names
Use the table below to record the currently entered names:
Operators Performing Physicians Referring Physicians
7-5. Worklist Management

• Access: Tools menu/Worklist management.
For each Host name listed, click Update to view the parameter settings, and copy them into the table
below. Copy this sheet if you need additional space:
Parameter Entry Entry

Host label
Host name
Application Entity Title
Network address
Port number
Comments

DR_019.fm
7-6. Network Management

• Access: Tools menu/Network management.
For each Host name listed, click Update to view the remote host parameter settings, and copy them
into the table below. Where multiple choices are shown, circle the selected parameter. Copy this
sheet if you need additional space
Parameter Host 1 Host 2 Host 3

Host label
Host name
Network address
Network protocol
Port number
Query retrieve Patient / Study / No provider Patient / Study / No provider Patient / Study / No provider
Storage commitment Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No
Network address
Port number
Manage send Yes / No Yes / No Yes / No
Comments
7-7. Printer Management

• Access: Tools menu/Worklist management.
For each Dicom printer listed, click Update to view the printer parameter settings. Copy the labels,
names, etc., into one of the illustrations below and mark all selected check boxes with a cross. Copy
this sheet if you need additional space:

DR_019.fm
- Printer 1:
DICOM printer label :
Hostname :
Application Entity Title (AET) :
Network address :
Port number :
Layouts :
Slide formats : 35mm 40mm

Pixel depth : 10 12
Film size :
Printer pixel size (micron) :
Configuration information :
Density : Min Max
Magnification type : Cubic
Smoothing factor :
Trim : No
Save Clear Done

DR_019.fm
- Printer 2:
DICOM printer label :
Hostname :
Application Entity Title (AET) :
Network address :
Port number :
Layouts :
Slide formats : 35mm 40mm

Pixel depth : 10 12
Film size :
Printer pixel size (micron) :
Configuration information :
Density : Min Max
Magnification type : Cubic
Smoothing factor :
Trim : No
Save Clear Done

DR_019.fm
This page is blank.

DR_019.fm
Job Card D/R 021 - Generator CPU Battery
Job Card D/R 021 - Generator CPU Battery Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Lithium battery.
2. TOOLS
• Soldering iron.
• DMR data diskette.
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Before removing generator CPU board 400PL3, back-up the generator parameters, to
ensure that these parameters (normally saved using battery power) are not lost while the
battery is being changed - see D/R Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page
475.
5-1. Removal of generator CPU battery and installation of new battery

1. Back up the generator parameters - see Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page
475.
2. Remove the generator front panel (CPU side) Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.

DR_021.fm
Job Card D/R 021 - Generator CPU Battery
3. Pull generator CPU board 400PL3 gently forward and

remove it.
4. Solder the new lithium battery in the free position
(BT1 or BT2), respecting the polarities. 400-PL3
Generator
5. Unsolder the old battery.
CPU
6. Reinstall generator CPU board 400PL3 in its position board
in the generator.
7. Reinstall the generator front panel (CPU side) D/R
101.

1. Switch ON the Senographe electrical power. Generator
Lithium
2. Check that the message: SAVED MEMORY ERROR
CPU
071/08 is not displayed after initialization
Battery
3. If the above message is displayed, restore the gener-
ator parameters from the previously saved diskette or
from the AWS disk (see Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/
Restore procedure on page 475).
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW GENERATOR CPU BATTERY.

DR_021.fm
Job Card D/R 022 - Capacitor box
Job Card D/R 022 - Capacitor box Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Capacitor box.
2. TOOLS
• Switch OFF mains power supply.
• Check residual voltage (inverter supply).
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal of filtering capacitors
Refer to Illustrations1 and 2.
1. Remove the four generator side panels (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
2. Switch OFF the electrical power supply, both in the main cabinet and on the rotary switch in the gen-
erator cabinet (position 0).
3. Using a voltmeter (rating 1000 V DC), check that there is no residual voltage between screws S1 and
S2 before proceeding.
4. Remove screws S1 and S2 (10 mm flat wrench), and remove the two resonant capacitors, RC1 and
RC2, together with their upper plate.
5. Remove screw S3, followed by screws S4, S5 and S6 (8 mm flat wrench).Remove screws S7 and
S8, followed by screws S9 and S10 mounting the capacitor box on the "Inverter" panel (4 mm Allen
wrench).
6. Remove the capacitor box.
5-2. Installation of filtering capacitors

• To install new filtering capacitors, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH NEW INVERTER FILTERING CAPACITORS.

DR_022.fm
Job Card D/R 022 - Capacitor box
ILLUSTRATION 1 - CAPACITOR BOX - TOP VIEW (WITHOUT RESONANT CAPACITORS)
S1 S4
C7+
C7 C5 C3 C1+ C1
S5
S3 C1-/C2+
C8+/C7-
C8 C6 C4 C2- C2
S2 S6
C8-
ILLUSTRATION 2 - CAPACITOR BOX - SIDE VIEW

RESONANT CAPACITORS
RC1 RC2
S3
S9, S10
S1 S2
CAPACITOR BOX
S7, S8
6. COMPLETION

DR_022.fm
Job Card D/R 025 - HV and kV/mA tank
Job Card D/R 025 - HV and kV/mA tank Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• HT block, equipped kV/mA.
• HT grease.
2. TOOLS
• Ammeter.
• Mammo kV peak meter.
• X-ray waveform meter RMI 233 and oscilloscope (see Section 3, below).
• X-ray emission safety precautions are applicable.
• If only the kV/mA board is being changed (not recommended) then the HT probe frequency
response must be calibrated. This requires the use of tool RMI 233 and an oscilloscope. Not calibrat-
ing the HT probe frequency response may result in non-compliance with CDRH standards (see
below) and will affect the AOP behaviour (incorrect breast thickness measurement during pre-expo-
sure).
4. PREREQUISITES
None.
5. PROCEDURE
CAUTION
The HT block and kV/mA board assembly is factory calibrated. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
ADJUST POTENTIOMETER P1 (HT probe frequency compensation).
5-1. Removal and installation of HT and kV/mA block

2. Remove the generator covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).
3. On the HT block, disconnect the following, in the sequence listed:
- HT connector,
- heating/bias connector GKB,
- ground connections (3 wires) (8 mm flat wrench),
- inverter GKA/1 and GKA/2 (8 mm flat wrench),
- HT probe cable: GKC.
4. On the kV/mA board, disconnect XJ2, XJ3 and XJ1.
5. Tighten the air-bleed screw.
6. Slacken the HT block mounting clamp and remove the block.
7. Install the new HT block and reconnect the cables (grease the HT end-piece if necessary).
8. Slacken the air-bleed screw.

DR_025.fm
Job Card D/R 025 - HV and kV/mA tank
6. CHANGING THE KV/MA BOARD ONLY

• Changing the kV/mA board alone IS NOT RECOMMENDED (see Section 3, above). However, if the
change is absolutely necessary, the calibration procedure is given below:
1. Configure the Senographe as follows:
- magnification device in position 1.9; Large focal spot; 2-point mode; 30 kV, 30 mA.
2. Place the RMI 233 probe on the magnification plate, in the center of the X-ray beam. Connect the
probe to an oscilloscope with memory facility; select scan 5 ms/division.
3. Execute an exposure and observe the beginning of the exposure waveform on the oscilloscope.
Adjust P1 to obtain the shortest rise time, with no overshoot, as shown in the waveform 1 below:
CAUTION
Incorrect adjustment results in wrong radiological thickness measurement during the pre-
exposure in AOP mode. When the adjustment is correct a normal exposure with 40 mm of
plexiglas in AOP mode, and an exposure aborted just after pre-exposure in the same con-
ditions, should display the same radiological thickness on the technical parameter display.
HV RISETIME
V
1 CORRECT
RESPONSE
UNSATISFACTORY
2 FOR AEC/AOP
UNSATISFACTORY
3 FOR AEC/AOP &
NON-COMPLIANCE
WITH CDRH !
7. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW HT BLOCK AND kV/mA BOARD

DR_025.fm
Job Card D/R 026 - Magnification device
Job Card D/R 026 - Magnification device Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• None.
2. TOOLS
• 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
• None.
4. PREREQUISITES
• None.
5. PROCEDURE
Refer to illustration 1.
1. Insert the plate in the guideway with the teeth engaged (Item 3).
2. Using the 2.5 mm Allen wrench, loosen the M5 Allen screw (Item 2) securing the left side of the guide
shaft (Item 1).
3. Keeping the magnification plate in contact with the bearing plate, and with the tooth (Item 3) in its
housing, pull the latching handle assembly (Item 1) to bring the tooth into contact with the edge of its
housing, and so removing play.
4. Tighten the M5 Allen screw (Item 2) securing the left side of the guide shaft.
5. Check that there is no play in the two magnification positions.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - ADJUSTMENT OF MAGNIFICATION DEVICE

DR_026.fm
Job Card D/R 026 - Magnification device

Completion
6. COMPLETION

DR_026.fm
Job Card D/R 027 - Arm Angle Sensor (potentiometer)
Job Card D/R 027 - Arm Angle Sensor (potentiometer) Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Arm Angle Sensor.
2. TOOLS
4. PREREQUISITES
Note:
Automatic view selection: The Senographe 2000 D system normally provides automatic selec-
tion of the view name, which is displayed on the X-ray console. View selection depends on the val-
ue of the compression arm angle and on the laterality (L or R) selected by the operator. This
function is active by default; it depends upon correct operation of the Arm Angle Sensor. Continued
operation in degraded mode (as described in the o.m.) is possible after failure of the angle sensor,
by disabling automatic view selection, as follows:
- Set the bit 8 of switch B1 on Generator CPU board to access INSTALL menu of X-ray Console;
- Enter menu: SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/ANGLE/NO
• Remove Compression Arm front covers. See Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539,
section 5-3-2.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Disassembly of Arm Angle Sensor
1. Locate Arm Angle Sensor at the front bottom of Compression arm.
2. Disconnect connector (1) of Angle Sensor cable
(at top of compression arm).

DR_027.fm
Job Card D/R 027 - Arm Angle Sensor (potentiometer)
3. Remove plate (2) and ties which attach the angle

sensor cable along the compression arm.
4. Remove the two screws (4, 5) securing the Arm

Angle Sensor (3).
3
5. Remove and discard the defective sensor (3).
4
5-2. Reassembly
1. Reverse disassembly procedure.
CAUTION
5
Take care to remount correctly the angle
sensor. Potentiometer is seen from opera-
tor side.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW ARM ANGLE SENSOR.

DR_027.fm
Job Card D/R 028 - Gantry CPU Board 800PL3
Job Card D/R 028 - Gantry CPU Board 800PL3 Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
Replacement board
2. TOOLS
• Set of Allen wrenches.
When handling circuit boards, take precautions against damage by ESD (electro-static discharge).
4. PREREQUISITES
CAUTION
Gantry parameters are saved in CPU board memory. If possible, ensure that a backup of
these parameters has been made before removing the board. If not, it will be necessary to
recalibrate the gantry after changing the board. Refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/
Restore procedure on page 475.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Removal and replacement of the gantry CPU board
2. Remove the column cover (CPU side only); refer to Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page
539.
3. Remove the two screws securing the CPU board 800PL3 (2.5 mm Allen wrench); remove the board.
4. Install the replacement board and secure it with the two screws.
5. Reinstall the column cover (CPU side).
5-2. Restore Gantry parameters

1. Switch ON the Senographe electrical power
2. Restore Gantry parameters as described in Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page
475.

DR_028.fm
Job Card D/R 028 - Gantry CPU Board 800PL3
6. COMPLETION
• If no Gantry parameter backup is available, or the restore is not successful, the Gantry must be reca-
librated. If this is necessary, perform the following calibrations in the order given:
- CAL 010 Tube Tilt Calibration
- CAL 012 Collimator Format Calibration
- CAL 019 Light Beam Centering
- CAL 009 Compression Arm Angle Calibration
• After restoration of Gantry parameters from the backup or by recalibration, make the following check:
- VF 008 IQ Tools Flat Field Test.
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW GANTRY CPU BOARD.

DR_028.fm
Job Card D/R 029 - Generator CPU Board 400PL3
Job Card D/R 029 - Generator CPU Board 400PL3 Chapter 12
1 SUPPLIES
Generator CPU Board
2 TOOLS
Set of Allen wrenches
When handling circuit boards, take precautions against damage by ESD (electro-static discharge).
4 PREREQUISITES
CAUTION
Generator parameters are saved in CPU board memory. If possible, ensure that a backup
of these parameters has been made before removing the board. If not, it will be necessary
to recalibrate the generator after changing the board. Refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Removal the faulty Generator CPU board
2. Remove the generator front panel (CPU side) to reveal the Generator CPU board 400PL3; refer to
Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.
Generator
CPU Board
2 Generator
2
Control Board
3. Remove the five screws (1) (4 mm allen wrench) that secure the Generator CPU board 400PL3 to
the Generator cabinet.
4. Gently pull and forwards the Generator CPU board 400PL3 to remove it from the two grey connec-
tors (2) on the Generator Command board.

DR_029.fm
5-2 Installation of the new Generator CPU board

1. Carefully push the new Generator CPU board 400PL3 in to the two grey connectors (1) on the Gen-
erator Command board. Ensure that the connections on the two grey connectors are fully secure and
correctly seated.
Generator
CPU Board
1 Generator
1
Control Board
2. Attach the five screws (2) (4 mm allen wrench) to secure the new Generator CPU board 400PL3 to
the Generator cabinet.
3. Make sure that the X2 jumper (3) to the left of the battery is in the horizontal position as indicated.
CAUTION
position TP1. If this jumper is either removed or placed in position TP1, the generator CPU
RAMs are totally erased, necessitating a TOTAL RE-CALIBRATION of the generator.

DR_029.fm
4. Make sure that the red switch block has the following configuration.
1 : OPEN
2 : OPEN
3 : OPEN
4 : OPEN
5 : OPEN
6 : OPEN
7 : OPEN
8 : CLOSED
5-3 Restore Generator parameters

2. Ensure that the LEDs at the top of the newly installed Genrator CPU board 400PL3 operate as fol-
lows:
• Green DS1 (Test OK) : ON
• Yellow DS4 (TXTTLA1) : Blinking
• Yellow DS5 (RXDA1) : Blinking
3. Reinstall the Generator front panel (CPU side).

4. Restore Generator parameters as described in Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on
page 475.

DR_029.fm
6 COMPLETION
• If no Generator parameter backup is available, or the restore is not successful, the Generator must
be recalibrated. If this is necessary, perform the following calibrations in the order given:
- Job Card CAL 001 - Heater Current Scale Factor. on page 191
- Job Card CAL 002 - X-Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 195
- Job Card CAL 004 - X-Ray Tube mA Measurement on page 203
- Job Card CAL 005 - Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 205
- Job Card CAL 003 - X-Ray Tube Heater Current on page 199
- Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration on page 237
• After restoration of Generator parameters from the backup or by recalibration, carry out the following
calibration:
- Job Card CAL 016 - Half-Value Layer Measurement on page 233
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW GENERATOR CPU BOARD

DR_029.fm
Job Card D/R 030 - Generator Command Board 400-PL1
Job Card D/R 030 - Generator Command Board 400-PL1 Chapter 12
1 SUPPLIES
• Generator Command Board 400-PL1
2 TOOLS
• Standard Tool Box
4 PREREQUISITES
None
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Removal of the Generator Command board 400-PL1
1. Remove the four generator side panels (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539) to
reveal the Generator Command board 400-PL1.
2. Switch OFF the electrical power supply, both from the Power Distribution Box (PDB) in the room and
on the rotary switch in the generator cabinet (position 0).

DR_030.fm
RC1 RC2
S1
S2
WARNING
Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous. Ensure that the res-
onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Command board.

DR_030.fm
4. The Generator Command board is located on the top left of the Generator. Disconnect all the cables
from the Generator Command board and make a mental note where they connect to. Be sure not to
move them too much so it will be easier to re-connect them later.
! Notice:
Disconnect with caution to avoid damage to the connectors and cables.
5. Remove the eight screws (1) that secure the Generator Command board (4 mm allen wrench) to the
Generator chassis, and carefully remove the defective Generator Command board.
6. Make a note of the defective Generator Command board’s current jumper settings. There are two
sets of jumpers JP1/JP2 below the XJ8 connector, and JP3/JP4 above the XJ8 connector. These
jumpers determine the room lamps and door configuration.
7. Put the defective Generator Command board in an anti-static bag.
5-2 Installation of the Generator Command board 400-PL1

1. Carefully place the new Generator Command board on the Generator chassis, and ensure that the
holes for the eight allen screws line up with the eight threads on the Generator chassis.
2. Attach the eight allen screws (1) (4 mm allen wrench) to secure the Generator Command board to
the Generator chassis.
3. Connect all the cables to the new Generator Command board as summarized in the diagram and
table below.

DR_030.fm
XJ6
XJ2
XJ4
XJ3
XJ9
XJ7
XJ10
XJ1 XJ8
XJ5
XJ13

DR_030.fm
Connector Description of cable Cable color

Label (usually identified by code on a white label)
XJ1 400 PL1 XJ1 Grey
(red line on right of ribbon connector)
XJ2 XJ2 Black
XJ3 400 PL1 XJ3 Black
XJ4 400 PL1 XJ4 5 Black
1 White
XJ5 C801418 XP1 XP2 Grey
(ribbon cable to kVmA board, red line on right of ribbon connector)
(red line on right of ribbon connector)
(red line on top of ribbon connector)
XJ8 The X-ray Console cable White
XJ9 45440115 Black
XJ10 400 PL2 XJ2 , 45440116, 400 PL1 X10 Grey
XJ12 Empty N/A
(red line on left of ribbon connector)
4. Ensure that the JP3 and JP4 (2) jumpers and JP1 and JP2 (3) abive and below the XJ8 connector
on the Generator Command board are set the same as the defective board that you have just
replaced.These jumpers determine the room lamps and door configuration, which can vary one each
customer site.
2
3
5. If the customer wants a different lamp and door configuration to before, then set jumpers JP1 and
JP2 as required according to the table below. Place unused jumpers in the parking positions JP3 and
JP4.
Note:
If there is no door switch, jumpers JP1 and JP2 should both be present (case 4 in the table).

DR_030.fm
TABLE 1 - JP1 AND JP2 JUMPER SETTINGS

JP1 JP2 Door closed Door opened
(PREP) (RADIOGRAPHY)
enabled disabled
enabled disabled.
NOTE: if the door opens during
an exposure, the exposure is
NOT aborted and completes nor-
mally)
3 1 0 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY PREP enabled
enabled RADIOGRAPHY disabled
enabled enabled
0 = No jumper 1 = Jumper present
6. Ensure that all the Test Point (TP) connectors (labelled TP1, ... etc.) on the Generator Command
board are open.
7. Switch ON the electrical power supply, both from the Power Distribution Box (PDB) in the room and
on the rotary switch in the generator cabinet (position I).
8. Switch ON the Senographe system’s electrical power (i.e. Generator, Gantry and Control Station).
9. Wait until the Gantry boot is complete, and check that no error has been reported.
If the Generator Command board is operating correctly, then the LED states on the Generator Com-
mand board are as follows:
• green DS1 LED is OFF • red DS8 LED is OFF
• yellow DS2 LED is OFF • green DS9 LED ON
• green DS3 LED is OFF • yellow DS10 LED is OFF
• red DS4 LED is ON • green DS11 LED ON
• yellow DS5 LED is OFF • red DS12 LED is OFF
• green DS6 LED is ON • red DS13 LED is OFF
• yellow DS7 LED ON
10. Reinstall the generator covers (see Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539).

DR_030.fm
6 COMPLETION
Carry out the following calibrations:

DR_030.fm
This page is blank.

DR_030.fm
Job Card D/R 031 - Generator Interface Board 400-PL2
Job Card D/R 031 - Generator Interface Board 400-PL2 Chapter 12
1 SUPPLIES
• Generator Interface Board 400-PL2
2 TOOLS
4 PREREQUISITES
None
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Removal of the Generator Interface board 400-PL2
reveal the Generator Interface board 400-PL2.

DR_031.fm
RC1 RC2
S1
S2
WARNING
onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Interface board.
4. The Generator Interface board is located on the middle right of the Generator. Disconnect all the
cables and optical fibers from the Generator Interface board and make a mental note where they
connect to. Be sure not to move them too much so it will be easier to re-connect them later.
! Notice:
5. Remove the five screws (1) that secure the Generator Interface board (4 mm allen wrench) to the
Generator chassis, and carefully remove the defective Generator Interface board by pulling it down-
wards away from the Generator CPU board.

DR_031.fm
6. Put the defective Generator Interface board in an anti-static bag.
5-2 Installation of the Generator Interface board 400-PL2

1. Carefully place the new Generator Interface board on the Generator chassis by inserting it up into the
connectors of the Generator CPU board. Ensure that the holes for the five allen screws line up with
the five threads on the Generator chassis.
2. Attach the five allen screws (1) (4 mm allen wrench) to secure the Generator Interface board to the
Generator chassis.
3. Connect all the cables to the new Generator Interface board as summarized in the diagram and table
below.

DR_031.fm
XJ1
XJ4
XJ2
XJ6 XJ7 XJ8 XJ9
XJ11
XJ10
Connector Description of cable Cable color

XJ1 45440115 Black
XJ2 400 PL2 XJ2 , 45440116, 400 PL1 X10 Grey
XJ4 XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 Grey
XJ6 400 PL2 XJ6 (optical fiber) Black
XJ8 Empty (optical fiber blank cover) N/A
XJ10 XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 Grey
XJ11 XJ11 - 400PL2 GENE. INTERF. Grey

DR_031.fm
4. Ensure that all the Test Point (PT) connectors (labelled PT1, ... etc.) on the Generator Interface board
are open.
5. Ensure that all the Test Point (TP) connectors (labelled PT1 to TP53) that are to the right of the XJ2
connector on the Generator Interface board are open.
If the Generator Interface board is operating correctly, then the LED states on the Generator Interface
board are as follows:
• yellow DS1 LED is ON
• green DS10 LED is OFF
• green DS11 LED is OFF
• green DS12 LED is ON
• red DS15 LED is OFF

DR_031.fm
6 COMPLETION
Carry out the following calibrations:

DR_031.fm
Job Card D/R 032 - Generator Supply Command Board 200-PL2
Job Card D/R 032 - Generator Supply Command Board 200-PL2 Chapter 12
1 SUPPLIES
• Generator Supply Command Board 200-PL2
2 TOOLS
4 PREREQUISITES
None
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Removal of the Generator Supply Command board 200-PL2
reveal the Generator Supply Command board 200-PL2.

DR_032.fm
RC1 RC2
S1
S2
WARNING
onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Supply Command
board.
4. The Generator Supply Command board is located on the bottom right of the Generator. Disconnect
all the cables from the Generator Supply Command board and make a mental note where they con-
nect to. Be sure not to move them too much so it will be easier to re-connect them later.
! Notice:

DR_032.fm
5. Remove the four nuts (1) (8 mm open ended wrench) that secure the Generator Supply Command
board (tbd mm open-ended wrench) to the Generator chassis, and carefully remove the defective
Generator Supply Command board. The top left nut also attaches a black cable to the Generator
Supply Command board – do not morve this cable to far as you will re-connect it when you install the
new Generator Supply Command board.
6. Put the defective Generator Supply Command board in an anti-static bag.
5-2 Installation of the Generator Supply Command board 200-PL2

1. Carefully place the new Generator Supply Command board on the Generator chassis’ four threads.
2
3
2. Attach the black cable (1) that you originally removed to the top left thread, and secure it by attaching
a nut (2) to the top left thread (8 mm open-ended wrench).
3. Attach the other three nuts (3) (8 mm open-ended wrench) to secure the rest of the Generator Supply
Command board to the Generator chassis.
4. Connect all the cables to the new Generator Supply Command board as summarized in the diagram
and table below.

DR_032.fm
XJ11 XJ4
F3-2
XJ9 XJ8
XJ1
XJ3
D27-AK
TP10 XJ6
XJ10
XJ7
C1P
XJ2
M1P
XJ5
Connector Tool Description of cable Cable color

XJ1 N/A 400 PL1 XJ1 Grey
(red line at bottom of ribbon connector)
(red line at left of ribbon connector)
XJ2 N/A 200 PL2/XJ2 Grey
XJ3 N/A 200 PL2/XJ2 (cable labelled "T" on top) Black
XJ5 N/A XJ5 Black
XJ8 N/A Two brown cables in to black connector Brown
TP10 N/A Black cable with red end plastic, coming from to left conduit Black
XJ10 Small screwdriver 200 PL2/XJ10 Black
C1P Small screwdriver C1P Brown
M1P Small screwdriver M1P Brown
XJ6 8 mm open ended XJ6 Brown
wrench

DR_032.fm
Connector Tool Description of cable Cable color

XJ7 8 mm open ended XJ7 (on two cables) Brown
wrench Yellow/green
XJ9 8 mm open ended 200 PL2/XJ9 Black
wrench
F3-2 13 mm open 200 PL2/F3-2 Black
ended wrench
D27-AK Cross-head 200 PL2/D27-AK Black
screwdriver
5. Except for the TP10 connector which you connected earlier, ensure that all the Test Point (TP) con-
nectors (labelled TP1, ... etc.) on the Generator Supply Command board are open.
If the Generator Command board is operating correctly, then the LED states on the Generator Com-
mand board are as follows:
• green DE1 LED is ON
• red DE2 LED is or OFF
• red DE3 LED is OFF
• clear N1 LED is ON
6 COMPLETION
None.

DR_032.fm
This page is blank.

DR_032.fm
Job Card D/R 033 - Generator Relay Board 200-PL4
Job Card D/R 033 - Generator Relay Board 200-PL4 Chapter 12
1 SUPPLIES
• Generator Relay Board 200-PL4
2 TOOLS
4 PREREQUISITES
None
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Removal of the Generator Relay board 200-PL4
reveal the Generator Relay board 200-PL4.
2. Switch OFF the electrical power supply on the rotary switch in the generator cabinet (position 0).
3. Switch OFF the external electrical power supply from the Power Distribution Box (PDB) in the room.
WARNING
It is extremely important that you switch off the external power supply on the room’s PDB
because you will be working in close proximity to where the external voltage arrives into
the Generator.

DR_033.fm
RC1 RC2
S1
S2
WARNING
onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Command board.
5. Switch off the external power supply that runs between the room’s lamps and the cables (1) that are
connected to the Generator Relay board.
WARNING
The lamp cables contain a live voltage from an external source. It is extremely important
that you switch off the external power supply to the lamp cables because you will be han-
dling them in order to remove Generator Relay board.
2
3
3 !
Ensure that the external
power from the room’s PDB
has been switched OFF be-
fore you start to handle the
Generator Relay board.
6. The Generator Relay board is located on the side of the Generator, behind the Generator Interface
board. Make a note of the defective Generator Relay board’s current lamp and door cable configura-
tion, as these determine how the customer’s room lamps and door operate with the Senographe sys-
tem. Disconnect the room and door cables (1) from the Generator Relay board.

DR_033.fm
7. Carefully disconnect the data cable (2) from the Generator Relay board . Be sure not to move it too
much so it will be easier to re-connect it later.
! Notice:
8. Remove the four screws (3) that secure the Generator Relay board (4 mm allen wrench) to the Gen-
erator chassis, and carefully remove the defective Generator Relay board.
9. Put the defective Generator Relat board in an anti-static bag.
5-2 Installation of the Generator Relay board 200-PL4

1. Carefully place the new Generator Relay board on the Generator chassis, and ensure that the holes
for the four allen screws line up with the four threads on the Generator chassis.
2
1
2. Attach the four allen screws (1) (4 mm allen wrench) to secure the Generator Relay board to the
Generator chassis.
3. Carefully re-connect the data cable (2) to the Generator Relay board . The red line of the ribbon cable
must be on the right hand side of the connector.
4. Reconnect the customer’s lamp and door cables (3) exactly how they were connected before.
5. Re-establish the external power supply to the room’s lamps.

DR_033.fm
6 COMPLETION
None.

DR_033.fm
Job Card D/R 100 - IDC Replacement Steering Guide
Job Card D/R 100 - IDC Replacement Steering Guide Chapter 12
The procedure for replacing a faulty IDC can depend on the following:
• The current AWS software version
• The current IDC hardware (Dione 1, 2, 3 or 4)
• The availability of replacement IDC hardware
Before deciding the course of action for replacing the IDC, you must first:
• Follow the steering guide given on the following page.
• Review and comply with the hardware and software version compatibility information given in Chap-
ter 13 System Evolution on page 605.

DR_100.fm
Chapter 12
Revision 1
GE Healthcare
LEGEND
SITE TYPE CHECK
Decision
AWS ver 17.2.3 or higher

AWS ver 17.2 AWS Version (System Onyx with:
(System ONYX with - IDC Dione 1 or 2 if AWS 17.2.3 (FMI 11497) is installed
Dione 1 or Dione 2 only) - IDC Dione 3 or 4 - system manufactured with Dione 3 or 4)
Failed IDC: Dione 1 or 2 Failed IDC: Dione 1, 2 or 3, 4

Identify current IDC type: See Section 1 of the present Job Card
Dione 1 or 2 Dione 3 or 4
The FE has two replacement The FE has two replacement The FE needs to order:
options: options IDC DIONE 3 Processor Assembly 2346842
IDC DIONE 2 IDC DIONE 2 or IDC DIONE 4 Processor Assembly 2375961
IDC DIONE 3 or 4 IDC DIONE 3 or 4 IDC Dione 3 and 4 Application Software (ver 3.2.1) 2380803
Page no. 536

Perform Job Card D/R 104C
To Dione 3 or 4 To Dione 2 To Dione 2 To Dione 3 or 4
Decision: Decision: Decision:

The FE needs to order: The FE needs to order: The FE needs to order:
IDC DIONE 3 Processor Assembly 2346842 IDC DIONE 2 Processor Assembly T3486EJ or 2286100 IDC DIONE 3 Processor Assembly 2346842
or IDC DIONE 4 Processor Assembly 2375961 or IDC DIONE 4 Processor Assembly 2375961
For AWS ver 17.2:
AWS Application Software (ver 17.3) 5113760 IDC Dione 2 Application Software (ver 2.1.5) 2369993 IDC Dione 3 and 4 Application Software (ver 3.2.1) 2380803
IDC Dione 3 and 4 Application Software (ver 3.2.1) 2380803 IDC Dione 3 Optical Fiber 2340426
IDC Dione 3 Optical Fiber 2340426 OR:
IDC Dione 3 Loop Back Cable 2350524
IDC Dione 3 Loop Back Cable 2350524
For AWS ver 17.2.3 or higher:
Perform Job Card D/R 104B
IDC Dione 2 Application Software (ver 2.2.2) 2387366
Perform Job Card D/R 104B
Perform Job Card D/R 104A
DR_100.fm
1. IDENTIFYING CURRENT IDC TYPE

To identify the IDC type, refer to the table and illustrations below.
Reference Function Reference Function
1 DMR Link RT (1) 2240227 5 Ethernet (To ADS)
2 Conditioner 2226612 6 AC mains
3 Detector Power Supply 2226621 7 Optical Fiber cables (to detector)
4 DMR Link Serial 2240227 8 Tray ground wire
IDC - Dione 3 or Dione 4: IDC - Dione 2:

7 4 5 4 5
2
2
7 3
3
1
6
6
IDC - Dione 1:
5 2
6 8

DR_100.fm
This page is blank.

DR_100.fm
Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers
Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
None
2. TOOLS
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
None
5. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF COVERS

5-1. Remove/replace generator covers
Refer to Illustration 1 for the locations of securing screws.
2. Remove the four plastic plugs from screws of generator top panel.
3. Use an Allen wrench to remove the four generator top panel retaining screws (5).
4. Remove generator top panel by lifting upwards.
5. For EACH of the four generator side panels:
a. Slightly lift the panel upwards and towards yourself.
b. Disconnect the ground wire at the Generator end to avoid risk of creating a short circuit.
6. Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. Be sure to reconnect the ground wire on
each of the four side panels
Take care when replacing the Generator Cabinet covers, especially after connecting air and
water pipes to the Conditioner. Check that the covers do not block the pipes and cause a
blockage.
5-2. Remove/replace gantry covers
Refer to Illustration 1 for the locations of securing screws.
2. Use a hex wrench to remove screw (1).
3. Remove plastic plugs and screws (2) and (3) from each column half-cover.

DR_101.fm
4. Do not touch screws (4). Undo hex bolt (6) by 2 or 3 turns (accessible through a slot at rear of the
base); this method retains correct alignment of covers with safety stop switches.
5. Slide the complete half-cover towards you to remove it.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH OR DAMAGE CABLES.
Note:
It is possible to remove only one column half-cover.
ILLUSTRATION 1 - COVER SECURING SCREW LOCATION
22
55
3
3
CPU AND OTHER

BOARDS ACCESSIBLE
FROM THIS SIDE
11
4
4
66

DR_101.fm
5-3. Gantry arm and Tube housing covers
WARNING
Be careful when touching the tube housing, as its temperature can be up to 80 °C (about
180 °F)
5-3-1. Removal and reinstallation of tube housing arm lower covers
1. Using a flat blade, remove the plastic caps - four around the rotation axis and two at the bottom end
of the arm (three in each half-cover).
2. Set the arm in the horizontal position, tube on the right, and remove the half-cover mounting screws
(1, 2, and 3).
3. Lift the half-cover and remove it.
4. Rotate the arm through 180 degrees.
5. Repeat 2 and 3, above, for the other half-cover, but removing mounting screws 4, 5, and 6.
6. To reinstall the arm lower covers, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
ILLUSTRATION 2 - TUBE HOUSING ARM LOWER COVERS - MOUNTING SCREW LOCATIONS
4
1
2 5
6
3

DR_101.fm
5-3-2. Removal and reinstallation of compression arm covers

1. Set the compression arm in the horizontal position, tube
on the right, and unlock the tube housing arm to set it at
27 degrees, with the tube below the horizontal.
3. Refer to the illustration. Use the flat screwdriver and 4 mm 1
Allen wrench to remove the two left hand cover securing
screws (1 and 2).
4. Remove the left half-cover by slightly lifting it on the com-
pression motor side, and then gently pulling it to the left.
5. Switch the Senographe electrical power back on.
6. Reset the tube housing arm to 0 degrees. 2
7. Rotate the compression arm through 180 degrees and
unlock the housing arm to set the tube 27 degrees down-
wards.
9. Use the flat screwdriver and 4 mm Allen wrench, remove
the two right hand cover securing screws.
10. Remove the right half-cover by slightly lifting it on the com-
pression motor side, and then gently pulling it to the right.
11. Recover spacer plate E (on the top of the sensor indicator plate P) and remove plate P by gently pull-
ing it towards the bottom of the compression arm.
12. To reinstall the compression arm covers, carry out the above operations, in the reverse sequence.
CAUTION
Reinstall spacer plate E as quickly as possible. It will stay in place when one of the half-
covers has been reinstalled. To prevent plate P from falling, do not set the compression
arm in the vertical position until at least one half-cover has been installed.

DR_101.fm
5-3-3. Removal and reinstallation of tube housing spacer covers

1. Remove strip B (clipped in position).
2. Set the tube housing arm horizontal, with the head on the right.
ILLUSTRATION 3 - TUBE HOUSING SPACER COVERS - MOUNTING SCREW LOCATIONS
5 B
6
7
8
3
P
4
4. Remove the left half-cover.

5. Rotate the arm through 180 degrees (head on the left).
7. Remove the right half-cover.
8. To reinstall the tube housing spacer covers, carry out the above operations in reverse order.
CAUTION
Take care to install the short screws in positions 3 and 4.

DR_101.fm
5-4. Cart covers

5-4-1. Rear cover
To remove the rear cover:
a. Remove the two securing screws B at the rear of
the Cart (cross–head screwdriver).
b. Release the cover by tilting it towards you.
c. Disconnect the ground connections which are D
made from the various units in the Cart to the rear
cover.
d. Remove the cover by lifting.
Reverse the procedure to replace the cover.
Remember to reconnect all ground connections!
5-4-2. Side covers

To remove a side cover: C
a. First remove the rear cover (see above).
b. Remove the external securing screw C (cross–
head screwdriver).
c. Remove the internal securing screw D (cross–head
B
screwdriver).
d. Remove the cover by lifting.
Reverse the procedure to replace the cover.

DR_101.fm
Job Card D/R 102 - Image Receptor Power Supply
Job Card D/R 102 - Image Receptor Power Supply Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Image Receptor Power Supply
2. TOOLS
• 5 mm wrench.
• 7 mm wrench.
• small screwdriver.
WARNING
The Senographe must be powered off.
4. PREREQUISITE
• Remove Senographe column covers. See D/R Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.
5. PROCEDURE.
5-1. Disassembly of Power Supply
1. Switch off the Senographe.
2. Locate the defective power supply (6)
mounted on the left of the Senographe col- 1
umn.
3. Disconnect the AC mains connector (3)
and the two low voltage connectors (1)
(one to Image Receptor and one to IDC).
4. Release the two securing clamps (4, 5)
located at bottom of power supply chassis 7 2
(two hex 5 mm nuts).
5. Remove the two hex 5 mm securing 6 3
screws and washers (2, 7) holding the top
of the power supply chassis. Take care not
to lose the screws.
5 4

DR_102.fm
Job Card D/R 102 - Image Receptor Power Supply
6. Remove the defective power supply by holding both

the top and bottom of its chassis with both hands.
Note:
Tilt the power supply assembly slightly forward to
ease removal.
5-2. Reassembly
• Reverse the disassembly procedure.

1. Switch ON the Senographe electrical power. 8
2. Check that the normal boot message is shown.
3. Make a test exposure.
.
6. COMPLETION
THE SENOGRAPHE IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW POWER SUPPLY.

DR_102.fm
Job Card D/R 103 - Image Receptor
Job Card D/R 103 - Image Receptor Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Image Receptor and its floppy disk with parameters.
2. TOOLS
• Right-angled flat screwdriver.
• Set of metric Allen wrenches.
• 7 mm hex wrench.
• Thread locking compound (Loctite blue).
WARNING
If the casing is punctured, remove the detector using protective gloves and dust masks.
Send the protective items for disposal along with the defective detector.
WARNING
The DMR senographe must be powered OFF.
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove Bucky (or Breast holder).
• Remove Compression Arm covers for access (refer to Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on
page 539).
5. PROCEDURE
CAUTION
When disconnecting and connecting coolant hoses on the image receptor connector
panel, the panel should be facing downwards (i.e., normal position), to minimize the risk of
coolant spilling or splashing onto the adjacent electrical connector.

DR_103.fm
5-1. Disassembly of Image Receptor

1. Refer to the upper illustration:
• Release (two screws) and remove the front con-
nector (1).
2. Refer to the lower illustration:

• Disconnect the two optical fiber cables (2) by
1
extracting the optical connectors by hand.
CAUTION
Do not apply any force to fiber cables and take

care not to bend them excessively.
• Disconnect the air and coolant supply pipes (3) by

pulling the connectors (not the pipes!). 3
2
CAUTION
Be careful to avoid spillage of coolant, especially onto or near electrical connections. If

any coolant is spilled, it must be cleaned up immediately.
3. Remove the bucky (two screws) for access to

the bucky interconnection plate (5).
4. Remove the two screws (4) securing the

bucky interconnection plate (5) to the rear wall
plate of the Image Receptor support (6).
4

DR_103.fm
5. Remove three of the four Image Receptor securing

screws (7) located at the bottom of the compression
arm (5 mm allen wrench).
7
Note:
It is necessary to tilt the exam arm first to the left
and then to the right for access to the securing
screws (two on each side).
6. Loosen the last screw, then hold the receptor to pre-
vent it from falling while removing the screw. It may
be advisable to lower the arm to a more convenient
height before performing this step.
7. Remove the Image Receptor (8) by holding it with

both hands and pulling it backward from its guides.
8. Release the hex screw securing the ground cable ter-
minal (7 mm hex wrench and 5 mm allen wrench).
9. Place the defective Image Receptor on a stable
stand.
8
WARNING
Drain all coolant from the detector before it is stored or shipped. Shipping a detector
which contains coolant may cause irreparable damage. This is especially important in win-
ter, when there is a danger of freezing.

DR_103.fm
5-2. Reassembly
• Reverse the disassembly procedure
• Check the Conditioner fluid level and top up as necessary. Proceed as follows
CAUTION
When performing any of the following procedures, be careful to avoid spillage of coolant,
especially onto or near electrical connections. If any coolant is spilled, it must be cleaned
up immediately.
Note:
A document describing an alternate procedure is provided in the coolant kit. For maximum safety
and minimum risk of spillage, we recommend using the procedure given below:
1. Remove the reservoir cap and check the liquid level.
2. If necessary, add liquid until it reaches the bottom of the cap threads.
3. To flush air from the circuit; proceed as follows:
- Switch on the unit (switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and press the Conditioner ON button in the
generator cabinet).
- As the coolant circulates and air bubbles are flushed from the coolant circuit, the coolant level
falls. Add liquid as necessary until the level is steady at the bottom of the cap threads.
4. Replace the reservoir cap when you are satisfied that the level is correct.
5-3. Clear Calibrations and Load Image Receptor Parameters

The new Image Receptor is supplied with a floppy disk containing parameters specific to the detector. To
clear the current detector calibrations and download the new parameters into the system, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Power on the system.
2. Select Service desktop/Calibration/Detector; then select Clear Calibrations and perform the clear
procedure as indicated on the screen.
3. Select Service desktop/Utilities, then click on the Detector Replacement button and follow the
instructions. Insert the floppy disk supplied with the new Image Receptor as requested.
5-4. First power-on check

1. Cycle OFF/ON the system,
2. Check that the message All devices are ready appears on the screen,
3. If the above message is displayed, continue with step 5.5 below. If not, verify that the various connec-
tions are correctly made and refer to Job Card D/R 109 - Digital Detector Firmware Flash on page
603.

DR_103.fm
6. COMPLETION
6-1. Data Backup

• After performing the specified calibration and check procedures, a system backup must be made to
safeguard the new detector and calibration data.
6-2. CAD License

• If the ImageChecker® (R2) CAD option is present, the new detector ID must be declared on the
DMPU. Follow the instructions given in the Senographe 2000D CAD Option s.m. Job Card License
Management.
THE SENOGRAPHE 2000 D IS NOW OPERATIONAL WITH THE NEW IMAGE RECEPTOR

DR_103.fm
This page is blank..

DR_103.fm
Job Card D/R 104A - Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 2
Job Card D/R 104A - Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 2 Chapter 12
NOTE: BEFORE REPLACING THE IDC UNIT YOU MUST READ AND FOLLOW ALL INSTRUCTIONS
GIVEN IN Job Card D/R 100 - IDC Replacement Steering Guide on page 535.
1. SUPPLIES
• IDC Dione 2 unit 2286100 or, for US only, T3486EJ
• Diskette supplied with the Image Receptor (Detector).
• Blank DOS formatted diskette for backup of AWS parameters via Backup/Restore Service functional-
ity.
• FFDM-IDC Software Media Set:
- If AWS is 17.2.3 or higher: FFDM-IDC Version FFDM2.2.2, 2387366
- If AWS is 17.2: FFDM-IDC Version FFDM2.1.5, 2369993 (FMI 11496)
2. TOOLS
• 5 mm wrench; 4 mm Allen wrench; small flat and cruciform screwdrivers.
WARNING
Before beginning work, shut down the equipment correctly and switch OFF the
Senographe 2000D hospital supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or mark it
4. PREREQUISITES
• For security reasons, before FE arrival on site, the customer must archive onto CDROM or PACS all
patient images present on the AWS and any review workstation if present.
• BEFORE REPLACING THE IDC UNIT YOU MUST:
- Read and follow all instructions given in Job Card D/R 100 - IDC Replacement Steering Guide on
page 535.
- Review and comply with the hardware and software version compatibility information given in
Chapter 13 System Evolution on page 605.
• Remove Cart rear cover. See Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Covers on page 539.
• Current system backup. See Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page 475.

DR_104A-OC.fm
5. PROCEDURE.
5-1. Summary
The following list summarizes the steps described in this document.
These steps must be followed in order when replacing an IDC Dione 1 or 2 unit with a Dione 2
unit:
1. Disassembly (removal) of the existing IDC Dione 1 or 2 unit.
2. Reassembly (installation) of the replacement IDC Dione 2 unit. Do not connect fiber optic cables
at this point.
3. Load IDC software from the IDC Application Software CD-ROM (to determine which version of IDC
software to load, see Section 1).
4. Using diskette supplied with Image Receptor, carry out the Detector Replacement procedure.
5. Reset the Senographe 2000D system by powering it OFF/ON.
6. Connect the fiber-optic cables.
7. Return the defective IDC (section 8).
8. US sites only: complete the Information to be Provided to the Customer Concerning Upgrades form
(section 9), detach it and give it to the QC Technologist or Medical Physicist at the facility.
5-2. Disassembly of IDC unit

1. Locate the IDC unit (1) inside the Cart.
2. Disconnect all cables from the IDC unit rear panel.
Note:
Note locations of disconnected cables.
1

DR_104A-OC.fm
3. Remove the screw (2) securing the IDC drawer to the

Cart left upright.
2
4. Disconnect the IDC tray ground wire from the terminal at
the right of the tray (see the rear panel connection illus-
trations in section 7; item 8 in the illustration of Dione 1).
5. Pull out the IDC unit tray (3). 3
6. Undo the Velcro strips (4) attaching the IDC unit to the
tray. 4
7. Remove the defective IDC unit (5). 5
5-3. Reassembly of IDC unit

• Reverse the disassembly procedure, but do not connect the fiber optic cables.
See section 7 for IDC rear panel connections.
Notice:
The fiber optic cables must not be connected before loading software.

DR_104A-OC.fm
5-4. Software Load

A complete IDC software installation takes about 1/4 hour.
1. On the AWS screen background (drag the application screen out of the way), click the right mouse
button to display the Service Tools menu; select Command Window.
2. In this command window, log as root:
{Hostname} su - root↵
(and then enter root password) ↵
3. Depending on the AWS version, prepare the appropriate IDC application software CDROM (see Sec-
tion 1).
4. Load the IDC Application CD into the AWS CD drive, then install the release on ADS:
{Hostname} cd /cdrom/cdrom0/iqst/install↵
{Hostname} installIdc.sh↵
The message below is displayed on the command window:

--------------------------------------------
This procedure will install IDC files on AWS
hit [Return] key when ready or [q/Q] to quit

--------------------------------------------
Hit the Return key. One minute later the message below is displayed:
directory iqst/install created
Transferring IDC files from CDROM to AWS...
IDC files transfer from CDROM to AWS is completed
5. Boot IDC using the "JUMPSTART 2.2" diskette: Insert the JUMPSTART 2.2 diskette into the IDC dis-
kette drive (NOT the AWS diskette drive!) and reboot IDC by pushing the reset button on the IDC.
6. Load the IDC Application CD into the AWS CD drive, then install the release:
{Hostname} script_release idc↵

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------
Hit the Return key. Several messages are displayed indicating thet the IDC is alive; and that files are
transferred from AWS to IDC. Seven to ten minutes later, the following message is displayed:
IDC files transfer from AWS to IDC is completed
{hostname}

DR_104A-OC.fm
7. Creation of the bootfile

Type the following commands:
{Hostname} telnet idc↵
{Hostname} cd "/idc"↵
{Hostname} rm "bootrom.sys"↵
{Hostname} mkbootAta 0,0,"bootrom.ata"↵
{Hostname} logout↵
8. Update the IDC Scripts on AWS:
In the window, type:
{Hostname} cd export/home/sdc/senovision/scripts↵
{Hostname} Update_IDC_Files↵
9. When End of script is displayed and CD-ROM automatically ejected, files are updated.
10. Remove the diskette from the IDC drive.
11. Be sure that the diskette is removed from the IDC drive: Rebooting the IDC with the diskette in the
IDC drive at this point could create problems, and you might even have to re-install the IDC software.
12. If the cd is not ejected type the following commands:
{Hostname} cd /↵
{Hostname} eject↵
13. Using the diskette supplied with the Image Receptor, carry out the Detector Replacement procedure
(refer to Job Card D/R 103 - Image Receptor on page 547, section 5-3).
Notice:
DO NOT carry out any IDC Restore operation - doing so might introduce files that are incompatible
with the new IDC installation!
5-5. Functional Check of New IDC Unit
1. Shut down the Senographe 2000 D system by clicking the button on the Browser.
2. When the system is powered off, power it on again by pushing the ON button on the X-Ray console.
3. If the message System is operational appears on the screen, the Senographe 2000 D is now
operational. If not, verify that the various connections are correctly made.
4. Make an acquisition.
6. COMPLETION
• Carry out the procedure(s) specified as Required Calibrations and Checks for the present Job Card
• US sites only: complete the Information to be Provided to the Customer Concerning Upgrades form

DR_104A-OC.fm
7. IDC DIONE 2 REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
IDC - Dione 2
4 5
2 IDC - Dione 1 (for information only):

5 2
7 3 7
1
1
6
6 8


DR_104A-OC.fm
8. RETURNING THE IDC

Since the IDC is a repairable unit, be sure to return the defective unit according to standard procedure.

DR_104A-OC.fm
This page is blank.

DR_104A-OC.fm
9. INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER CONCERNING

UPGRADES
FOR US SITES only: FDA requirement regarding “major repair”
This section must be detached and given to the QC Technologist or Medical Physicist at the facility.
Nature of the Upgrade
If the IDC or AWS is upgraded to provide some feature corrections, this upgrade can impact the calibra-
tion of the Senographe 2000D. In particular, if an AWS software upgrade from cold is performed during
this system modification, or if the IDC Hardware is replaced and the IDC software is updated, then it is
expected that detector calibration files will be lost. If this should happen, substantial re-calibration is
required and subsequent in-person mammography equipment evaluation by a medical physicist will be
required. Additional details are provided in the next section.
Post-Upgrade Responsibilities of the Facility
As per quality mammography standard 21CFR 900.12(e)(10) and subsequent guidance developed by
the FDA, any software upgrade is considered as a Major Repair.
As a consequence, a mammography equipment evaluation shall be conducted after this upgrade and
before the customer uses the system to image patients.
The Field Engineer (FE) must notify the facility that they must inform their physicist that the upgrade is
going on and that the physicist’s services might be needed in case an AWS or IDC software installation
from cold is required and the FE has to calibrate the detector system.
Unless otherwise noted, tests to be performed can be found in the Senographe 2000 D QAP: Quality
Control Tests For MQSA Facilities.
The FE will check the boxes below to identify the outcome of the upgrade and inform the facility of its
responsibilities with regard to the mammography equipment evaluation. The tests that need to be per-
formed are detailed below.

DR_104A-OC.fm
AWS Software Upgrade from Warm

The test to be performed is:
• Check that Annotation Model 3 has been selected for printing films. See Senographe 2000 D Acqui-
sition System Operator Manual, doc. no. 2285097-100, Rev. 1, Chapter 7, Section 8-3.
This test is not routinely performed as part of the quality assurance program for the Senographe 2000 D.
However, it is considered to be part of the quality assurance program for the specific purpose of this
upgrade and it is expected that it can be readily performed by the Quality Control Technologist. Conse-
quently, the mammography equipment evaluation may be performed under “Medical Physicist Oversight”
according to an Alternative Requirement to 21 CFR 900.12(e)(10) approved May 31, 2002. Hence, this
mammography equipment evaluation can be performed by the QC Technologist in consultation with the
Medical Physicist; in-person mammography equipment evaluation by the Medical Physicist is not
required.
AWS Software Upgrade from Cold

There was a need for system re-calibration. In-person mammography equipment evaluation by a medi-
cal physicist is required. Section references identify specific tests in Senographe 2000 D QAP: Quality
Control Tests for MQSA Facilities, QC Manual. Tests to be performed are:
• Test listed above for “AWS Software Upgrade from Warm”
This test may be performed by the QC Technologist
• Sec. 1-5: Flat Field and Phantom IQ Tests.
Following re-calibration of the detector gain it is necessary that the facility re-establish the baseline
CNR. However, evaluation of the image on the printer is not necessary.
• Sec. 1-8: AOP Mode and SNR Check
• Sec. 2-4: Breast Entrance Exposure, Average Glandular Dose, and Reproducibility
This test must be performed on-site by a Medical Physicist.
IDC Software Upgrade from Warm

The IDC software installations were successful and there was no need for any detector calibration. Sec-
tion references identify specific tests in Senographe 2000 D QAP: Quality Control Tests for MQSA Facil-
ities, QC Manual. The test to be performed is:
• Sec. 1-8: AOP Mode and SNR Check: This test is routinely performed by the Quality Control Technol-
ogist as part of the quality assurance program for the Senographe 2000 D. Consequently, the mam-
mography equipment evaluation may be performed under “Medical Physicist Oversight” according to
an Alternative Requirement to 21 CFR 900.12(e)(10) approved May 31, 2002. Hence, this mammog-
raphy equipment evaluation can be performed by the QC Technologist in consultation with the Medi-
cal Physicist; in-person mammography equipment evaluation by the Medical Physicist is not
required.

DR_104A-OC.fm
IDC Hardware replacement & IDC Software upgrade from Cold

This upgrade resulted in the loss of some detector calibrations. It was necessary for the FE to calibrate
the entire system. The following calibrations were performed on the system.
Note:
Before performing the calibrations, the FE should refer to Job Card CAL 000 - Calibration Interac-
tions on page 187.
Job Card CAL 013 - Bad Pixel Calibration on page 225

Job Card CAL 014 - Detector Gain Calibration on page 229
Job Card CAL 015 - Conversion Factor Measurement on page 231
Job Card CAL 016 - Half-Value Layer Measurement on page 233
Job Card CAL 017 - AOP Calibration on page 237
Job Card CAL 020 - mAs Non-linearity Calibration (Automatic) on page 253
Since the detector calibration affects the gain maps and conversion factor, the tests that must be done
are (section references identify specific tests in Senographe 2000 D QAP: Quality Control Tests for
MQSA Facilities, QC Manual.):
• Sec. 1-5: Flat Field and Phantom IQ Tests,

CNR, but it is not necessary to evaluate the phantom image on the RWS or the printer.
Important:
• If any test failure is found, it shall be corrected and the correction confirmed before doing patient
examinations.
• Testing records must be kept on customer site (facility’s responsibility).

DR_104A-OC.fm
This page is blank.

DR_104A-OC.fm
Job Card D/R 104B - Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 3 or 4
Job Card D/R 104B - Replacing IDC Dione 1 or 2 With Dione 3 or 4Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• IDC Dione 3 unit 2346842 or IDC Dione 4 unit 2375961
ity.
• Only if AWS is 17.2: AWS Application Software version 17.3 5113760
• FFDM-IDC Software Media Set FFDM-IDC Version FFDM3.2.1 2380803
• IDC Dione 3 or 4 Optical Fiber 2340426
• IDC Dione 3 or 4 Troubleshooting Loop Back Cable 2350524
2. TOOLS
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
page 535.

DR_104B-OC.fm
5. PROCEDURE.
5-1. Summary
These steps must be followed in order when replacing an IDC Dione 1 or 2 unit with a Dione 3 or
4 unit:
1. Only if current AWS version is 17.2: Upgrade AWS software to 17.3 using the AWS Application Soft-
ware CD-ROM specified in Section 1.
3. Replace the existing IDC-DMR Fiber Optic Cable for IDC Dione 1 or 2 (2226619) with the IDC-DMR
Fiber Optic Cable for IDC Dione 3 or 4 (2340426). This fiber optic cable is part of the Bulkhead/IDC-
AWS-UPS Black Harness.
4. Reassembly (installation) of the replacement IDC Dione 3 or 4 unit. Do not connect fiber optic
cables at this point.
5. Load IDC software from the IDC Application Software CD-ROM specified in Section 1.
(section 9 of the present Job Card), detach it and give it to the QC Technologist or Medical Physicist
at the facility.

DR_104B-OC.fm
5-2. Upgrade AWS to 17.3 if Necessary

ONLY if the current AWS version is 17.2, upgrade it to 17.3 using the AWS Application Software CD-
ROM specified in Section 1. Follow the instructions in the booklet provided with the CD-ROM.

Note:
1

Cart left upright.
2
trations in section 8; item 8 in the illustration of Dione I).
tray. 4

DR_104B-OC.fm
5-4. Replace IDC-DMR Fiber Optic Cable

Replace the existing IDC-DMR Fiber Optic Cable for IDC Dione 1 or 2 (2226619) with the IDC-DMR
Fiber Optic Cable for IDC Dione 3 or 4 (2340426). This fiber optic cable is part of the Bulkhead/IDC-
AWS-UPS Black Harness.
Notice:
Be sure to run the new cable with the correct connectors on the IDC end (the connectors on the
IDC end are not the same as those on the ganry bulkhead end).

Notice:

DR_104B-OC.fm
5-6. Software Load

tion 1).

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------
{hostname}

DR_104B-OC.fm

{Hostname} cd /↵
{Hostname} eject↵
Notice:
5-7. Functional check of new IDC unit
1. Shut down the Senographe 2000D system by clicking the button on the Browser.
3. If the message System is operational appears on the screen, the Senographe 2000D is now

DR_104B-OC.fm
6. COMPLETION


DR_104B-OC.fm
8. IDC REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
IDC - Dione 3 or Dione 4:

7 4 5
IDC - Dione 2 (for information only): IDC - Dione 1 (for information only):
4 5 5 2
2
7
7 3
3
1
1
6
6 8


DR_104B-OC.fm

UPGRADES

DR_104B-OC.fm

required.


required.

DR_104B-OC.fm

Note:
tions on page 187.


Important:
examinations.

DR_104B-OC.fm
This page is blank.

DR_104B-OC.fm
Job Card D/R 104C - Replacing IDC Dione 3 or 4 With Dione 3 or 4
Job Card D/R 104C - Replacing IDC Dione 3 or 4 With Dione 3 or 4Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• IDC Dione 3 unit 2346842 or IDC Dione 4 unit 2375961
ity.
• FFDM-IDC Software Media Set FFDM-IDC Version FFDM3.2.1 2380803
2. TOOLS
WARNING
4. PREREQUISITES
page 535.

DR_104C-OC.fm
5. PROCEDURE.
5-1. Summary
These steps must be followed in order when replacing an IDC Dione 3 or 4 unit with a Dione 3 or
4 unit:
2. Reassembly (installation) of the replacement IDC Dione 3 or 4 unit. Do not connect fiber optic
cables at this point.
3. Load IDC software from the IDC Application Software CD-ROM specified in Section 1.

DR_104C-OC.fm

Note:
1

Cart left upright.
2
trations in section 8; item 8 in the illustration of Dione I).
tray. 4

Notice:

DR_104C-OC.fm
5-4. Software Load

tion 1).

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------

--------------------------------------------
{hostname}

DR_104C-OC.fm

{Hostname} cd /↵
{Hostname} eject↵
Notice:
5-5. Functional check of new IDC unit
1. Shut down the Senographe 2000D system by clicking the button on the Browser.
3. If the message System is operational appears on the screen, the Senographe 2000D is now

DR_104C-OC.fm
6. COMPLETION


DR_104C-OC.fm
8. IDC REAR PANEL CONNECTIONS
IDC - Dione 3 or Dione 4:

7 4 5
IDC - Dione 2 (for information only): IDC - Dione 1 (for information only):
4 5 5 2
2
7
7 3
3
1
1
6
6 8


DR_104C-OC.fm
This page is blank.

DR_104C-OC.fm

UPGRADES

DR_104C-OC.fm

required.


required.

DR_104C-OC.fm

Note:
tions on page 187.


Important:
examinations.

DR_104C-OC.fm
This page is blank.

DR_104C-OC.fm
Job Card D/R 105 - Conditioner Unit
Job Card D/R 105 - Conditioner Unit Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Conditioner unit.
• Cooling liquid kit (refer to the Generator and Conditioner Cabinet section of the Renewal Parts List on
page 395 for part number) including:
- Pre-mixed coolant for conditioner.
- Funnel.
- Safety goggles.
- Gloves.
2. TOOLS
• When filling the Conditioner, take great care to keep coolant away from the vents, the ON/OFF switch
and the power cord connection. Do not immerse the Conditioner in any liquid.
• Dispose of surplus coolant with care as described in the section Surplus Coolant Disposal; refer to
the Caution below.
CAUTION
immediately.

DR_105.fm

n
4. PREREQUISITES
• Remove Generator Cabinet covers as required for access. See Job Card D/R 101 - Removal of Cov-
ers on page 539.
5. PROCEDURE
5-1. Preparation - Conditioner Drain
To drain the Conditioner, proceed as follows:
1. Shut down the entire system by clicking the System Shutdown button on the Browser window.
2. Switch OFF the Generator and MDR circuit breakers in the Generator Cabinet.
3. Prepare the Empty container to receive the used coolant. Place the end of the purge tool into the
container.
4. Disconnect the coolant input pipe from the Conditioner. The pipe connector seals automatically.
5. Connect the disconnected coolant input pipe to the purge tool. The connector is now unsealed, and
coolant can drain into the prepared container.
6. Switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and press the Conditioner ON button in the generator cabinet.
7. Coolant drains into the container, until the “Check Fluid” alarm stops the flow.
8. Switch OFF the MDR circuit breaker.
Note:
The Conditioner is now empty.
9. Label the container containing the drained coolant to indicate the nature of its contents; cross out the
word Empty on the label, and copy the information from one of the coolant containers (Flush or Top-
ping) provided in the kit. See below for disposal.

DR_105.fm
5-2. Disassembly of Conditioner

• Before beginning work, shut down correctly the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospital
supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent oth-
ers from applying power.
1. Locate the Conditioner unit (1) in the Mains
Distribution Rack.
2. Disconnect serial line connector (2) from the

Conditioner unit. 2
3. Disconnect the two air pipes and two coolant pipes
(4) from the Conditioner unit.
3
Note:
The coolant pipe connectors are self-sealing.
4. Disconnect the AC Mains cable connector (3).

DR_105.fm
5. Remove the two front screws (6) and the two rear
screws (5) securing the Conditioner unit to the
generator support.
Note:
Some systems use a nylon strap to secure the
Conditioner instead of the four screws.
6. Loosen, without removing, screw (7) securing air

duct (8) in place, then carefully remove air duct. 8 7
7. Remove defective Conditioner unit from the Gen-
erator cabinet by pulling it through the left side of
the generator chassis.
5-3. Reassembly
Reverse the disassembly procedure.

DR_105.fm
5-4. Coolant Fill

minimum risk of spillage during coolant installation, we recommend using the procedure given below:
1. Check that all hoses are correctly connected.

MDR Breaker
2. Remove the reservoir cap, then slowly add liquid
from the container for the conditioner to the reservoir
until the liquid reaches the bottom of the cap
ON/OFF
threads. The total capacity of the cooling circuit is push buttons:
approximately 500 ml (1 pint). Conditioner
and Conditioner
3. Switch on the unit (switch ON the MDR circuit
MDR
breaker and press the Conditioner ON button in the Detector supply
generator cabinet).
Cart
4. As the coolant circulates and air bubbles are flushed
from the system, the coolant level falls. Add liquid as UPS
necessary until the level is steady at the bottom of
the cap threads.
5. Replace the reservoir cap when you are satisfied Generator
that the level is correct.
5-5. Functional check Generator

• Switch ON the Senographe electrical power. Breaker
• Check that the Conditioner display shows the mes-
sage IDC CONTROL for about 5 seconds shortly
after the system is switched on.
• Check that within about 15 minutes of operation manifold temperature shown on the Conditioner dis-
play is 20°C +2°C.
• About 15 minutes after the system is operational, make an exposure; verify that the exposure pro-
ceeds correctly, with no warning message displayed after the acquisition.

• In a normal non-sensitive environment, surplus coolant may be disposed of by pouring down a drain.
6. COMPLETION

DR_105.fm
This page is blank.

DR_105.fm
Job Card D/R 107 - AWS unit
Job Card D/R 107 - AWS unit Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• AWS unit.
2. TOOLS
• 5 mm wrench.
• 4 mm Allen wrench
• small flat screwdriver.
• CD-ROM Senographe 2000 D AWS Application Software (supplied with the system).
WARNING
Before beginning work, shut down correctly the equipment and switch OFF the
Senographe 2000 D hospital supply circuit breaker. Lock it in the OFF position or mark it
4. PREREQUISITES
5. PROCEDURE.
5-1. Disassembly of AWS unit
1. Locate AWS unit (1) inside the AWS Cart.
2. Remove all connected cables from the AWS unit rear
panel.
Note:
1
Note locations of all disconnected cables.

DR_107-OC.fm
3. Remove screw (2) securing the AWS tray to the Cart

left upright.
4. Disconnect the ground wire (3) from the terminal

at the right of the AWS unit tray.
5. Pull out the AWS unit tray (4).

6. Undo the Velcro strips (5) securing the AWS unit to
the tray. 5
7. Remove the defective AWS unit (6).
5-2. Reassembly of new AWS unit

• Reverse the disassembly procedure.
Note:
See section 5-3 for AWS rear panel connections on a Sun U10 station.
See section 5-4 for AWS rear panel connections on a Sun SB150 station.

DR_107-OC.fm
5-3. AWS Rear Panel Connectors (Sun U10 Station)

2 1 4
11 10 9 8 12 7
Reference Function (and cable p/n)

1 Service-specific cable (connected at AWS
panel only) (2244433)
2 External Ethernet Link (2226632)
3 CD-ROM Writer SCSI Link (530-2115-02)
4 Generator Serial Link (2226625)
5 Not used
6 UPS Serial Link (2226615)
7 IDC Ethernet Link (2226628)
8 Monitor
9 Modem Serial Link (2175122)
10 Keyboard
11 AC mains
12 Tray ground connection

DR_107-OC.fm
5-4. AWS Rear Panel Connectors (Sun SB150 Station)

5 7 3 9 4 5
11 1 5 13 10 12 2 5 8 6
Reference Function (and cable p/n)

1 Service-specific cable (connected at AWS
panel only) (2244433)
2 External Ethernet Link (2226632)
3 CD-ROM Writer SCSI Link (2150580 or
2402214)
4 Generator Serial Link (2226625)
5 Not used
6 UPS Serial Link (2226615)
7 IDC Ethernet Link (2226628)
8 Monitor (2306204) 14
9 Modem Serial Link
10 Keyboard USB Link
11 AC mains
12 Mouse or Trackball USB Link
13 Bar Code Reader USB Link
14 Tray Ground Connection

DR_107-OC.fm
5-5. Software Installation

• Install the AWS Application from the AWS Application Software CD-ROM supplied with the system.
CAUTION
It is important to load the same software version as that installed in the old AWS.
• Follow the instructions given in the CD-ROM booklet to install the software.
5-6. Back-Up and Restore of data

Refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page 475.
1. Restore AWS parameters from the back-up diskette. If the back-up diskette is not available, the
patients in the Worklist will be lost, and the procedures given in Job Card CFG 005 - AWS Configura-
tion on page 139 must be carried out.
2. Because the IDC and Senographe parameter back-up copies were held in the AWS, a new back-up
must be performed in order to make IDC and Senographe back-up parameters available.
Perform a system back-up.
Notice:
If this is not done, no back-up for IDC and Senographe parameters will exist.
5-7. Re-installation of CD-R writer

After removal and re-installation of the AWS, the CD-ROM unit must be re-installed. Follow the proce-
dures in Job Card IST 015 - Installation of the CD-R writer (option) on page 95.
5-8. Declaration of Network Devices

Open the Remote Hosts Selection window (refer to Job Card CFG 006 - Declare Network Hosts on page
143) and verify that all network devices are still correctly declared. If not, follow the procedures given in
Job Card CFG 006 - Declare Network Hosts on page 143 and Job Card CFG 009 - Declare Printers
(Filming Devices) on page 167 to declare hosts as required.
5-9. Functional check of new AWS unit

1. Power up the Senographe 2000 D and check that the message All devices are ready appears on the
AWS screen,
2. If the above message is displayed, the Senographe 2000D is now operational. If not, verify that the
various connections are correctly made.
3. Perform an image acquisition, then a network transfer to other devices.
6. COMPLETION

DR_107-OC.fm
This page is blank.

DR_107-OC.fm
Job Card D/R 108 - Software reload
Job Card D/R 108 - Software reload Chapter 12
1. SUPPLIES
• Software kits supplied with the system
2. TOOLS
• None.
4. PREREQUISITES
• Wherever possible, a full system backup must be available. Refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/
5. AWS SOFTWARE
5-1. AWS Full Software Reload
• A full AWS software reload (operating system and application software) may be necessary if, for
example, the AWS unit has been replaced, or if lost or corrupted files make it impossible to run the
application after rebooting, and reloading the application only is not successful.
Use the same AWS software CD-ROMs as used for the current installation (supplied with the system
or supplied for a software update).
CAUTION
If reloading software after a system crash or after replacement of the AWS, it is important
to load the same software version as that previously installed.
• Follow the Install from scratch instructions given in the booklet supplied with the AWS Application
Software CD-ROM to install the software. Before starting the procedure, take note of the require-
ments for Material needed.
• After completing the installation, refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page
475:
- Restore AWS parameters from the backup diskette. If this diskette is not available the procedures
given in Job Card CFG 005 - AWS Configuration on page 139 must be carried out.
- Perform a system backup.
Notice:
If the system backup is not done, no backup for IDC and Senographe parameters will exist.

DR_108.fm
Job Card D/R 108 - Software reload
5-2. AWS Application Reload or Update

• To reload the Application software only, or if a new version of application software must be installed
on your system, use the AWS Application Software CD-ROM used for the current installation, or that
provided for the update, and follow the Update from CD-ROM instructions given in the CD-ROM
booklet.
6. IDC SOFTWARE
6-1. IDC Software Reload or Update from CD-ROM
Software reload from CD-ROM is necessary when the IDC unit has been replaced, or if a new version of
the IDC software must be installed on your system:
• First restore the IDC directory data from the current system backup. Refer to Job Card D/R 019 -
Back-up/Restore procedure on page 475.
• Follow the installation instructions given in the CD-ROM booklet supplied with the IDC Application
Software CD-ROM used for the current installation or supplied for a software update. Remember to
carry out the Detector Replacement procedure (requires the floppy disk containing parameters for the
detector).
6-2. IDC Data restore from Backup

• If lost or corrupted files make it impossible to run the application after rebooting, restore the IDC
directory data from the current system backup. Refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore proce-
dure on page 475.
7. SENOGRAPHE PARAMETERS
7-1. Senographe Software Reload
• If Senographe parameters have been lost or corrupted, reload them from the current system backup.
Refer to Job Card D/R 019 - Back-up/Restore procedure on page 475.
• If the backup is not available, it will be necessary to recalibrate the Senographe.

DR_108.fm
Job Card D/R 109 - Digital Detector Firmware Flash
Job Card D/R 109 - Digital Detector Firmware Flash Chapter 12
1. SYMPTOMS
The detector contains firmware in a PROM mounted on its electronic cards. This firmware can be down-
loaded by IDC in certain cases, namely when the version of the detector is not compatible with IDC ver-
sion.
The symptoms on a system that has corrupted detector firmware are that, at every IDC reboot, you get
an error like the one below if you monitor the boot sequence in a telnet idc window:
IDC-Detector Communication Failed: [AEController:RegulationTask] Booting
detector failed after retries
Detector Electronics Failed: Async error - C80 #0- APOLLO_DRIVER_ERROR:

ERR_DCT_ERROR_CRC_DETECTOR - param: 0x10 -
IDC-Detector Communication Failed: CDetectorBoot::verifySignature read

fails
These symptoms may seem rather similar to a fiber optics communication failure, for example, or any
other failure that prevents IDC from booting, so you should suspect firmware corruption only if the IDC or
the detector has been changed and a software compatibility problem has occurred.
2. SOLUTION
There exists a way to force a detector firmware download from IDC to the detector. Apply it if you think
that the detector firmware is corrupted:
2. Type "telnet idc" with login "target" and password "password".
3. You will see the Vxworks prompt -> on the screen.
4. Type: -> downloadDetectorFW <ENTER>
5. Then you will see some messages on the screen saying that IDC should be rebooted.
6. Reboot IDC, and it's done, the detector should boot normally.

DR_109.fm
Job Card D/R 109 - Digital Detector Firmware Flash
This page is blank.

DR_109.fm
Revision 1
Conditioner
System_evolution.fm
2210405-8 (FRU pn 2210405-8)
GE Healthcare
or OK OK OK OK
2210405-11 (FRU pn 2386318)
NO: cannot be
2210405-14 (FRU pn 2390024) used with IDC OK OK OK
FFDM2.1.4
NO: cannot be NO: cannot be

2210405-15 (FRU pn 2387548) used with IDC used with IDC OK OK
FFDM2.1.4 FFDM2.1.5
IDC
IDC Hardware: IDC Hardware:
IDC Hardware:
Dione 1 or 2 Dione 3 or 4
FFDM2.2.2
FFDM2.1.5 same as 2.1.5 FFDM3.2.1
FFDM2.1.4
IDC Software: same as 2.1.4 + dryerless conditioner same as 2.2.2 but for
current ONYX IB
+ address I31/I32 bug + bad pixel map Dione3 and 4
ADS
ADS ADS Software IDC Software FMI ONYX (mandatory) FMI 11496 Kit soft 2387366 (see Kit soft 2380803 (see
ADS Software: Deployment: (mandatory) SN 4513 and 4514) SN 4513 and 4514)
Hardware: Deployment
NO: only ADS 17.2.3 NO: only ADS 17.2.3
FMI ONYX
17.2 OK OK or later can or later can
(mandatory)
be used be used
U10 all configs 17.2.3
ADS/IDC/Conditioner Compatibility Matrix
Page no. 605

same as 17.2 + CQA + SPR FMI 11497
OK OK OK OK
corrections: e.g. multiprint, Kit 2359614
query with today's date
17.2.10
U10 all configs same as 17.2.3 + new driver for NO: cannot be NO: cannot be
or SB150 5109928 UPS750 + carets correction Kit 5104340 used with IDC used with IDC OK OK
(2x40Gb HD) + SB150 5109928 (2x40Gb HD) FFDM2.1.4 FFDM2.1.5
compatibility
U10 all configs

or SB150 5109928
17.3 NO: cannot be NO: cannot be
(2x40Gb HD)
same as 17.2.10
CHAPTER 13 SYSTEM EVOLUTION
or SB150 5113759 Kit 5113760 used with IDC used with IDC OK OK
+ SB150 5113759 and 5113759-2
(2x80Gb HD) FFDM2.1.4 FFDM2.1.5
(2x80Gb HD) compatibility
or SB150 5113759-2
(2x80Gb HD)
U10 all configs
or SB150 5109928
(2x40Gb HD) NO: cannot be NO: cannot be
17.4.5 OK OK
or SB150 5113759 Kit 5179391-2 used with IDC used with IDC
same as 17.3
(2x80Gb HD) FFDM2.1.4 FFDM2.1.5
or SB150 5113759-2
(2x80Gb HD)
Chapter 13
Chapter 13
This page is blank.

System_evolution.fm
End of the Publication
Congratulations !! You have reached the end of this Publication.

To consult the Revision History, see Revision History on page 16.
Page no. 607

Last-Page.fm
Manufactured by:
GE Medical Systems SCS
BP 34
F78533 BUC CEDEX France
Page no. 608

Last-Page.fm

2302228-3-100 r1 O PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

2302228-3-100 r1 O PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GE Healthcare

Senographe 2000 D Acquisition System

No Rights Licensed - Do not duplicate. Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited.

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

This page is blank.

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

This page is blank.

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

This page is blank.

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

This page is blank.

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Chapter 1: Publication Presentation

Chapter 2: System Description

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Job Card CFG 009 - Declare Printers (Filming Devices). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Chapter 6: Functional Checks

Chapter 7: Equipment Protection

Chapter 8: Planned Maintenance

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Job Card PM 002 - Conditioner Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Chapter 9: Error Message Information

Chapter 10: Diagnostic Information

Chapter 11: Renewal Parts

Chapter 12: Disassembly/Reassembly

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Job Card D/R 026 - Magnification device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Chapter 13: System Evolution

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

CHAPTER 1 PUBLICATION PRESENTATION

2. CONTENT OF THIS PUBLICATION

Publication_Presentation.fm Page no. 15

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Revision History Chapter 1

Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

Chapter 1 Page no. 16 Publication_Presentation.fm

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

Publication_Presentation.fm Page no. 17 Chapter 1

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

Updated job cards:

Introduction of FRU 2102082-9 800PL1 Gantry power board:

Chapter 1 Page no. 18 Publication_Presentation.fm

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

Updated Job Card VF010 Acquisition in AOP Mode:

Updated Job Card IST015 Installation of the CD-R Writer (option):

Updated Job Card CAL005 Calibration of kV Scale Factor:

Updated Job Card ERR002 AWS Error Messages:

Publication_Presentation.fm Page no. 19 Chapter 1

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

Chapter 1 Page no. 20 Publication_Presentation.fm

Revision 1 Service Manual 2302228-3-100

Rev. Date Reason for change Pages

Publication_Presentation.fm Page no. 21 Chapter 1